OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R009C10 Commissioning Guide 04

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100R009C10
Commissioning Guide
Issue 04
Date 2017-02-28
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R009C10
iManager U2000 V200R014C60
iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R014C60
Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after
hardware installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and
network commissioning.
This document is intended for:
l Installation and commissioning engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk,

which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Based on Product Version V100R009C10

This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
update of contents is described as follows:
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
4 Configuring NE l 4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800

and Network T32/8800 T64 is modified.
l 4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800
T16 is modified.
l 4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800 is
modified.
l 4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal
Platform Subrack is modified.

This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10.

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
Update Description
6.12 Adjusting Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board is

Optical Power of added.
Submarine
Amplifier Board
4.4 Setting the NE Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold is added.

Power Consumption
Threshold

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. The
Update Description
4 Configuring NE 4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM is added.

and Network
6 Commissioning Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board (New-Generation

Optical Power on 100G) is added.
Site
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description
All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R014C50 to

V200R014C60.
All Optimized the operation procedure and added operation screenshots.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.

Update Description
15 Configuring Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor is

the O&M modified.
Function Based
on Optical
Doctor

Update Description
6 4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board is added.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R001C00 to

V200R014C50.
All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
1.7 Testing The EFI panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is modified.
Connection
Points
4 Configuring 4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters is added.

NE and
Network
4.23 Checking The DIP switching setting for the TN18EFI board is added.
the Master/
Slave Subrack
for Universal
Platform
Subrack
6.13.1 The TN12HSC1 board is added.

Commissioning
the Optical
Power of OSC
9.4.8 The optical power equalization multimedia is added.

Commissioning
the Optical
Power
Equalization

Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC120 and SPC200 is added.
Update Description
15 Configuring The "Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor" chapter
the O&M is added.
Function Based
on Optical
Doctor
9 Example for The "Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System" chapter is optimized.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System
All Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M Through

MDS 6630 is deleted.
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Update Description
4 Configuring NE l Setting License is added.

and Network
9 Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

Commissioning the Coherent Transmission System is modified.
Optical Power of the
Coherent
Transmission System
5 Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through MDS

Commissioning 6630 is added.
Optical Power
Through MDS 6630
11.9 Testing Packet 11.9.5 Testing Ethernet Service Latency, Throughput, and
Ethernet Services Short-Term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP-Assist is added.
11.9.6 Testing Long-term Ethernet Packet Loss Ratios Using
TP-Assist is added.
Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M

Commissioning Through MDS 6630 is added.
Optical Power for
O&M Through MDS
6630
2.1 Starting the Web Starting the Web LCT is modified.

LCT
2.2 Quck Guide of Quck Guide of the U2000 is modified.

the U2000

The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description

This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the 03 issue, updating is added.
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
4 Configuring l 4.12 Configuring Boards is modified.

NE and l Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor is
Network modified.
Example for "Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System" is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System
17 Reference 17.33 Measuring Trail Latency is modified.

Operations for
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, updating of SPC200 is added.
Update Description
4 Configuring Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor is added.

NE and
Network

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00. Only
the issue number is updated.

Update Description
1.7 Testing The testing connection points for OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack is
Connection added.
Points
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
3 l Commissioning Procedure (OTN) is added.

Commissioning l Commissioning Procedure (OCS) is added.
and
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment
4 Configuring Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 Platform

NE and Subrack is added.
Network
6 l 6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G) is added.

Commissioning l 6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board is
Optical Power added.
on Site
l 6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light is added.
l 6.13.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC is modified.
11 l 11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels is added.

Commissioning l 11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services is added.
the Network
17 Reference 17.33 Measuring Trail Latency is added.

Operations for
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration

Update Description
Commissioning l Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions is modified.

Guide of the l Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface is
Raman added.
Amplifier
l Method of Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality is added.
8 Example of l 8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System is modified.

Commissioning l 8.3.1 Checking Design Documents is modified.
Optical Power
Based on 40 l The structure of 8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System,
Gbit/s Single- 8.7 OSNR Penalties, and 8.8 Adjusting Dispersion
Wavelength Compensation is modified.
System l 8.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters is added.
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is deleted.

Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630

Update Description
5 Automatically l Routine Maintenance is added.

Commissioning l Common Problems Found During Link Optimization
Optical Power Commissioning is added.
Through MDS
6630 l How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU
Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value? is added.
l Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data
Synchronization is added.
l Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer
Information Between the NMS and Live Network is added.
6 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier is modified.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
Example for Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System
17.31 l PRBS Application Scenarios is deleted.

Configuring the l "PRBS Test" is added.
PRBS Test

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
Adjusting the Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
On-off Gain of
the Raman
Board
5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630

Update Description
Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is added.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

Update Description
Adjusting the Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
On-off Gain of
the Raman Board
Automatic Automatic Commissioning is deleted.

Commissioning

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description

Update Description
2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.
17.32 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

NE Power
Consumption

Update Description
2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.
17.32 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

NE Power
Consumption

Update Description
6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Commissioning
Optical Power
Through MDS
6630
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Update Description
Commissioning The procedures for commissioning and configuration during

and deployment are added.
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment
4 Configuring 4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is
NE and added.
Network
6.15 6.15.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

Commissioning (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
of ROADM
Board
6.17 Example of 6.17.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM

Commissioning (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
Based on 10G
(or Lower)
Single-
Wavelength
System
7 Remotely 7.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and
Commissioning link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
10 Configuring The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added and
Services and provides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and Feature
Service Description where detailed procedures for configuring services and
Protection system features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioning
process during deployment is provided.
11 11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal

Commissioning Alarms, 11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection,
the Network 11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 13 Checklist for
Commissioning During Deployment, and 14 Backing Up the NE
Database to the SCC Board are added.
17 Reference The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is

Operations for added.
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
Parameters The section "Parameter Description" is added.

Reference

l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Update Description
Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series

OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any
difference between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800
T64.
4 Configuring Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.

NE and
Network
Commissioning Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is

Guide of the modified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contents
Raman Amplifier are added.
6 11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
6 11.6.3 Testing Items is added.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
8 Example of 8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 8.2 Process for
Commissioning Commissioning a 40G System, 8.3 Preparations for
Optical Power Commissioning, and 8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common
Based on 40 Problems in a 40G System are added.
Gbit/s Single-
Wavelength
System
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
5 Automatically Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the

Commissioning scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to
Optical Power automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations
Through MDS and procedure for the commissioning.
6630
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide.................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols.......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers....................................................................................................................................................3
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on.............................................................................................................. 5
1.1.4 ESD..............................................................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Instruments and Tools.....................................................................................................................................................7
1.3 Reference Documents................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.4 Engineering Design Information.................................................................................................................................. 11
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document..................................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document..................................................................................................................................11
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check .............................................................................................................................. 12
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers............................................................................................................... 13
1.7 Testing Connection Points............................................................................................................................................ 13
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer................................................................................................................................... 24
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly..................................................................................................................... 24
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.........................................................................................................26
2 Quick Guide................................................................................................................................. 28
2.1 Starting the Web LCT................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.1.2 Connecting to NEs.....................................................................................................................................................30
2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT.......................................................................................................................................31
2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT.................................................................................................................................................32
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000.............................................................................................................................................32
2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client.................................................................................................................................32
2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000.......................................................................................................................................35
2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client.............................................................................................................................. 50
2.2.4 Using Online Help..................................................................................................................................................... 51
3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment............................... 52

3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)................................................................................................................................53
3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)................................................................................................................................ 58
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................61

4.1 Creating NEs by Searching...........................................................................................................................................64
4.2 Creating Optical NEs....................................................................................................................................................68
4.3 Logging In to an NE..................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold............................................................................................................71
4.5 Uploading the NE Data.................................................................................................................................................73
4.6 Setting NE ID and IP.................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually...................................................................77
4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE................................................................................................ 79
4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode........................................................................................................... 82
4.10 Setting License........................................................................................................................................................... 89
4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions.............................................................................................................. 91
4.12 Configuring Boards.................................................................................................................................................... 93
4.12.1 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards................................................................................................ 93
4.12.2 Checking Board Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 96
4.12.3 Adding Ports.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
4.12.4 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board................................................................................................................ 110
4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board................................................................................................................111
4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode..........................................................................................................114
4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters...........................................................................................................................................120
4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................. 121
4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM.................................................................................................................................124
4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search........................................................................................................................ 127
4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail...........................................................................................................129
4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64.................................................................. 132
4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16................................................................................... 144
4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800.............................................................................................. 157
4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal Platform Subrack......................................................................172
5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through MDS 6630............................... 187

5.1 Networking Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................188
5.2 Precautions for Commissioning..................................................................................................................................198
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium Commissioning................................................................... 200
5.3.1 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network................................................................ 200
5.4 Commissioning Report............................................................................................................................................... 221
5.4.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report................................................................................................ 221
5.4.2 Generating a Commissioning Report...................................................................................................................... 221
5.5 Reference Operations................................................................................................................................................. 227
5.5.1 Viewing Operation Tasks.........................................................................................................................................227
5.5.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000...........................................................................................................................228
5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.................................................................................................................... 229
5.5.4 Querying Commissioning Index Data..................................................................................................................... 232
5.5.5 Checking the Fiber Designed Loss(EOL)............................................................................................................... 235
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.6 FAQ.............................................................................................................................................................................236
5.6.1 Commissioning Fails Because the MCA Board Detects No Signal........................................................................ 236
5.6.2 Output Optical Power of the OA Board Behind M40V Is Excessively Low But the MDMDS 6630 component
Reports a Commissioning Success and Displays No Error Message............................................................................... 239
5.6.3 Failure to Start Commissioning Because No OCh Trail Is Found.......................................................................... 239
5.6.4 Failing to Commission Multiplexed Wavelengths.................................................................................................. 240
5.6.5 Service Provisioning Fails or the Performance of Provisioned Services Is Poor.................................................... 241
5.6.6 TDC Search Fails on the TN54NS3 Board............................................................................................................. 242
5.6.7 Input Optical Power of the OA Board Is Greater Than the Target Value................................................................243
5.6.8 Failed to Obtain the Board Type..............................................................................................................................245
5.6.9 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to existent wave BER un-queried...........................................245
5.6.10 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to MCA cannot detect the new wave................................... 246
5.6.11 MDS 6630 componentCommissioning/Report Generation Failed due to the board information cannot be queried
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 250
5.6.12 How to Commission Optical Power Using the U2000 When the Optical Power Attenuation in a Cable Section in
a WDM Link Is High........................................................................................................................................................250
5.6.13 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE Classification............................................................... 250
5.6.14 How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a System with Multi-Level Subnets.............................. 251
5.6.15 How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in Case of Many Errors on the Network..................... 252
5.6.16 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the Commissioning Report...................................................................252
5.6.17 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization Commissioning................................................................253
5.6.18 Meanings of Commissioning Trail Status Parameters...........................................................................................253
5.6.19 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target
Value?............................................................................................................................................................................... 254
5.6.20 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data Synchronization..................................................... 255
5.6.21 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live
Network............................................................................................................................................................................ 255
5.6.22 What to Do If the ALC Function Detects an Exception After Deployment or Expansion Commissioning?....... 255
5.6.23 Commissioning Exception for Line Compensation Using the ALC Function...................................................... 256
5.6.24 Commissioning Cannot Be Performed After a Switchover to the Secondary Site of a U2000 HA System......... 256
5.6.25 How to Deal with an Exception Indicating that the MDP Fails to Send a Message During the Synchronization of
Networkwide NMS Data?................................................................................................................................................ 256
5.6.26 Error Message Is Displayed When Insertion Loss Is Preset for an OCh Trail...................................................... 256
5.7 Event Code................................................................................................................................................................. 257
5.7.1 Event code: 0x4A007.............................................................................................................................................. 257
5.7.2 Event code: 0x4A042.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.3 Event code: 0x4A043.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.4 Event code: 0x4A044.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.5 Event code: 0x4A064.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.6 Event code: 0x4A067.............................................................................................................................................. 258
5.7.7 Event code: 0x4A105.............................................................................................................................................. 259
5.7.8 Event code: 0x4A11E.............................................................................................................................................. 259
5.7.9 Event code: 0x4C012...............................................................................................................................................259
5.7.10 Event code: 0x4D104............................................................................................................................................ 259
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.7.11 Event code: 0xD1002.............................................................................................................................................260

5.7.12 Event code:0x44000050........................................................................................................................................ 260
5.7.13 Event Code: 0x9706.............................................................................................................................................. 260
6 Commissioning Optical Power on Site................................................................................. 261

6.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power........................................................................................................... 263
6.1.1 Basic Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 263
6.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence.......................................................................................................................... 263
6.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments................................................................................................................... 265
6.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board...........................................................................................................265
6.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light.................................................................................................................... 265
6.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................................266
6.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board....................................................................................................267
6.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board........................................................................................................... 268
6.5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(New-Generation 100G)..................................................................... 269
6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G)...................................................................................................272
6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board........................................................................................... 274
6.8 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board................................................................................................................... 274
6.8.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards................................................................ 275
6.8.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board............................................................ 277
6.9 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board........................................................................... 278
6.9.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board............................................................................. 280
6.9.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board............................................................................................. 281
6.10 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.......................................................................................................282
6.10.1 Preparations........................................................................................................................................................... 284
6.10.2 Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions............................................................................................................285
6.10.3 Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface............................................................................... 286
6.10.4 Requirements on the Fiber Line............................................................................................................................ 288
6.10.5 Method for Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality...................................................................................................... 288
6.10.6 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................................292
6.10.7 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................................293
6.10.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function.................................................................................................. 295
6.10.9 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board.................................................................296
6.10.10 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board...........................................................................................................296
6.10.11 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board..................................................................................................300
6.10.12 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum.............................................................................................................................. 302
6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light.........................................................................................................303
6.12 Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board........................................................................................ 306
6.13 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel.......................................................................................... 308
6.13.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC........................................................................................................... 308
6.13.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................................311
6.14 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board............................................................... 311
6.14.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V Boards............................................................................................ 311
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.14.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board........................................................................................312

6.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board............................................................................................... 314
6.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board.................................................................................................. 316
6.15.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)................................................................. 316
6.15.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)...................................................................318
6.15.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)................................................................... 319
6.15.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9)................................................................... 321
6.15.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)............................................................ 323
6.16 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM.................................................................................................................. 327
6.17 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System....................... 328
6.17.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................. 328
6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station...................................................................... 329
6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA................................................................................................................ 333
6.17.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.......................................................................................... 335
6.17.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).....................................339
6.17.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)....................................................................................340
6.17.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)............................................................................345
6.17.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)............................................................................. 348
6.17.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)..............................................................................352
6.17.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)............................................................................358
6.17.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)..................................................................... 361
6.17.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2+WSMD2).....................................................................364
6.17.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9).....................................................................367
7 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................ 371

7.1 General Commissioning Sequence............................................................................................................................. 372
7.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network..................................................................................................374
7.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network................................................................................................... 375
7.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network.................................................................................................. 377
7.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning........................................................................... 379
7.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards....................................................................................................................379
7.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards............................................................................................................... 382
7.2.3 Monitoring the Optical Power by MCA/OPM8 Board........................................................................................... 383
7.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network................................................................ 384
7.3.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 384
7.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.......................................................................................................................................386
7.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.................................................... 392
7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.................................................................................... 396
7.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)..400
7.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)...407
7.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)... 409
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM). 413
7.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 414
7.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 416
7.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 417
7.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D........................................................................................ 418
7.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)............ 419
7.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board
+Demultiplexer Board).....................................................................................................................................................422
7.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.........................................................................................424
7.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................................... 425
7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization............................... 426
7.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization...............................431
7.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization................................ 432
7.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)..................................................................................................433
7.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU Boards...........................................................................................434
7.3.22 Commissioning OSNR.......................................................................................................................................... 435
7.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans.................................................................................. 436
8 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength

System.............................................................................................................................................440
8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System....................................................................................................................442
8.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.................................................................................................................446
8.3 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................................................ 447
8.3.1 Checking Design Documents.................................................................................................................................. 447
8.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter..................................................................................................................................... 451
8.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System...................453
8.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station.................................................. 458
8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End................ 460
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization.....................................................................................................462
8.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System............................................463
8.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.........................................................................469
8.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station................................................................................................ 472
8.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station..........................................................................475
8.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization..................................................................................................... 477
8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System............................................................................................................... 478
8.7 OSNR Penalties.......................................................................................................................................................... 486
8.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.......................................................................................................................... 500
8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System................................................................................. 502
8.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters.....................................................................................................................502
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8.9.2 OSNR Failure.......................................................................................................................................................... 502

8.9.3 Excessively High Incident Optical Power............................................................................................................... 503
8.9.4 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration......................................................................................................................... 503
8.9.5 Methods for Handling Other Faults.........................................................................................................................503
9 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
.......................................................................................................................................................... 505
9.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System................................................ 506
9.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system........................................................................................ 510
9.3 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................................................ 511
9.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent System....................................................................................512
9.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station.................................................. 514
9.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and OTM Station at the Receive End...................... 517
9.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and Links at the ROADM Station.......................... 519
9.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Pass-through Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station................... 521
9.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the ROADM Station............................................ 523
9.4.7 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station..........................................................................525
9.4.8 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization.....................................................................................................529
9.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning............................................................................................................... 530
10 Configuring Services and Service Protection.................................................................... 531

10.1 Configuring Services................................................................................................................................................ 532
10.2 Configuring System Features................................................................................................................................... 532
11 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................ 534

11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.................................................................... 536
11.2 Testing Protection Switching.................................................................................................................................... 537
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection.................................................................................................538
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800.........................540
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800......................................... 541
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards.....................................................................................542
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching............................................................................................................ 543
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching...................................................................................................... 545
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching............................................................................................................... 547
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching............................................................................................................... 550
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching.......................................................................................................... 554
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................................ 557
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................................... 560
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)................................................................. 562
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching..............................................564
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching...................................................................................................568
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching............................................................................................. 571
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching....................................................................................................... 574
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching...................................................................................................... 576

11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching.................................................................................. 579
11.2.19 Verifying Linear MSP..........................................................................................................................................582
11.2.20 Verifying Ring MSP.............................................................................................................................................583
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching..................................................................... 585
11.2.22 Verifying SNCP................................................................................................................................................... 587
11.2.23 Verifying SNCTP.................................................................................................................................................589
11.2.24 Verifying Transoceanic MSP Ring Switching..................................................................................................... 591
11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching.................................................................................................................... 593
11.2.26 Verifying DLAG.................................................................................................................................................. 595
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics..................................................................................................................................... 596
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS...................................................................................................................................................596
11.3.2 Testing the LPT......................................................................................................................................................599
11.3.3 Testing the STP/RSTP........................................................................................................................................... 599
11.3.4 Testing the MSTP.................................................................................................................................................. 601
11.4 Testing System Features........................................................................................................................................... 603
11.4.1 Testing IPA.............................................................................................................................................................603
11.4.2 Testing IPA of Raman System (CRPC01/RAU1/RAU2 + Detection Board + Auxiliary Detection Board).........604
11.4.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2+ Auxiliary Detection Board)........................................................606
11.4.4 Testing ALC...........................................................................................................................................................608
11.4.5 Testing APE........................................................................................................................................................... 610
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks..................................................................................................................................611
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2................................................................................................................................................ 615
11.6.1 Testing Process...................................................................................................................................................... 615
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation................................................................................................................................. 617
11.6.3 Testing Items..........................................................................................................................................................619
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels........................................................................................................................... 622
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops...........................................................................................622
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function...........................................................624
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels.............................................................................................................................. 625
11.8.1 Testing Tunnel Performance Using MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM................................................................................625
11.8.2 Testing PW Performance Using MPLS-TP PW OAM.......................................................................................... 626
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................................. 627
11.9.1 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using Ping Commands..............................................................627
11.9.2 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using ETH-OAM......................................................................629
11.9.3 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance Using ETH OAM......................................................................... 631
11.9.4 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using SmartBits...................................................................... 632
11.9.5 Testing Ethernet Service Latency, Throughput, and Short-Term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP-Assist................. 633
11.9.6 Testing Long-term Ethernet Packet Loss Ratios Using TP-Assist........................................................................ 636
11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System................................................................................................................. 639
11.10.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................................ 639
11.10.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................................ 641
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.10.3 Configuring Conference Calls............................................................................................................................. 642

11.10.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................................ 644
11.11 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System............................................................................................ 646
11.11.1 Configuring Orderwire.........................................................................................................................................646
11.11.2 Configuring Conference Calls............................................................................................................................. 647
11.11.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................................ 648
11.12 Testing Orderwire Functions.................................................................................................................................. 650
12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer...................................................................... 651

12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors............................................................................................................................653
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.................................................................................................................................655
13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment......................................................... 658

14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................660
15 Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor............................................. 662
15.1 Setting Basic Parameters.......................................................................................................................................... 663
15.1.1 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.........................................................................................................................663
15.1.2 Setting OA Board Parameters................................................................................................................................664
15.1.3 Calibrating ASE.....................................................................................................................................................666
15.2 Setting the State of OCh Trails................................................................................................................................. 671
15.3 Configuring the OD Monitoring Function................................................................................................................672
16 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems........................................... 685

16.1 OSC/ESC Conflict.................................................................................................................................................... 686
16.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports...................................................................................................................... 688
17 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration............................... 691

17.1 Configuring the NE Data.......................................................................................................................................... 695
17.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.......................................................................................................................695
17.1.2 Replicating the NE Data........................................................................................................................................ 696
17.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack.......................................................................................................................... 697
17.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration.....................................................................................................................697
17.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE.................................................................................................. 697
17.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute............................................................................................................................... 698
17.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack................................................................................................................ 702
17.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.......................................................................................................................................704
17.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming......................................................................................................................... 705
17.3.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................................... 705
17.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.......................................................................................................... 706
17.3.3 Configuring the ROADM...................................................................................................................................... 707
17.4 Configuring the NE Time......................................................................................................................................... 718
17.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs......................................................................718
17.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time............................................................ 719
17.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key...................................................................................................................... 720
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time........................................................................722
17.5 Performance Management........................................................................................................................................ 723
17.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold.............................................................................................................723
17.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters........................................................................................................ 725
17.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers................................................................................................................ 728
17.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs.............................................................................................................................. 730
17.6.1 Modifying the NE Name....................................................................................................................................... 730
17.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name...........................................................................................................................731
17.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 733
17.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs................................................................................................................................... 735
17.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Non-GNE........................................................................................................................... 736
17.6.6 Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE........................................................................................................................... 738
17.6.7 Deleting NEs..........................................................................................................................................................740
17.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration....................................................................................................................... 742
17.7.1 Deleting Boards..................................................................................................................................................... 742
17.7.2 Adding Boards....................................................................................................................................................... 744
17.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.........................................................................................................................746
17.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information...................................................................................................................... 746
17.8.2 Deleting Fibers...................................................................................................................................................... 749
17.9 Creating a Single NE................................................................................................................................................ 751
17.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User............................................................................................................................ 755
17.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode...............................................................................................................757
17.12 Configuring the Edge Port...................................................................................................................................... 760
17.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection............................................................................................................. 761
17.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes.............................................................................................................. 763
17.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes.........................................................................................................764
17.16 Opening/Closing Lasers......................................................................................................................................... 765
17.17 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards.................................................................................................... 767
17.18 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)................................................................................................................... 768
17.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board....................................................................................... 769
17.20 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board......................................................................................... 771
17.21 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..........................................................................771
17.22 Setting the NULL Mapping Status......................................................................................................................... 773
17.23 Configuring Path Binding.......................................................................................................................................774
17.24 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.................................................................................................................... 775
17.25 Setting the FEC Mode............................................................................................................................................ 776
17.26 Enabling and Disabling LPT.................................................................................................................................. 777
17.27 Setting the Speed Level of Fans............................................................................................................................. 778
17.28 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port................................................779
17.29 Configuring Ethernet Boards..................................................................................................................................780
17.29.1 Configuring Internal Ports................................................................................................................................... 780
17.29.2 Configuring External Ports.................................................................................................................................. 782
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.30 Verifying Ethernet Services.................................................................................................................................... 784

17.31 Configuring the PRBS Test.................................................................................................................................... 784
17.31.1 PRBS Test............................................................................................................................................................784
17.31.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board................................................................................. 786
17.31.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ...................................................................................................... 787
17.31.4 Performing the PRBS Test in E2E Mode............................................................................................................ 789
17.32 Managing NE Power Consumption........................................................................................................................ 791
17.32.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption................................................................................................................... 791
17.32.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE...................................................................................................... 796
17.32.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report..............................................................................798
17.33 Measuring Trail Latency.........................................................................................................................................799
17.34 Enabling the ASON Feature................................................................................................................................... 801
17.35 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs...............................................................................................................803
17.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data.......................................................................................................................804
17.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods................................................................................ 804
17.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card........................................................................................ 809
17.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................................... 810
17.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board................................................................................................814
17.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card.................................................................................................... 815
17.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................................817
17.36.7 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data.................................................................................................. 819
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................822
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning
1 Preparations for Commissioning
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety
regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to
prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.2 Instruments and Tools
This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
1.3 Reference Documents
This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
1.4 Engineering Design Information
This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check
Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers
This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
1.7 Testing Connection Points
This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function
and connection types.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer
This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.
Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety
regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to
prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the
alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.
Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment

Symbol Describes
ESD protection symbol.

You must wear an ESD wrist strap or
glove to avoid damage caused by
electrostatic discharge to boards.
Laser level symbol.

Indicates the laser level and warns that
laser beams can cause injuries to eyes.
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the grounding
point.
Regular cleaning symbol.

! ATTENTION 注意 Warns you to regularly clean the air
CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清扫
filter.
Fan warning symbol.

Warns you not to touch the fan blade
until the fan stops moving.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers

This section describes how to safely use fibers.
DANGER
Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to
your eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid
directly exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber
connectors.
Protection of Optical Connectors

All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards
must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be
promptly covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their
packages to keep the optical ports clean.
Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps
Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended
NOTE
Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other
material. These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.
Connecting Fibers
NOTICE
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation
to avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that
have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx
optical port rather than at the Tx optical port.
Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is
excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the
device caused by a high input of optical power.
DANGER
Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to
avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser.
The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see
Table 1-2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC

Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)
0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0
10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0
NOTE
The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points
must be spliced.
Cleaning Fibers
NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned
before the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the
equipment.
The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning
tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:
l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is
never used)
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Dust-free cotton stick
l Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl
l Fiberscope
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on

This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the
power is on.
Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is
on:
l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.
l Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.
l Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation
requirements.
1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow ESD procedures to prevent equipment damage:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.

l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.
NOTICE
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure
that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of
the equipment.
For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
NOTE
Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.
When you are following ESD procedures, take the following precautions:
l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be
between 0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two
years) has expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a
wrist strap that provides the required resistance value.
l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not
protected by the wrist strap.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or
chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips,
circuits, or pins with your bare hands.
l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the
removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-
antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack
boards, and do not let these materials touch the boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-
sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you
connect them to the ports.
l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room
for packing boards in the future.
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-
CORE.
1.2 Instruments and Tools

This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
Table 1-3 describes how the tools and testing instruments are used for equipment
commissioning.
Table 1-3 Instruments and tools required for commissioning
Tool or Tester Usage
Laptop Used to install the U2000 Web LCT during network element
(NE) commissioning.
Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, receiver
sensitivity, and receiver overload at an optical port. It is
mainly used to measure the optical power on the client side
and the WDM side of the OTU. This meter also measures the
total optical power of the multiplexed signals.
Optical spectrum analyzer Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), and central wavelength for each wavelength in
the multiplexed signals.
NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the
multiplexed signals needs to be measured using an optical spectrum
analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is more
accurate. When using this method, the noise impact does not need to
be considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the
test. Use the following method to verify the calibration: measure the
optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU using the optical
spectrum analyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained
by using an optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB,
the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5 dB,
recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
SDH analyzer Used for network commissioning and SDH service testing.
GE analyzer Used for the GE service testing.
10GE analyzer Used for the 10GE service testing.
OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service testing.
ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service testing.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tool or Tester Usage
Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service testing.
FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service testing.
Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity

during a power test.
Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of fiber end faces.
Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.
Compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.
Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of optical
ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.
Cassette cleaner or lens Used to clean fiber end faces.

tissue
Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.
Fixed optical attenuator Used to attenuate the received optical power, which may
damage the optical component, during the received optical
power test for an optical port.
Variable optical attenuator Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload optical
(VOA) power of an optical port.
NOTE
l The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise
while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise.
l When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical
power closely. When the attenuation stops decreasing, stop the
adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 1-4 lists three 40G SDH analyzers. Table 1-5 lists three
types of optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate its
optical power setting.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-4 40G SDH analyzers

Name Appearance
ONT-506
NX 4000
MP1797A
Table 1-5 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance
MTS8000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Name Appearance
Agilent86145B/86142
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317
Table 1-6 lists the 100G test meters.
Table 1-6 Optical spectrum analyzers for 100G system testing
Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503
EXFO FTB-500

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1.3 Reference Documents

This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
1.4 Engineering Design Information

This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document

This section describes the required engineering survey documents.
The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work
instructions associated with the engineering survey.
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document

This section describes the engineering design documents required during equipment
commissioning.
The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basic
topological diagram, and the network management diagram)
l Board layout diagram of the cabinet
l Wavelength allocation diagram
l Cabinet fiber connection diagram
l Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers
l Fiber connection diagram
l Optical attenuator list
l Design description file
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check

Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Reference.
Table 1-7 Checking items

No. Task Item
1 Operating Environment and l Equipment Room

Grounding Specifications Environment
Requirements
l Power Supply
l Lighting
l Protection System
l Antistatic Protection
l Lightening Protection
and Grounding
Requirements
2 Installation Checklist l Checking the Cabinet

Installation
l Checking the Cabinet
Reenforcement
l Checking the Subrack
and Board
l Checking the Cable and
Fiber Routing
l Checking the DCM and
CRPC Modules
l Checking the Cabinet
Door Installation

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
No. Task Item
3 Grounding Specifications l General Grounding

Specifications
l Equipment Grounding
Specifications
l Specifications for
Managing Ground
Cables
4 Others l Engineering Labels

l Checking Cabling and
Bundling
l Inspecting and Cleaning
the Optical Fiber
Connectors
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers

This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical network

commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.
Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:
l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories

l WDM equipment
l U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT
l Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)
1.7 Testing Connection Points

This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function
and connection types.
Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
For the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8 and
Table 1-13.
Table 1-13.
NOTE
In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and general OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified. Distinguish the "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32" and
"General OptiX OSN 8800 T32" subracks as follows: enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is the subrack with the
"Enhanced" label; general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is the subrack without the "Enhanced" label.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-13.
Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800
universal platform subrack. For the functional description of the testing connection points and
buttons, see Table 1-9, and Table 1-13.
Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-10, and
Table 1-13.
Figure 1-9 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-11, Table
1-12 and Table 1-13.
Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
EFI2 EFI1 PIU STI ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ALMI2 ALMO3
ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH1
CLK2
CLK1
ETH2
TOD2
TOD1
SERIAL
NM_ETH
ALMO4
ALMO2
ETH3
Front Back

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
EFI2 EFI1
PIU ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1
ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMO4

ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH2
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
ALMO2
ETH3
Fan
Fan

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PIU
EFI AUX AUX ATE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 Universal
Platform Subrack
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 LAMP1 LAMP2 SubRACK_ID NM_ETH1ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2 NM_ETH2
ID5 ID4 ID3ID2ID1
LAMP TEST RESET 1
PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG 0
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
Fan
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SCC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800
COM ETH3 ALM02 ALM04 ALMI1 LAMP1
ALM01 ALM03 SERIAL ALMI2 LAMP2
PIU
xcs SCC
STAT STAT RUN
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
PWRA
PWRB
NEG(-)
PWRC
ALMC
RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
Fan RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xc SC
s C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-9 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800
FAN
STAT STAT RUN

ACT PROG
PROG
SRV DO not hot
PWRA plug this unit！
PWRB
PWRC
NM_ETH1
ALMC
S1 S11
S6
S5
S4
S2
SCC
SCC
AUX
PIU
PIU
RESET
NM_ETH2
LAMP
TEST
NEG(-)
ALM
CUT
PWR
RTN(+)
CRI
EXT
MAJ
MIN
SCC AUX PIU
Table 1-8 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection

Screen Type
ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the RJ-45

ALMO2 centralized alarm and power distribution cabinet
by output ports and cascading ports. Other modes
ALMO3 can be configured to send the alarm output for
ALMO4 assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 8800 provides eight channels of alarm
output. The first three channels, by default, are
critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms.
The other five channels are reserved for alarm
output cascading.
SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9

port which supports the X.25 protocol.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Screen Type
ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45

ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring
remote monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names for the eight
alarm channels can be set to achieve remote
monitoring of the external alarms with the
external system.
LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45

LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.
NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45

NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
8800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE through a network cable to that on
another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45

subrack using a network cable to the same ports
on another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave
subracks.
CLK1/CLK2 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time RJ-45

signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional.
That is, they input and output signals at the same
time.
TOD1/TOD2 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time RJ-45

signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can
either input or output time signals.
PHONE Orderwire phone interface RJ-45
F1 F1 interface RJ-45

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Universal Platform Subrack
Screen Type

can be configured to send the alarm output for
assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides
four channels of alarm output. The first three
channels, by default, are critical alarms, major
alarms, and minor alarms. The other channel is
reserved for alarm output cascading.

external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names of the four alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.

LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.
NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45

NM_ETH2 OSN 8800 universal platform subrack using a
network cable to the network port on the U2000
server to achieve management of the U2000 over
the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.

subracks.
SubRACK_ID Used to show the subrack ID. -
LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this -
button, all indicators are lit
RESET Used to reset the EFI board. -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Screen Type
COM Commissioning port used for communications RJ-45

between the EFI and AUX boards.

ALMO3 can be configured to send the alarm output for
ALMO4 assembling and displaying the alarm. The OptiX
OSN 6800 provides eight channels of alarm
output. The first three channels, by default, are
critical alarms, major alarms, and minor alarms.
The other five channels are reserved for alarm
output cascading.
SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9

port which supports the X.25 protocol.

ALMI2 external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names of the eight
alarm channels can be set to achieve remote
monitoring of the external alarms with the
external system.

LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.
NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45

NM_ETH2 OSN 6800 using a network cable to the network
port on the U2000 server to achieve management
of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
between NEs.

subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Interface Silk- Connection
Screen Function Description Type
NM_ETH1/ Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45

NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
between NEs.
EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64
Table 1-12 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk-
Screen (on Connection
Cables) Function Description Type
ETH Used as the COM commissioning port. RJ-45
F&f Debugs the serial port. DB9
ALMO The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm RJ-45

and power distribution cabinet by output ports
and cascading ports. The port provides two
channels of alarm output and two channels of
output cascading.

ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring
remote monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). It is used to input six
channels of external alarms.

LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the chassis is
housed.
Table 1-13 Function description of the testing buttons

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description
RESET Used to reset the SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Interface Silk-Screen Function Description
ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack.
You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressing
and then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarms
by pressing the button for five seconds. When the audible
alarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC
board remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is
turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains
off.
LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, all
indicators are lit.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer

This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using
a cable.
Prerequisites
The subrack must work normally.
The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMS
computer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the
EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.
Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window
is displayed.
Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.
Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.
Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP
address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is
an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as
any of the existing IP addresses.
Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.
Prerequisites
When the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way that
is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable.
Note the following requirements:
l The subrack must work normally.
l The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same
network segment.

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.
Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment is
connected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the
EFI2 or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX
board using cables.
The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX
board using cables.
Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window
is displayed.
Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.
Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.
Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP
address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is
an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of
the existing IP addresses.
Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.
Step 12 Click OK.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide
2 Quick Guide
About This Chapter
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and
the U2000.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally
manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security
equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NE
and network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product and
solution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN)
hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and network
management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In
the TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture,
the Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and
maintenance. The Web LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses
a remote NE over data communications channels (DCCs).
2.1 Starting the Web LCT
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000
The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth,
trouble-free launch of the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.1 Starting the Web LCT

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT

You can install the Web LCT using a CD or DVD, or by copying and decompressing the
software package that contains the Web LCT.
Installing the Web LCT by Copying and Decompressing the Software Package
1. Obtain the software package that contains the Web LCT from Huawei engineers.
2. Decompress the installation software package that includes
U2000WebLCTversion_en_win32_x86.zip.
NOTE
Ensure that the decompressing directory contains no spaces, punctuation, or non-alphabetic

characters.
Installing the Web LCT Using a CD or DVD

1. Insert the installation CD or DVD.
2. Run the setup.exe file.
3. Select the language version for Wizard, and click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.
6. Select the installation directory, and click Next.
NOTE
When you click Browse to select a different installation folder, ensure that the destination path
does not contain spaces or punctuation.
7. The following dialog box is displayed. Select the features you want to install based on
the following NOTE. Click Next.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When you select the features to be installed, COMMON must be selected and other features can
be selected based on the managed equipment.
l For OTN equipment using the North American version only, select NA OTN.
l For OTN equipment using the global version only, select NG WDM.
l It is recommended that all the features are selected.
8. Click Install to install the Web LCT. The entire installation process lasts five minutes.
9. After the installation is complete, the Installation finished dialog box is displayed.
Click Finish.
2.1.2 Connecting to NEs

Connect the computer where the Web LCT is installed to an NE using a crossover or straight-
through cable so the Web LCT can directly manage the connected NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the crossover or straight-through cable to the Web LCT. One end of the cable should
be connected to the network port of the computer. For the specific ports and boards to be
connected, see Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Specific port on a board

Product Board Name Port
OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 EFI1/EFI2 NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 EFI NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 6800 AUX NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 3800 AUX NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
Step 2 Check the green indicator of the network adapter interface of the computer and the indicators
on the board that connect to the computer.
NOTE
The indicator of the computer and the green "LINK" indicator on the board remain on. The orange
"ACT" indicator on the board should blink.
If the three indicators are malfunctioning:
l Replace the network cable with a new one. If the indicators are functioning correctly, the original
cable is faulty.
l If all the above-mentioned indicators are still malfunctioning, check whether the network adapter
of the computer and the board that connects to the network cable are functioning correctly.
Step 3 Change the IP address of the computer being used to commission the NE so that the computer
IP address is on the same subnet as the default IP Address of the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l The default IP address of an NE ranges from 129.9.0.0 to 129.9.0.255 or from 129.9.191.0 to

129.9.191.255.
l Change the computer IP address that is in the same network segment as the NE, for example,
129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255.
l Change the computer subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
----End
2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

Log in to the Web LCT before performing NE settings on the Web LCT.
Procedure
1. Double-click the startweblct_https.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to launch
the Web LCT application.
2. In the browser, enter the default value admin for User Name and Changeme_123 for
Password.
3. Enter the Verification Code according to the picture that is displayed on the right side.
4. Click Login to display the NE List window.
Postrequisite
After logging in to the Web LCT,pay attention to the following if you need to commission an
NE on the Web LCT:
l When no U2000 user logs in to an NE and an LCT user requests to log in to the NE, the
NE does not refer to the LCT Access Control parameter and allows the LCT access
directly
l When a U2000 user has logged in to an NE and then an LCT user requests to log in to
the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in based on the LCT
Access Control parameter.
l When an LCT user has logged in to an NE and then a U2000 user requests to log in to
the NE, the login of the LCT user does not affect the login of the U2000 user, and the
successful login of the U2000 user does not affect the logged-in LCT user.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l When the LCT user and the U2000 user log in to the NE at the same time, set LCT
Access Control to Prohibit Access. This does not affect the LCT user that has already
logged in.
2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT

After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned
NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.
Procedure
Step 1 Highlight the NE that you are logged in to, and click the NE Logout at the bottom of the
screen.
Step 2 Physically disconnect the Web LCT from the NE
Step 3 Close the browser.
Step 4 Double-click the stopweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to stop the Web LCT
application.
----End
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000

The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth,
trouble-free launch of the U2000.
2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client

Log in to the U2000 client to manage NEs by performing management operations on the
U2000 client.
Prerequisites
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The U2000 server is started.
l The network communication between the U2000 client and U2000 server is available.
NOTE
Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.

l The ports used between the U2000 client and U2000 server are not blocked by the
firewall.
l The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is
configured on the U2000 server.
NOTE
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements.
l Legitimate U2000 user names and passwords have been allocated.
l U2000 licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Background Information
By default, after you enter an incorrect password three consecutive times, the user account is
locked by the U2000 server. The administrator user admin can unlock the account of a
common user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the operating system where the client program is installed.
l On a Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.
l On a Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user ossuser.
Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE
l For a Windows OS, double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\oss\client directory to
start the client.
l For a Solaris OS, run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the \opt\oss\client directory to start
the client.
Step 3 Optional: If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a
server:
1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to be
added, and click OK.
Table 2-2 Server parameter settings

Parameter Settings
Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address for
login or the related host name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter Settings
Server Name (or It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address.
IP Address) – In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the
system IP address of the server.
– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the
IP address of NMS application network in the active site
server.
Port There are two data transmission modes: Common and

Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Common mode
and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.
Mode There are two data transmission modes: Common and

Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command
to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -
cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and
the SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is
Common.
NOTE
– A client can log in to the U2000 server only when they work in the
same mode. If the client and server work in different modes, even if
they are installed on the same host, the client cannot log in to the
server.
3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.
Step 4 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and
Password to the valid values, and click Login.
NOTE
By default the user name is admin, The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123 (It is
Admin_123 for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must be changed during the first login
to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.
Step 5 Optional: When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is
older than the server version, a prompt is displayed asking you whether to upgrade the client.
l Click OK to upgrade the local version to the server version (recommended). This
ensures version consistency on the U2000 client and on the U2000 server.
l Click Cancel, which prevents you from logging in to the client of the server version.
Step 6 After you log in to the U2000 client, the U2000 automatically displays the workbench
window where default shortcut icons are displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End
2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000

This topic describes how to start the U2000 system, include: Main Topology, NE Panel, NE
Explorer, Frequently Used Shortcut Icon, Common Shortcut Keys.
Main Topology
All topology management functions can be accessed through the Main Topology on the
U2000. These functions include creating topological objects and subnets, and searching for
existing equipment in the network. You can search, view, create, set, and manage NEs and
subnets. You can also search, create, configure, and maintain management functions on the
Main Topology
Navigation Path
In the Workbench window, double-click the Main Topology shortcut icon.
GUI Description
Figure 2-1shows the Main Topology of the U2000 client.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-1 Main Topology
No. Area Description
1 NMS name This area displays the full name of the U2000.
2 Menu bar You can operate the U2000 and NE using a submenu
bar. The operations include configuring and managing
tasks.
3 Shortcut icon By clicking a shortcut icon, you can perform a simple

task quickly; for example, exit the U2000, lock the
U2000 client, log out, manage U2000 users, stop the
current alarm sound, access NE manager, view alarms,
and create connections.
4 Shortcut icon on the By clicking this icon, you can zoom in or out or
Main Topology page refresh or save the view, show or hide the navigators,
search objects, monitor object attributes, and lock or
unlock the view.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5 Alarm button bar The alarm pane provides fault information about the
entire network by collecting statistics on the alarms of
different severities and their status according to the
current alarm template.
The alarm pane can function as a monitoring panel. On
the alarm button bar, the alarms severities are marked
in different colors, and the number indicates the
number of uncleared alarms.
6 Filter tree and legend In this area, you can set the display types of the
objects, and examine the descriptions of the legends in
a view.
7 Time and date Displays the client time in real time.
8 User name Displays the user name of the current logged-in U2000
user.
9 Server IP address and Displays the name that is set by the current U2000
name client and the IP address of the current U2000 server.
10 Physical map Views NEs.

In the Main Topology, you can perform operations
such as Creating NEs, Configuring the NE Data,
Creating Connections, Browsing Fibers/Cables,
Deleting Topology Objects, Browsing the Current
Alarm, and Starting the NE Data Collection; enter the
NE Explorer to configure the service for the NE and so
on.
You can check the NE status and communication status
in the Filter Tree or on the Legend tab.
11 Coordinate value Displays the current mouse coordinate in the Main

Topology.
12 Topology navigation Displays all the NEs managed by the U2000 so they
tree can be quickly located.
13 Current Alarms In this area, you can browse the alarms that require
attention and processing by setting the filtering criteria
of the current alarm.
NOTE
In the Current View drop-down list, you can select Physical Root, Current View, and Custom View.
NE Explorer
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors indicating their current status. On
the U2000, most operations such as equipment configuration, monitoring, and maintenance
are performed in the NE Panel window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Navigation Path
In the Main Topology, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
GUI Description
Figure 2-2 shows an NE Explorer of the U2000 client.
Figure 2-2 NE Explorer
1 Object display Displays the current NE, subracks on the NE, and boards
area in each subrack.
2 Shortcut icon
l Click to display the NE panel.
l Click to switch to another NE.
l Click to back up the NE database.
l Click to obtain online help.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3 Function tree You can select a function from the Function Tree to
perform operations, such as configuring services,
creating connections, and querying alarms on the current
NE.
4 Right-hand Displays different windows based on the functions that

window are selected from the Function Tree. You can click a
shortcut icon to switch to another window.
Opening the NE Panel

The NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the
current state of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for
configuring, monitoring, and maintaining equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)
Procedure on the U2000

l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left
side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End
Procedure on the Web LCT

l Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE
Panel by default.
----End
User Interface
NE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Figure 2-4 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-5 shows the NE Panel
of the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-6 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800
Figure 2-6 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800
Using Shortcut Icon

This section describes the frequently used shortcut icons on the U2000 Client.
You can customize the toolbar so only the frequently used shortcut icons are displayed on the
toolbar. To do so, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item from the shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 2-3 The shortcut icons on the Main Topology

Button Name Description
Workbench l Style of Favorites Folder: By

selecting it, you can modify or
delete the default workbench.
l Style of Desktop: By selecting it,
you can return to the workbench.
Exit Exits the client.
Log Out Logs out of the current user.
Lock Terminal Locks the current client.
Full Screen Displays the Main Topology in full

screen mode.
NMS User Manages user information

Management
Maintain SDH Displays the Maintenance SDH

Protection Subnet Protection Subnet window.
Manage SDH Trail Displays the Manage SDH Trail

window.
Create SDH Trail Displays the Create SDH Trail

window.
Manage WDM Trail Displays the Manage WDM Trail

window.
Browse Current Displays the Filter dialog box. After

Alarm the filter criteria is set, displays the
Browse Current Alarm window.
Browse Alarm Logs Displays the Filter dialog box. After

the filter criteria is set, displays the
Browse Alarm Logs window.
Stop the Current Clicks this shortcut to stop the

Alarm Sound current alarm sound.
Main Topology Switches to the Main Topology.
NE Explorer Displays the NE Explorer window.
Create Fiber Creates fiber.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Browse SDH Displays the Browse SDH

Performance Performance window.
Browse WDM Displays the Browse WDM

Performance Performance window.
WDM Optical Displays the WDM Optical Power

Power Commissioning window.
Commissioning
IPA Management Displays the presence of the IPA

that is in the disabled state. This
icon blinks if a disabled IPA exists.
When you click this icon, the IPA
Management window is displayed.
NM Tasks Displays the process of NMS tasks

Management management. When you click this
Progress icon, the Configuration Data
Management Progress window is
displayed.
Networkwide Performs centralized monitoring

Maintenance Status over the maintenance and operating
status of the equipment
managed,including:
l Alarm Reversion
l DCC Enabling Status
l Path Loading
l Alarm Suppression
l Alarm Insertion
l Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
l Cross-Connection Loopback
l Laser Status
Show alarm panel Displays the Alarm Panel dialog

box. The statistics of all current
alarms are displayed by default.
Critical Alarm Dynamically displays critical

alarms. When you click this icon, all
critical alarm information is
displayed.
Major Alarm Dynamically displays major alarms.

When you click this icon, all major
alarm information is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Minor Alarm Dynamically displays minor alarms.

When you click this icon, all minor
alarm information is displayed.
Warning Alarm Dynamically displays

warnings,When you click this icon,
all warning or alarm information is
displayed.
No new events Dynamically displays abnormal

events. This icon indicates that there
are no newly reported events. When
you click this icon, the Query
Event Logs window is displayed.
New events Dynamically displays abnormal

events. This icon indicates that there
are newly reported events. When
you click this icon, the Query
Event Logs window is displayed.
New To create a custom view, subnet,

NE, and link.
NOTE
The NE cannot be created in the custom
view.
Back to Parent To return the parent interface.
Select To select a topology object.
Move View To move the topology view.
Search Displays the Search dialog box.

You can locate objects in the
topology.
Print To print the topology view.
Print Preview To preview the print effect of the

topology view.
Overview To provide a general view of

topology.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE Statistics l To collect statistics on the NE

types and number of the objects
selected in the current topology
view.
l If no object is selected in the
current topology view, the
system collects statistics on the
types and number of all NEs in
the current topology view.
Refresh Refreshes the current view after you

click the button when the data in the
view is changed. For example, if an
IP link is changed in the link
management window, you can click
this button to display the latest IP
link data in the Main Topology.
Save Position To save the position information of

the topology objects in the current
Legend & Filter & To display the legend/filter/attribute

Attribute panel.
Current Alarm To display the current Alarms.
Layout To arrange the topology objects in

the topology view.
Zoom In Zooms in topology view.
Zoom Out Zooms out topology view.
Local Amplification To enlarge the selected area. In the

topology view, drag the mouse to
generate a rectangle. Topology
objects in this rectangle are
magnified.
Lock View/Unlock Locks/Unlocks the current NE(s).

View
Ascending Lists the objects on the Object Tree

in an ascending or a descending
order.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Descending NOTE
Topology objects in the navigation tree
are sorted according to the following
rules:
l No matter whether topology objects
are sorted in ascending or
descending order, the order of the
types of topology objects is
unchanged, namely, local NMS,
subnets, NEs with subnodes, and
NEs without subnodes. The local
NMS is always displayed on the
top.
l The types of topology objects are
sorted by name alphabetically.
Object names are case insensitive.
Table 2-4 The shortcut icons on the other GUI

Shrink all Shrinks Alarm/Event Name.
Classify by group Classifies alarms by group ID.

id
Classify by Classifies alarms by severity.

severity
Classify by type Classifies alarms by type.
Classify by Classifies alarms by category.

category
NE Time Synchronizes the NE time and NMS

Synchronization time.
Synchronize Synchronizes the current alarms of an

Current Alarms NE.
Browse Current Browses the current alarms of an NE.

Alarms
Clear Alarm Clears the current alarm indications

Indication of an NE.
Refresh NE Panel Refreshes the NE panel status to

Status enable the NE panel to display the
latest data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Back Up NE Backs up NE data to the system

Database To control board.
system control
board
Display/Hide Displays or hides the extended slot on

Extended Slot the Extended Slot tab.
Legend Displays a legend and its description.
Using Shortcut Keys

This following table describes the common shortcut keys. Using shortcut keys, you can
increase the operation efficiency.
Shortcut Key Description
F1 Opens the Help.
Enter Confirms the operation or moves downward to the next line. If the
cursor is on a button, pressing Enter confirms the operation. If the
cursor is in the list box, press Enter once and the cursor then moves
downward to the next line.
Esc Closes a dialog box.
Tab Switches between buttons if the cursor is on a button, or switches

between text boxes if the cursor is in a list box.
Ctrl+F Searches resources, such as the NEs, subnets, cards, frames,

interfaces, and VLANs in basic and rapid modes, by pressing Ctrl+F
in all views.
Ctrl+A Selects all the NEs or all the contents in a list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+A to select all NEs. If the cursor is in a list box,
press Ctrl+A to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+X Selects all NEs or selects all contents in the list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+X to select all NEs. If the cursor is in the list box,
press Ctrl+X to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+C Quickly copies the text in a table.
Ctrl+V Pastes the copied data to another data area.
Ctrl+Alt+U Unlocks a terminal.
Alt+F4 Exits the system.
Ctrl+S Saves the data.
F11 Displays full screen.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Shortcut Key Description
Ctrl+F4 Closes the current window.
Ctrl+F5 Restores down (when the service window in the public window is
maximized).
Ctrl+F9 Minimizes the window (applied to the service window in the public
window).
Ctrl+F10 Maximizes the window (when the service window in the public
window is restored).
Ctrl++ Zooms in the topology view.
Ctrl— Zooms out the topology view.
Alt+F Opens the File menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+E Opens the Edit menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+V Opens the View menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+U Opens the Fault menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+P Opens the Performance menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+C Opens the Configuration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+R Opens the Service menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+I Opens the Inventory menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+S Opens the Administration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+W Opens the Window menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+H Opens the Help menu from the Main Menu.
2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client

Ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
The U2000 clients must be started correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.

If certain operations are performed in the Main Topology on the U2000 client but not saved, a
prompt is displayed asking you whether to save them.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.2.4 Using Online Help

Online Help provides help information about the U2000.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.
NOTE
When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment
3 Commissioning and Configuration

Procedure During Deployment
About This Chapter
This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system and OCS
system.
3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)
This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system.
3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)
This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OCS system.

3.1 Commissioning Procedure (OTN)

This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OTN system.
The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical power
commissioning and network commissioning.
l Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical power
values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the
abnormal attenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and
the gain and insertion losses of the boards.
l Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function,
commissioning feature function, testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning
operations at the network level.
NOTE
For the ASON network, the commissioning procedures and requirements refer to Automatic Commissioning
Process and Commissioning Items for ASON Network.
NOTE
When functioning as an OLA NE, OptiX OSN 3800 supports optical-layer ASON. Before using the optical-
layer ASON function, enable the ASON Feature.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800

Configuring
Installation Installing the
Creating an NE Port of the Creating Fibers
Equipment
Board
Creating an Checking Creating OCh

Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide trails using the
Installation
Element Software trail search
Version function
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment
Configuring
Manually the ROADM
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE
Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Service on
Service
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
& WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System
Testing Bit
Errors
Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800

Configuring
Creating an NE Port of the Creating Fibers
Equipment
Board
Creating an Checking Creating OCh

Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide trails using the
Installation
Element Software trail search
Version function
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting
Performance
Configuring NE
and Network
with the NMS an NE
Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Service on
Service
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
&
WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System
Testing Bit
Errors
Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional
You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment
by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web
LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be
performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the
computer hardware and can be started quickly.
Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.

Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment
No. Task Mandato Tool
ry/
Optional
1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000
3 Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold. Mandatory U2000
4 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000
5 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Mandatory U2000 or Web

U2000/Web LCT Server Manually. LCT
7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web

an NE. LCT
8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000

Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.
Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000

the network uses IP over DCC for communication.
Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task Optional U2000

when the network uses OSI over DCC for
communication.
9 Setting license. Optional U2000
10 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000
11 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
12 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000

Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000
13 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross- Optional U2000 or Web

Connection. Perform this task when ROADM according LCT
stations are configured on the actual network. to the
network
14 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform this Mandatory U2000

task on the U2000. on the
U2000


ry/
Optional
15 Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optional U2000

Optical Doctor. Perform this task on the U2000.
16 Commission optical power by using one of the Mandatory U2000 or Web

following methods as required: LCT
l Automatically Commissioning Optical
Power Through MDS 6630
l Commissioning Optical Power on Site
l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
NOTE
This document uses a 40-channel system as an example
to describe optical power commissioning. The optical
power commissioning methods for an 80-channel
system are similar. The main difference is that the 40-
channel system and 80-channel system have different
requirements on nominal single-wavelength optical
power and single-wavelength incident optical power for
OA boards.
NOTE
See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based
on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to
commission optical power of a 40 Gbit/s system.
See Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Coherent Transmission System to commission
optical power of the Coherent Transmission System.
17 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000
18 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000
19 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web

Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT
20 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000
21 Testing Data Features. Mandatory U2000
22 Testing System Features. Mandatory U2000
23 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000
24 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System and Optional U2000 or Web

Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS LCT
System.
25 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web

LCT
26 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory OTN analyzer or

SDH analyzer


ry/
Optional
27 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.
28 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web

Board. LCT
3.2 Commissioning Procedure (OCS)

This section describes the general commissioning procedures for the OCS system.
Figure 3-3 provides the general commissioning procedures.
Figure 3-3 General commissioning procedures (OCS)

Creating an NE Creating Fibers
Equipment
Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation
Element Software
Version
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting
Performance
Configuring NE
and Network
with the NMS an NE
Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
& Configuring the
Commissioning OCS Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
OCS Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System
Testing Bit
Errors
Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment
by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web
LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be
performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the
computer hardware and can be started quickly.
Table 3-2 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.
Table 3-2 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment (OCS)
ry/
Optional
1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000
3 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000
4 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Mandatory U2000 or Web

U2000/Web LCT Server Manually. LCT
6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web

an NE. LCT
7 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000

Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.
Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000

the network uses IP over DCC for communication.
Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task Optional U2000

when the network uses OSI over DCC for
communication.
8 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000
9 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000

Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000
10 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
11 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
12 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000


ry/
Optional
13 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000
14 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web

Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT
15 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000
16 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000
17 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS Optional U2000 or Web

System. LCT
18 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web

LCT
19 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory SDH analyzer
20 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.
21 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web

Board. LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network
4 Configuring NE and Network
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.
4.1 Creating NEs by Searching

When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs
that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment
to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is
quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in
batches is recommended.
4.2 Creating Optical NEs
The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold
After an NE is powered on, set the NE power consumption threshold on the U2000 based on
the actual power distribution of the NE.
4.5 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the
network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the
NE data by uploading the data.
4.6 Setting NE ID and IP
ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for
searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or
expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can
change the NE ID on the U2000.
4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is
consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with
the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.
4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the
performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during
the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status
performed by maintenance personnel.
4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE uses the extended ECC
in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC
communication exceeds five, you must use extended ECC in specified mode.
4.10 Setting License
This chapter describes how to perform license setting on the NMS. For example: The smart
line card/The TP-Assist function/The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 standard Subrack Speedup.
4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions
After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
4.12 Configuring Boards
In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board
This topic describes how to commission a multi-carrier line board.
4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode
In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters
Before configuring the centralized monitoring function for the Optical Doctor (OD), you need
set an inter-site fiber type and fiber length. If the fiber type is not configured or is incorrectly
configured, the incident optical power will be incorrectly calculated. If the fiber length is not
configured, there is no impact because the fiber length will be automatically calculated. If the
fiber length is incorrectly configured, the OSNR calculation will be incorrect. The design end
of life (EOL) value of fiber loss must be set to determine whether the fiber loss exceeds the
design EOL value. If the EOL is incorrectly configured, the SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL
alarm will be reported, indicating that the fiber loss exceeds the design EOL value. This topic
describes how to set the fiber parameters in batches.
4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM
Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.
4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search
for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end
WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail

In addition to centralized configuration, individual configuration can be used to configure an
OD route for each trail to achieve E2E OSNR detection. If no OD route is configured, no
OSNR value can be displayed and no OSNR equalization can be performed.
4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID
conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal Platform Subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.1 Creating NEs by Searching

When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs
that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment
to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is
quicker and more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in
batches is recommended.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
l The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information
Figure 4-1 shows legend information about U2000 operations.
Figure 4-1 Legend Information
Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with

N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

1. Visit the following navigation path.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Create NEs in batches.

– Set the Search Mode as Search for NE.
4
5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
3
:Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP
Address.
You can repeat the above step 3 to step 5 to add more search domains. You can delete the
system default search domain.
l If you use IP address to search for NEs:
l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched out
in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE because
broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent network
storm).
l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if
you need to search for the NEs across routers.
l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP Address.
6
: Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.
7
:
l The default NE user is root.
l The default password is Changeme_123 or password.
– Set the Search Mode as IP auto discovery.
NOTE
If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IP
auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related
to the GNE.
NOTICE
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs
cannot be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by
network segment.
3. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.

NOTE
You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
4. Optional: Select a created NE and click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID
dialog box is displayed. Users can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar
Code, and then modify the NE Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address
fields accordingly.
NOTE
The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software
commissioning personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, you
can select the uncreated NEs from the Result list and click Create. The Create dialog
box is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.
6. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set
Gateway NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE list. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add. The New Domain dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Repeat 2 through 4 to add multiple search domains.
6. Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
7. Select the appropriate IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
NOTE
l The NE search function searches for only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
9. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or
right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed,
enter lct and Changeme_123 or password in the User Name and Password fields
respectively, and then click OK.
NOTE
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to
multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do
not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and
password for login last time.
Reference Information
Item Description
Creating a Single NE If you have obtained the ID of an NE, you

can create the NE manually.
Switching a Logged-In NE User You can switch a login NE user without

logging out of the U2000 or Web LCT.
Modifying the NE Name You can change the NE name as required.

This operation does not affect the running of
the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Item Description
Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong NE, you can

delete the NE from the U2000 or Web LCT.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE
user.
4.2 Creating Optical NEs

The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
Prerequisite
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating
the NE of the type.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Navigation path.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2
1
2. The Basic Attributes setting.
3
4
3. The Resource Division setting.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2
3
NOTE
To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and
choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list
on the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
4. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.
Category Item Description
(Optional) Related Modifying the Optical NE See this section to change

Operation Name the name of an optical NE
independently.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created and must be working normally.
The user must have logged in to the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.
A NE only allows 15 users to log in at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the
ONE.
Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box.
----End
4.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold

Prerequisites
Precaution
The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the
actual power distribution capability; otherwise, alarms will be falsely reported.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2. Set the NE power consumption threshold.

2 3
4
1
NOTE
4
: The setting of NE Power Consumption Threshold depends on the area division. For
details about area division, see Power Redundancy. The NE Power Consumption Threshold
parameter needs to be set based on the network planning and practical power distribution
capability of the NE. For details about the maximum power consumption of each subrack, see
"Power Consumption" of the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.5 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the
network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the
NE data by uploading the data.
Prerequisite
l The NE must be created successfully.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Navigation path.
2. Uploading the NE Data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1 3
NOTE
When the upload is complete, an error is reported, indicating that no wavelength or bandwidth
have not been configured for the port. However, this error report does not affect the upload and
you can continue to perform the configuration.
Follow-up Procedure
1. For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set
based on the current license requirements refer to 17.2.3 Changing a Subrack
Attribute; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
2. After uploading the NE data, if the logical boards are not added, you can add logical
boards refer to 17.7.2 Adding Boards
(Optional) Related Configuring the NE Data You can configure the NE

Operation data in upload or manual
mode.
4.6 Setting NE ID and IP

ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for
searching on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you
must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing
collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or
expansion process, if you need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can
change the NE ID on the U2000.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.
The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE ID
and one NE IP.
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the
NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between
the NE ID and IP address is canceled automatically.
Association Between the ID and IP Address of an NE

An NE ID consists of 24 bits, with 8 most significant bits for a extended ID and 16 least
significant bits for a basic ID. The extended ID ranges from 0x1 to 0xFE, and the basic ID
ranges from 0x1 to 0xBFEF. 0xFFFFFF is an internal reserved value and is used as the
broadcast address.
The association between the ID and IP address of an NE is described as follows: A factory
default NE IP address is provided together with the NE delivery. The factory default NE IP
address is derived from the NE ID and is in the format of 129.9.basic ID(8 most significant
bits).basic ID(8 least significant bits). For example, if the factory default NE ID is 0x070004,
the default NE IP address is 129.9.0.4. If the NE IP address is not manually configured, it is
associated with the NE ID. To be specific, the NE IP address is changed accordingly if the NE
ID is changed. The association ends once the NE IP address is manually configured.
Precautions
NOTICE
l Changing the ID of an NE is a risky operation because it causes the NE to be reset,
which further results in an NE communication failure during the reset.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example,
the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the Optical
Wavelength Shared Protection group, the wavelength locking function,the Optical Line
Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE, OPA,OD,ECC,inter-NE fiber connection and so on.
After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection and re-configure the protection
group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE ID on the U2000.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship between
the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore the
deleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.
l After changing the NE ID and resetting the NE, log in to the NE again, otherwise, when
you change the IP, an error message will be displayed prompting that you have not
logged in to the NE.
Legend Information

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

N notes
N N
Procedure
l Setting NEs ID
a. Modify the NE ID.
3
1
NOTICE
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and
other NEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs
that are originally connected to the GNE.
NOTICE
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this
NE and other NEs on the U2000.
l Setting NEs IP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2
3
NOTE
l The defalut NE IP should be changed in time to ensure system security.

l When the gateway type is set to OSI gateway, you can set NSAP Address as required.
l The communication mode between the NMS and an NE can be changed by setting Connection
Mode.
l If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE
varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE
ID and IP address is deleted automatically.
l For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to set the IP address of the GNE accordingly in the
DCN management and specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are originally connected
to the GNE.
----End
4.7 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT

Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is
consistent with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly
record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with
the time of the U2000/Web LCT server.
Prerequisite
On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

U2000 or Web LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify
that the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the
system time, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time.
4
3
批注框标注。选择形状，然后开始键入。将框的大小调整到
所需尺寸。移动控制手柄可以将指针对准要标注的对象。
5
2

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the
NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
(Optional) Related Configuring the NE Time With the time

Operation synchronization function,
consistency is maintained
between the NE time and
the U2000/Web LCT server
time.
4.8 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precaution
If the latest period of the performance monitoring is not finished, after you reset the beginning
time for monitoring the NE performance, the incomplete historical data of the performance
monitoring will be lost.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Enable performance monitoring function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3
1
NOTE
4
: Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check
box 24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.
5
: Select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning time and end time for
monitoring. The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to
monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of
the NMS and NE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be
later than the start time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring
function is enabled all the time.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitor Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the
desired NE.
NOTE
An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.
2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the
From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
NOTE
The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-
click the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.
3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the From
field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4. Click Apply to apply the settings.
(Optional) Related Performance Management To ensure the normal

Operation functioning of the network,
the network management
and maintenance personnel
should periodically check
and monitor the network by
taking proper performance
management measures.
4.9 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode

When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE uses the extended ECC
in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC
communication exceeds five, you must use extended ECC in specified mode.
Prerequisites
The equipment must be installed according to the planning. The connections of the cables and
fibers are correct.
The user must log in to the NE.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

U2000 or Web LCT
Precaution (Autosensing Mode)

The autosensing mode obviates the need for multiple site visits of software commissioning
personnel. For example, Table 4-1 shows site A: NE_a1, NE_a2, and NE_a3. NE_a1
communicates with the U2000 through HWECC, and NEs_a2 and a3 communicate with the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
U2000 through extended ECC. Without the autosensing mode, the extended ECC is disabled
by default and consequently NEs_a2 and a3 cannot communicate with the U2000. To achieve
the communication, software commissioning personnel need first to enable the automatic
extended ECC for NE_a1 using the U2000 and visit the site to manually enable the automatic
extended ECC for NEs_a2 and a3. With the autosensing mode, software commissioning
personnel need only to enable the automatic extended ECC for NE_a1 using the U2000. Then
NE_a1 will automatically enable the extended ECC for its Ethernet neighbor NEs (a2 and a3),
obviating the need for site visits.
The extended ECC communication is in autosensing mode by default. To make all NEs
communicate with each other properly, you must enable the extended ECC communication of
the gateway NEs on the U2000 as follows:In the NE Explorer,
2 3
NOTE
For the non-gateway NE, when the number of Huawei NEs that use the extended ECC communication does
not exceed four, you can keep Autosensing mode unchanged.
Background Information (Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode)

The extended ECC Ethernet ports vary depending on the NG WDM series. The details are as
follows:
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet
port (NM_ETH) on the EFI1 and EFI2 board.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the EFI board.
l OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the AUX board.
l OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
(NM_ETH) on the AUX board
The extended ECC in specified mode can be set on site or remotely. When setting the ECC
extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the following sequence: set the farthest NE
without the OSC first, and then the NE with the OSC. Normally, the NE with the OSC is
configured as the server. In the case of the NE without the OSC, the communication between

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The
communication between the U2000 and the NE is restored automatically after the setting on
the NE with the OSC at the station is complete.
When configuring the extended ECC in specified mode, configure one or multiple NEs as the
servers and other NEs as the clients. An NE that is configured as a server NE can also be the
client of other server NEs. If an NE is only configured as a server NE, it supports a maximum
of eight client NEs. When eight client NEs are fully configured, the server NE cannot be used
as the client of any other server NEs. To use a server NE as the client of another server NE,
ensure that no more than seven client NEs are configured for the server NE. All port numbers
of server NEs must be different.
NOTICE
l The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the
gateway NE must be modified last.
l The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.
l Do not set the gateway NE to the server. The NE closest to the gateway NE is
recommended to be the server NE.
l When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the required setting
sequence. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the NE where the
communication with the U2000 stops cannot be restored automatically. In this case, on-site
resetting is required. Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the
ECC setting plan in advance to ensure that the settings are correct.
For example, a station has eight NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at
NE_a1. NE_a1 is the server end. NE_a7 is the client end of NE_a1 and the server end of
NE_a8. Figure 4-8 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of
the NEs and the ECC setting plan.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-8 Network topology of a station
NOTE
NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.
Table 4-1 Configuration plan for extended ECC in specified mode

NE IP Address Set Server Set Client
IP Port Opposite IP Port
NE_a1 132.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - -
NE_a2 132.37.49.131 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a3 132.37.49.132 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a4 132.37.49.133 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a5 132.37.49.134 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a6 132.37.49.135 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a7 132.37.49.136 0.0.0.0a 1602 132.37.49.130 1601
NE_a8 132.37.49.137 - - 132.37.49.136 1602
a: Indicates the local NE.

When remotely configuring the extended ECC in specified mode for a site, follow the
sequence below:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The default ECC extended mode is the autosensing mode.
NE_a8→NE_a7 client end→NE_a6, NE_a5, NE_a4, NE_a3 and NE_a2→NE_a1 server

end→NE_a7 server end
During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs
changes frequently.
l After the setting at NE NE_a8 is complete, the communication between the U2000 and
NE NE_a8 stops.
l After the setting at NE NE_a7 client end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NE NE_a8 stops.
l After the settings on NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 client end are
complete, the communication between the U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4,
NE_a5 and NE_a6 stops.
l After the setting at NE NE_a1 server end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 restores automatically.
l After the setting at NE NE_a7 server end is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NE NE_a8 restores automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 Setting the Client NE
1 6
4 5
NOTE
l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.
l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the server NE. The port number
cannot be the same as the value of the Port field in the Set Server area.
l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and the
server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, see "Setting the Server NE."
Step 2 Setting the server NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4 5
NOTE
l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE.
l The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client NE.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Field Value Description
ECC Extended Mode Autosensing Autosensing mode: An NE in this mode does

mode, Auto not proactively send ECC discovery packets to
Mode, its interconnected neighbor NEs but receives
Specified Mode and responds to such packets. Two neighbor
Default Value: NEs in autosensing mode do not proactively
Autosensing establish an extended ECC connection with
mode each other. Instead, an NE establishes an
extended ECC connection as a response only
when the automatic extended ECC is enabled
for its neighbor NE.
Auto Mode means that NEs automatically
achieve ECC communication through the
Ethernet. The configuration of the auto mode is
easy but extra connections are established.
Hence, the resource utilization ratio is low. The
auto mode is used usually when the number of
NEs is less than 4. In addition, two NEs can
automatically establish extended ECC
communication only after the ECC Extended
Mode parameters of the two NEs are set to
Auto mode.
Specified Mode means that NEs realize ECC
communication only after you specify the client
and server. The reliability of the connection that
operates in the specified mode is high and the
bandwidth utilization ratio is also high. In
normal cases, use the specified mode to
establish extended ECC communication.
An NE cannot operate in three modes at the
same time to establish ECC communication
with another NE.
To establish extended ECC communication
between two NEs in the specified mode, you
need to specify one NE as the server and the
other NE as the client.
Set Server IP 0.0.0.0 IP address of the NE. It cannot be modified.
Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the current NE that is used
Default: 1601 for extended ECC communication.
Set Client Opposit - Specifies the IP address of the opposite NE.

e IP
Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the opposite NE that is

Default: 1601 used for extended ECC communication. The
ports used at the two NEs must be the
consistent.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.10 Setting License

This chapter describes how to perform license setting on the NMS. For example: The smart
line card/The TP-Assist function/The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 standard Subrack Speedup.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.
l The license file has been installed.
l The NE has been created on the NMS.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
U2000Batch Configuration
2. Select the desired license.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. On the NE license Authorization window, select the desired NE and set the license.
1
3
4
NOTE
1. To set the license to support TP-Assist, on the right side of the window, change the NE license
status from off to on and click Apply on the lower right corner of the window.
2. To set the license to support a smart line card, in the column of OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card SDH Encapsulation Ability fee or OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card Packet Encapsulation Ability fee, enter the number of virtual ports, and
click Apply.
3. To set the license to support OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup, in the column of
OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup enter the number of borads, and click
Apply

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Single NE Configuration
You can also navigate to the NE Explorer to set the license for a single NE.
1. IN the NE Explorer, set the license.
1
NOTE
1. To set the license to support TP-Assist, on the right side of the window, change the NE license
status from off to on and click Apply on the lower right corner of the window.
2. To set the license to support a smart line card, in the column of OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card SDH Encapsulation Ability fee or OptiX OTN Platform,Hybrid
Service Line Card Packet Encapsulation Ability fee, enter the number of virtual ports, and
click Apply.
3. To set the license to support OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup, in the column of
OptiX OSN 8800T32 standard Subrack Speedup enter the number of borads, and click
Apply
200G/400G license Configuration

None.
4.11 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions

After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client must be started up.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
1. Navigation path.
2. Checking Network-Wide Software Versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1
3
批注框标注。选择形状，然后开始键入。将框的大
小调整到所需尺寸。移动控制手柄可以将指针对准
要标注的对象。
6
4
批注框标注。选择形状，然后开始键
入。将框的大小调整到所需尺寸。移动
控制手柄可以将指针对准要标注的对
7
象。
3. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and make
records.
NOTE
The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version.
Similarly, the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also
have the same software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the
regional office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.
4.12 Configuring Boards

In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
4.12.1 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
This section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.
Prerequisites
The board must be created.
Impact on System
None

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Precaution
When configuring board parameters, you should configure the board mode for priority.
Otherwise if the board mode is modified, the services and other board parameters of the board
must be reconfigured.
The board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.The Board Mode
can be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and
electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is
set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode. The parameter must be set to Optical
Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of
ASON services is not available.
NOTE
For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.
To enable the TN54NS4 or TN55NO2 board to work in regeneration mode, select

TN54NS4(REG) or TN55NO2(REG) when creating the logical board and then configure the
board regeneration mode according to the following steps.
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Set the board relay mode for the line boards.
3
1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.12.2 Checking Board Parameters

You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you
configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of
board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need to
adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check and modify the relevant
board parameters.
1. Check and modify the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 4-2
lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.
Table 4-2 List of parameters for an optical transponder

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario
Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and

Explorer, select shut down a laser Close the Laser on
the by setting the laser the WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
Automatic Laser When no light is See Setting
Shutdown 2. Choose input, a laser is Automatic Laser
Configuration automatically shut Shutdown on the
> WDM down and stops WDM Board.
Interface from transmitting optical
the Function signals. The laser
Tree. life can be
3. Click By prolonged by
Board/ decreasing the
Port(Channel) working time of the
and choose laser. In addition,
Channel from this function
the drop-down prevents hazardous
list. laser radiation
4. Click the Basic exposure from
Attributes tab. causing permanent
eye damage.
LPT Enabled You can add the See 17.26

overhead byte that Enabling and
supports the LPT Disabling LPT.
protocol to the
frame format of a
WDM-side signal,
to monitor the
running status of
the network access
point or the service
network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Service Type You can query or See Querying and

set on the U2000 Setting the Service
the type of client Type on the Client
services of a board Side of a Board.
to ensure that the
service type on the
client side of the
board is correct
OFC Enabled The OFC function See Enable the

is used to control Open Fiber Control
the transmit optical (OFC).
power of a laser
when a fiber is cut,
and check whether
the fiber recovers
by sending a short
laser pulse.
Actual Wavelength 1. In the NE Used to query the See Configuring

N0./Wavelength Explorer, select operating Board WDM Port
(nm)/Frequency the wavelength at the Attributes.
(THz) corresponding WDM-side optical
board. port of a board.
Configure 2. Choose Used to set the

Wavelength N0./ Configuration wavelength No,
Wavelength (nm)/ > WDM wavelength and
Frequency (THz) Interface from frequency of the
the Function current optical port
Tree. on the WDM side
3. Click By of a board.
Board/
FEC Working State Port(Channel) Used to enable the See Enabling the
and choose FEC function on a FEC Function.
Channel from board.
FEC Mode the drop-down After enabling the See Setting the
list. FEC function, you FEC Mode.
4. Click the should set the
Advanced desired FEC Mode
Attributes tab. for the board.
2. Check and modify the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 4-3 lists the
parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 4-3 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit
Scenario

board.
Automatic Laser When no light is See Setting
Shutdown 2. Choose input, a laser is Automatic Laser
Configuration automatically shut Shutdown on the
> WDM down and stops WDM Board.
Interface from transmitting optical
the Function signals. The laser
Tree. life can be
3. Click By prolonged by
Board/ decreasing the on
Port(Channel) time of the laser. In
and choose addition, this
Channel from function prevents
the drop-down hazardous laser
list. radiation exposure
from causing
permanent eye
damage.
LPT Enabled You can add the See 17.26

overhead byte that Enabling and
supports the LPT Disabling LPT.
protocol to the
frame format of a
WDM-side signal,
to monitor the
running status of
the network access
point or the service
network.
NULL Mapping You can set NULL See 17.22 Setting

Status Mapping Status to the NULL
Enabled for a path Mapping Status.
that has no signal,
and check or view
OTN overhead by
using an
instrument, to
monitor the status
of paths in a
network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
OFC Enabled The OFC function See Enable the

is used to control Open Fiber Control
the transmit optical (OFC).
power of a laser
when a fiber is cut,
and check whether
the fiber recovers
by sending a short
laser pulse.
Service Type You can query or See Querying and

set on the U2000 Setting the Service
the type of client Type on the Client
services of a board Side of a Board.
to ensure that the
service type on the
client side of the
tributary board is
correct
Actual Wavelength 1. In the NE Used to query the See Configuring

N0./Wavelength Explorer, select operating Board WDM Port
(nm)/Frequency the wavelength at the Attributes.
(THz) corresponding WDM-side optical
board. port of a line board.
Configure 2. Choose Used to set the

Wavelength N0./ Configuration wavelength No,
Wavelength (nm)/ > WDM wavelength and
Frequency (THz) Interface from frequency of the
the Function current optical port
Tree. on the WDM side
3. Click By of a line board.
Board/
FEC Working State Port(Channel) Used to enable the See Enabling the
and choose FEC function on a FEC Function.
Channel from board.
FEC Mode the drop-down After enabling the See Setting the
list. FEC function, you FEC Mode.
4. Click the should set the
Advanced desired FEC Mode
Attributes tab. for the board.
3. Check and modify the parameters for an Ethernet unit. Table 4-4 lists the parameters for
the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 4-4 List of parameters for an Ethernet unit

Scenario
Port Enabled 1. In the NE When you See 17.29.1

Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an Internal Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the internal
2. Choose port (that is,
Configuration VCTRUNK port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select Internal
Port.
TAG 1. In the NE Set the port type of

Explorer, select the internal port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
2. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select Internal
Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Network Attribute 1. In the NE – If the port is of

Explorer, select the UNI type,
the the port
corresponding processes the
board. tag attributes
2. Choose specified in
Configuration 802.1Q and the
> Ethernet port has the tag,
Interface access and
Management > hybrid
Ethernet attributes.
Interface from – If the port is of
the Function the C-Aware
Tree. type, the port
3. Select Internal does not
Port. process the tag
attributes in
802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries a
C-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the C-VLAN
tag.
– If the port is of
the S-Aware
type, the port
does not
process the tag
attributes
specified in
802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries
an S-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the S-VLAN
tag.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Port Enabled 1. In the NE When you See 17.29.2

Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an External Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the external
2. Choose port (that is, PORT
Configuration port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.
Working Mode 1. In the NE Set the transmit

Explorer, select end and receive
the end to have the
corresponding same setting of
board. working mode.
2. Choose
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
MAC/PHY 1. In the NE MAC loopback and

LoopBack Explorer, select PHY loopback are
the used to locate a
corresponding fault, but they can
board. interrupt services.
2. Choose In addition, they
Configuration are mutually
> Ethernet exclusive. When
Interface you set MAC
Management > LoopBack to
Ethernet Inloop, PHY
Interface from LoopBack is
the Function automatically set to
Tree. Non-Loopback.
When you set PHY
3. Select External LoopBack to
Port. Inloop, MAC
LoopBack is
automatically set to
Non-Loopback.
Autonegotiation 1. In the NE When the Working

Flow Control Explorer, select Mode of the port is
Mode the Auto-Negotiation,
corresponding select the
board. autonegotiation
2. Choose flow control mode.
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Non- 1. In the NE When the Working

Autonegotiation Explorer, select Mode of the port is
Flow Control the not Auto-
Mode corresponding Negotiation, select
board. the non-
2. Choose autonegotiation
Configuration flow control mode.
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.
TAG 1. In the NE Set the port type of

Explorer, select the external port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
2. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port. Click the
TAG
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Network Attribute 1. In the NE The Port Attribute

Explorer, select (Ethernet Port)
the parameter specifies
corresponding the position of a
board. port in the network.
2. Choose Different port
Configuration attributes support
> Ethernet different packets.
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Select External
Port.
4. Check and modify the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 4-5 lists the
parameters for the optical amplifying unit.
Table 4-5 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit

Scenario

board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
4. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. Check and modify the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 4-6 lists the
parameters for the spectrum analyzer unit.
Table 4-6 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit

Scenario
Wavelength 1. In the NE Enable wavelength See Monitoring

Monitor Status Explorer, select monitoring. Wavelengths by
the Using the
corresponding Spectrum Analyzer
board. Board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Monitor
Wavelength
from the drop-
down list.
6. Check and modify the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 4-7 lists
the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 4-7 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit

Scenario

board.
2. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel)
and choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
7. Check and modify the parameters for SDH units. Table 4-8 lists the parameters for the
SDH units.
Table 4-8 List of parameters for SDH unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario
Laser Switch 1. In the NE Explorer, You can open or close a

select the laser by setting the laser
corresponding board. switch.
2. Choose Configuration
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
3. Click By Board/
Port(Channel) and
choose Port from the
drop-down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario
Optical (Electrical) 1. In the NE Explorer, Sets loopback according to

Interface Loopback select the the path.
corresponding board.
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
3. Click By Board/
Port(Channel) and
choose Port from the
drop-down list.
Automatic Laser 1. In the NE Explorer, When no light is input, a

Shutdown select the laser is automatically shut
corresponding board. down and stops
2. Choose Configuration transmitting optical
from the Function signals. The laser life can
Tree. be prolonged by
decreasing the on time of
the laser. In addition, this
function prevents
hazardous laser radiation
exposure from causing
permanent eye damage.
VC4 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC4
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
VC3 Path Overhead 1. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC3
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
PRBS Test 1. In the NE Explorer, You can set PRBS test of

select the the ports on the board, and
corresponding board. perform the bit error test of
2. Choose Configuration the transmission link
from the Function without attaching a meter
Tree. to the equipment during
the deployment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you select an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, a static optical add/drop multiplexer board, a
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator
board, you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set
parameters.
Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.
----End
4.12.3 Adding Ports

Users must add ports on the U2000 according to the physical optical module types used on the
equipment.
Prerequisites
Some client- or line-side ports are not added on the U2000.

U2000 or Web LCT
By default, client-side ports on each board have been added. If you want to add a client-side
port that has been added by default, delete the default port first.
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT

1. Add the ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
3
: Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window. A shortcut menu is
displayed.
5
: If Bulk add ports is selected, you can add multiple ports with the same type and rate.
4.12.4 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board

If a board supports electrical ports, you must configure the electrical ports on the U2000 to
enable the board to access electrical signals.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
l Electrical port modules must be configured on the board.

U2000 or Web LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure the electrical ports of a board.
6
2
1
NOTE
5
: If you need to modify Type to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then
add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.
4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board

This topic describes how to commission a multi-carrier line board.

Optical power meter
U2000
Context
First configure wavelengths in single-site mode and then create OChM trails in search mode
for management.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NS4M Typical networking
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure for commissioning the NS4M board

1. Create the physical and logical fiber connections between the ports of the NS4M and
M40V/D40 boards by strictly following the network plan.
1 2 3 4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
1. The wavelengths output from the IN1/OUT1, IN2/OUT2, IN3/OUT3, and IN4/OUT4 optical ports
of the NS4M board are consecutive wavelengths with 100 GHz spacing. For details, see
Wavelength Number in the Hardware Description.
2. Because fixed wavelengths are used on the ports of M40V/D40, configure the wavelengths for the
NS4M board strictly based on the wavelengths on M40V/D40. If the wavelength information is
inconsistent, the optical path will be unavailable.
2. Configure wavelengths for the NS4M board as follows: On the main topology of the
U2000, double-click the NE to enter the NE Explorer.
Based on the physical connections, configure the wavelengths for each port of the NS4M
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3
2
3. Configure the fiber connections and wavelengths for the peer NS4M board using the
same method.
4. Adjust the input optical power of the IN ports on the WDM side of the NS4M board to
the optimal range: -9 dBm to -4 dBm.
5. Create OChM trails in search mode. For details, see Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search.
After the search is completed, you can go to the Manage WDM Trail window to view
OChM trails.
6. To ensure that multi-carrier signals are synchronized, lock wavelengths before services
are received. For details, see Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.
4.14 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode

In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
l Optical NEs and NEs must be created.
l Logic board has been created on the U2000.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.
l Applies to WDM equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the
NE. You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.
Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. Create fibers in the synchronization mode.
Note
4 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
2
: Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed.
– Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides.
U2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs.
– Uncreated Fiber in U2000: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
4
: Handle different situations as follows:
– If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create
Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are
displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
– If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to
delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click Create
Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:

NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Select the source board and port and the sink board
4
6
2 5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit
object selection.
3. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.
NOTE
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:

NOTE
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiber
connections between stations are created.
1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .
2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.
3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box
displayed.
4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.
5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.
6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed.
7. Click OK
8. Enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.
Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.
----End
(Optional) Related Creating Fiber Compared with the graphic

Operation Connections in List Mode mode, the creating fiber
connections in the list mode
is not visual. Hence, the list
mode is applicable to the
scenario where you create a
few fiber connections only.
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that the
fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters

Before configuring the centralized monitoring function for the Optical Doctor (OD), you need
set an inter-site fiber type and fiber length. If the fiber type is not configured or is incorrectly
configured, the incident optical power will be incorrectly calculated. If the fiber length is not
configured, there is no impact because the fiber length will be automatically calculated. If the
fiber length is incorrectly configured, the OSNR calculation will be incorrect. The design end
of life (EOL) value of fiber loss must be set to determine whether the fiber loss exceeds the
design EOL value. If the EOL is incorrectly configured, the SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL
alarm will be reported, indicating that the fiber loss exceeds the design EOL value. This topic
describes how to set the fiber parameters in batches.
Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The EOL value has been obtained from the network design document.

U2000
Configuration Principles
l If the IN port on the receive optical amplifier (OA) board is equipped with a dispersion
compensation unit (DCU) or a dispersion compensation module (DCM), calculate the
EOL value for the fiber between the local NE and upstream NE using the following
formula: EOL = Design fiber loss + Maximum insertion loss of the DCU/DCM. If an
OLP board is installed in front of the receive OA board, the EOL value for the fiber
between the local NE and upstream NE is equal to the fiber loss between the upstream
OLP board and the local OLP board.
l Ensure that the inter-site fiber type and fiber type are the same as those in the practical
fiber configurations.
Procedure
1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link
Management from the main menu.
2. In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear the
Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable Browse
Filter Criteria dialog box.
3. Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.
4. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Length (km), Designed Loss(EOL)(dB),
and Medium Type of the fibers/cables as required, and click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the parameter column, and choose Modify in
Batchs.
5. Click Apply Parameters to NE in the Result dialog box.
6. In the Please Select Setting Scope dialog box, select the desired parameters and click
OK.
7. Optional: Click NE Operation, and select Query. Click OK in the Please Select
Query Scope dialog box to view whether reference parameters is delivered successfully.
4.16 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.
The edge port must be configured.
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical
cross-connection of the single station uses.

U2000 or Web LCT
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically
or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board
automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select
Manual, you need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several
types of optical cross-connection trails.
NOTE
The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or WSM9.

OA indicates the optical amplifier boards, such as OAU1 and OBU1.
The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards, such as TD20, D40, and MR2, can be added between the
WSD9 and OTU.
In add networking, the multiplexer boards, such as TM20, M40, M40V, and MR2, can be added
between the OTU and WSM9.
NOTE
l The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be
configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar. When creating the
unidirectional optical cross-connect services through RDU module, you cannot select Auto.
Otherwise it fails.
l Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a
single station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

1. Create the single-station optical cross-connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5
1
3
6
7
NOTE
5
: Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the
Available Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength.

Click OK.
7
: The optical cross-connection created here does not belong to the optical cross-
connections mentioned in the background information. Therefore, OPA Mode can be set only to
Manual.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-
Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click

OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the
window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
(Optional) Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to set an

Related optical port of an NE as a
Operation connection point between this NE
and another NE.
Creating Board Optical Cross- The intra-board optical wavelength

Connection route can be set for a board that
performs grooming at the optical
layer. The intra-board service route
is established through the creation
of single-board optical cross-
connection.
4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM

Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.
Prerequisites
Boards supporting flexible ROADM have been configured.
The TN15OPM8 board has been configured.
Internal fiber connections of the OAU board are completed.
The edge port must be configured.
The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical
cross-connection of the single station uses.
Context
You can create NE- or board-level optical cross-connections on the NMS. The following uses
NE-level cross-connection configuration as an example.
l For wavelengths that have fixed optical spectra, the procedure for configuring flexible
ROADM is similar to that for configuring traditional ROADM.
l For wavelengths that have variable optical spectra, the procedure of configuring flexible
ROADM differs from that of configuring traditional ROADM in wavelength selection.
NOTE
l The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be
configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port.
1
Step 2 Optional: For a wavelength with a fixed optical spectrum, select the wavelengths
1
3
注
5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
2
: Select the wavelength as required.
5
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength NO. .
Step 3 Optional: For a wavelength with a variable optical spectrum, select the required frequency
based on the wavelengths for the OTU or line board. Click the desired grid.
3
1
4
5
7
NOTE
2
: Select the frequency based as required. A bandwidth spacing of 12.5 GHz is present between two
lines of grids. When you move the cursor over a grid, the corresponding frequency will be prompted.
3
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed in green. Clicking a green area will cancel the selection of
the wavelength.
4
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed here. Clicking a wavelength area will cancel the selection
of the wavelength.
6
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength.
A bandwidth spacing of 12.5 GHz is present between two lines of grids. When you move the cursor over a
grid, the corresponding frequency will be prompted.
Note that there is a mapping between Source Wavelength and Source Wavelength No. and between Sink
Wavelength and Sink Wavelength No.. Therefore, if the settings of Source Wavelength and Sink
Wavelength are modified, Source Wavelength No and Sink Wavelength No. will change accordingly.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.18 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search

After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search
for the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end
WDM trails at the network layer of the U2000.
Prerequisite
l Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.
Precautions
l If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the
following methods:
– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the
trail function. This method affects services.
– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.
l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT
port of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD9/WSMD4/
WSMD2 board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These
types of single-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create
these types of single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to
manage the services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management
function.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure for the U2000


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Set trail search criteria.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
beyond the selected subnet range.
3. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail
from the main menu.
4. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area
beyond the selected subnet range.
5. Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while for searching,
depending on the number of services.
NOTE
l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end
to end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail
may cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail,
including deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.
6. Click Next after searching, you can browse all trails found. If you want to set a trail
management flag, right-click it and select the management flag.
NOTE
Skip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching" policy in Step 2.
7. Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.
NOTE
If Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the
network layer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on
the U2000.
8. After the search is complete, click Finish.
4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail

In addition to centralized configuration, individual configuration can be used to configure an
OD route for each trail to achieve E2E OSNR detection. If no OD route is configured, no
OSNR value can be displayed and no OSNR equalization can be performed.
Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator group" rights or higher.
l The logical fiber connection and optical cross-connection must be properly configured.
l The inter-NE OSC communication in the OMS must be normal.
l Only the TN12OPM8, TN11MCA402, and TN11MCA802 boards support OSNR
detection on signals at a rate of 10Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s, 100Gbit/s.
l In an OMS section, MCA or OPM8 boards must be configured for the first and last OA
boards. If the OMS section contains only one OA board, an MCA or OPM8 board must
be configured for the OA board; otherwise, OSNR cannot be detected for the OMS
section.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Precautions
l For Raman boards, the OD route configuration does not support the CRPC or ROP
board. However, it supports the RAU board in gain locking mode.
l All the OMS sections on a complete OCh trail must be configured with OD route
configuration function; otherwise, the OSNR detection is not supported.
l When a fiber cut occurs on the downstream links, the OPM8 or MCA board at the
receive end of an OMS section cannot detect the optical power. In addition, the OPM8/
MCA4/MCA8 board at the transmit end cannot calculate and display OSNR values of all
detected wavelengths.
l If the OPM8 or MCA board at an ROADM or OTM site is faulty, the OSNR of
wavelengths that traverse this site cannot be detected at the local site or any of the
downstream sites.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Specify the type and length for fibers between sites. For details, see 4.15 Setting Fiber
Parameters.
Step 2 Filtering the OMS trail.
1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
2. In the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, select OMS in the Service
Level.
3. Click Filter All, and all OMS trails on the live network are displayed.
Step 3 Configure the OD route configuration function for an OMS section.
1. Click Maintenance, and choose OD Route Configuration.
2. The scanning progress window is displayed. After the scanning completes, the Result
dialog box is displayed, click Close.
3. Optional: Click Query All. The status of all OMS sections is refreshed.
4. In the OD Route Configuration window, select an OMS section to be created. Click
New.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.

6. Check whether Status of a set OMS section is Created.
NOTE
When the network topology changes or the boards/fiber connections change, the OD route configuration
function of the OMS sections must be reconfigured.
l Click Query All. The status of all OMS sections is refreshed.
l In the OD Route Configuration window, select the OMS sections affected by the network topology
changes or the boards/fiber connections change. Click New.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the OD route configuration function is configured on the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board,
you can use the following methods to locate the causes of an abnormal OSNR.
l In the query of the optical spectrum analysis data, only the optical power can be
obtained. For the OSNR, --- is displayed and OSNR calculation is abnormal. The
possible causes are as follows:
– The OMS section is configured incorrectly or offline boards exist in this section.
Check the function configurations of this OMS section on the NMS and the actual
networking configurations.
– The scanned spectrums at the transmit and receive ends of the OPM8/MCA4/
MCA8 board are inconsistent. Check the scanned wavelength in the OMS section.
– The inter-NE communication is abnormal. Check whether you can log in to NEs
and whether NEs are reachable.
– The upstream OMS section is abnormal. Check the optical spectrum information of
the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board in the upstream OMS section along the signal flow
direction. If the same fault exists, use the same methods to locate the causes.
– If the fiber type of the OMS section is modified, the OSNR detection of the OMS
section must be reconfigured refer to Step 3.
l In the query of wavelength information of a specific wavelength in the optical spectrum
analysis data, no information is reported. The possible causes are as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– The physical fiber connection of the OPM8/MCA4/MCA8 board is incorrect.

Check the physical fiber connection.
– The optical path on the link is abnormal. Check whether the optical path is set up,
for example, whether the optical cross-connection is created, whether the physical
fiber connection is correct, and whether the OA laser is enabled.
4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800

T32/8800 T64
correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

U2000
Context
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of
the EFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack
is 0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of
the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits
1–4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only
ID1-ID6 are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states
can be set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-18, the value
represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID
is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.
Figure 4-18 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
EFI1
CPLD (ID5) ON (ID1) ON

(ID6) ON (ID2) ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
SW1 SW2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-19 The ID of the subrack: 1-15

SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID
(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8 9 10
ON ON

(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15
SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE
with one ID and one IP.
Precautions
NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions

The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and methods for
resolving conflicts.
Scenario Applicable Impact on Handling Handling
Version Services Rule Method
The port that V100R009C10 The involved Resolve the For details, see
brings a and port has been subrack ID "Procedure for
subrack ID V100R011C00 isolated. conflict the Scenario
conflict and later Therefore, the according to the Where the
(referred to as versions subrack ID isolation alarm Involved Port
the involved NOTE conflict does indication. Has Been
port) has been This function not affect Isolated".
isolated. needs to match services.
the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.
The involved Versions earlier Services are Resolve the For details, see
port has not than affected. When subrack ID "Procedure for
been isolated in V100R011C00 a subrack ID conflict and the Scenario
case of a conflict occurs then check for Where the
subrack ID on an NE, the alarms. Involved Port
conflict. board Has Not Been
configurations Isolated".
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.
The involved When the Resolve the For details, see

port cannot be involved port subrack ID "Procedure for
isolated in cannot be conflict and the Scenario
V100R009C10 isolated or the then check for Where the
and port isolation alarms. Involved Port
V100R011C00 becomes Has Not Been
and later invalid, services Isolated".
versions. will be frozen.
NOTE Therefore,
This function neither services
needs to match nor DCN is
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before the isolation
takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service board communication is
frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as service configuration and deployment
commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.
Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid
Table 4-9 Tree-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking
Example
Isolat When a A subrack

ET从子架 2
ion subrack ID conflict Master Subrack 0
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
identific information
ation of the 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
port the AUX 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
synchro
Copyright
nization
© Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
When When the

two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
subrack with that of
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
identific identificati
ation on
informat information 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
with the switches, a
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
subrack occurs after
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Man When The IDs of ET从子架

Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
ual the two slave

H2 H2
opera subrack subracks 从子架

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack
tions IDs of conflict. 从子架

Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
requi conflict NE1 does
red with not have
after each slave
isolat other subrack 2,
ion. and the the subrack
local NE is
does not automatical
have the ly installed.
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
After the subrack of
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.
Table 4-10 Ring-like subrack cascading

Example
Isolat A Master 从子架

Master 20
Subrack
ion subrack subrack in

fails. is added a version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
to the earlier than

middle V100R011 从子架
Slave Subrack22 从子架
Master 20
Subrack
of a ring C00(exclud
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
occurs. A slave 从子架

Master 20
Subrack
The subrack of
involved any version 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
port is added to
cannot the middle 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
be of a ring
isolated. network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in the master
and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a subrack ID conflict occurs.
NOTE
l When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is
reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and disable the port.
l After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported. Based on
the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
NOTE
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the NE or the subrack.
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be implemented by restarting the
subrack power supplies. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all
master and slave subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during an upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access Control from
the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and change the port status to
Enabled.
NOTE
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.
4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board into the slave
subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the U2000. Check whether the
board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check whether the board is
displayed green on the U2000. If the board can properly go online and start, the master
and slave subracks are correctly configured.
Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a subrack ID conflict.
NOTE
3. Double-click the optical NE on the U2000 to view the status information of the optical
NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current
Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.
5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the master
subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
NOTE
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according planning so
that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
NOTE
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning to set
the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC board in
this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave
subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board
goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave
subrack is correct.
(Optional) Related Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the

Operation Shelf attributes of a master or
slave shelf.
4.21 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800

T16
Prerequisites

U2000
Context
the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is
0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4
of SW2, and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6
are valid. The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be
set. Currently, the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-21, the value represented by
the ID6-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.
Figure 4-21 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
T1
SW1 SW2
NM_ETH2
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)
(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1 SW2

SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8 9 10
ON ON

(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
The LED front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master
subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
Precautions
NOTICE


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

NOTE Therefore,
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE

Example

ET从子架 2
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
synchro
Copyright
nization
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
When When the

two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
ation on
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
ual the two slave

H2 H2

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
red with not have
after each slave
local NE is
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Example

Master 20
Subrack

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
to the earlier than

Master 20
Subrack
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 20
Subrack
The subrack of
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
port is added to
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
be of a ring
isolated. network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
Enabled.
NOTE
NOTE
NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
this subrack.
subrack is correct.

slave shelf.
4.22 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800

correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
Prerequisites

U2000
Context
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a
secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and
for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight
combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers
is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack and the other values indicate slave
subracks. Figure 4-24 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the
right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each
jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 4-24, the jumper setting
represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.
l For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18,
jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be
capped. The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal
values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the
master subrack and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 4-25 shows the
position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are
capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are
capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 4-25, the jumper setting represents the
decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.
NOTE
Jumper caps must be installed for all the preceding jumpers based on the plan of actual subrack IDs.
Figure 4-24 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board
Representing Representing Representing

0 0 1
1 2 3
Junper cap
Jumpers
1 2 3
CPU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-25 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing 1
J4 J3 J2
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing0
J17 J16 J15

Representing 0 Representing0
Junper cap
J18 J14
J4 J3 J2
J17 J16 J15 Jumpers
J18 J14
CPU
NOTICE
The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 4-25 .
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.
The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that
represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five
jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks.
Figure 4-26 shows the jumpers on the board.
Figure 4-26 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing 1
J4 J3 J2
Representing 0 Representing 0 Representing0
J17 J16 J15

Representing 0 Representing0
Junper cap
J18 J14
J4 J3 J2
J17 J16 J15 Jumpers
J18 J14
CPU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTICE
The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 4-26.
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
Precautions
NOTICE

the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

NOTE Therefore,
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

ET从子架 2
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
synchro
Copyright
nization
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
When When the

two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
ation on
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
ual the two slave

H2 H2

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
red with not have
after each slave
local NE is
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Example

Master 20
Subrack

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
to the earlier than

Master 20
Subrack
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 20
Subrack
The subrack of
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
port is added to
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
be of a ring
isolated. network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
Enabled.
NOTE
NOTE
NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
this subrack.
subrack is correct.

slave shelf.
4.23 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal

Platform Subrack
Prerequisites

U2000
Context
the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is
0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
DIP switches on the board panel: Figure 4-27 shows the position of the DIP switches on the
EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of five DIP switches whose IDs are ID1-ID5 from the
lower bit to the higher bit. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1.
When the DIP switch is toggled to 0, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. DIP
switches must be toggled to the topmost or the bottommost. Otherwise, the subrack ID
cannot be intuitively identified.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the
master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-27, the
value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the
subrack ID is 1.
DIP switches within the board: Figure 4-28 shows the position of the DIP switches on the
EFI board.
l The TN18EFI board has a set of eight DIP switches. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of
SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-
ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1. Each DIP
switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to ON,
the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
l A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the
master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-28, the
value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the
subrack ID is 1.
Figure 4-27 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI panel
NM_ETH1 ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2 NM_ETH2

ID5 ID4 ID3ID2ID1
1
X
0
ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1

1
X
0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-28 Position of the DIP switches within the EFI board
ON (ID8) ON (ID4)
ON (ID7) ON (ID3)
ON (ID6) ON (ID2)
ON (ID5) ON (ID1)
SW1 SW2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Error Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED
0 Decimal subrack ID
The LED front panel of the EFI/SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master
subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
Precautions
NOTICE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

the U2000
V200R016C50
or later
versions.
may be
incorrect, a
communication
abnormality
may occur, and
even worse
protection
switching and
service running
may be
affected.

NOTE Therefore,
the U2000 affected.
V200R016C50
or later
versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE

Example

ET从子架 2
fails. ID occurs H2
conflict before
occurs identificati
before on
Slave 21
Subrack
informat active
ion system
synchro
nization,
control
board is
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
the synchroniz
involved ed between
Slave 22
Subrack
cannot boards in
be the master
isolated. and slave
subracks
and the
system
control
boards in
slave
subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
NOTE After the
The involved
identifi
cation
port is
informa isolated,
tion of replace the
the system
active control
system board or
control
board
AUX
needs board. A
to be subrack ID
synchro conflict
nized occurs
betwee again
n the
AUX
within 6
boards minutes.
in the
master
and
slave
subrack
s and
the
system
control
boards
in slave
subrack
s so
that the
local
NE can
be
identifi
ed.
When
no
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
informa
tion of
the
active
system
control
board
can be
updated
6
minutes
later
after
the
synchro
Copyright
nization
.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
When When the

two ID of a
subracks new
that have subrack
a conflicts
ID an existing
conflict subrack,
are the two
powered subracks
off and are
they are powered
powered off and
on again then
at an powered
interval on. The
longer new
than 6 subrack is
minutes, powered on
the over 6
involved minutes
port earlier than
cannot the original
be subrack.
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
For a Slave
subrack
that has
subrack 2
has
ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
H2
synchro synchroniz
nized ed
ation on
Slave 21
Subrack
ion of of the
the active
active
system
system
control
从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
control board.
board, if When the
the ID of slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is changed
changed to the same
by as that of
adjustin slave
g DIP subrack 1
switches by
and adjusting
conflicts DIP
ID of an subrack ID
existing conflict
on the the
local subracks
NE, the are
involved powered
port on.
cannot
be
isolated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat When - -
ion the
beco involved
mes port has
inval been
id. isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board in
the
master
subrack
or the
involved
AUX
board is
reset,
powered
off, or
switched
, the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 2 0
Subrack ET从子架
Master 20
Subrack
ual the two slave

H2 H2

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 21
Subrack

Slave 23
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
NE1 NE2
are two NEs Because
red with not have
after each slave
local NE is
specific NOTE
subrack, Slave
the subrack 2
logical that is
automatica
subrack
lly
will be installed
automati mismatche
cally s the
installed. logical
NE1,
isolation
causing a
, the SUBRAC
logical K_TYPE_
subrack MISMAT
needs to CH alarm.
be The alarm
is
manuall
automatica
y lly cleared
deleted. after the
isolation.

Example

Master 20
Subrack

Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
to the earlier than

Master 20
Subrack
network ed
and a V100R009
conflict C10).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example

Master 20
Subrack
The subrack of
Slave 21
Subrack 从子架
Slave 23
Subrack
port is added to
Slave 22
Subrack 从子架
Slave 22
Subrack
be of a ring
isolated. network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Example
Isolat A - -
ion subrack
beco is added
mes to the
inval end of a
id. ring
network
and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After the
isolation
, handle
the issue
based on
the
alarm
instructi
ons. If
the
system
control
board or
AUX
board in
the
subrack
is reset
or
switched
, or the
network
cable of
another
subrack
is
removed
and re-
inserted,
the
isolation
will
become
invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
Enabled.
NOTE
NOTE
NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
this subrack.
subrack is correct.

slave shelf.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 5 Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through
Commissioning Guide MDS 6630
5 Automatically Commissioning Optical

Power Through MDS 6630
About This Chapter
This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is
used to automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure
for the commissioning. The WDM optical power commissioning tool is mainly used to
commission optical power of a new WDM network or a live WDM network under expansion.
This tool supports remote and automatic commissioning of optical power of WDM
equipment.
5.1 Networking Scenarios
This topic describes the networking scenarios that the MDS 6630 component supports.
5.2 Precautions for Commissioning
This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM
equipment.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium Commissioning
This topic describes the commissioning scenarios, process, and procedure that the optical
power equilibrium commissioning tool supports.
5.4 Commissioning Report
The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.
5.5 Reference Operations
This topic provides reference operations for commissioning.
5.6 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power
commissioning.
5.7 Event Code
This topic describes methods of handling the event code.

5.1 Networking Scenarios

This topic describes the networking scenarios that the MDS 6630 component supports.
Availability
The G.652(SMF-28)/G.655(LEAF)/G.655(TWRS)/TWC/TW+/SMF-LS/G.653 fibers can be
commissioned using U2000.
Table 5-1 lists the supported board types.
Table 5-1 Supported board types

Multiple Demulti OA Static Reconfig MCAa VOA
xer plexer Optical urable
Add/ Optical
Drop Add and
Multiple Drop
xer (MRx Multiple
Series) xer
M40, D40, OAU1, MB2, RDU9, TN11MC VA1, VA4

M40V D40V OBU1, MR2, RMU9, A401,
OBU2, MR4, WSD9, TN11MC
DAS1, MR8, WSM9, A402,
RAU1, MR8V WSMD2, TN11MC
RAU2 WSMD4, A801,
WSMD9, TN11MC
TM20, A802,
TD20 TN11OP
M8,
TN12OP
M8
a:
l TN11MCA401, TN11MCA801, and TN11OPM8 does not support the OSNR detection
of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s wavelengths.
l If the function of detecting center wavelengths is not required, use the TN12OPM8
board.
Network and site models that supports the monitoring and commissioning is shown in
Network Models. In addition, this tool cannot be used to implement automatic
commissioning if a live network does not use a topology described in this section; instead
users need to manually commission the network.

NOTE
l This section describes how to commission sites OTM, OLA, FOADM, and ROADM in a 40-channel
system with examples. The WDM optical power commissioning tool also supports automatic
commissioning of these sites in an 80-channel system.
l Broadcast and multicast networks do not support automatic optical power commissioning on this tool.
Network Models
l Chain network:
West East
OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM
A B C D E F G
l Ring network:
A C
H D
G E
l Mesh network:

A C
B
K
H D
G E
: OTM : OLA : OADM
Application Scenarios of OTM

l Typical OTM
OTU OPM8
OTU M
U OA
X
OTU
F
I
U
OPM8
OTU
D
OTU M
OA
U
X
OTU
l Back-to-back OTM 1

OPM8 D OPM8
M
M
U
U OTU OTU
OA X OA
X
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
F F
I I
U U
OPM8 OTU OTU OPM8

OTU OTU
D
M
OA OTU M OA
U OTU
U
X
X
l Back-to-back OTM 2
OPM8 D D OPM8
M M
U U
OA OA
X X
F F
I I
U U
OPM8 OPM8
D
M
OA M OA
U
U
X
X
Application Scenarios of OLA

l OLA using only a single OA on a link

OPM8
OA
F F
I I
U U
OPM8
OA
l OLA using cascaded OAs

OPM8
OA OA
F F
I I
U U
OPM8
OA OA
Application Scenarios of FOADM

l FOADM using cascaded MRx boards (1)
OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
F F
MRx MRx I
I
U U
OA OA
OPM8 OPM8
O O
T T
U U

OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
F F
I MRx MRx MRx MRx I
U U
OA OA
OPM8 OPM8
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OPM8 OPM8
RO TO
OA OA
TO RO
F I I F
I T T I
U L RE TE L U
OA M M
TE RE OA
R R
x x
OPM8 OPM8
O O
T T
U U
Application Scenarios of ROADM

l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (1)

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
OA OA
OPM8 OPM8
F F
I OA WSD9 WSM9 OA I
U U
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (2)
OPM8 W W OPM8
S S
D M
OA 9 9 OA
F F
I I
U U
W W
OA S S OA
M D
9 9
OPM8 OPM8
WSM9 WSD9
OPM8
OA OA
OPM8
FIU
l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (1)

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MUX
DMUX
OA
OPM8 OPM8
TOA
F F
I OA WSD9
ROA OA I
RMU9
U U
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
TOA
OPM8 OPM8
OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MUX
DMUX
OA
OPM8
TOA
F OPM8 F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U
OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
OPM8
TOA
OPM8
OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MRx
MRx
OA
OPM8
TOA
F OPM8 F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U
OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
OPM8
TOA
OPM8
OA
MRx
MRx
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
l ROADM using RDU9+WSM9 boards

O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
OA
OPM8 OPM8
F F
I OA RDU9 WSM9 OA I
U U
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OPM8 OPM8
DMUX
OA
MUX
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
l ROADM using TD20+TM20 boards

O O O O
O O O O
T T T T
T T T T
U U U U
U U U U
TD20 TD20 TM20 TM20
WSD9 WSM9
OA
OA
OPM8 OPM8
F F
I OA RDU9 OA I
WSM9
U U
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
WSM9 WSD9
TM20 TM20 TD20 TD20
O O O O
O O O O
T T T T
T T T T
U U U U
U U U U
l ROADM using cascaded WSMDx boards

O O
T T
U U
OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
F F
I WSMDx WSMDx I
U U
OA OA
OPM8 OPM8
OA OA
OA OA
DMUX MUX MUX DMUX
O O
T T
U U

NOTE
WSMDx boards are classified into WSMD4 and WSMD2 boards. If the WSMD2 board is used, an
OTU board must be connected to a multiplexer board so that the OTU board can add/drop a wavelength
and the demuliplexer board must be connected to the WSMD2 board.
Application Scenario of RAU

NOTE
Only the TN14FIU/TN16FIU board can work with the RAU board.
RAU boards include RAU1 board and RAU2 board. The RAU2 board contains VOA module while the
RAU1 board does not.
5.2 Precautions for Commissioning

This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM
equipment.
Prerequisite
l The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The
expected results are as follows:
– Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF.
– A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM
fiber connection is checked.
– Ensure that all equipment must be powered on correctly, and communication
between all NEs on the network is normal.
– 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment.
– Ensure that at least one OTU board is configured at each site excluding OLA.
– The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM
equipment.
– Physical fiber connections must be correct.
NOTE
You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the optical
power. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.
l Non-GNEs require that the network must use the OSC but not ESC communication
mode. GNEs do not have particular requirements on the communication mode.
l Optical NEs are classified by function. Ensure that an optical NE is configured with
essential boards. For example, OTU boards and MUX/DEMUX boards must be
configured on an OTM optical NE. Do not configure the OTU and MUX/DEMUX
boards on separate NEs.
l Only the sites where OA boards are configured at the receive end can be commissioned.
l OA boards (including RAU) must be Gain locking. Otherwise, U2000 cannot perform
optical power commissioning on the network.
l Physical and logical fiber connections must be consistent.
l The U2000 supports configuring ALC links on OMS trails, and the U2000 automatically
disables the ALC link and stops the APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and
enables the ALC and APE functions after the commissioning is complete. Automatic

regulation remains disabled. You are advised to set Automatic Regulation Switch of the
ALC links to Disabled and stop the APE functions or if you have to keep these functions
enabled before commissioning.
l Create or search for WDM OCh trails on the U2000 before using the commissioning
function. For details, see Creating OCh Trails and Searching for WDM Trails.
l Both the transmit-end and receive-end NEs on the commissioning trail have been online.
l Fiber types have been correctly set. For details, see Setting Fiber Parameters.
l Before expansion or maintenance commissioning, ensure that:
– No pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing alarm or OTU optical power threshold-
crossing alarm is generated on the existing wavelengths.
– The flatness of all wavelengths on the network is within the permitted range
specified in the system design.
Precautions
l If iManager MDS 6630 component is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data
on the U2000, see Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
l Do not modify subnet data during commissioning.
l Stop the WDM commissioning processes before deploying new U2000 instances (such
as NE management instances), and restart the WDM commissioning processes after the
deployment is complete.
l If you have uploaded NE data to the U2000, synchronized NE data, or initialized U2000
data, synchronize data on the U2000 before commissioning.
l Do not perform optical power commissioning during software package Loading.
Otherwise, the commissioning operation will be failed.
l When the U2000 is upgraded by migrating database data using the upgrade tool UExpert,
all U2000 data can be smoothly migrated to the upgraded U2000, and OD parameters do
not need to be set again. If the U2000 is upgraded in another mode, database data cannot
be smoothly migrated to the U2000, and therefore OD parameters need to be set again
after the upgrade is completed.
l If the level of a trail is OCh-Group, the trail must be deleted from the U2000 and then a
bidirectional trail needs to be searched again.
l For OptiX NetStar O&M 1.2.010, ensure that the preset insertion loss values of the
related boards are correct before performing commissioning.
Limitation
l The integrated equalization feature on U2000 supports concurrent commissioning on a
maximum of twenty clients.
l The CWDM network cannot be commissioned.
l The broadcast scenarios cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The CRPC or ROP board does not support the monitoring or commissioning.
l PID cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The network without the MCA/OPM cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l System commissioning is not supported when electrical regeneration boards are
configured on multiple cascaded sections.
l Monitoring and commissioning of alien wavelengths and unterminated trails are not
supported.

l For the coherent transmission system, the G.652(SMF-28)/G.655(LEAF)/G.

655(TWRS)/TWC/TW+/G.653 fibers can be commissioned.
l If a WDM network is deployed and commissioned manually, you need to evaluate and
optimize the network manually before optimizing and commissioning optical power for
the network by MDS 6630 component during maintenance (including ASON rerouting
optimization).
l Commissioning dual-homed diamond ASON services is not supported.
l Monitoring and commissioning of looped services are not supported.
Note
The MDS 6630 supports operations on the optical NEs copied from the U2000.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power for Power Equilibrium

Commissioning
This topic describes the commissioning scenarios, process, and procedure that the optical
power equilibrium commissioning tool supports.
5.3.1 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a

New Network
When an entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,
commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning
process described in this topic. The purpose of commissioning optical power is to commission
the network performance to meet the requirements for transferring services, and ensure that
there is a certain margin of system optical power to perform network expansion and long-term
stable running of the system.
NOTICE
For new deployment commissioning, trails to be commissioned and their associated trails
(OCh Trails that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other) cannot
carry services. Otherwise, services on the trails are interrupted during commissioning because
lasers are shut down for the OTU boards on the trails.
Commissioning Process
This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment by
using the U2000 during the deployment of a new network.
Figure 5-1 shows the flowchart for commissioning optical power by using the U2000.

Figure 5-1 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of a new network
Start
Synchronize data on the

U2000.
Set fiber type.
Set OA board parameters.
Choose commissioning
trails.
Record the optical power

before commissioning.
Commission the optical

power.
View the commissioning

result.
Preset the OPA insertion

loss for OCh paths
End Mandatory Optional

NOTE
If you use the MDS 6630 component for the first time or you have changed NMS configurations, you must
synchronize MDS 6630 component data and NMS data. For details, see Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
If an ASON network is used, you must preset OPA insertion loss for OCh trails. For details, see Presetting
OPA Insertion Loss for OCh Trails.
Preparing for the Commissioning

Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, you need to make
preparations for the commissioning. The preparations include preparing related documents,
checking the conditions of WDM equipment to be commissioned, preparing the data
configuration files for the WDM NEs, and evaluating whether the network scenarios of the
network to be commissioned support optical power commissioning.
Preparing Documents
The documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are no
engineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the
telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documents
include:
l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before
commissioning optical power.
l Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology.
l Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained
in OCh trails when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same
trail.
l Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
l Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
Preparation and Precautions for Commissioning

Before commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the following
conditions are met:
l You can refer to 5.1 Networking Scenarios to check whether the live network
conditions satisfy the commissioning requirements.
l You can refer to Precautions for Commissioning to check whether equipment satisfies
the commissioning requirements.
Setting Fiber Types

This topic describes how to set fiber types in batches. If no fiber types are set or the fiber
types are incorrectly set, the correctness of the incident optical power that is automatically
calculated when no incident optical power is configured will be affected, causing an incorrect
adjustment on incident optical power. In addition, for the RAU board, the commissioning will
fail or the gain of the Raman module will be incorrectly adjusted.

Prerequisites

U2000
Configuration Principles
For a fiber whose source or sink is RAU, the fiber type must be the same as the value of
Fiber Type set for the RAU board on the NE Explorer of the U2000.
NOTE
On the NE Explorer, select the RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
navigation tree to check the value of Fiber Type set for the RAU board.
Procedure
1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link
2. In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear the
Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable Browse
Filter Criteria dialog box.
3. Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.
4. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Medium Type of the fibers/cables as
required, and click Apply
NOTE
To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the parameter column, and choose Modify in
Batchs.
5. Click Apply Parameters to NE in the Result dialog box.

6. In the Please Select Setting Scope dialog box, select the desired parameters and click
OK.
7. Optional: Click NE Operation, and select Query. Click OK in the Please Select
Query Scope dialog box to view whether reference parameters is delivered successfully.
Setting OA Board Parameters

This topic describes how to set OA board parameters. This operation must be completed
before the optical power commissioning of a WDM trail. In this operation, set System
Wavelengths, Rate, Code Type, and Launch Power, that determines the typical
commissioning value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM trail.
Ensure that all the preceding parameters are correctly set. If any parameter is not set, the
commissioning will fail. If any parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will
be incorrect.
Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
l You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.
Configuration Guidelines
l Set System Wavelengths based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by
the system. If System Wavelengths is not set, the optical power target value cannot be
calculated. If the parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will be
incorrect.
You can set the value of System Wavelengths based on the frequency allocation table in
the marketing telecom design documents or based on the actual product configurations.
For example:
– If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System
Wavelengths value is 80wave.
– If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System
l For the scenario that signals of different rates traverse the same OA, for example, when
40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s signals are received in a 100G system and the signals traverse
the same OA, set the Rate and Code Type of the OA based on 100 Gbit/s signals.
l The value of Launch Power queried on the Board Parameter Settings tab is the launch
power set on the U2000. If the value of Launch Power is displayed as /, the NMS data
may not be synchronized or this parameter is not set for the board on the U2000. In this
scenario, you are advised to perform the following operations:

a. Synchronize NMS data.

b. If the value of Launch Power is still displayed as /, set Launch Power for the
board on the Board Parameter Settings tab.
NOTE
To use the OD function, ensure that the Launch Power and System Wavelengths parameters are set on
the Board Parameter Settings tab.
During launch power commissioning:
l In general, System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type need to be set by subnet only on the
Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. When NEs on different subnets are interconnected and
the values of System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type for the subnets are inconsistent, the
three parameters need to be set on the Board Parameter Settings tab for boards on the NE of a
subnet so that the parameter values are consistent with the parameter values on the interconnected
subnet.
l The Launch Power value set for the board will be preferentially used. If Launch Power is not
set for the board, ensure that other OA parameters including System Wavelengths, Rate, Code
Type, and Fiber Type are correct. If other parameters are properly set, the system can
automatically calculate the launch power based on the settings of other OA parameters to ensure
accurate launch power commissioning.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Parameter Configuration from
the main menu.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. Set System Wavelengths,
Rate, and Code Type for each subnet. This step is not required when the OD function is used
because the settings are invalid for the OD system.
Step 3 Click the Board Parameter Settings tab. Set Launch Power, System Wavelengths, Rate,
and Code Type for boards.
1. Set filter criteria. Click OK to filter the boards for which parameters need to be set.
NOTE
To perform batch setting, select multiple boards, right-click a parameter column, and choose the desired
value.

2. Set System Wavelengths of each OA board.

3. Set Rate and Code Type, or set Launch Power of the egress OA board at the transmit
end.
NOTE
– Before setting Launch Power, you must set Source of Launch Power to Manually Set.
– In the high-power fiber access scenario, Launch Power must be set.
– In case of setting the launch power on a per-NE basis, the launch power of the related OA board
will be automatically displayed after NMS data synchronization.
Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To ensure that the optical power is more accurately commissioned, you can set the attributes
of specific OA boards such as the rate, code type, and system wavelengths based on the
practical networking scenario. For details, see 5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.
Choosing Commissioning Trails

The U2000 commissions optical power based on the OCh trail. Therefore, OCh trails need to
be created before commissioning optical power.
Prerequisite
l The fiber connection data is complete and correct.
l Creating OCh trail is complete.
l To successfully create a OCh trail, ensure that the following requirements are met:
– The logic fiber connection has been set up correctly on the U2000.
– Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/
drop multiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network.
– If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists
in the network, protection groups are correctly configured.
– Ensure that the wavelength No. and FEC mode of the OTU boards are configured
correctly.
NOTICE
Topological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivation
will affect existing OCh trails. Therefore, re-create OCh trails before commissioning the
optical power.

U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Trail
Step 2 In Set Trail Filter Criteria window, select the desired filter criteria and click Filter All or
Incremental Filter.
NOTE
l If you need to filter all the trails, click Filter All.

l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental Filter.
NOTE
You can also click Subnet Settings tab to filter the subnets.
Step 3 The desired filtering OCh trails are displayed in the Commissioning Trail Management.
NOTE
l Select a trail, and the trail detail diagram is displayed in Trail Details.
l Select a trail, and the information of the associated trails is displayed in Associated Trail.
l When the board uses four wavelengths to transmit one OTU4 signal, set Level of the trail to OChM.

NOTE
On the Trail Details tab, you can right-click the desired OA board and select Set OA Info to set the
information about the OA board.
NOTE
During dimension expansion, if the number of system wavelengths of the expanded dimensions is different
from the number of system wavelengths on the original subnet, configure optical amplifiers for expansion
based on the actual networking. For details, see Setting Optical Amplifier Information.
----End
(Optional) Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning

An optical power commissioning report can be created to record the before-commissioning
data. The report helps verify that the optical power has been commissioned successfully.
Prerequisites
l OCh trails have been Filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning Trails.
l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see Setting OA
Board Parameters.

U2000
Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:
l Pre-FEC BER at the receive end
l Input and output optical power of the OA board and the OTU board
You can also commission the optical power directly, without generating a commissioning
report.
Procedure
Step 1 Export the optical power commissioning report. For details, see 5.4.2 Generating a
Commissioning Report.

Step 2 View the OCh Trail Data sheet to obtain the following information:
l Wavelengths and channels of all the boards on the to-be-commissioned trails, and optical
power information that can be queried, including the input optical power and output
optical power
l Input and output optical power, pre-FEC BER of the OTU board
Step 3 View the Single-Wavelength Data sheet to obtain the single-wavelength input and output
optical power of the OA board.
Step 4 View the Span Data sheet to obtain the fiber attenuation.
----End
Commissioning Optical Power

By using the function of automatic optical power commissioning during deployment of a new
network, commission the optical power of one or more specified trails at a time. In addition,
no manual operation is required during the automatic commissioning process. This mode
saves manual intervention, shortens the commissioning time, and improves commissioning
efficiency.
Prerequisites
l If the commissioning tool is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data on the
U2000. For details, refer to Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
l The trails to be commissioned are complete trails. trails without sinks or sources cannot
be commissioned.
l Subnet parameters have been configured.

U2000
Precaution
NOTICE
If the channel attenuation on the associated trails of the to-be-commissioned trail has been
configured before deployment commissioning and the associated trails work in the ESC
communication mode, the communication will be interrupted during the deployment
commissioning, resulting a commissioning failure. Therefore, turn off the laser for the
wavelengths on the associated trails before the deployment commissioning in this scenario.
During deployment commissioning, the directly associated trails of the to-be-commissioned
trail will not be commissioned. In addition, lasers on the transmit-end OTU boards on the
directly associated trails will be automatically turned off.
During deployment commissioning, for boards supporting bidirectional switching, if
commissioning on the working trail or protection trail in either direction fails, the
commissioning on both the working and protection trails of the boards will fail.

Because the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium (APE) function
for the system may start during the commissioning, pay attention to the following points:
l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, you should stop the APE
function of the NEs, and stop the ALC function of the NEs or set the Automatic
Regulation Switch of the ALC function is Disabled, and that the OPA function is not in
the Auto state before commissioning.
l For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 and V100R006, the U2000 automatically stops
the ALC and APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and enables the ALC and
APE functions after the commissioning is complete. You are advised to stop the ALC,
and APE functions or set Automatic Regulation Switch of the ALC function to
Disabled if you have to keep these functions enabled before commissioning.
l For NG WDM equipment of V100R007 or later versions, the U2000 supports
configuring ALC links on OMS trails, then the U2000 automatically disables the ALC
link and stops the APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and enables the ALC
and APE functions after the commissioning is complete. You are advised to set
Automatic Regulation Switch of the ALC links to Disabled and stop the APE functions
or if you have to keep these functions enabled before commissioning.
l Before commissioning, the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled
for the network to be commissioned. After the commissioning is completed, the IPA
function must be enabled again.
Before commissioning, check whether Raman boards meet amplified spontaneous emission
(ASE) conditions based on the actual line loss and usage requirements of Raman boards,
calibrate ASE for the Raman boards that met the conditions, and ensure that the Raman lasers
are in the On state.
Do not shut down the laser of the wavelength that is associated with the to-be-optimized
wavelength before the commissioning; otherwise, the commissioning may fail.
During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to unexpected
interruptions in communication, in which case the server will continue the commissioning.
When the client is reconnected to the server, click to view the operation tasks. For
details, see 5.5.1 Viewing Operation Tasks. Perform the commissioning again after the trails
are completely commissioned if you want to ensure that the operation is successful.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Trail Management
window of U2000, select trails to be commissioned and click Operate > New Deployment
Commissioning.
NOTE
For boards supporting bidirectional switching, select both the forward and reverse trails of the boards for
deployment commissioning.
Step 2 In the New Deployment Commissioning window, select the trails to be commissioned.

NOTE
l For OChM trails on which each board transmits one OTU4 signal using four wavelengths,
commissioning can be performed only in any of the three conditions: Four forward trails are selected, four
reverse trails are selected, and all the four forward and four reverse trails are selected. During the
commissioning, the BER values of the trails in the same direction are queried using the IN1 port of the
receive-end board. Therefore, all the BERs of the trails in the same direction are the same.
l After the deployment commissioning is complete, the Receive Optical Power(Working/Protection) and
BER(Working/Protection) columns respectively display the optical power and BER of the receive line
board or OTU board on the commissioned OCh trail and the protection trail. If an OCh trail does not have
a protection trail, only the receive optical power and BER of the OCh trail are displayed. For example,
-5dB/- is displayed in Receive Optical Power(Working/Protection).
Step 3 Optional: Click Advanced Option. The system displays the Advanced Option dialog box,
where commissioning options are available.

NOTE
l By default, Restore laser status is selected on the Advanced Option. If this option is not selected,
after the commissioning is completed, the system does not turn on the lasers that are turned off
during the commissioning and whose wavelength BER does not satisfy the requirement.
l In Advanced Option, Set the trail maintenance state is selected by default. If it is deselected, the
status of a trail will not be automatically changed to Maintenance Status after the trail is
successfully commissioned. For details about Maintenance Status of trails, see Setting the State of
OCh Trails.
Step 4 Click Start to commission the optical power. The Prompt dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK, a Prompt dialog box is displayed. Confirm the commissioning parameters of the
subnets.
Step 6 Click OK, the MDS 6630 component begins to commission the optical power.
NOTE
During the commissioning process, you can obtain the commissioning progress from information in Boards
or from the progress information that is displayed at the bottom of the window.
Step 7 During the commissioning process, the Check Wavelength Status window is displayed
asking you whether to disable lasers for wavelengths that do not need to be commissioned. If
you want to disable them, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel.

Step 8 The Disable Laser dialog box is displayed. Click Continue to confirm. Otherwise, click
Cancel. The Prompt dialog box is displayed and click OK.
Step 9 After commissioning is complete, the Commissioning Completed dialog box is displayed. In
this dialog box, click OK.

NOTE
After the commissioning is complete, the trails in the commissioning information are displayed in different
colors. Perform subsequent operations based on the colors of the trails.
l Black: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail and no subsequent operations are
required.
l Yellow-orange: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail but you must check the data
displayed in yellow-orange in Boards.
l Red: indicates that no services are deployed on a trail and you must check the data displayed in red in
Boards.
----End
Result
Query the commissioning information in the New Deployment Commissioning window and
check whether the result meets the requirement.
l Select the desired trails and Click Save as.... Select the target trail and desired file name.
You can save the trail information in the U2000 window and the commissioning data in
Boards to an .xls file.
A filename must include date and time information (recommended format: Year-Month-
Day-Hour-Minute) to prevent a file saved later from overwriting a file with the same
name saved earlier.
– Trail information:
– Board information:

l Right-click in the Public Message area and choose Select All from the shortcut menu
that is displayed. Copy all the selected information to a text file and save the file for later
view.
l Select the desired trails and Click Generate Commissioning Report. For details, refer
to Viewing the Commissioning Result.
Troubleshooting
l If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 5.6 FAQ in the
Optical Power Commissioning Window, and then retry the commissioning.
l If the commissioning result is abnormal, click Rollback to roll back the commissioning
operation and save data after the rollback is complete.
Click Rollback to roll back the commissioned trails. In the dialog box that is displayed,
click OK to start restoring the commissioned trails to original optical power. After the
original optical power is restored, a dialog box is displayed indicating successful
operations. In this dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
After the rollback is complete, you must check the reported information. If error information is
displayed, rectify the fault accordingly.
Viewing the Commissioning Result

When optical power commissioning is complete, check whether the commissioning result
meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.

Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning has been completed.
When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in
the commissioning result:
l Pre-FEC BER at the receive end
l Input and output optical power of the OA board and the OTU board

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Generate the commissioning report, and view the input and output optical power of the
available boards on the trails, and information about wavelengths, channels for the OCh trails.
Step 2 In the OCh Trail Data sheet, check whether the input optical power, output optical power,
pre-FEC BER of the OTU board, and the gain of the OA board meet the requirements.
NOTE
If the pre-FEC BER does not meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by
performing the follow-up steps in this topic.
If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM)
configuration of the related trails is consistent with that in the design file.
The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be within input optical power alarm
threshold. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of the commissioning result
is marked red.
The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.
Step 3 In the Single-Wavelength Data sheet, check whether the single-wavelength input and output
optical power of the OA board meet requirements.
Step 4 If the average single-wavelength input optical power of the OA board is lower than the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power, check whether the insertion loss and fiber
attenuation of the upstream board of the OA board are appropriate.
l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board.
l For the OA board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report. The contents
marked red indicate exceptions.
Step 5 In the Span Data sheet, check whether the fiber attenuation meets requirements.
----End
Presetting OPA Insertion Loss for OCh Trails

After new deployment, site/degree/wavelength expansion, or board replacement is performed
on an ASON network, you can preset the insertion loss for new OCh trails on the network to
achieve optical power adjust (OPA). In other words, you can divide a new OCh trail into
multiple OPA spans, preset insertion loss for the port or channel of each OPA span, and
deliver the insertion loss to the related NE, achieving quick OPA during ASON service
rerouting.

Prerequisite
l The required ASON LSP management licenses have been obtained.
l The maximum number of system wavelengths has been configured. For details about the
configuration method, see Setting OA Board Parameters.
l Each OA board is connected to an MCA or OPM board, the fibers are clean, and all fiber
connections are correct.
l Complete OCh trails are configured.
l Setting up the optical paths of desired trails is complete.
Precautions
When services are running, ensure that the services are not interrupted.
Context
l When OPA insertion loss is preset for an OCh trail for the first time, the OPA preset
insertion loss configurations are applied to both ports and channels of the trail.
l If port insertion loss has been preset on the desired OCh trail, port insertion loss can be
performed for ports again only when the OPA spans on the OCh trail do not support
channel insertion loss. When the OPA spans support channel insertion loss, only channel
insertion loss can be preset.
l Based on the signal flow of an OCh trail, you can view the OPA spans that the signals
traverse and check the value of Current Output Power of Sink. If the value deviates
greatly from the nominal value, channel insertion loss needs to be preset. Preset
Insertion Loss can be automatically calculated or changed as required. Then, you need
to deliver the preset insertion loss again to make it take effect.
l During channel insertion loss preset, ensure that the difference between Preset Insertion
Loss and Current Insertion Loss does not exceed 2.0 dB; otherwise, an error message
will be displayed.
Procedure
Incremental Filter.
NOTE


NOTE
Step 3 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, select desired OCh trails and choose
Operate > OCh Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss.
Step 4 In the OCh Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss window, select the OCh trails. The OPA Path
area displays all the OPA spans that the OCh trails contain.
Step 5 Optional: Query the current insertion loss preset status.

1. Select the OPA span for which insertion loss needs to be preset and click Query.
2. After the query is complete, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
In the OCH Path Preset OPA Insertion Loss window, you can click any header of the table in the
OPA Path area to display the OPA spans in descending or ascending order.

NOTE
– Port/Channel Insertion Loss: If the value is Port Insertion Loss, only port insertion loss
instead of channel insertion loss can be preset. If the value is Channel Insertion Loss, channel
insertion loss is preset. If the value is Not Supported, no attenuation needs to be adjusted for
an OPA span.
– Logical Insertion Loss: indicates the sum of the nominal insertion loss of each board in the
OPA spans. The nominal insertion loss is read by the from devices, however, insertion loss
cannot be read from passive devices such as the DCM board.
– Port Insertion Loss: indicates the port preset insertion loss. If the actual insertion loss is
displayed as /, the insertion loss is unknown, which maybe because the insertion loss is not
preset.
– Insertion Loss Offset: indicates the value obtained by subtracting the logical insertion loss
from the target insertion loss. If an OPA span has the current insertion loss, this parameter
indicates the difference between the current insertion loss and logical insertion loss. The value
is also called wastage.
n -1.5 <= wastage =< 2.5: The insertion loss is successfully preset.
n wastage <-1.5 or wastage>2.5: If an insertion loss value is marked in red, the insertion
loss value exceeds the permitted range. If the insertion loss value is excessively small,
you are advised to check the fiber quality or fiber end face cleanness of the MCA or
OPM board connected to the MON port of the transmit-end OA board. If the insertion
loss value is excessively large, you are advised to check the fiber quality or fiber end
face cleanness of the MCA or OPM board connected to the MON port of the receive-end
OA board. After the cause is found and the problem is solved, preset the insertion loss
again.
Step 6 Calculate Preset Insertion Loss.

1. Click Auto-Calculate. After the calculation is complete, click OK in the confirmation
dialog box. The newly calculated Preset Insertion Loss are displayed in red.
NOTE
If a message is displayed, indicating that the operation is partially successful and the failure cause is
that no corresponding optical cross-connection is found at the source or sink, no optical cross-
connections are configured for the OPA span.
2. Click Apply. Then click OK in the confirmation dialog box. The insertion loss is applied
to the NE and then OPA adjustment is triggered.
3. Click Query. The Current Output Power of Sink is updated based on OPA adjustment
results.
4. If Current Output Power of Sink cannot meet requirements, repeat Step 6.1 toStep
6.3.
If the output optical power of the OA board cannot reach the nominal value, Current
Output Power of Source must match with Current Output Power of Sink. If they do
not match, repeat Step 6.1 to Step 6.3. For example, if the source and sink OA boards of
an OPA span are OAU100 and OAU101, the current nominal output optical power of the
source board should be approximately 2 dB less than the current nominal output optical
power of the sink board.
NOTE
You can query and obtain the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength for the OA boards.
For details, see Querying Commissioning Index Data.
Step 7 Optional: Modify Preset Insertion Loss.

1. Check Current Output Power of Sink of the wavelength. If the value deviates
significantly from the nominal value, modify it using the automatic calculation function
or directly use an empirical value.

2. Double-click a value in the Preset Insertion Loss column and change it. After the value
is changed, it is displayed in red.
3. After modification, click Apply.
4. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 8 Optional: Clear the insertion loss of the OCh trails.
1. Select the desired OCh trails, and click Clear.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Query to check the values of the channel insertion loss are cleared.
----End
Result
Preset channel insertion loss has higher priority than preset port insertion loss. When preset
channel and port insertion loss values are available, the channel insertion loss value is used
with preference during OPA adjustment.
l Click Save As... to save the result of presetting insertion loss.
a. Click Save As.... In the displayed dialog box, enter the row number in the From
text box and end time in the To text box.
b. Optional: Click . Select the path for saving the file, enter the file name, and
select the file type and code. Click Save.
NOTE
The default file type is an .txt file. For the convenience of viewing the data, it is
recommended to save data to an .xls file.

c. In the Save As window, and click OK to save data.

l The preset result will be automatically saved in the ..\client\report\ directory. You can
view the preset information in this directory.
5.4 Commissioning Report

The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.
5.4.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report

Before generating an optical power commissioning report, filter the commissioning trails and
set subnet commissioning parameters.
Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks
have been completed:
l The commissioning trails have been filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning
Trails.
Board Parameters.
5.4.2 Generating a Commissioning Report

This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report. The commissioning report
consists of the OCh Trail Data, Single-Wavelength Data, and Span Data sheets.
Prerequisites
Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks
have been completed:
l The commissioning trails have been filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning
Trails.

Board Parameters.

U2000
l For an 80-channel system with no OA board configured at the transmit end, no data is
displayed in Span Data in the report.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the trails to generate reports.
l Method 1: In the Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning
Trail Management window of U2000, choose Operate > Commissioning Report.
l Method 2: In the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management >
Online Optimization Management. In the interface that is displayed, select the desired
trails and click Generate Commission Report.
l Method 3: If optical power commissioning is complete, you can click Generate
Commission Report in the commissioning window to generate all commissioning
reports.
Step 2 In the Export Report dialog box, set Data type and Data range and specify the save path for
the report..
NOTE
l Select Selected and Associated Trails as required to generate information about associated trails in the
report.
l If Based on trails in the maintenance state is selected, the generated report will contain data of only
trails in the state of Maintenance; if Based on trails in the maintenance state is not selected, the
generated report will contain data of all selected trails.
Step 3 Click Generate to start generating the commissioning report. A progress bar is displayed.
----End

Description of Parameters in a Trail Report

A hyphen (-) indicates that the corresponding parameter is not supported or configured. A
slash (/) indicates that no data is obtained. Abnormal data is marked with a color based on its
abnormality level. The Status column shows the color of the abnormality with the highest
level in the row.
NOTE
For details about how to handle abnormal issues displayed in the report, see 5.6.16 Solutions to Abnormal
Optical Power in the Commissioning Report.
Table 5-2 OCh Trail Data

Parameter Description
Object Optical NE Indicates the optical NEs on an OCh trail.
NE Indicates the NEs on an OCh trail.
Board Indicates the boards on an OCh trail.
Port Indicates the board ports on an OCh trail.
Port Type Indicates the types of board ports on an OCh trail.
Number of Wavelengths Indicates the number of wavelengths on an OA

board port that the OCh trail traverses.
Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Indicates the wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) frequency (THz) of an OCh trail.
Single- Current Value Indicates the current single-wavelength optical

Wavelength Optic power of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
al Power (dBm)
Nominal Indicates the single-wavelength nominal input or
Value / output power of the OA board that an OCh trail
Threshold traverses when the gain of the OA board is the
minimum value, and the input power alarm threshold
of an OTU board.
Average Indicates the average/minimum/maximum single-

Value/ Min. wavelength optical power of a node that the OCh
Value/ Max. trail traverses.
Value NOTE
l When the single-wavelength optical power is not flat,
the value in the Average Value/Min. Value/Max.
Value column is marked in a color indicating a minor
abnormality.
l Click the link to display the Single-Wavelength Data
tab, where the current optical power value of every
single wavelength on the OA is displayed.
Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current single-wavelength OSNR of a

OSNR (dB) node that the OCh trail traverses.

Min. Value/ Indicates the minimum/maximum single-wavelength

Max. Value OSNR of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
NOTE
Click the link to display the Single-Wavelength Data tab,
where the current OSNR value of every single wavelength
on the OA is displayed.
Multiplexed- Current Value Indicates the multiplexed-wavelength optical power

Wavelength of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
Optical Power NOTE
(dBm) The multiplexed power cannot be queried on the
TN11WSD9 board.
Threshold Indicates the multiplexed-wavelength optical power

threshold of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
Nominal Gain Current Value Indicates the current nominal gain of a node that the
(dB) OCh trail traverses.
Range Indicates the nominal gain threshold of a node that

the OCh trail traverses.
Attenuation (dB) Current Value Indicates the current optical power attenuation of a
node that the OCh trail traverses.
Range Indicates the optical port attenuation range of a node

that the OCh trail traverses.
Span Data Provides a link to the Span Data sheet, where you
can query the span data of the OCh trail.
Pre-FEC BER Current Value Indicates the current pre-FEC BER of a node that the
OCh trail traverses.
Threshold Indicates the pre-FEC BER threshold of a node that

the OCh trail traverses.
FEC Type Indicates the FEC type of a node that the OCh trail
traverses.
Q Value Indicates the Q value of a node that the OCh trail

traverses.
The Q value directly shows the network performance
and each Q value matches a BER value. A greater Q
value indicates better network performance.
CD Compensation Current Value Indicates the current chromatic dispersion (CD)

offset value of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
CD indicates spreading of a pulse in an optical fiber
caused by differences in wave velocity in the
medium.

DGD Current Value Indicates the current polarization mode dispersion

value of a node that the OCh trail traverses.
The polarization mode dispersion is caused by
imperfect symmetry of cross-sectional area of a
fiber.
In-band noise (dB) Current Value Indicates the current in-band noise of a node that the
Table 5-3 Single-Wavelength Data

OA Board Optical NE Indicates the optical NE on the OCh trail where

an OA board resides.
NE Indicates the NE on the OCh trail where an

board resides.
Board Port Indicates an OA board and board port that the

OSA Board Optical NE Indicates the optical NE where an optical

spectrum analyzer (OSA) board resides.
NE Indicates the NE where an OSA board resides.
Board Port Indicates an OSA board and the board port. This
port is used to analyze the spectrum of an OA
board.
Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Indicates the wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) frequency (THz) of a single wavelength on an
OA board.
Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current input power of a single

Input Optical wavelength on an OA board.
Power (dBm)
Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current output power of a single

Output Optical wavelength on an OA board.
Power (dBm)
Single-Wavelength Current Value Indicates the current OSNR value of a single

OSNR (dB) wavelength on an OA board.

Commissioning Current Value Indicates the commissioning reference value for

Reference Value a single wavelength. You can evaluate network
(dB) performance based on this value.
NOTE
The commissioning reference value indicates the
OSNR deterioration generated after the normalization
progress.
Table 5-4 Span Data

Inter-Site Source Indicates the source optical NE of an optical transmission

Object Optical NE section (OTS).
Source NE Indicates the source NE of an OTS.
Span Indicates the source OA board of an OTS.

Source Port
OTS Source Indicates the source port of an OTS.
Sink Indicates the sink optical NE of an OTS.

Optical NE
Sink NE Indicates the sink NE of an OTS.
Span Sink Indicates the sink OA board of an OTS.

Port
OTS Sink Indicates the sink port of an OTS.
Fiber Loss Current Indicates the current fiber loss.

Value (dB) NOTE
If the current fiber loss is greater than the specified EOL value, the
current fiber loss is identified as a major abnormality.
Design Indicates the design fiber loss.

Value(EOL)
(dB)
Margin Indicates the difference between the design fiber loss and
(dB) current fiber loss.
Span Loss Current Indicates the current loss of an OTS.

Value (dB) NOTE
l The span loss is not calculated if there is no source or sink OA
board.
l The current span attenuation is the output optical power of the
source OA board minus the input optical power of the sink OA
board. When the current span loss is not within the permitted
range, the current span loss is identified as a minor abnormality.

Reference Indicates the nominal loss of an OTS.

Value
Range (dB)
Output Current Indicates the output optical power of the source OA board on
power of Value(dBm) an OTS.
Source OA
EVOA Current Indicates the attenuation of the electrical variable optical

before Value(dB) attenuator (EVOA) before the sink OA board on an OTS.
Sink OA
Input Current Indicates the input optical power of the sink OA board on an
power of Value(dBm) OTS.
Sink OA
Launch Launch Indicates the single-wavelength incident optical power of a

Power Power fiber.
(dBm)
Nominal Indicates the single-wavelength nominal output optical power

Single- of the source OA board on an OTS.
Wavelength
Output
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Attenuation Indicates the attenuation of the EVOA after the source OA

(dB) board on an OTS.
NOTE
Attenuation (dB) in the Launch Power column indicates the
attenuation of the EVOA that is installed in the downstream direction
of the egress OA board and is used to control the incident optical
power.
When the value calculated from the nominal output optical power of
the OA board minus the EVOA attenuation is greater than the Launch
Power, the Attenuation (dB) column is marked as minor abnormality.
5.5 Reference Operations

This topic provides reference operations for commissioning.
5.5.1 Viewing Operation Tasks

With the function of viewing operation tasks, you can view the progress of operation tasks
and the related information to avoid repeated operations on the same object.

Viewing Operation Tasks

a user can view information about tasks that are being performed. In the Manage Operation
Tasks window, information about tasks that are being performed is displayed. The
information includes Operation Status, Start Time, and Progress.
On the toolbar, click to display the Manage Operation Tasks dialog box. The tasks
under operating are displayed in this dialog box.
NOTE
After you click an operation task, the related information about the operation task is displayed in the lower
part of the dialog box.
NOTE
indicates that operations mutually exclusive are in process, such as generating reports, new/
expansion deployment commissioning, or optimizing links.
indicates no operation is in process.
5.5.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000

After the WDM commissioning component is installed or re-deployed, you must synchronize
data on the entire network. After NE data is uploaded, NE data is synchronized with the
U2000 data, or U2000 data is initialized, you must synchronize the U2000 data on the entire
network or the corresponding subnets before the commissioning.After modifying the NE ID
on the U2000, you must synchronize U2000 data, restart the process, and synchronize U2000
data again.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
If operations such as the adding, deletion, or modification on subnets, sites, NEs, boards, and
fibers are performed during data synchronization, data synchronization will fail.

Procedure
the main menu.
Step 2 Click the Synchronize Data on the U2000 tab.
Step 3 Choose the subnet to be synchronized from the Root navigation tree and click Start. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When the installed WDM commissioning component is used to synchronize data for the first time, you
must select Root to perform network-wide synchronization. In other scenarios, you can select a subnet
to synchronize the subnet data.
Step 4 Click Yes. Data synchronization starts.

NOTE
If data share conflicts during data synchronization on the U2000, maybe another user is deleting, uploading,
copying or checking data consistency on the NE. When this occurs, perform data synchronization again after
another user completes the operations on the NE. During synchronization, do not perform other
commissioning operations on the NE.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization.
NOTE
After the synchronization is completed, the refresh icon turns red. Click to refresh the root navigation
tree.
----End
5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information

practical networking scenario.

Prerequisites
l The subnet parameter is set.
l Commissioning trails are filtered.
l The designed rate, modulation format, and maximum number of system wavelengths for
specific OAs have been obtained from the network design document before the
configuration.
Context
Set commissioning information for specific OAs based on actual network parameters as
follows:
l When both 40-wavelength and 80-wavelength systems are configured in a subnet to be
commissioned, set the maximum number of system wavelengths for OAs based on the
type of the system .
the same OA, set the service rate and code pattern of the OA based on 100 Gbit/s signals.
l When NEs on different subnets are interconnected and the values of System
Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type for the subnets are inconsistent, the three
parameters need to be set in the Set OA Info window for boards on the NE of a subnet
so that the parameter values are consistent with the parameter values on the
interconnected subnet.
l The value of Launch Power queried in the Set OA Info window is the launch power set
on the U2000. If the value of Launch Power is displayed as /, the NMS data may not be
synchronized or this parameter is not set for the board on the U2000. In this scenario,
you are advised to perform the following operations:
board in the Set OA Info window.
NOTE
l To use the OD function, ensure that the Launch Power parameter is set.
l During launch power commissioning, the Launch Power value set for the board will be
preferentially used. If Launch Power is not set for the board, ensure that other OA parameters
including System Wavelengths, Rate, Code Type, and Fiber Type are correct. If other
parameters are properly set, the system can automatically calculate the launch power based on the
settings of other OA parameters to ensure accurate launch power commissioning.
Procedure
Incremental Filter.
NOTE


NOTE
Step 3 The desired filtering OCh trails are displayed in the Commissioning Trail Management.
Step 4 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, select the desired trails, and click Set
OA Info.
NOTE
You can also select and right-click an OA board in the signal flow in Trail Details, and choose Set OA Info
from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 In the Set OA Info window, set the system wavelengths, rate, code type, and launch power
for specific OAs based on actual networking requirements.
NOTE
value.
end.

NOTE
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Click OK to close the Set OA Info window.
----End
5.5.4 Querying Commissioning Index Data

This section describes how to query and obtain index data (intrinsic optical specifications) of
the optical-layer boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Optical Management > Commissioning Index Data from
the main menu.
Step 2 Click the Optical Amplifier Index Data tab. Query commissioning index data of the boards
displayed on the tab.
l Click Refresh. Then the system queries the data in the database and updates the data in
real time.
l To add index items for OAs of new types, click Add.

l To delete unnecessary index items from the list that is displayed, select the unnecessary
index items and click Delete.
l Click Find. In the Board Type select the desired OA board type and click OK to find
the index data of the board.
Step 3 Click the Insertion Loss Index Data tab. Query insertion loss index data of optical-layer
boards.

l Click Refresh. Then the system queries the data in the database and updates the data in
real time.
l To add index items for optical-layer boards of new types, click New.
l To delete unnecessary index items from the list that is displayed, select the unnecessary
index items and click Delete.
l Click Find. In the Board Type select the desired optical-layer board type and click OK
to find the index data of the board.

----End
5.5.5 Checking the Fiber Designed Loss(EOL)

During the optical power commissioning process, the MDS 6630 component checks and
compares the actual loss with the designed loss of long fibers. If the actual loss of a long fiber
exceeds the designed loss, the MDS 6630 component will display a message indicating that
the long fiber needs to be optimized. You can also check the loss of long fibers against the
commissioning report generated after the commissioning is completed.
Prerequisites
The fiber loss has been set on the U2000.
1. In the Main Topology, right-click a fiber and choose Object Attributes from the
shortcut menu.
2. In the Link Properties tab, enter the value of the Designed Loss(EOL)(dB) parameter
according to the design value.

Context
NOTE
When a CRPC board is configured at the sink or no OA board is configured at the transmit end, the loss
of long fibers does not need to be checked.
Procedure
l During deployment, expansion, or optimization commissioning based on power
equalization, an error message will be displayed in the Boards list if the MDS 6630
component detects that the actual loss of a long fiber exceeds the designed loss.
l In the OA report, Actual Line Loss and Designed Loss of long fibers are displayed. If
the actual loss of a long fiber exceeds the designed loss, the message There is a great
difference between the designed line loss and actual line loss will be displayed when
the cursor rests on the actual loss of the long fiber.
5.6 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power
commissioning.
5.6.1 Commissioning Fails Because the MCA Board Detects No

Signal
[Problem Description]: The following error information is displayed during commissioning:
No signal of wavelength XX is detected on the MCA board (NE:XX,slot:XX,board

kind:XX,port:1).
[Problem Analysis]: The possible causes are as follows:

l The laser on the OA board is turned off.

l The related board is faulty.
l An incorrect fiber connection is found.
[Solution]:
1. In the main topology of the U2000, double-click the NE housing the MCA board where
no signal is detected to open the NE panel. Click Signal Flow Diagram to search for the
OA board connected to the MCA board.
2. Search for the WDM trails that traverse the OA board.
3. Based on the wavelength information displayed in the error message, search for the
corresponding OCh signal flow and search for the OA board in the signal flow diagram.

4. In the signal flow diagram, search for the upstream signal power of the OA board to
locate the point where the signal is interrupted.
5. Based on the signal interruption point, check the following:
a. Whether the laser on the OA board is turned on.
b. Whether the related board is faulty.
c. Whether the related fiber connections in Figure 5-2 are correct. That is, ensure that
the following requirements are met:
n The physical fiber connection of the M40 wavelength add port is correct.
n The physical fiber on the TDC/RDC port of the OAU board is properly
connected.
n The logical fibers of the OA boards at both the receive and transmit ends are
properly connected.
Figure 5-2 Schematic diagram of incorrect fiber connections

MCA
IN OUT
D40
M40
OA OA
RDC
OUT M40 D40 IN
O TDC F F O
T I I T
U U U U
IN M40 OUT
M40
D40
OA OA
Fiber connection
To-be-checked fiber
connections
Fault point

5.6.2 Output Optical Power of the OA Board Behind M40V Is

Excessively Low But the MDMDS 6630 component Reports a
Commissioning Success and Displays No Error Message
[Problem Description]: The MDS 6630 component reports that commissioning succeeds and
displays no error message but actually the output power of the OA board behind the M40V
board is excessively low.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible cause is that the physical fiber connection is incorrect.
[Solution]: Ensure that the physical fiber of the OUT port on the M40V board is properly
connected.
D01 M01
M40V
D40
OA OA
D40 IN OUT M40
F O O F
I T T I
U U U U
M40 OUT IN D40
M40V
D40
OA IN OUT OA
M01 D01
Fiber connection
To-be-checked fiber
connections
Fault point
5.6.3 Failure to Start Commissioning Because No OCh Trail Is

Found
[Problem Description]: No OCh trail is found before commissioning. As a result, the
commissioning cannot start.

After the Next button is

clicked to search for OCh
trails, no OCh trail is found.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible cause is that the logical fibers that the OCh trail that is to
be commissioned travels along are not connected or are falsely connected.
[Solution]: Ensure that all logical fibers that the OCh trail that is to be commissioned travels
along, including the logical fibers of the TDC/RDC optical ports on OAU boards, are
correctly connected.
5.6.4 Failing to Commission Multiplexed Wavelengths

The input optical power of the OA boards in the new dimension is still high after the lasers for
the newly expanded wavelengths are disabled. Please check whether OCh trails are created
for the configured wavelengths on the OA boards. If OCh trails are not configured for many
configured wavelengths, create OCh trails for these wavelengths or disable the lasers for
these wavelengths and perform commissioning again.
As a result, the multiplexed wavelengths fail to be commissioned.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible cause is that the physical or logical fiber connections are
incorrect.
[Solution]:
l Ensure that all physical fiber connections between the D40 and M40 are correct.
l Ensure that the logical fiber between the OUT port of the OTU board and the wavelength
add port of the M40 board is correct.

D01 M01
M40
D40
OA OA
D40 IN OUT M40

F O O F
I T T I
U U U U
M40 OUT IN D40
M40
D40
OA IN OUT OA
M01 D01
Fiber connection
To-be-checked fiber
connections
Fault point
5.6.5 Service Provisioning Fails or the Performance of Provisioned

Services Is Poor
[Problem Description]:
l Symptom 1: Services are successfully provisioned, without any errors reported; however,
service performance is poor.
l Symptom 2: The service commissioning fails and the following error message is
displayed during commissioning:
Commissioning is stopped because the IN port power is too low (-60 dBm). Please check
whether the fiber connection between boards is correct according to the fiber connection
diagram.
In the link commissioning window of the MDS 6630, the related links are marked
yellow.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible cause is that the fiber attenuation is greater than the design
value.
[Solution]: Ensure that the inter-site fiber attenuation is within the permitted range.

5.6.6 TDC Search Fails on the TN54NS3 Board

TDC search failed.
[Problem Analysis]: The TDC search function on the TN54NS3 board requires normal
receive optical power. The possible cause of the TDC search failure is that the optical power
is abnormal, which is caused by incorrect parity of the D40 board or incorrect physical fiber
connections between the D40 board and line board.
[Solution]:
1. Find the OCh signal flow that traverses the TN54NS3 board.
In the main topology of the U2000, double-click the NE housing the TN54NS3 board to
start the NE panel. Find the WDM trails that traverse the TN54NS3 board.
2. Check whether the optical power of the IN port on the TN54NS3 board is normal.
3. If it is not, check the optical power along the signal flow.
– Check whether the output optical power of the wavelength-dropping OA board is
normal.
– Check whether the input optical power of the IN port on the wavelength-dropping
D40 board is normal.
– Check whether the input power of the TN54NS3 board is normal.
Possible cause 2: The

Possible cause 1: The
physical fiber
board parity is incorrect.
connection is incorrect.

4. If the optical power is abnormal, do as follows:

– Check whether the parity of the D40 board is correct. For example, check whether
the D40 board in the even band is falsely used when the board in the odd band
needs to be used.
– Check whether the physical fiber connection between the D40 board and TN54NS3
board is correct.
5.6.7 Input Optical Power of the OA Board Is Greater Than the

Target Value
Input optical power of the optical amplifier does not reach the nominal value XXdBm.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible cause is that the EVOA at the receive end of the line is not
connected.
[Solution]:
1. Search for OCh trails that traverse the OA board.
In the main topology of the U2000, double-click the NE housing the OA board to start
the NE panel. Find the related WDM trails that traverse the OA board.

2. Check whether the output power of the OA board at the upstream site is normal.
3. Check whether the attenuation of the EVOA that first receives signals and is connected
to or embedded in the OA board is normal. (The attenuation may have been set to the
maximum value.)
4. Modify the attenuation of the EVOA and check whether the input power of the OA
board changes. If the input power of the OA board remains the same, the EVOA is not
actually connected.
Local receive-end OA
Upstream
transmit-end OA

5.6.8 Failed to Obtain the Board Type

Failed to obtain the type of the optical amplifier board.
[Possible Cause]:
l The board manufacturer information is incorrect.

l The board is malfunctioning.
l The OA board type is not supported in this NE version.
[Solution]:
l On the U2000, verify that the board manufacturer information is correct.
l Check whether the board is faulty. If it is, replace the board.

l If the problem persists, send the board manufacturer information to Huawei R&D to
analyze whether the board type is supported in this NE version.
5.6.9 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to existent

wave BER un-queried
[Problem Description]: When checking wavelength status before commissioning, the BER
of some wavelengths cannot be queried and is not displayed in the displayed Check
Wavelength Status window, refer to the figure below.

[Problem Analysis]: To reduce the risk and improve the accuracy of the commission, during
commissioning MDS 6630 component will check the BER of associated wavelengths before
the equalization. If BER for some wavelengths is lower than BER thresold(for example, BER
thresold for AEFC mode is 1E-4) or cannot be queried, the tool will pop up the window
showing the message mentioned above.
After investigate the BER un-queried board, it is existent wavelength but does not carry
traffic, see below info:
[Solution]: If it is confirmed that there is no live traffic, in order to finish commissioning,

MDS 6630 component wiil continue commissioning and the laser for existent wavelength will
be shut down, meanwhile feedback the existent wavelength issue. If the MDS 6630
component fails to query performance of the trails carrying client services, stop the
commissioning and contact Huawei engineers.
5.6.10 MDS 6630 component Commissioning Failed due to MCA

cannot detect the new wave
[Problem Description]: During MDS 6630 component commissioning, it failed, the error
message is:
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Optical NE: XX NE: XX Board:1-12-12OAU1 Optical Port:6
Channel:1 Equalizing optical power on the current detection point...
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Subnet: XX WDM Link: XX Wave Number:8 The spectrum
analysis board (NE: XX; slot: 2-16; board type: 11MCA8; port: 2) detects no signal by
scanning wavelengths.
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Subnet: XX WDM Link: XX Wave Number:8 No optical
signal is detected on the detection point (NE: XX; slot: 1-12; board type: 12OAU1) of
the wavelength.
Channel:1 Failed to adjust the optical power flatness at the current detection point.
Channel:1 Equalizing optical power on the current detection point finished.
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Enabling ALC and APE on NEs that are disabled before
commissioning...
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : ALC and APE are enabled on NEs.
l dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Multiplexed wavelength commissioning failed. Commissioning
failed.
[Problem Analysis]: The miss of the new wavelength can be caused by the following factors:
1. The physical fiber misconnection between OTU and M40.
2. The inconsistence between logical fiber and physical fiber. The MDS 6630 component
determines which MCA8 board is used to detect the optical power of the OA that reports
errors based on logical fiber connections. If no logical fiber connections are established

for the MCA8 board but the board is physically connected, then the MDSMDS 6630
component considers that the MCA8 board is not connected.
3. The flatness of the wavelengths of this optical amplifier board is very bad. If the
difference of channel power exceeds 10 dB, the wavelength of the low power will be lost
from MCA spectrum.
4. The board insertion loss or the fiber attenuation of the site is unacceptably high.
To locate the fault, check the optical power detected at the power detection points (namely,
the OAs connected to an MCA board) upstream and downstream from the OA that reports the
error. If the optical power of the missing wavelength can be detected at one of the power
detection points but cannot be detected at the other power detection point, then the fault is
likely located between the OA that reports the error and the detection point that fails to detect
the wavelength.
As shown in the following figure, site A is the transmitting site, site E is the receiving site,
and other sites are intermediate sites. In the figure, the power detection points that are
connected to an MCA board are provided.
The figure above shows a network where WSM9 and WSD9 boards are used. The following
describes how to handle a fault on such a network. The methods for handling the fault on a
network with WSMD4 boards are similar.
The following provides the troubleshooting procedure by scenario.
l Scenario 1: At site A, the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.
– Check whether the MCA8 board detects other wavelengths. If it does not detect
other wavelengths but the U2000 displays that there is Rx and Tx optical power on
the A101 board, then check the physical and logical fiber connections between the
MCA8 and A101 boards. If the fiber connections are incorrectly established, correct
them.
– If the MCA8 board detects other wavelengths and the MCA8 board is correctly
connected to the A101 board, then set the attenuation to 5 dB for the channel
carrying the new wavelength on the WSM9 board.
– On the U2000, check whether the optical power of the new wavelength is displayed
in the MCA8 board data. If yes, then check the fiber insertion loss from the OTU
board to the M40 board. If the fiber insertion loss is greater than 1 dB, clean or
replace the fiber from the OTU board to the M40 board.
– If the optical power of the new wavelength is not displayed in the MCA8 board
data, then check the physical fiber connections between the OTU and M40 boards.
If the physical fiber connections are incorrectly established, correct them.
l Scenario 2: At site B, the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.

them.
– If the MCA8 board detects other wavelengths, ensure that the MCA8 board is
correctly connected to the A101 board.
– Site B is an optical line amplifier (OLA) site. Therefore, determine the point for
adjusting the optical power of the new wavelength at site A. Then, set the
attenuation to 5 dB for the channel carrying the new wavelength on the WSM9
board at site A.
– Determine the fiber connections to the MCA8 board at site A and view the optical
power of the new wavelength displayed for the MCA8 board on the U2000.
– If the MCA8 board detects the optical power of the new wavelength, then check the
fiber insertion loss from the OTU board to the M40 board at site A. If the fiber
insertion loss is greater than 1 dB, then clean or replace the fiber from the OTU
board to the M40 board.
– If the MCA8 board does not detect the optical power of the new wavelength, then
handle the fault by referring to scenario 1.
l Scenario 3: At site C, the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.
– Check whether the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board detects other
wavelengths. If it does not detect other wavelengths but the U2000 displays that
there is Rx and Tx optical power on the B103 board, then check the physical and
logical fiber connections between the MCA8 and B103 boards. If the fiber
connections are incorrectly established, correct them.
correctly connected to the B103 board.
– At site C, the B103 board is a receiving OA. Therefore, determine the point for
adjusting the optical power of the new wavelength at site A. Then perform the
operations for scenario 1.
l Scenario 4: At site C, the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.
them.
– The new wavelength is transparently transmitted at site C. In this case, the A101
board at site C is a transmitting OA. To locate the faulty point, check whether the
MCA8 board connected to the B103 board at site C detects the new wavelength. If
it does not detect the new wavelength, see the methods for scenario 3.
– If the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board detects the new wavelength, then
the faulty point is located between the B103 and A101 boards at site C. In this case,
set the attenuation to 0 dB for the channel carrying the new wavelength on the
WSD9 board and to 5 dB for the channel carrying the new wavelength on the

WSM9 board. After that, check whether the MCA8 board connected to the A101
board detects the new wavelength.
– Check the physical fiber connections between the WSD9 and WSM9 boards if the
following conditions are met: (1) The MCA8 board connected to the A101 board
still does not detect the new wavelength. (2) Other wavelengths are dropped or
added from the WSD9 or WSM9 board. (3) No wavelength except the new
wavelength passes the WSD9 and WSM9 boards.
– Check the physical fiber connections between the B103 and A101 boards if the
MCA8 board connected to the A101 board still does not detect the new wavelength
and no wavelength except the new wavelength passes the WSD9 and WSM9 boards
l Scenario 5: At site D, the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.
– Check whether the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board detects other
there is Rx and Tx optical power on the A101 board, then check the physical and
logical fiber connections between the MCA8 and A101 boards. If the fiber
– Site D is an OLA site. Therefore, determine the point for adjusting the optical
power of the new wavelength at site C, which is an ROADM site.
– At site C, check whether the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board detects the
new wavelength. If it does not, see the methods for scenario 4.
l Scenario 6: At site E, the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board cannot detect the
new wavelength.
– Check whether the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board detects other
there is Rx and Tx optical power on the B103 board, then check the physical and
logical fiber connections between the MCA8 and B103 boards. If the fiber
correctly connected to the B103 board.
– The B103 board at site E is a receiving OA. Therefore, determine the point for
adjusting the optical power of the new wavelength at site C.
– At site C, check whether the MCA8 board connected to the A101 board detects the
l Scenario 7: The input optical power of the receiving OTU board at site E is lower than
the lower threshold and reports an OTU-LOF, LOS, or IN-PWR-LOW alarm.
– At site E, check whether the MCA8 board connected to the B103 board detects the
– If the MCA8 board detects the new wavelength, set the attenuation to 0 dB for the
channel carrying the new wavelength on the WSD9 board. If the OTU board still
reports the OTU-LOF, LOS, or IN-PWR-LOW alarm, check the physical fiber
connections from the D40 board to the OTU board. If the fiber connections are
incorrectly established, correct them.

5.6.11 MDS 6630 componentCommissioning/Report Generation

Failed due to the board information cannot be queried
[Problem Description]:
l Board type cannot be found in the database during commissioning.
dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss : Optical NE:XX NE: XX Board:1-7-12OAU1 Optical amplifier
board type not found. Please upload commissioning data.
l Failed to obtain the board information from the database during the operation of
generating the OTU report. The error message as below:
[Problem Analysis]: MDS 6630 component commissioning need many board specifications
(such as OTU and Amp target commissioning value). If the board information cannot be
found in the MDS 6630 component database during commissioning, it fails.
[Solution]: MDS 6630 component can get the information by uploading NE board data, if
these information not in MDS 6630 component database, upload should be done first. Execute
an upload the NE in MDS, and then restart the commissioning or report generation.
5.6.12 How to Commission Optical Power Using the U2000 When

the Optical Power Attenuation in a Cable Section in a WDM Link
Is High
If the attenuation of a line on the network to be commissioned is too large so that the gain of
the OA board cannot be compensated, check and repair the line fiber. If this problem persists,
use an OA board with larger gain on the receive end of the line, or cascade OA boards.
5.6.13 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE

Classification
This topic describes the restrictions and requirements on optical NE classification when the
U2000 is used to commission optical power of WDM equipment.
When the U2000 is used to commission optical power of WDM equipment, optical NE
classification must be consistent with the physical optical NE classification. In addition, one

physical site cannot be classified into different optical NEs. For example, a back-to-back
OTM site can be created as only one optical NE as shown in Figure 5-3 but such a site cannot
be created as two or more optical NEs as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-3 Back-to-back OTM site created as one optical NE
Figure 5-4 Back-to-back OTM site created as two optical NEs
If a physical site is classified into two optical NEs on the U2000, automatic optical power
commissioning is unavailable. When this occurs, manually classify the two optical NEs as
one. That is, allocate the boards and fiber connections of one optical NE to the other optical
NE.
5.6.14 How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a

System with Multi-Level Subnets
This topic describes the rules for setting the maximum number of wavelengths that a system
supports during the process of setting subnet parameters.
During the commissioning process, the U2000 calculates the power of the optical amplifier
based on the maximum number of wavelengths for the system. If the system contains multiple
subnets, calculate the power based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by the
subnet where the optical amplifier board is located. If the subnet contains multi-level subnets,
set the maximum number of wavelengths for each subnet.

5.6.15 How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in

Case of Many Errors on the Network
The entire commissioning process consists of network data recording, channel attenuation
initialization, main channel commissioning, and BER optimization. If an error occurs during
any process, the entire commissioning is stopped.
All the preceding processes need to be performed to commission the entire network. If an
error occurs during any process, the commissioning will take a long time.
To speed up commissioning and fault identification, commission a few associated links each
time. In this manner, if an error occurs on a link, the error is reported in a timely manner.
After the fault is rectified, only these links need to be commissioned instead of the entire
network. When the commissioning is successful, commission other associated links.
Are There Any Restrictions on Link Commissioning
For new deployment commissioning, links to be commissioned and their associated links
cannot carry services. Otherwise, services on the links are interrupted during commissioning
because lasers are shut down for the OTU boards on the links.
Wavelength expansion commissioning applies to a network that is configured with MCA
boards and meets expansion requirements. The U2000 of the current versions does not
support wavelength expansion commissioning of a network that is not configured with MCA
boards.
5.6.16 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the

Commissioning Report
This topic describes how to handle abnormal optical power displayed in the commissioning
report.
Abnormal Optical Power of Optical Amplifiers

In the commissioning report, if input optical power at the transmit end of the OA deviates
from the nominal value by >= 1.5 dB, the OA board is yellow.
[Solution]:
l Check whether there are wavelengths that are not commissioned. If yes, commission
them, regenerate a commissioning report, and check the optical power again.
l Check whether some channels are added or lost, the MCA board will detect the added or
lost channels, and CHAN_ADD or CHAN_LOS will be reported on the MCA board. At
that case, repair the channels and regenerate a commissioning report.
l Check whether the link fiber attenuation exceeds the engineering design value, or the
inter-station fiber attenuation exceeds 0.5 dB. If yes, repair the fibers and regenerate a
commissioning report.
l Use the link optimization function to adjust the deviation in a proper maintenance time
period.
Abnormal Optical Power Flatness

Ensure that the optical power flatness of all the wavelengths is within the range of ±3 dB of
the average single-wavelength optical power. Check for MCA boards on the link from source

to sink for abnormal optical power flatness. The commissioning report automatically
discovers flatness problems on the MCA board on the link and marks the MCA board in
yellow if a problem is discovered. Check whether there are wavelengths that are not
commissioned. If yes, commission them, regenerate a commissioning report, and check the
optical power again.
NOTE
The optical power displayed on the MCA board is 20 dB less than actual power. Therefore we need to
compensate the value obtained by 20 dB to get the actual single-channel power value. For example in the 40-
channel WDM configuration, if each channel output power should be + 4 dBm, it will be displayed as -16
dBm in the MCA board.
[Solution]: In the event, the wavelengths are not flat, that means the flatness is more than the
recommended margin, each wavelength should be adjusted to fulfill the recommended single-
channel power value. This can be done by adjusting the VOA on the WSS boards (WSMD4,
WSM9 or WSD9) for each channel (as needed) with each step by incrementing or
decrementing 0.5 dB.
In more severe cases, it is recommended to consult Huawei to provide assistance in fixing the
issue.
5.6.17 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization

Commissioning
This section describes common problems found during link optimization commissioning.
Logical or Physical Fiber Connections on the Trail to Be Commissioned Are

Incorrect
l If you commission link optimization or manually optimize optical power when physical
fibers are led from the Vo port to the Vi port on the electrical variable optical attenuator
(EVOA) configured before the optical amplifier (OA) board, the EVOA may be burnt,
causing service interruption.
l If you commission link optimization when the EVOA is configured before the OA board
at the local site from the aspects of logical fiber connections but the EVOA is configured
behind the OA board from the aspects of physical fiber connections, the input optical
power of the receive-end OTU board at a downstream site will be lower than the
threshold. As a result, the commissioning will be rolled back due to optical performance
deterioration.
5.6.18 Meanings of Commissioning Trail Status Parameters

This topic describes the meanings of the commissioning trail status parameters Optical
Commission Status, OSNR Status, and OD Optimization Status.

Table 5-5 Meanings of commissioning trail status parameters

Status Meaning
Optical On the U2000, an OCh trail can be in the Unset, Commission, or

Commissio Maintenance state.
n Status l The Unset state indicates that an OCh trail is initially created.
l The Commission state indicates that an OCh trail has been created but
the optical path has not been commissioned, and therefore the OCh trail
cannot be used to carry services.
l The Maintenance state indicates that the optical path of an OCh trail has
been commissioned and the OCh trail can be used to carry services.
Indicates the commissioning status of a trail. If Optical Commission Status
of a trail is Maintenance, no deployment commissioning or expansion
commissioning can be performed for the trail.
OSNR Indicates whether an OCh trail supports OSNR detection.

Status You can view the OSNR of a trail only when OSNR Status of the trail is set
to Enable.
For the method of setting OSNR Status to Enable, see (Optional)
Configuring OSNR Detection for a Trail.
NOTE
When the OSNR detection function is enabled for trails, each unidirectional trail
automatically consumes an OD management system license. When the OSNR
detection function is disabled for trails, the used licenses are released.
OD Indicates whether an OCh trail supports optimization commissioning.

Optimizatio You can perform optimization commissioning for a trail only when OD
n Status Optimization Status of the trail is set to Enable.
For the method of setting OD Optimization Status to Enable, see
(Optional) Configuring the OD Optimization Function for a Trail.
NOTE
When the OD optimization function is enabled for trails, each unidirectional trail
automatically consumes an OD optimization license. When the OD optimization
function is disabled for trails, the used licenses are released.
5.6.19 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of
the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value?
This section describes common problems found during the commissioning of RAU boards.
If the working mode of the Raman optical module on the RAU board is not set to gain locking
before commissioning, the working mode is automatically changed to gain locking during the
commissioning. After the commissioning is complete, if the gain of the RAU board cannot
compensate for the line attenuation, manually change the working mode of the RAU board to
Maximum power or Pump power, and adjust the optical power of the RAU board and the
OA board at the receive end.

5.6.20 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data

Synchronization
[Problem Description]: During the execution of operation tasks such as deployment

commissioning, expansion commissioning, and link optimization commissioning, the
operation tasks may fail to be performed if the data of the subnets or optical NEs involved in
the operation tasks is synchronized with the NMS data.
[Solution]: Before synchronizing NMS data, click the icon to check whether tasks are
being performed in the commissioning task management window. If tasks are being
performed, wait until the tasks are completed.
5.6.21 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board

Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live Network
[Problem Description]: During commissioning for deployment, capacity expansion, or link
optimization, the NMS displays a message "The board information is not configured" and
stops the commissioning process.
[Problem Analysis]: If board manufacturer information mismatches between the NMS and
live network, commissioning may fail.
[Solution]:
1. Locate the board that is involved in the problem according to the displayed message, and
synchronize the NMS with the data of the optical NE where the board resides by
referring to Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
2. When the synchronization is complete, restart commissioning.
5.6.22 What to Do If the ALC Function Detects an Exception After

Deployment or Expansion Commissioning?
This section describes what to do if the ALC function detects an exception after deployment
or expansion commissioning.
[Problem Description]: What to do if the ALC function triggers an alarm immediately after
deployment or expansion commissioning?
[Solution]: Determine whether the alarm is caused by the incorrect setting of the Node Gain
Compensation Offset(dB) parameter for the ALC function or caused by abnormal line
attenuation.
l If the alarm is caused by the incorrect setting of the Node Gain Compensation
Offset(dB) parameter, set the parameter again by referring to "Automatic Level Control
(ALC)" in the Feature Description. If the ALC function is in the automatic adjustment
mode or the user has manually triggered the ALC function after the alarm is reported,
manually trigger the ALC function again after setting the Node Gain Compensation
Offset(dB) parameter to ensure that the line optical power is restored.
l If the alarm is caused by abnormal line attenuation, check for fiber exceptions and
remove them accordingly.

5.6.23 Commissioning Exception for Line Compensation Using

the ALC Function
This topic describes how to handle a commissioning exception for line compensation using
the ALC function
[Problem Description]: If the communication between the U2000 and a network element
(NE) is interrupted during the commissioning, the ALC enable/disable status may be not
restored to the state before the commissioning. As a result, the commissioning for rerouted
automatically switched optical network (ASON) services fails.
[Solution]:
l In the ASON Monitor Settings or Advanced Option of Link Optimization
Commissioning window, you must deselect Trigger ALC Optimization and trigger
commissioning again for rerouted ASON services on the OCh trails travelling along the
optical multiplexing section (OMS).
l Perform deployment or expansion commissioning on the OCh trails traveling along the
OMS.
5.6.24 Commissioning Cannot Be Performed After a Switchover to

the Secondary Site of a U2000 HA System
[Problem Description]: This topic describes how to handle a commissioning abnormality
after a switchover to the secondary site of a U2000 HA system.
[Solution]: After the switchover is completed, perform the operations Synchronizing Data on
the U2000 and Setting OA Board Parameters at the secondary site before commissioning.
5.6.25 How to Deal with an Exception Indicating that the MDP

Fails to Send a Message During the Synchronization of
Networkwide NMS Data?
This topic describes how to deal with an exception indicating that the MDP fails to send a
message during the synchronization of networkwide NMS data.
[Problem Description]: During the synchronization of networkwide NMS data, the error
message MDP cannot send the message to the process at the receive end is displayed.
[Solution]: Log in to the U2000 System Monitor client and check whether the required OTN
NE management process such as nemgr_otn is started. If no OTN NE management process is
started, start the required ONT NE management process and then synchronize NMS data
again.
5.6.26 Error Message Is Displayed When Insertion Loss Is Preset

for an OCh Trail
[Problem Description]: When insertion loss is preset for an OCh trail, the error message
Failed to set the preset total insertion loss for the OPA (Event code: 0x420421F9) is
displayed.
[Problem Analysis]: The possible causes are as follows:

l When channel insertion loss is preset, the value of Insertion Loss Offset is greater than
8 dB or less than -8 dB, which is not within the permitted range.
l When port insertion loss is preset, the automatically calculated value of Preset Insertion
Loss is 10 dB greater than or -10 dB less than that of Logical Insertion Loss.
l The OPA spans on the OCh trail are not properly specified. As a result, the equipment
fails to find the port for which insertion loss can be configured.
[Solution]:
Handle the issue based on errcode in the error message.
Table 5-6 Solution to an insertion loss preset failure
Error Solution
Code
0x9742 1. Check whether the fibers in the OPA spans, especially the fiber from the
OA board to the MCA board, are contaminated.
2. Ensure that System Wavelengths is set to 40 or 80. For details, see Setting
OA Board Parameters.
0xaeb4 Check whether the fibers in the OPA spans, especially the fiber from the OA
board to the MCA board, are contaminated.
0xaeb5 No insertion loss calibration points are available on the OPA span for which
insertion loss is to be preset. Therefore, insertion loss cannot be preset for the
OPA span.
5.7 Event Code

This topic describes methods of handling the event code.
5.7.1 Event code: 0x4A007
Event Description: "Failed to obtain the type of the optical amplifier board"
The probable causes for the preceding prompt message are as follows:
l The board manufacturer information is incorrect.
l The board does not work properly.
l The U2000 does not support the optical amplifier board type.
The solution is as follows:

l Correctly configure the board manufacturer information on the U2000.
l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.
l If the board manufacturer information is correct, send the board manufacturer
information to Huawei R&D engineers and request them to check whether the U2000
supports the optical amplifier board type.


Event Description: "Failed to query the adjustable range of the EVOA"
The cause of the preceding prompt messages may be that the NE or board does not work
properly.
Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.

Event Description: "Failed to query the input optical power of the optical amplifier board."
properly.

Event Description: "Failed to query the output optical power of the optical amplifier board."
properly.

Event Description: "Failed to query the attenuation of the EVOA."
properly.

Event Description: "The IN port power is too low (-60dBm). Stop commissioning."
Cause:The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that there is a problem with
the fiber used by the link. For example, the fiber is cut, incorrectly connected, severely aged,
or excessively attenuated.

l Check the line attenuation or fiber connection, and replace the aged fiber.

Event Description: "The optical power of the IN interface of the OTU board will exceed the
threshold and the commissioning cannot proceed."
If the preceding prompt message is displayed, the budget optical power of the IN interface on
the OTU board will exceed the upper threshold. If the U2000 continues optimizing optical
power, the optical power exceeds the upper threshold and components are burned out.

l Check whether the attenuator before the OTU board at the receive end or transmit end is
configured properly. If the attenuator is not configured properly, replace it with a fixed
attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the attenuation meets the
designed attenuation.
l Check whether the logical fiber connections for the U2000 are consistent with the
physical fiber connections on the network according to the fiber connection diagram and
correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections.
5.7.8 Event code: 0x4A11E
Event Description: "Exceeds the lower threshold. You have commissioned the attenuator to
the minimum value, which still cannot reach the target optical power"
Cause:The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The actual line
attenuation is inconsistent with the designed attenuation, and the line is excessively
attenuated.

l Reconstruct the line according to the network design so that the line attenuation meets
the designed attenuation.
5.7.9 Event code: 0x4C012
Event Description: "Failed to query groups of optical cross-connections"
Cause:The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the optical cross-connect
group is not configured or the board is faulty.

l Check the NE to remove board faults. Alternatively, configure the cross-connect group
of the board on the U2000.
5.7.10 Event code: 0x4D104
Event Description:"Failed to query the wavelength. "
Cause:The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the OTU board is faulty.

l Check the NE to remove board faults.

5.7.11 Event code: 0xD1002

Description:"The board information is not configured."
Cause:The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that other users modify the
data being synchronized. As a result, some data fails to be synchronized and errors occur on
some boards.
l Synchronize data on sites where the boards with errors reside.
5.7.12 Event code:0x44000050

Event Description: "The calculated fiber loss is a negative value. Please check whether the
network connection is normal."
In addition, the current inter-NE fiber Loss (EOL) on the signal flow diagram of the Trail
Performance Analysis window is a negative value.
The probable causes for the preceding prompt message are as follows:
l The fiber connection of the board is incorrect.
l The board is faulty.
l Verify that the physical and logical fiber connections are correct.
l Verify that the board is functioning properly.
5.7.13 Event Code: 0x9706

The message is displayed when you query the optical fiber loss.
Event Description:"Query result is null."
The possible reasons of the preceding message are as follows:
l No OA board is configured at the transmit end.
l Due to the reasons such as a fiber cut or faulty board, a downstream node cannot receive
the data transmitted by an upstream node.
l The OSC communication is abnormal.
The solutions are as follows:
l Configure An OA board at the transmit end.
l Check whether the fiber connections and boards are normal.
l Check whether the OSC communication is normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Commissioning Optical Power on Site
6 Commissioning Optical Power on Site
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.
6.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
6.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
6.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.
6.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.
6.5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(New-Generation 100G)
The PID feature allows the system to automatically perform commissioning on optical power,
without any manual intervention. Users only need to check the optical power of PID boards.
6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G)
After PID boards are installed, you need to commission the PID boards.
6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board
This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of packet service board.
6.8 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment.
When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be
damaged. By testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the
received/transmitted optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.
6.9 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
6.10 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier
This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the
Raman amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light

For the forward Raman amplifier commissioning, to ensure normal adding and dropping
wavelength and to ease the commissioning, dummy light must be configured to fill the empty
channel. This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.
6.12 Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board
This section describes how to adjust the gains for the Submarine optical amplifier board.
6.13 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel
This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.
6.14 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
6.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board
ROADM board.
6.16 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM
The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3
dBm.
6.17 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength
System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
6.1.1 Basic Requirements

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power.
Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows:
l After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the minimum and
maximum values.
l Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to ensure that
the power fluctuations in a range do not affect services.
l After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for system
expansion.
Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:

l The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore, for a
CWDM network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The OSNR and
flatness do not need to be commissioned.
l Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specific
commissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the DWDM
network.
During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can add or delete
at one time is half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If there is only one wavelength
in the system, only one wavelength can be added at a time.
6.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.
General Sequence of Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal
flow. During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the
requirements on optical power, gain, and insertion loss for each board.
Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements on the
boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Usually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as one
network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction
and the receive direction.
For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is commissioned on a
per-NE basis according to the signal flow.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the optical
power for each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally, commission the receive
optical power for the destination OTM. After commissioning the optical power along the
transmit direction, commission the optical power in the reverse direction of the system.
Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power of an OptiX
WDM system.
Figure 6-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are optical NEs
(ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are back-to-back OTM
stations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE E is an OADM station.
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
135km/39dB 85km/27dB
55km/15dB 60km/16dB
Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA
:OTM :OLA : OADM
Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C.

First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to the
following sequence.
l Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow:
– At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C.
– At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B.
l Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow:
– At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A.
– At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B.
Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the A-F-E-D-C
network segment in both directions.
NOTE
For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 6.17 Example of Commissioning
Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments

The optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for commissioning
optical power.
l Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM
side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the multiplexed signals.
l Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexed signals.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical power. Use
the following method to verify the calibration:
Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical
spectrum analyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by using the optical
power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the
difference is more than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
NOTE
The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this method is used. When
this method is used, the noise impact does not need to be considered.
6.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
NOTICE
The overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the
APD laser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you insert the fiber loosely
from the input optical port of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make
sure the input optical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.
6.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light

This section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the U2000.

U2000
The signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals in actual
transmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not emit light,
refer to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the
board is not forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.
Precautions
NOTE
l The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the OTU is
forced to emit light.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical
port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
NOTE
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXScan set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.
Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
6.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Optical power meter
Precautions
NOTICE
Before the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is configured
according to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of the OTU (including the
WDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver overload to avoid damage to the optical
module during commissioning. Note that the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9
dBm. Adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure
that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -14 dBm to -25 dBm.For the
specifications about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the Product
Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Requirements
l Adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that
the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -12 dBm to -5 dBm; adjust the
input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input
optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point
-2) dBm.
NOTE
In the commissioning process, you should better commission the OTU received optical power to the
middle of the range of the above requirements.
NOTE
For the Client-side CFP optical module, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal
range: from (Average receiver power per lane (Min) +10lgN+3) dBm to (Average receiver power per
lane (Max) +10lgN-2) dBm (where N is the number of wavelengths of the input client-side multiplexed
signal). For the 4x25Gbit/s CFP and 4x10Gbit/s CFP optical module, the value of N is 4 and 10lgN is 6.
For the 10x10Gbit/s CFP optical module, the value of N is 10 and 10lgN is 10.
For example: For the 100GBASE-LR4-10km(CFP) optical module, the average receiver power per lane
(Min) is -10.6dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 4.5dBm, and the number of
wavelengths is 4. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
-1.6dBm to 8.5dBm.
For example: For the 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP optical module, the average receiver power per
lane (Min) is -10.8dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 3.5dBm, and the number of
wavelengths is 10. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
2.2dBm to 11.5dBm.
l Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end has
output the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this occurs, the input
optical power on the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual optical power by
adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
l After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU when the input
optical power reaches a normal state.
6.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Optical power meter
Before the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding tributary board,
adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator at the RXn
on the client side of the tributary board. This ensures that the input optical power is within the
optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point - 2) dBm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For the Client-side CFP optical module, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range:
from (Average receiver power per lane (Min) +10lgN+3) dBm to (Average receiver power per lane (Max)
+10lgN-2) dBm (where N is the number of wavelengths of the input client-side multiplexed signal). For the
4x25Gbit/s CFP and 4x10Gbit/s CFP optical module, the value of N is 4 and 10lgN is 6. For the 10x10Gbit/s
CFP optical module, the value of N is 10 and 10lgN is 10.
For example: For the 100GBASE-LR4-10km(CFP) optical module, the average receiver power per lane
(Min) is -10.6dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 4.5dBm, and the number of wavelengths is
4. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -1.6dBm to 8.5dBm.
For example: For the 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP optical module, the average receiver power per lane
(Min) is -10.8dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 3.5dBm, and the number of wavelengths is
10. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from 2.2dBm to 11.5dBm.
A 100GBASE-ER4 optical module supports a maximum of 40 km transmission distance and is mainly
applicable to the scenario in which the transmission distance is 10 km to 40 km. For the transmission distance
less than 10 km, a 100GBASE-LR4 optical module is required. For a 100GBASE-ER4 (CFP) module, a fixed
optical attenuator (FOA) can be added so that the total receive optical power (P) is less than -4 dBm. To be
specific, no FOA is required in case of P < -4 dBm, a 5 dB FOA is required at the receive end of the module
in case of -4 dBm ≤ P ≤ 1 dBm, and a 10 dB FOA is required at the receive end of the module in case of 1
dBm ≤ P ≤ 6 dBm.
6.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Optical power meter
l Before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the corresponding line
board, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the line board by
adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range: from
-12 dBm to -5 dBm.For NS4M board, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical
port IN of the line board by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within
the optimal range: from -9 dBm to -4 dBm.The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/
OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are consecutive with a 100 GHz
spacing. Each board (with a unique variant) supports only odd wavelengths or even
wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000,see Version Description
NOTE
In the commissioning process, you should better commission the line board received optical power to
the middle of the range of the above requirements.Before commissioning the NS4M board, you should
locking Wavelength by WMU Board, see Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.
l Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if the
station is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA of
the output port on the WDM side of the line board to make the gain flatness for each add
wavelength amplified by the OAU to be less than 2 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(New-

Generation 100G)
The PID feature allows the system to automatically perform commissioning on optical power,
without any manual intervention. Users only need to check the optical power of PID boards.
Prerequisites
l Recommended networking application conditions are satisfied.
l PID boards have been installed and fibers have been correctly connected.
l NPS4, NPS4E, TN13OBU1P3, TN13OBU2P3, and TN14OBU2P3 must be configured
on the same NE. It is recommended that TN13OBU1P3 or TN14OBU2P3 be inserted in
the adjacent slot on the left of NPS4E and NPS4 be inserted in the adjacent slot on the
right of the NPS4E.
l VOAs through which signals first traverse must be configured for TN13OBU1P3,
TN13OBU2P3 and TN14OBU2P3, and the service signal flow must be VI-->VO-->IN--
>OUT.

U2000
Recommended Networking Application

When the following recommended networking application conditions are satisfied, OA boards
are free of commissioning, and optical attenuators in the system are not required to adjust line
attenuation.
l SSMF fiber
– Fiber length less than or equal to 20 km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive
end and no OA board is required at the transmit end.
– Fiber length greater than 20 km but equal to or less than 40 km: TN14OBU2P3
must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit
end.
must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the
transmit end.
must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the
transmit end.
l LEAF fiber
– Fiber length less than or equal to 65 km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive
end and no OA board is required at the transmit end.
must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit
end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Principles for Automatic Commissioning

The following describes the operation procedure after devices are powered on:
1. (Automatic) The OA and PID boards are matched.
2. (Automatic) Commissioning is performed.
3. (Manual) NE data is uploaded.
4. (Manual) Output/Input optical power of each channel on the PID board is checked.
5. (Manual) Logical boards and logical fiber connections are created on the NMS.
To change information such as board slot IDs, trigger automatic matching again based on the
principles described in the following table.
Scenario Description Method for Principle

Triggering
Automatic
Matching
Automatic The slot ID of the Removing and re- Based on physical

matching is PID board needs to be inserting the OA fiber connections, the
completed. changed but that of board OA board
l No logical the OA board remains automatically
board or the same. Physical discovers its
fiber fibers have been connected PID board
connection is connected again. and automatically
created on matches the PID
The slot ID of the OA Changing the slot ID board.
the NMS. board needs to be of the OA board
l The related changed but that of In case of any change
logical the PID board on the board slot ID
boards or remains the same. or physical fiber
fiber Physical fibers have connection of a
connections been connected again. matched board, the
have been OA board needs to be
deleted from powered on again to
the NMS. trigger board
matching.
Removal and re-
insertion of an OA
board in the slot that
already has a logical
board will not trigger
automatic board
matching.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Scenario Description Method for Principle

Triggering
Automatic
Matching
Automatic board matching has been Re-creating logical New matching

completed, and logical boards and fiber fiber connections relationships match
connections have been created on the new logical fiber
NMS. connections
regardless of the
automatic matching
results (that is, the
original matching
relationships).
Commissioning Networking Diagram

This topic uses a 100G system that satisfies the following conditions as an example to
describe how to commission PID boards: The 100G system uses NPS4E boards and SSMF
fibers. The fiber distance is greater than 60 km but less than or equal to 80 km. TN13OBU2P3
boards are used at the transmit end and TN14OBU2P3 boards are used at the receive end.
Figure 6-2 shows the commissioning networking.
Figure 6-2 Commissioning networking

Site A Site B
OUT VI OUT VI OUT IN

TN13 TN14
OBU2P3 OBU2P3
Tribut Tribut Client
Client ary NPS4E NPS4E ary
service board board
service
IN OUT TN14
VI OUT VI OUT
TN13
OBU2P3 OBU2P3
Procedure
Step 1 Check the output optical power in each channel on the NPS4E/NPS4 board. If the output
optical power in any channel is inappropriate, replace the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration > Optical
Power Management from the left Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling that the operation was successful.
Click Close.
NOTE
The NPS4E/NPS4 board's WDM-side optical module launches proper optical power. For details on
proper optical power, see NPS4E Specifications or NPS4 Specifications in the Hardware Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Check input optical power of each channel on the NPS4E/NPS4 board. with reference to step
1. If the input optical power is abnormal, verify whether the line attenuation complies with the
design.
NOTE
Input optical power at NPS4E/NPS4 board's WDM-side input optical interface is within the range:
(receiver sensitivity dBm) to (overload dBm). For details on sensitivity and overload, see NPS4E
Specifications or NPS4 Specifications in the Hardware Description.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Create logical boards and fibers on the U2000.
6.6 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board(10G)

After PID boards are installed, you need to commission the PID boards.
Prerequisites
PID boards have been installed and fibers have been correctly connected.

U2000
When PID is applied on the following recommended networks, commissioning system power
is not necessary. Instead, you only need to check optical power for PID boards.
l When the TN55NPO2S board is used in a 40G, 80G, or 120G system, whether OA
boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance and attenuation. If the fiber
distance is 40 km or shorter, configure OA boards or not according to attenuation. If an
OA board is required in this case, configure a OBU1P1 board at the receive end.
l When the TN55NPO2L board is used in a 40G, 80G, or 120G system, the fiber distance
is greater than 40 km but equal to or shorter than 80 km, no optical amplifier is required
at the transmit end and the OBU1P1 board must be configured at the receive end.
l When the TN55NPO2ES board is used in a 40G, 80G, 120G, 160G, 200G system,
whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance and attenuation. If
the fiber distance is 40 km or shorter, configure OA boards or not according to
attenuation. If an OA board is required in this case, configure a OBU1P1 board at the
receive end.
l When the TN55NPO2EL board is used in a 40G, 80G, 120G, 160G, 200G system, the
fiber distance is greater than 40 km but equal to or shorter than 80 km, no optical
amplifier is required at the transmit end and the OBU1P1 board must be configured at
the receive end.
When PID is applied on the following networks (not recommended), commissioning system
power is required. Commission system power in the common way. For details, see the
Commissioning Guide.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l When the TN54NPO2 board is used in a 80G or 120G system, the incident optical power
of a single wavelength must be 2 dBm. It is recommended to use optical amplifiers on
which the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength is 2 dBm, or use optical
amplifiers on which the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength is 4 dBm
and 2 dB fixed optical attenuators (FOAs).
Commissioning Networking Diagram

An 80G system based on TN55NPO2 is used as an example to show how to commission PID
boards. If the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, an OA board is not required at the
transmit end but is required at the receive end (the OBU1P1 board is always configured).
Figure 6-3 shows the commissioning networking.
Figure 6-3 Commissioning Networking

Site A Site B
OUT VI OUT IN
OBU1P1
Client Tribut Tribut

TN55 TN55 Client
ary ary
service NPO2L NPO2L service
board board
IN OUT VI OUT
OBU1P1
NOTE
The OBU1P1 board at the receive end does not need to be commissioned. An optical attenuator in the
system is not required to adjust line attenuation.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the output optical power in each channel on the TN55NPO2 board. If the output optical
power in any channel is inappropriate, replace the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration > Optical
Power Management from the left Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed showing that the operation was
successful. Click Close.
NOTE
The NPO2/NPO2E board's WDM-side optical module launches proper optical power. For details on
proper optical power, see NPO2 Specifications or NPO2E Specifications in the Hardware Description.
Step 2 Check input optical power of each channel on the TN55NPO2 board. with reference to 1. If
the input optical power is abnormal, verify whether the line attenuation complies with the
design.
NOTE
Input optical power at NPO2/NPO2E board's WDM-side input optical interface is within the range:
(receiver sensitivity dBm) to (overload dBm). For details on sensitivity and overload, see NPO2
Specifications or NPO2E Specifications in the Hardware Description.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of packet service board.
Prerequisites
An packet service board cannot function as a master or slave subrack but an independent NE.

Optical power meter
Context
For the packet service board specifications, see the Hardware Description.
l For the PND2 board: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of
the PND2 board to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
-11 dBm to -4 dBm.
l For the EG16 or EX2 /EX8 board: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the
client side of the board to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range:
from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
l Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the packet service board at the
receive end has output the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this
occurs, the input optical power on the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual
optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
l After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the packet service board
when the input optical power reaches a normal state.
6.8 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board

damaged. By testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the
received/transmitted optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.
The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical power of an
optical interface board.
NOTICE
If the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the corresponding rate
through the U2000 before testing the specifications of this optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.8.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical

Interface Boards
If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the
equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment
can be damaged. This section describes how to test the mean launched optical power of an
optical interface board. This test is performed to ensure that the mean launched optical power
of each port is correct.
Prerequisites
The optical port to be tested must be enabled.
NOTE
The optical port of certain TDM optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before performing the
test, you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled. Determine if it is enabled by
doing as follows: In the NE Explorer window of the U2000 or U2000 LCT, select the board to be
tested. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface, and check the status of the Laser Switch in the list.
The status should be Open.
The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are connected
correctly.

Optical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber connectors, fiber
cleaning tools
Test Connection Diagram

Figure 6-4 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-4 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.
Optical power meter
SDH Board
Precautions
DANGER
During NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be tested. Cap
the removed optical fiber with a protective cap.
Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.
NOTE
The port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding connector.
Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by referring to
the section that describes the board bar code in the Hardware Description. Query the
specifications of the corresponding optical port by referring to the Hardware Description. By
doing this, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working wavelength of the
optical port.
Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes
stable. The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should be within the range
of the transmitted optical power for this optical port, specified in the Hardware Description.
Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the optical fiber
connectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter. For more information, see
"Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. After
cleaning the connectors, repeat Steps 1-5.
Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port.
----End
6.8.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical

Interface Board
damaged. This section describes how to test the actual received optical power for an interface
board. This test is performed to ensure the actual received optical power for each port is
correct.
Prerequisites
l The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the optical fibers are
connected correctly.
l The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must be normal.
l The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local station. In
addition, the opposite station must be commissioned and powered on.

Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Figure 6-5 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power.
Figure 6-5 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for an optical
interface board
Optical interface
board
Tested
optical
Fiber interface
jumper Fiber IN
- jumper
ODF ODF
OUT
Local station Adjacent station

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical interface board.
Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the fiber connector.
Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes the board bar
codes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port
by referring to the Hardware Description. By doing this, you can obtain the working
wavelength for the optical port to be tested.
Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working wavelength of the
optical port.
Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes
stable. The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical power.
Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by referring to the
optical power range, which is specified in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement:
Minimum sensibility + 3 dB ≤ Actual received optical power (measured value) ≤ Minimum overload
point – 5 dB
Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:

l If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber connector, ODF
fiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal, or replace the existing fixed optical
attenuator according to the measured optical power. For information about cleaning the
fiber connector, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the
Supporting Tasks.
l If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical attenuator is
normal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about the values of the optical
attenuators, see the Hardware Description and the description about the actual received
optical power in Step 5.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal.
Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the optical port
under test.
----End
6.9 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical

Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
The EDFA optical amplifier board includes DAS1, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, and OBU2.
l Seven types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106 ,
OAU107 and OAU105.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.

l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.
l One type of DAS1 is valid: DAS1.
The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the optical
amplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows.
Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (where N
is the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)
Because the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end face of a
fiber at an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening, the following two
solutions can be adopted.
l 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the following
operations:
– (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2
on the ODF. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Fiber splicing on the ODF
1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2
– (2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be spliced. Use
a fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break the
250 um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
– (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in the
standard single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and voids. If the splice
point is not free of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber jumpers.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The
heat shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment
room and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot.
l 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF,
complete the following operations:
– (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also
called the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on the ODF for
the SC.
– (2) Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT port of the
FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. See Figure
6-7.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-7 Fiber splicing on the line side
1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2
– (3) Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an

intermediate point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers to the
client-side line fiber at point 4, as shown in Figure 6-7.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The
heat shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment
room and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber
needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.
6.9.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier

Board
This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier board.
Adjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the optical
amplifier board to the typical input power for single wavelength ±1 dB. Ensure that the
number of wavelengths whose optical power is higher than the typical value is equal or close
to the number of wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is –19 dBm (40-channel)
and –13 dBm (10-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101 is –20
dBm (40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU103/TN12OBU103/
TN96OBU103 is –19 dBm (40-channel) and –22 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/
TN13OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 is –19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is –14 dBm (40-
channel) and –17 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN13OAU106 is –12 dBm (40-
channel) and –15 dBm (80-channel).
l If maximum total output optical power is 23dBm, typical input power of single
wavelength of the TN13OAU107 is –12 dBm (40-channel) and –15 dBm (80-
channel).
NOTE
According to the network planning, on the U2000 set the Maximum Output Optical Power in the
Advanced Attributes tab for the 13OAU107 board to confirm the specification of maximum total
output optical power.
channel).
channel).
l Typical single-wavelength input power of the DAS1 is -16 dBm (40-channel) or -19
dBm (80-channel).
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical
amplifier board is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input power of single
wavelength, adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to make the average single
wavelength input optical power reach the typical value.
NOTE
For the TN12/TN13 OA board and DAS1 board, the input end of the OA is not added with a VOA, but
instead uses the inner EVOA.
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical
amplifier board is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input power of single
wavelength, no VOA is needed.
6.9.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be complete.

U2000, optical power meter
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power
equals the maximum output optical power for single wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output
optical power of single wavelength is in the range of maximum output optical power of single
wavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If
it exceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the NE Explorer on the U2000.
Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain.
Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower Threshold
of Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board.
Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength.
Calculate the gain value.
Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single
wavelength
NOTE
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Check whether the gain calculated in Step 6 is within the value range.
l If the calculated gain is less than the minimum settable gain, increase the attenuation
value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This decreases the
average input power of single wavelength to the standard value.
l If the calculated gain is more than the maximum settable gain, decrease the attenuation
value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This increases the
average input power of single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement,
confirm the network design value with the network designer.
l If the calculated gain is within the value range, decrease the attenuation value of the
VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board to make single-wavelength input
optical power as close to maximum nominal single-wavelength input optical power.
Step 8 According to the results in Step 6, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board in the Basic
Attributes tab to ensure the single-wavelength output optical power meets requirements.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the U2000. If the gain difference of the actual
value and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If the setting fails,
check whether the gain is within the gain range.
----End
6.10 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier

This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the
Raman amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 6-1 provides the general commissioning procedures for CRPC and RAU1/RAU2 board.
Table 6-1 General commissioning procedures for Raman board

No. Task CRPC The Raman The Raman The Raman
board module of module of module of
RAU1/ RAU1/ RAU1/
RAU2 RAU2 RAU2
board board board
(Gain (Pump (Maximum
lockingLO power) gain)
CKGAIN)
1 6.10.6 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the Fiber
Connection
s
2 6.10.7 Y Y Y Y
Connecting
the Fiber
Jumpers on
the Line
Side
3 6.10.8 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the
Configurati
on of the
IPA
Function
4 6.10.9 N Y Y Y
Configuring
the
Working
Mode and
Fiber Type
for the
Raman
Board
5 6.10.10 N Y N N
Adjusting
the Gains
for the
Raman
Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
No. Task CRPC The Raman The Raman The Raman

board module of module of module of
RAU1/ RAU1/ RAU1/
RAU2 RAU2 RAU2
board board board
(Gain (Pump (Maximum
lockingLO power) gain)
CKGAIN)
6 6.10.11 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the On-off
Gain of the
Raman
Board
7 6.10.12 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the Gain
Spectrum
l "Y" indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.

l "N" indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
NOTE
When the RAU1/RAU2 board functions as the power detection board for the ALC, the ASE of the
RAU1/RAU2 board must be demarcated; otherwise, the ALC function cannot be implemented. For
details, see Calibrating ASE.
The commissioning for the RAU1/RAU2 board involves both EDFA and Raman modules. This topic
only involves the Raman module. For the commissioning procedure for the EDFA module, see 6.9
Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.
6.10.1 Preparations
This section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools required for
commissioning the Raman amplifier.
Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure. When
general amplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the system can achieve
better OSNR. The strong pump light output from the LINE optical port on a Raman amplifier
enters a fiber line. Therefore, disable the pump laser on the Raman amplifier before the
testing.
Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations:
l Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe covers, and
protective gloves.
l Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber connection
between the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar with the connection
between these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location of
the connector. Take the drawings into the equipment room.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope (400x or
higher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video fiberscopes. For more
information, see Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters.
l U2000 or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the single
station commissioning is performed. This section uses the U2000 as an example to
describe the commissioning procedure.
After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on another NE, you
must reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the network cable. The operation of
resetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt services.
6.10.2 Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions

The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. This section describes the safety
mechanism and safety precautions for a Raman amplifier.
Safety Mechanism
The raman pump laser output power level of the Raman board is CLASS 4, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface is above 27 dBm (500 mW).
In the DWDM system, an optical fiber break, an equipment failure or optical connector
removal may lead to the loss of optical signals. To prevent personal injuries resulting from
laser radiation, the system provides the IPA function. After the IPA function is configured, the
laser safety class of the Raman board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the
maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to
21.3 dBm (136 mW). This ensures personal safety for maintenance personnel.
Huawei WDM equipment adopts the following safety mechanisms to prevent human injury
and equipment damage:
l When the system is configured with IPA function, the system determines whether to
enable or disable the lasers of Raman amplifiers according to the fiber link status. It is
recommended not to operate a laser manually on the NMS.
l When a Raman laser is enabled, IPA cannot be deleted or disabled manually on the
NMS.
l On the NMS, view the value of Laser Status of a Raman board and the value of IPA
Status of IPA.
Safety Precautions
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, only an engineer who has
received trainings on WDM products and are familiar with safety instructions can perform
operations on WDM products. Take the following precautions when using the Raman
amplifier:
l Do not stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance of the
fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
l Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabled
When the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove the fiber
connector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber connectors are burned or
there may be personal injuries especially to the eyes.
l Clean the fiber surface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the fiber
jumper is dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and heats. As a result, the
jumper is easy to be damaged or burned, and the system performance is affected.
l Perform cable testing.
The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence, the type and
quality of the transmission cable influences the performance of the Raman amplifier. If
the fiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier has the poor quality (big loss point
or large reflection factor), the system performance is greatly influenced, and may result
in the line being burned. Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier is
necessary.
l Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.
The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm. Hence, the
fiber connector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber
connector is used, a large reflection is formed, which damages the fiber connector.
l Do not bend the fiber.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the
requirements (greater than 50 mm) and cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber jumper will
burn.
l Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the U2000.
For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is working
normally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the corresponding
command on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman amplifier.
l Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser.
Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the jumper at the
input port and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper.
l Meet output optical power requirements.
When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The requirements of
the near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power. High optical power may bring
damages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence for the CRPC board, and the
Pump power mode of the RAU1/RAU2 board, the power of the Raman pumping light
should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB.
6.10.3 Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface

Before powering on the Raman amplifier, ensure that the endface of the fiber connector is
clean.
Use the fiber microscope to check the jumper fiber endface. You can see that the clean fiber
endface is a gray circle. Sometimes, there is a light gray small circle in the middle of the gray
circle, which is the fiber core, as shown in Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-8 Endface of clean fiber connector 1
Figure 6-9 Endface of clean fiber connector 2
Figure 6-10 shows the endface with black dust. Wipe the dust away with the paper for
cleaning the fiber. If the dust remains there, use the alcohol to clean it. Never use the
detergent or refractive index matching liquid other than the alcohol. Otherwise, the bond in
the fiber connector may be dissolved. If the dust still remains there after cleaning, it indicates
that this spot of the endface of the fiber is damaged. If the damaged spot is the fiber core, it
indicates that the fiber core is burned-out. In this case, you need to replace the jumper. See
Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-10 Endface of stained fiber connector

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-11 Endface of burnt-out fiber
6.10.4 Requirements on the Fiber Line

The additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the requirements.
NOTE
Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a bi-directional
test. Use an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) to test the additional loss at both ends of the
fiber line and calculate the average of the tested two loss values.
Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the quality of the
local 40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.
l 0 km-20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be connected
to each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used, components may be burned and
the on-off gain of the Raman amplifier is affected.
l 0 km-10 km (0 mi.-6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652) or
0.2 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 10 km-20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652)
or 0.4 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 20 km-30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4 dB.
l 30 km-40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB.
l Over 40 km (24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 2 dB.
l The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.
6.10.5 Method for Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality

The section describes the method of testing the fiber cabling quality.
Prerequisite
Set the relevant parameters for the optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). If field
parameters cannot be determined and standard G.652 optical fibers are used, use the default
OTDR settings.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Precautions
1. Before using OTDR, make sure that OTDR connects to the fiber connector on the fiber
cable side. OTDR cannot connect to the connector on the equipment side. Make sure that
the fiber between the opposite station and the optical interface board is disconnected, to
prevent damage to the receiving optical modules because of high optical power. Caution:
An optical power instrument can tell us that the optical power of OTDR is low. However,
because the light from OTDR is not composed of continuous signals, the pulse peak
power is about 20 dBm. Hence, perform operations carefully to prevent damage to
human body or equipment.
2. Before testing a fiber, connect the output interface of OTDR to the fiber to be tested by
using a launch cable. Otherwise, the near-end connection loss cannot be measured
correctly. Decide the length of the launch cable based on the test item. When you are
going to test the fiber quality of a distributed Raman fiber amplifier, use a launch cable
with the length of 5 km or so. When you need to test the near-end connection loss of a
normal fiber, use a launch cable with the length from 300 m to 2000 m.
3. Make sure that the fiber end is clean. Otherwise, the test result might be affected. Before
each test, clean the fiber end by using dedicated fiber cleaning tools. Nondedicated
cleaning solvent may dissolve the adhesives inside fiber connectors.
4. Optical output interfaces of OTDR are normally of FC/PC or FC/APC type. Make sure
that the connector type of the fiber to be tested matches the interface type of OTDR.

OTDR and fiber.
Procedure
Step 1 Before the test, use a 5-kilometer transitional fiber (the same type as the line fiber) to connect
the OTDR output interface to the fiber.
NOTE
l Ensure that the endface of the fiber is clean. Otherwise, the measurements will be affected.
l The OTDR test value contains a dead zone of a certain length. You can use a transition fiber to avoid
this dead zone, and thus the real attenuation curve of the transmission fiber can be tested.
Step 2 First, test the loss of the entire fiber. It is recommended to use the automatic test function of
the OTDR. The parameters are set by the instrument.
Step 3 Test the cable near-end loss of the Raman amplifier manually. Set the basic parameters for the
fiber, for example, the refractive index n and the backscatter coefficient η.
NOTE
In general, the values of the two parameters are set by the fiber manufacturer. If they are not set by the
manufacturer, use the default values on the instrument, which will not affect the inspection result of the
fiber quality.
Step 4 Set the following parameters of the OTDR. Retain default values for other parameters of the
OTDR.
----End
Example
Parameter setting

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Test the cable near-end loss of the Raman amplifier manually. Set the following parameters
manually for the OTDR.
l Wavelength select
The wavelength must be the same as the transmission wave length. In general, it is 1550
nm.
NOTE
Some OTDRs have two fiber interfaces, which are output interfaces of two different wavelengths.
Make sure that the fiber is connected to the correct interface before the test.
l Pulse width
Choose the pulse width as narrow as possible. At the same time, ensure that the fiber has
no noise as far as 30 kilometers. You can test the narrowest pulse width first and
determine if the curve is smooth in the 30th kilometer. If the curve is not smooth, it
indicates that the fiber has noise. Then, choose a wide pulse width to test. When there is
no noise in the 30th kilometer, it indicates that the pulse width is the correct one. See
Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Smooth OTDR curve indicating that the fiber has no noise
l Measurement range
The best measurement range is more than two times long of the tested fiber. This
prevents the far end of the fiber from affecting the near end in the test. For some OTDRs,
after you choose a pulse width, the measurement range that you can choose has an upper
limit. You must choose the maximum value.
l Probe time
The longer the probe time you set, the higher the signal-to-noise ratio. For the test to the
near end, you do not need to set a very long time. Thirty seconds is long enough for the
test.
Result Analysis
In the normal case, the slope of the fiber (a roll or several rolls) curve is the same in the
OTDR test. If the slope of a segment is steeper, it indicates that the segment of fiber
attenuates a lot. If the main body of the curve is irregular and the slope changes frequently, is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
bent or arced, it indicates that the fiber is aging heavily and cannot be used for
communications. See Figure 6-13.
The OTDR describes the exception points of the fiber by events. The events are grouped into
two categories: reflection event and non-reflection event.
l The reflection events refer to the events that cause great reflection magnitude, such as
the loss and reflection caused by the active connector, mechanical connector, or
breakpoint in the fiber. The changes of the backscattering level value determine the loss
of the reflection event. The reflection summit on the backscattering curve determines the
reflection value. Figure 6-13 shows the Fresnel reflection of the breakpoint at the end of
the fiber.
l Non-reflection events refer to the events that the loss is caused by the fusion splice and
micro-bend in the fiber. The events do not cause reflection. It is represented in the OTDR
test curve with a sudden falling step attached to the backscattering level. Thus, the
change in the y-axis represents the loss of the event, such as the loss of the fusion splice
point in Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Analysis on the OTDR test results
The TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board has a built-in OTDR laser and provides the fiber
connection detect (FCD) function. You can press the FCD button on the front panel to trigger
FCD. After installing a TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board, inserting a fiber to the board, and
powering on the board to start the board software, you can press the FCD button to perform
FCD, regardless of whether logical boards are configured. The FCD will last 30 seconds. The
detection process and results can be identified by the FCD indicator blinking frequency and
indicator status. If the fiber connection is normal, the FCD indicator is steady green.
NOTICE
When the automatic OTDR detection function is disabled for the pump laser on the
TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board, the board cannot detect whether the end faces of its fiber
connectors are contaminated. As a result, fiber burning may occur if the pump laser is turned
on when the end face of a fiber connector on the board is contaminated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.10.6 Checking the Fiber Connections

This section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.
Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power.
When the SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical amplifier board, the
variable optical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it should be replaced with a fiber.

l Optical power meter.
l Optical fiber scope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is recommended.
l CLETOP cassette cleaner.
l Clean solvent. Use Isoamylol or propyl. Alcohol or formalin cannot be used.
l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven lens tissue is
recommended.
l Compressed air.
l Special cleaning roll.
l Optical cleaning sticks or cotton swabs used to clean optical connectors.
Precautions
NOTICE
l Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety.
l The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be very
careful during operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not completely
insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can be placed in the
designated slot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the board will not receive power from
the subrack.
Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of the FIU or
optical amplifier board with fibers.
Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure that the fiber
loss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean. Check this with a video
fiberscope (400x or higher magnification).
Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any, immediately replace
the line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.10.7 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side

This section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the Raman
amplifier.

Fiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing
Precautions
NOTICE
l The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are spliced, and
the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in fusion splicing.
l Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the fiber
connectors.
l The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner.
l To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and remove an
E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.
Context
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the endface of a fiber
connector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is contaminated, the probability is high
that the fiber endface is damaged. The high output optical power can cause eye damage or
skin burns in case of operator error. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the
loss of the near-end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km
to 20 km (12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion splicing.
There are two fiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to the actual situations
on site.)
Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference

Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce
Direct fiber None None Medium Low High

fusion splicing
on the ODF
Fiber splicing Low Very low Medium Medium Medium

through the
E2000-E2000
connector on the
ODFa

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference

Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce
a: When fibers splice through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, purchase an E2000
ODF box for fiber routing and installation. For details, see the E2000–ODF BOX
Installation Guide.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF.
The CRPC board shown is used as an example.
ODF CRPC
Line Sys
2. Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use a fiber
stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break a 250 um bare
fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
3. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting point after fiber
splicing.
4. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in the standard
single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids. Otherwise, re-splice the
fiber jumpers.
5. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot.
Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the procedure is
as follows:
1. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called
E2000-E2000) flange.
2. Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the CRPC
board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC board shown
is used as an example.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ODF CRPC
Line Sys
3. Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate

point. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is cut off or the customer
line cable to protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of
the fiber with the customer line cable at point specified by 4 in the figure above.
4. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the
splicing needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray.
Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new cabinet that is
installed, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the corresponding subrack. If the cabinet
and the subrack are already in service and therefore powered on, see 6.10.8 Checking the
Configuration of the IPA Function.
----End
6.10.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function

This section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA function when
you commission the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
When set Working Mode of the RAU1/RAU2 boards to Gain locking or Maximum gain,
you must set Fiber Type as the actual fiber type.
Precautions
NOTICE
The optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure the IPA
function should be previously. When a CRPC board is configured, set the threshold for the
detection board when configuring the IPA function with the detection board. Before the
commissioning at each station, disable the IPA function and the laser of the Raman board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the
Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer to Intelligent Power
Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.
Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them to
Disabled and click Apply.
----End
6.10.9 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the
Raman Board
This section describes how to configure Working Mode and Fiber Type for the RAU1/
RAU2 board.
Prerequisites
The RAU1/RAU2 board must be working properly.
When the LINE ports of the RAU1/RAU2 board is configured to Gain locking or Maximum
gain mode, you should set the Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Set Working Mode for the RAU1/RAU2 board as required.
1. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired RAU1/RAU2 board
and choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking, Maximum gain, or
Pump power as required for the LINE port.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
For the OUT port of the RAU1/RAU2 board, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or Power locking.
Step 2 Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers that have
been used.
2. Click Apply.
----End
6.10.10 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the RAU board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the RAU board must be correct.
The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.
Return loss detection is enabled.
The Raman module of the RAU board must work under Gain locking.
The Raman module of the RAU board must work under LOCKGAIN.

Optical power meter, U2000
Precautions
NOTE
The return loss detection of RAU is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI
alarm is reported during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or
RL_CRITICAL_HI.
Setting the RAU1 board gain

If the RAU1 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and EDFA module
for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 6-2 and Table 6-3.
Table 6-2 Setting the RAU1 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks
19 5 14 When the line loss is

in the range of 19
20 6 dB to 24 dB (smaller
21 7 than 24 dB), keep
the EDFA gain at 14
22 8 dB and set the
Raman amplifier
23 9 gain to ensure that
the line loss meets
the requirement.
L 10 L - 10 When the line loss is

in the range of 24
dB to 33 dB, keep
the Raman amplifier
gain at 10 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 6-3 Setting the RAU1 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C fibers
19 5 14 When the line loss is

in the range of 19
20 6 dB to 26 dB (smaller
21 7 than 26 dB), keep
the EDFA gain at 14
22 8 dB and set the
Raman amplifier
23 9 gain to ensure that
the line loss meets
24 10
the requirement.
25 11
L 12 L - 12 When the line loss is

in the range of 26
dB to 35 dB, keep
the Raman amplifier
gain at 12 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
loss meets the
requirement.
Setting the RAU2 board gain

If the RAU2 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and EDFA module
for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 6-4 and Table 6-5.
Table 6-4 Setting the RAU2 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
22 10 20 22 <= Loss (L) < 30

dB
23
Ensure that the gain
24 of the Raman and
EDFA modules keep
25 unchanged and
adjust the
26
attenuation of the
27 VOA between the
Raman module and
28 the EDFA module to
29 loss meets the
requirement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
L 10 L - 10 30 <= Loss (L) <=

41 dB
of the Raman
module consistently
remains at 10 dB
and adjust the gain
of the EDFA module
to ensure that the
line loss meets the
requirement.
Table 6-5 Setting the RAU2 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF fibers
22 12 20 22 <= Loss (L) < 32

dB
23
24 of the Raman and
EDFA modules keep
25 unchanged and
adjust the
26
attenuation of the
27 VOA between the
Raman module and
28 the EDFA module to
29 loss meets the
30 requirement.
31
L 12 L - 10 32 <= Loss (L) <=

43 dB
of the Raman
module consistently
remains at 10 dB
and adjust the gain
of the EDFA module
to ensure that the
line loss meets the
requirement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
1. Select the desired RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE ports of
the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them to Off and click Apply.
Step 2 Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the LINE port of the
Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If it is greater than 1 dBm, add a
fixed attenuator to the transmit end of the upstream site so that the input optical power on the
LINE port meets the requirement. Note that the input optical power on the LINE port of the
RAU board must be within the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm. If it is greater than +1 dBm, the
Raman amplifier may be damaged.
Step 3 After repairing the fiber , open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the Basic
Attributes tab, set the Laser Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM interfaces
are On, and click Apply.
Step 4 Set the gain of the RAU board by referring to Table 6-2, Table 6-3, Table 6-4 and Table 6-5.
1. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB) for the LINE and OUT ports according
to the actual line loss.
2. Click Apply.
----End
6.10.11 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the on-off gain of the Raman board.
Prerequisites
The Raman module of the RAU1/RAU2 board must work under Pump power.
The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under PLLOCKPWR.

Spectrum analyzer, U2000.
Precautions
NOTE
The return loss detection of TN11RAU is enabled by default. The return loss detection of TN12RAU is
disabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported during
commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value depends on the
type, length, and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are required to be the same,
different fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initial optical power of
the Raman amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values and the requirement of
the on-off gain of each channel in the following table.
Table 6-6 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fiber types
Board Type Fiber Type Optical Optical Power On-Off gain
Power of of Pump
Pump Group Group LINE-2
LINE-1
CRPC G.652 +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 11 dB
G.655 LEAF +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 13 dB
G.653/TW- +23.5 dBm +23.5 dBm 13 dB

RS/TW-C
RAU1/RAU2 G.652 +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 12 dB
G.655 LEAF +25.0 dBm +25.0 dBm 14 dB
G.653/TW- +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 14 dB

RS/TW-C
Context
The on-off gain refers to the difference between the output optical power on the SYS port of
the Raman board when the pump laser is turned on and the output optical power when the
pump laser is turned off. During the calculation of the on-off gain, optical noise must be
measured using an optical spectrum analyzer and be considered because it may have impact
on gain calculation.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure the pump laser of the Raman board is closed.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 board and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE ports of
the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them to Off and click Apply.
Step 2 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of the FIU
or optical amplifier board.
Step 3 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the
spectrum. Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.
Step 4 Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value.
Step 7 Open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the Basic Attributes tab, set the
Laser Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM interfaces are On, and click Apply.
Step 8 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula:
SYS on-off gain = SYS signal output power (Raman laser enabled) - SYS signal output power
(Raman laser disabled)
NOTE
Before reconnecting the SYS port of the Raman board to the IN port of the FIU board, you must disable
the laser of the Raman and IPA.
Step 9 Adjust the on-off gain.

NOTE
For the different fiber type, the on-off gain of each channel must be greater than the requirement value, which
is required by the Raman board. If not, adjust the on-off gain to make it meet the requirements.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the
CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical Interface/
Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBm respectively at
a time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel is higher than the requirement
value.
NOTE
For the /RAU1/RAU2 board, set the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the 9(LINE)-1 and
9(LINE)-2 port in the Advanced Attributes tab.
NOTE
If the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM-LBC-HIGH alarm is generated. If this alarm occurs, the
pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs while the gain does not reach
the requirements, shut down the pump lasers and check the line fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if
necessary.
----End
6.10.12 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum

This section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
The Raman module of the RAU1/RAU2 board must work under Pump power.

Spectrum analyzer, U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement.
l After adjusting the on-off gain to the requirement value, determine if the gain flatness
among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain flatness requires no
adjustment.
NOTE
The requirement of the on-off gain of each channel of the Raman amplifier refer to Table 6-6.
l If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the next step to
adjust the pump optical power according to the Raman gain spectrum to improve the
gain flatness.
Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.
Step 3 If the short-wavelength gain is lower than the long-wavelength gain, increase the optical
power of pump laser group 1 to elevate the shortwave gain or decrease the optical power of
pump laser group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of
0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness
among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB.
Step 4 If the short-wavelength gain is higher than the long-wavelength gain, decrease the optical
power of pump laser group 1 to lower the shortwave gain or increase the optical power of
pump laser group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of
0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness of
each wavelength is within 3 dB.
Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is higher than the
requirement value. If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in
steps of 0.1 dBm until the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than the requirement
value.
NOTE
If the pump optical power is changed, the on-off gains need be retested. If the on-off gain of any
wavelength is smaller than the requirement value, the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2
need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new optical power rate between the two
pump laser groups. The gain difference between the two pump laser groups cannot change.
----End
6.11 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light

For the forward Raman amplifier commissioning, to ensure normal adding and dropping
wavelength and to ease the commissioning, dummy light must be configured to fill the empty
channel. This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
For a system that cannot be fully configured with service wavelengths in the initial phase,
vacant channels must be filled with wavelengths that do not carry services, or the optical
power must be increased for one or more wavelengths that do not carry services to ensure that
the input optical power of optical amplifiers (OAs) satisfies the system requirement. The
wavelengths that do not carry any services are called dummy light wavelengths.
The networking for producing dummy light depends on the channel spacing of the system.
l 100 GHz channel spacing
The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+OA+OD, as shown in Figure
6-14.
NOTE
In a system with 100 GHz channel spacing, only even wavelengths are generally deployed. Therefore,
in the following figure, only even wavelengths in the dummy light block are transmitted from the TE
port on the ITL board to the OA board and the odd wavelengths transmitted from the TO port on the
ITL board are not used.
Figure 6-14 Networking for producing dummy light (100 GHz channel spacing)
EVEN
VO
IN
IN VI IN
OA(OBU101) ITL OA(OAU101) D40
OUT TE OUT
RDC
TDC M40V
Dummy Light
OTU
OTU
l 50 GHz channel spacing

The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+2xOA+2xOD, as shown in
Figure 6-15.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-15 Networking for producing dummy light (50 GHz channel spacing)
OTU
ODD
OTU
VO
IN
VI IN M40V
OA(OAU101) D40
TO OUT
RDC
IN
OA(OBU101) TDC
ITL
OUT VO
IN
VI IN
OA(OAU101) D40
TE OUT
M40V
RDC
TDC
OTU
EVEN
Dummy Light OTU
Requirements for Commissioning Forward Raman Amplifier Boards

Commissioning of a forward Raman amplifier is to adjust the pump power of the amplifier
and the signal power allocation for each channel of the amplifier. The adjustment is
determined by the system design for the spans. To commission a forward Raman amplifier
board, an optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) or an optical spectrum analyzing board must be
used at the receive end to determine in real time whether the OSNR flatness and optical power
flatness are as expected. It is recommended that the OSNR flatness be smaller than 1 dB and
the optical power flatness meet the system requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Before adjusting the optical power of wavelengths that carry dummy light, ensure that the
wavelengths that carry service signals provide the optimal performance. For details, see 7
Remotely Commissioning Optical Power.
Step 2 Set the EVOA attenuation for the M40V board's port connecting to the D40 board to the
maximum value.
Step 3 Set Working Mode to Power Locking for the first-level OA (OBU101) board. And set
Power Value to 0 dBm.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to Power Locking.
3. Set Power Value to 0 dBm.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 Ensure the first-level OA (OBU101) board to forcibly emit light.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Click Query.
3. Ensure Laser Status for the OUT port on the OBU101 board is On .
Step 5 Adjust the EVOA attenuation for the second-level OA (OAU101) board to the minimum
value, and then adjust the gain to ensure that the total output optical power of the board
reaches 20 dBm.
1. Right-click the NE housing the OAU101 board and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu to start the NE Explorer.
2. Select the OAU101 board and in the navigation tree choose Configuration > WDM
Interface.
3. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for the VI port on the OAU101 board to the
minimum value.
NOTE
In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management. On the right side of the
window, check the value of Input Power, which represents the optical power of the IN port on the
OAU101 board.
4. Click Apply.
5. Set Nominal Gain to 23dB (adjust the gain value according to the actual optical power),
and ensure that the total output optical power of the board reaches 20 dBm.
6. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the EVOA attenuation to 5 dB for the wavelength that carries dummy light next to the
wavelength that carries service signals on the M40V board.
Step 7 Fine-tune the EVOA attenuation for the wavelength that carries dummy light and other
wavelengths that carry service signals on the M40V board to ensure that the board provides
the optimal optical power balancing among the wavelengths.
Step 8 Repeat Step 6 through Step 7 to adjust the optical power of the remaining wavelengths that
carry dummy light one by one to ensure that the system will be able to provide the optimal
performance when a maximum of wavelengths are provisioned.
----End
6.12 Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier

Board
This section describes how to adjust the gains for the Submarine optical amplifier board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The configuration of the DUMMY LIGHT must be complete.

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network
Figure 6-16 shows the diagram of a submarine network with OBU103:
Figure 6-16 Network with OBU103

Transmit Receive
End End
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
WSM9 OBU103 TD20
A
OTU OTU
TO RO
IN B RPT B
IN OUT
OBU103 ITL OBU103 WSM9 OA OA WSD9
TE RE OUT
Dummy Light
OTU OTU
OTU A A OTU
WSM9 WSD9
OTU OBU103 OBU103 A OTU
A
OTU OTU
WSM9 OBU103 OBU103 WSD9
OTU OTU
Procedure
Step 1 Commissioning Amplifier Boards of group A as Figure 6-16.
2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to Gain Locking.
3. Click Apply.
4. Follow-up commissioning procedure, see Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA
Optical Amplifier Board.
Step 2 Commissioning Amplifier Boards of group B as Figure 6-16.

2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to APC.
NOTE
The configuration of the DUMMY LIGHT must be completed before setting Working Mode.
3. Set Power Value,the value rang: from -7 to 20 dBm.
NOTE
Set Power Value to make sure the input optical power of the RPT is nominal.
4. Click Apply.
5. On the Basic Attributes tab, Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for the VI port
on the OBU103 board, make sure the input optical power of the OBU103 board reaches
the nominal value.
6. Click Apply.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.13 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory

Channel
This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.
The system offers two types of supervisory channels:

l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
l Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)
The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel board DAS1, HSC1, ST2, SC1 or SC2. The
board is used to transmit and receive the supervisory information.
The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel boards. In this mode, the optical
transponder board (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels
for transmission.
NOTE
After the boards are commissioned and work normally, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.
6.13.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC

This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must be
complete.

Optical power meter, fixed optical attenuator (FOA)
The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The transmit optical
power of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirements of the optical power
commissioning on the OSC are as follows:
l The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8 dBm.
NOTE
The receive optical power of the ST2 board and the OSC board on the DAS1 board is in the range of -41 dBm
to -10 dBm.
The transmit optical power of the TN11HSC1 board is in the range of 5 dBm to 10 dBm.
The receive optical power of the TN12HSC1 board is in the range of -42 dBm to -10 dBm. The transmit
optical power of the TN12HSC1 board is in the range of 13 dBm to 14 dBm.
To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, FOAs that are
required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Table 6-7 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board

Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (150Km) Fix Attenuator on the
Optical or DAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss SC1/SC2 Board (Line
Power Is the EOL Value) Insertion Loss Is the
Incident EOL Value)
Scenario
or Not 0=<IL<15 15=<IL<25 25=<IL 0=<IL<20 20=<IL
An EVOA 15 dBa NA NA 15 dBb NA

is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier at
the receive
end
No EVOA 20 dBc 10 dBa NA 15 dBb NA

is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier at
the receive
end
l a:Configure the FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX port on the
DAS1 board.
l b:Configure the FOA at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 port on
the SC2 board.
l c:Configure the 10 dB FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX port
on the DAS1 board. Configure the 10 dB FOA at the RM port on the FIU board
l Table 6-8 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board

Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (80Km) Board (Line Insertion
Optical Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0=<IL<10 10=<IL<15 15=<IL<20 20=<IL
Scenario or
Not
An EVOA is 15 dBd 10 dBa 5 dBa NA

configured
before an
optical
amplifier at the
receive end

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (80Km) Board (Line Insertion

Optical Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0=<IL<10 10=<IL<15 15=<IL<20 20=<IL
Scenario or
Not
No EVOA is 15 dBd 10 dBa 5 dBa NA

configured
before an
optical
amplifier at the
receive end
l a:Configure the FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX port on the
DAS1 board.
l d:Configure the 10 dB FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX port
on the DAS1 board. Configure the 5 dB FOA at the RM port on the FIU board
l Table 6-9 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board for Raman System
Line Insertion Loss(EOL Value) Fix Attenuator on the OSC board of

the ST2 or DAS1 Board
0=<IL<24 NA
24=<IL<30 7 dBa
30=<IL NA
a: If a more than 7 dB FOA has been configured for the ST2 or DAS1 board refer to
Table 6-7or Table 6-8, it does not need to configure other FOAs.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC board.
l The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at the local
station.
l The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at the local
station.
l The RX port on the DAS1 board is the receive optical port of the OSC board and must be
connected to the TM port. The TX port is the transmit optical port of the OSC board and
must be connected to the RM port.
Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit optical
power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to 0 dBm. If it does not meet
the requirement, replace the board.
NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receive
optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The input
optical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the basis of the actual optical power by
adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
NOTE
If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists, check whether
the OSC board, the survey report, or line loss test report is faulty, and if so, clear the fault.
Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss
between the IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU. The values
should be less than 1.5 dBm.
----End
6.13.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power of the ESC
board.
When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of the OTU
transmits light), the ESC route is set up.
By default the WDM side of the OTU board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit light, see
6.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the board is forced to emit
light. If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the board so that it emits light forcibly.
6.14 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and

Demultiplexer Board
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
6.14.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V Boards

M40V boards.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA for each
wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
In the power adjusting station, you should reserve at least 2.5 dB for the mean attenuation of single-
wavelength channels.
l Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V at the transmit end to 5
dB before commissioning.
a. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
c. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
l Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal
flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel in the WDM
mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port on
the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each
channel on the U2000 as follows:
– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board in the NE Explorer, choose
Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each current
wavelength.
NOTE
l The MON port of the DAS1, RAU1, RAU2, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a 1/99 tap of
the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).
l The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB
lower than the actual signal power).
l According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the largest or the
smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the corresponding channels of
the M40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) near the average value.
l Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4
dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the channels is within 2 dB.
NOTE
Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after this
commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to make
the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure
that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near the standard value.
6.14.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss of the FIU
board.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTICE
If fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power commissioning is
seriously affected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber adapter for every external fiber
that is connected into the equipment through the ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning
before inserting an external fiber to an optical port on the equipment.
Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:

l IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TC
port
l RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port – Output optical power of
OUT port
l IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TM
port
l RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port – Output optical power of
OUT port
Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards:
l LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port – Output optical
power of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port – Output optical
power of LINE2 port
l LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port – Output optical
power of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port – Output optical
power of LINE2 port
The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical spectrum
analyzer. The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows.
Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIU
l For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIU
l For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical
power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the
optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with
the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the
optical power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the
optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510
nm with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum
6.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board

FOADM board.
Network with MR2+MR2

Figure 6-17 shows the diagram of a network with MR2+MR2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-17 Diagram of a network with MR2+MR2
1 2 3 4
MO
OA OA
OUT IN OUT
TC IN OUT IN MI OUT RC
IN F F
MR2 MR2 I
I
U U
MI
OA OA
OUT MO IN OUT IN
OUT RC OUT IN TC
O O O O
West T T T T East
U U U U
1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end

3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU
Network with MR8V+MR8V

Figure 6-18 shows the diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V.
Figure 6-18 Diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V
1 2 3 4
OUT
MO OA
OA OUT
TC IN MI IN OUT RC
IN OUT VI F
F MR8V
MR8V I
I
U OUT U
MI
OA OA
MO VI OUT IN
IN TC
OUT RC OUT
O O O O O O
West T T T T T
East
T
U U U U U U

The commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l In the pass-through direction:

– For MR8V, adjust the VOA on the MR8V in the pass-through direction. Make the
pass-through wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between MR2s. Make the pass-through wavelength meet
the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end.
l In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator at the input
end of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical
power of the OTU.
l In the add wavelength direction:
– For MR8V, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding
wavelengths and the MR8V to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and
the pass-through wavelength.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding
wavelengths and the MR2 to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and
6.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

ROADM board.
This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network using ROADM
boards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring network uses the following
ROADM boards:
l ROAM+ROAM
l WSD9+WSM9
l WSD9+RMU9
l RDU9+WSM9
l WSMD4+WSMD4
l WSMD2+WSMD2
l WSMD9+WSMD9
NOTE
l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9,
RDU9, WSMD2, WSMD9 and WSMD4 are the same.
l The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. For
applications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment
mode.
l The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN port at
the transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the U2000.
6.15.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM

+ROAM)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with ROAM
+ROAM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network with ROAM+ROAM

Figure 6-19 shows the diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM.
Figure 6-19 Diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM
1 2 3 4
OAU
OAU
F OUT IN F
IN OUT
I ROAM ROAM I
OAU
OAU
U U
OUT IN OUT IN
OBU OBU
West East
D40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE
TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or
connected directly.
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add and pass-through wavelength
directions.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east
OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN
port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single
wavelength. The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output
optical power to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the rated optical power of
the IN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single
wavelength. The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output
optical power to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
l Manual power adjustment is required in the drop wavelength direction. Configure the
fixed optical attenuator at the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end. Select the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
fixed optical attenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU to ensure that
the input optical power meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame) between
the ROAM and D40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the optical
amplifier to a value in the nominal range. If the input optical power is in the nominal
range when the VOA is not added, then the VOA is not required.
NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive
end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an
avalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the
receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed
frame are required.
6.15.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

(WSD9+WSM9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with
WSD9+WSM9.
Network with WSD9+WSM9

Figure 6-20 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9.
Figure 6-20 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
D40 M40
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN
M40 D40
West East
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

NOTE
connected directly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through
wavelength directions.
l In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west
OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of
the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for
the drop wavelength.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the
OTU or through the MRx or D40 to the OTU.
l In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to
the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT
port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength.
Set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the
typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure
that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for
l I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at
the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east
OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the
requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the
MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit
end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

(WSD9+RMU9)
WSD9+RMU9.
Network with WSD9+RMU9

Figure 6-21 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-21 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
OA
D40 MRx M40 T
O
A
ROA
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
IN
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
OUT ROA OUT IN
T
O
A M40 MRx D40
West East
OA
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through
wavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the MRx or M40V board)
directions.
– In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical cross-
connection from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of
the WSD9 board to ensure that the optical power of each drop wavelength sent to
the OTU board meets the specification requirements.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength directly to the
OTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or D40.
– In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from
the west FIU to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts
the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-
through wavelength.
– In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths directly):
Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit
end to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each port of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical
power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the optical
power needs to be manually adjusted.
When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs
to be configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the RMU9 board. And a VOA
needs to be configured between the ROA port and the optical amplifier. When
wavelengths are added through the MRx board, the TOA and the ROA ports on the
RMU9 board are connected to each other directly by a fiber.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that the input
power flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths on the east
OAU at the transmit end meet the system requirements.
l In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function, the RMU9
board has certain requirements on configuration. These requirements are as follows:
– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards when the
OTU board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this case, the APE
function can be automatically implemented.
– When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9
board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In this case, the APE
function can be automatically implemented.
– If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be
implemented.

(RDU9+WSM9)
RDU9+WSM9.
Network with RDU9+WSM9

Figure 6-22 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-22 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
MRx D40V M40
OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN
M40 D40V MRx

West East
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

NOTE
connected directly.
NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-through
wavelength, and drop wavelength through the MRx board or the D40V board.
– In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west
FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of
the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength.
The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in
each channel of the MRx board or the D40V board to ensure that the input optical
power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the
OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single
wavelength, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the
transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of
the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east
OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN
port of the east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of
the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through
the MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the
transmit end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not
required.

(WSMD4+WSMD4)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with
WSMD4+WSMD4.
Network with WSMD4+WSMD4

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD4. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration
purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar.
Figure 6-23 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4.
Figure 6-23 Diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4

1 2 3 4
DM4
OA OA
F IN OUT IN AM4 OUT IN OUT F
I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
U U
AM4 IN
OA OA
OUT IN OUT DM1 DM4 OUT IN
AM1 AM1 DM1
OA OA
West East
D40 M40 M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE
l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown.
These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The commissioning requirements for the WSMD4 are as follows:
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU
board on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power
range of the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can
meet the OTU design requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame)
between the demultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical
power is within the nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical
power is already within the nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the VOA
is added, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive
end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an
APD module is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA
in the dashed frame are not required.
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA
in the dashed frame need to be configured.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east
FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical
power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the
input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds
wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.

(WSMD2+WSMD2)
WSMD2+WSMD2.
Networking with WSMD2+WSMD2

This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD2. In this section, the
networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
O O O O
1 2 T T T T 3 4
U U U U
D40 M40
AM
DM
IN TC OUT OUT
EXPI OUT
OA OA
EXPO IN RC
IN IN OUT
F F
West East
I WSMD2 WSMD2 I
U U
IN IN
OUT OUT OUT EXPI
OA OA
RC IN EXPO OUT TC IN
DM
AM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE
l The M40 or M40V can be used as the multiplexer board.

l If only one wavelength needs to be added, you can directly connect one OTU to the AM port of the
WSMD2.
The commissioning requirements of the WSMD2 are as follows:
meet the OTU design requirements.
l In the pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l In the add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.

wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA needs to be added
before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the
M40, the VOA is not required.
NOTE

(WSMD9+WSMD9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with
WSMD9+WSMD9.
Network with WSMD9+WSMD9

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD9. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
LIN SOUT IN EXPO SIN LOUT
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
DAS1 TX WSMD9 WSMD9 TX DAS1
RM RM
EXPO IN
SIN OUT EXPI SOUT LIN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect
boards in other dimensions.
meet the OTU design requirement.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
wavelength.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
wavelength.
6.16 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM

The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3
dBm.
Prerequisites
Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper
Procedure
Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical power
must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the specified
range. Otherwise, replace the DCM.
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the
DCM
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.17 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on

10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.
NOTICE
Ensure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, the
system performance is affected.
l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before
optical power commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light normally, start the
commissioning station by station.
l Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning.
Compare the value reported by the NE and the value tested by the instruments. Ensure
that the two optical power values are the same.
NOTE
The optical power is queried by using the U2000. The difference between the U2000 value and the value
tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
6.17.1 Example Description

This section describes the network of project X.
Figure 6-26 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are the
NG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE
C are the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations.
And the ONE E is the OADM station.
Station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network.
If station E uses the FOADM boards, see 6.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM
Board for its commissioning description.
If station E uses the ROADM boards, see 6.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM
Board for its commissioning description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-26 Network diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
55km/15dB 60km/16dB
Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA
: OTM :OLA : OADM
NOTE
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate the
commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same
as the commissioning method for the signal flow from west to east.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-26, 2OTM means back-to-back OTM
6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of an OTM
station along the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 6-27 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
West To F I SC2 I To B East
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX
Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

VOA
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station A IN OUT
DCM
D1 D2 A1 A2
LINE C SY S TDC RDC
R
P OAU1 MR2 OBU1
C IN TC IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
TM RM1 TM2 RM
FI SC2 FI
West To F U U To B East
RM TM1 RM2 TM
D
OBU1 MR2 OBU1 C
M
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The
optical fiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the client side of the OTU.
Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU.
Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain the
optical module information on the client side of the OTU.
Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client side.
Compare the launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power
on the client side of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed optical attenuator for later use.
Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the client side of
the OTU by using an optical power meter.
Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the OTU to ensure
that the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.
Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification requirements, insert
a fiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input optical power at the RX port in the
commissioning record.
Step 8 Check whether all of the east OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs emit light. If
not, check whether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using an optical
power meter.
Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power meter, and
record the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between the optical power of the
port and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB,
check whether fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by
using an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by
using an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, measure the input optical power at the A1 and A2 port on the
MR2 by using an optical power meter.
Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to scan the
multiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the output port on the
OTU to adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths. In this manner, ensure that the
single-wavelength output optical power of the M40 is consistent with the nominal single-
wavelength input optical power of the OA at the transmit end.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the
MR2 board.
Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the
insertion loss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the insertion loss of
each wavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength passes through the board. If the
optical power is abnormal, check the fiber connection to the Mn port.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the MR2 board.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit
OBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and measure the optical
power at the IN port on the OBU1.
Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of a single
wavelength is in the standard range.
Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following formula: Gain
= Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power of a single wavelength.
The gain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower than 2.0 dB.
Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power, and gain of
each wavelength of the OBU1.
Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The variance between the power displayed on the U2000 and the power measured by
using the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Otherwise, replace the
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical power meter. If
the variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and the optical power at the
OUT port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and
whether the fibers are clean.
Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RC
to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.0 dB.
Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical power
meter, and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the FIU. If the variance
between the optical power at the two ports is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are
routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RM
to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output optical
power at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed.
----End
6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at
an OLA station.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 6-30 Fiber connection of OLA station B
Station B
D
C OBU1
M
IN TC IN OUT RC OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
I SC2 I To C East
West To A
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
D
C
OBU1 M
OAU1
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
RDC TDC
Fix optical attenuator ODF side

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare
the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the line
attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is
larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to
determine whether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables
are faulty, clear the fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the
west FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values
in the commissioning record.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The insertion
loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dBm. Record the
input optical power of the RM1 port in the commissioning record.
Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the commissioning record.
Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the OUT port on
the east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber
to the RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning
record.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC port on the
west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical
power values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion
Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-
to-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBU to
commission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to nominal value.
Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss of
the VOA and DCM.
Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end
of the OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in 6.17.2 Commissioning
Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the OUT port of
the east FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when
disconnecting the fiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in
the commissioning record.
Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion
----End
6.17.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at
the receive end of an OTM station.
Prerequisites
The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 6-31 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT M M02 D02
OUT LOM LOM D OUT TC
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

VOA
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT OUT M M02 D02
D TC
LOM LOM OUT
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station C IN OUT
TDC RDC D1 D2 A1 A2
D
OAU1 C OBU1 MR2 OBU1
IN TC OUT M IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
West To B I SC2 I To D East
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
OBU1 MR2 OAU1

OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
DCM
RDC TDC
L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 6.17.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 6.17.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow.
Then measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode. Or connect
the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow.
Then measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel on the U2000 by completing
the following operations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Log in to U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
the NE is displayed.
l Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
l Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
l Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
l In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each current
wavelength display.
NOTE
You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-to-
East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power and OSNR of each wavelength
of the IN port on the OAU1.
Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the West-
Receive-to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1
on the U2000 to commission the launched optical power to the maximum value for single
wavelength for the OAU1.
NOTE
For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see 6.9 Commissioning Optical Power
of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.
Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical power, gain of
each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal.
Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to
the typical value by using the U2000.
Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end must be
higher than the designed OSNR in the actual project.
Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM is the
same as that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10 through Step 12 in
6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port on the west
board to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the MR2
board.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port
on the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port
on the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the D1 and
D2 ports on the MR2 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The insertion loss
must satisfy the following requirements and the maximum difference between the insertion
loss values must be lower than 2.0 dB. If the difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the
board with a new board.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the
optical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APD
is used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that
the input optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does not
meet the requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received
optical power is within the standard range.
Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical power
meets the requirements.
Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.
Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctly
connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.
Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the U2000. The difference
between the values on the U2000 and the test values must be lower than 2.0 dB. The number
of error corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC function must be less than
100,000. If the number of error corrections is more than 100,000, locate and correct the fault.
Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the client
equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RX
ports on the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF side. In addition, a fixed optical
attenuator needs to be added before the RX port.
NOTE
Section 6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 6.17.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 6.17.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive
End show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the
multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar to these.
----End
6.17.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer

Board+Demultiplexer Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station along the
west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
Fiber connections and network configuration must be complete.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed optical
attenuator, variable optical attenuator (VOA), U2000 computer
Figure 6-34 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station

Station E
DCM
D M
TDC
LINE C SYS RDC
IN 4 D03 Tx Rx M03 4
IN RC
TC OTU OTU
R OAU1 0 0 OBU1
P D02 M02
IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT
C OTU OTU
D01 M01
OTU OTU
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
OTU OTU
M02 D02
OUT OTU OTU
OUT OUT D TC
M M03 D03 D
OBU1 OTU OTU OBU1 C
OUT RC 4 4 IN M IN
IN IN
0 0
Fixed optical attenuator Optical distribution frame (ODF)

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM station
using the multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 6.17.4 Commissioning Optical
Power of OTM Receive End.
Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan the
multiplexed signals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through wavelength,
adjust the VOA in each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical power flatness of the pass-
through wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power input to the OBU1 is
consistent with the nominal single-wavelength input optical power.
Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the same way
as the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more information about the
commissioning procedure, see 6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the
OTM Station.
----End
6.17.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)

This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-east signal
flow in the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the optical power
commissioning procedure for an FOADM station.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR2 is considered as an example.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 6-35 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

VOA
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D MO MO OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I I
TC M OUT IN IN MI IN OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
MR2 MR2 MR2
MI OUT IN
MI
OBU1 OAU1
IN
RC OUT IN OUT OUT MO TC
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM
L L L L L L
Q 4 4 4 Q 4
M G G G M G

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 6.17.3
Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of
the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 6.17.3 Commissioning
Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5
in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 6.17.3 Commissioning
the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the same as the
commissioning method for the OLA station. For more information, see Step 10 through Step
12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
NOTE
The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical power
commissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The optical power,
gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.
Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after commissioning the west
OBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with the highest output optical power.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the
MR8V boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the
receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the
MR8V boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the
receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 ports on the
two MR2 boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the
receiving end.
Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that the input
optical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.
NOTE
For the specific specifications of OTUs, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the input optical
power meets the requirements.
Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on the
west MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the D1
port and to the D2 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port
on the first west MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 13 For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and
MO ports on the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2 in the
same way.
Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical
power of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit
end conforms to the standard value.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical
power of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, adjust the attenuation of the VOA between the east MR2 and
the west MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical
power of the pass through wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit
Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical power meter.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit
end conforms to the typical input power for a single wavelength.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on
the east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on
the east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT ports on the
east MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8
ports to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on
the east MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8
ports to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on
the east MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 port and the A2
port to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to the OUT port
on the east MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east OBU1 by using
an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power of a single
wavelength – Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness for each
wavelength must be lower than 2 dB.
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the value on the U2000 and the measured value must be
lower than 2 dB.
Step 22 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of the RC and
the OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
----End
6.17.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM

+ROAM)
This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in
the ROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)
Figure 6-38 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OBU1 OBU1 F
To D IN OUT EXPI IN OUT To F
I RC ROAM
EXPI
ROAM TC I
U OBU1 OAU1 U East
West EXPO
OUT IN OUT IN
M M M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0 0 0
OUT 1 2 1 2 IN
OBU OBU DCM
D40 D40
L L L L
Q O Q O
M G M G

VOA
Procedure
optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 6.17.3
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU, from the west FIU to
the west OTU. Create the optical cross-connection from east OTU at the transmit end to the
east FIU on the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUs
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the
optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD
module is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identified
through the bar code information pasted on the front panel of the module. The APD also has a
corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the
input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO ports for the west ROAM with an optical
power meter. Measure the input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output
optical power at the Dn port of the D40.
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port. Calculate the pass-through
loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the west ROAM. Calculate the insertion loss for the
D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero +
Attenuation value of the inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss of the ROAM board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the
ROAM. Method 1 is recommended.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for east OTU
and west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN
port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the ROAM board. This
ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end
is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT ports for the east ROAM by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn port to the OUT port and the pass-through loss
from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the east ROAM.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside
VOA of the board
insertion loss of the ROAM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 16 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power for each output
wavelength of the OUT port for east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power for the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less
than 2 dB.
Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT
ports of the east FIU, sees Step 13 and Step 14 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
----End
6.17.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)

the ROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)
Figure 6-39 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Station E
D40 M40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
West F EXPO F East
OBU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
To D TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
U
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

VOA
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same
wavelength at the same time.
Procedure
optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of
the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This
ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to
fine-tune the power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop
wavelength of the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port
of the west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the
requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power for the west pass-
through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through
wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical
input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use the second
method to fine-tune the optical power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power
of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is
equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an
optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 – the output optical power of D40

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.
NOTE
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to
or less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east
OTU. This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths for the IN port on
the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single
wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to
fine-tune the optical power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-
through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the
typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
NOTE
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate
the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the
inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be
equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
than 2 dB.
ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
----End
6.17.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)

the ROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)
Figure 6-40 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR8V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
OUT EXPI OUT

OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR8V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
OUT EXPI OUT

OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR4
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
TOA
DM AM
F TC OUT EXPO OUT F
ROA
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
IN IN EXPI OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT ROA EXPO IN
TC
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR4 D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G

VOA
NOTE
Procedure
optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports
on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of
the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU on the U2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the east
OTU that is connected with RMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended during
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength from the
west OTU. This ensures that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the
receive end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to
2. Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the U2000.
Ensure that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU is equal to the typical input
power of a single wavelength.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the
D40 board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 12 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for
the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to
Test the input power of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually
set the corresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This
ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is
Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port and the pass-through loss
from IN port to the EXPO port of the WSD9 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to
or less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths for the east OTU board (the OTU is directly
connected to the RMU9 board). Method 1 is recommended during deployment
commissioning.
The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each add wavelength of
each east OTU. This ensures that the input power the single add wavelength of the
OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use method 2 to
Test the input power of east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. M set the
corresponding VOA of each add wavelength for the east OTU in the east RMU9. This
ensures that the input power of the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the
Step 16 For wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MRx,
perform the following substeps:
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR4 is considered as an example.
1. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx
to 3 dB.
2. Set the VOA attenuation between the MRx and OTU to the minimum.
3. Determine the smallest input optical power value for wavelengths added through the
MRx to the IN port of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power for each of the other
wavelengths to the smallest input optical power value to flatten the optical power.
4. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx
to obtain the typical input power of a single wavelength of the OBU1 added through the
MRx.
Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MRx, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the MRx board must satisfy the following requirements.
l For the MR8V board, the insertion loss for the MR8V board should be equal to or less
than 3.5 dB.
l For the MR4 board, the insertion loss for the MR4 board should be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the RMU9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 19 Calculate the insertion loss for each add wavelength from the AMn port to the OUT port.
Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the RMU9.
NOTE
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about
the insertion loss of the RMU9 board.
Step 20 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
than 2 dB.
Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of the insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT
OLA.
----End
6.17.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM

(RDU9+WSM9)
the ROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites

attenuator, VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)
Figure 6-43 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with RDU9+WSM9)

O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Station E
D40 M40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
IN
West F IN IN EXPO RC F East
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
EXPI
To D U TC OUT OUT OUT U To F
OUT
OUT EXPI TC
OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
RC EXPO IN
IN
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

VOA
NOTE
Procedure
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 6.17.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that
of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end,
from the west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
on the U2000.
Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the MR8V board or the D40 board, adjust the fixed
optical attenuators to meets requirements for the west drop wavelengths during deployment
commissioning.
NOTE
In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, select Manual related to the optical cross-
connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the
drop wavelength of the RDU9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the west
OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength.
This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths of the IN port
on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-
through wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by using an
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east
OTU. This ensures that the average input power for the add wavelengths of the IN port
on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-
through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40, a VOA (in the solid frame)
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate
the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board should be
equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output wavelength
for the OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1 by using the
than 2 dB.
OLA.
----End

(WSMD4+WSMD4)
the ROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.
Prerequisites
l The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
l The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section,
the networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for illustration purposes. The
network providing multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as multiple networks
providing two-dimensional grooming.
Figure 6-44 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC RC OUT
DM4
OBU1 OAU1
West To D I WSMD4 WSMD4 I To F East
OUT
U RC AM4 TC U IN
IN
OBU1 DM4 OBU1
OUT IN OUT DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1
OBU
OBU
D40 M40 M40 D40
L L L L
O S O S
G X G X

VOA
NOTE
l In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are not shown.
The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that for
the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 6.17.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and
create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west
OTUs meets the requirements.
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the
optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD
module is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not
required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For the OTU
with APD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type can be
identified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a corresponding APD
warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD4, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or
less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +
Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about
the insertion loss for the WSMD4 board.
WSMD4. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power
of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This
ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end
Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by using an
Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD4.
Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power
of each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1 by using the
than 2 dB.
OLA.
----End

(WSMD2+WSMD2)
Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be correct.
To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer
(selected according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical
attenuator, Variable optical attenuator, U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC OUT EXPO OUT RC OUT

OAU1 OBU1
F IN IN EXPI IN OUT F
West To DI WSMD2 WSMD2 I To F East
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM OUT IN
AM DM
D40 M40 M40 D40
L L L L
O S O S
G X G X
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection
diagram, and check that the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, immediately correct
the error.
Step 2 Test the optical power of the west FIU and the SC2. See step 1 to step 9 in 6.17.3
Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the west OAU. See step 10 to step 12 in6.17.3
Step 4 Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the west FIU. Create optical cross-
connections on a per-NE basis from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 5 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength
output optical power at the DM and EXPO ports on the west WSMD2. Calculate the insertion
loss of the wavelength dropped from the IN port to the DM port and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the IN port to the DM port on the WSMD2.
Drop insertion loss = Input optical power for a single drop wavelength at the IN port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single drop wavelength at the DM port on the
WSMD2
Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the IN port
on the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPO
port on the WSMD2
NOTE
For information about the parameters of optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port
and the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the west D40. Calculate the
insertion loss of the D40.
Single-wavelength insertion loss of the D40 = Single-wavelength input optical power at the
IN port on the D40 – Single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the D40
Step 7 Test the input optical power from the IN port on all the west OTU boards. Replace or remove
the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power from the IN port on the OTU
boards is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point – 5) dBm.
Step 8 Test the client-side transmitting optical power of the west OTU board. There are two possible
situations, described as follows:
l If the client equipment is also newly installed, connect the OTU boards to the client
equipment for test.
l If the client equipment is not connected, use a fiber to connect the client-side TX port on
the west OTU board to the client-side RX port on the east OTU board of station C by
using a fixed optical attenuator on the ODF.
NOTE
The client side of the OTU board is connected to the client equipment normally after commissioning.
The interconnection of the OTU boards exists for the testing of 24-hour bit errors in serial after an
analyzer is connected to station A after commissioning.
Step 9 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power of the east OBU. On the U2000,
set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD2.
Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each pass-through wavelength of
the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Measure the optical power at the RX port on the east OTU board. Add, replace or remove a
fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the optical power at this RX port is within the optimal
range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload – 2) dBm.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the east OTU board. This value should
be in the range from 0 dBm to –5 dBm. This value is usually about –2 dBm.
Step 12 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the received single-wavelength optical power at the Mn
port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east M40.
Calculate the insertion loss of the M40.
NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.
Step 13 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power at the IN port on the east OBU.
On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the
east WSMD2. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each add
wavelength of the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.
Step 14 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the AM and EXPI ports and the single-
wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east WSMD2. Calculate the insertion

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
loss of the wavelength added from the AM port to the OUT port, and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the AM port to OUT port on the WSMD2.
Add insertion loss = Input optical power of a single add wavelength at the AM port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power of a single add wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2
Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPI port
on the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the OUT
port on the WSMD2
NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description. The insertion loss
measured in the previous steps includes the VOA attenuation, which differs from the insertion loss
measured when the VOA attenuation is set to 0.
Step 15 Perform the commissioning on the east OBU. See 6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End
Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 16 Perform the commissioning on the east FIU. See 6.17.2 Commissioning Transmit-End
Optical Power of the OTM Station.
----End

(WSMD9+WSMD9)
Prerequisites
To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer
(selected according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical
attenuator, Variable optical attenuator, U2000
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in Figure 6-46. If
the system is required to support the 1588 clock, see 6.15.5 Commissioning Optical Power
of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4) for the commissioning procedure.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
RM RM
EXPO IN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The
Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power meter.
Compare the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station D to
calculate the line attenuation between station D and station E on the line side. If the actual line
attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line
attenuation to determine whether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is
faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the TM port on
the west DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1. The insertion
Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less than –3 dBm. Record
the input optical power of the RX port in the commissioning record.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TX port in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the LOUT port on
the east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the
fiber to the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the optical power values in the
commissioning record.
Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1. The
insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical power of a single
wavelength is in the range of nominal optical power of a single wavelength ± 2 dB.
Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east DAS1, and
create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on the U2000.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west
OTUs meets the requirements.
Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD9, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or
less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +
Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
insertion loss for the WSMD9 board.
WSMD9. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power
of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9 board. This
ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end
Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by using an

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD9.
Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength optical power
of each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each wavelength
must be lower than 2 dB.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 7 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
7 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.
7.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
7.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical
power by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical
amplifier board.
7.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.
7.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

l The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board (VA1 or VA4).
l MCA/OPM boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that you
can query and analyze the optical spectrum through the U2000.
l Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation of the
optical fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and the U2000 is
normal.
General Sequence for Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal
flow. During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the optical
power, gain, and insertion loss requirements for each board.
Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements for
the boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Figure 7-1 shows the commissioning procedure.
NOTE
If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing, check the internal
fiber connections and external fiber attenuators.
If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value: the line
attenuation ≤ EOL – required fiber margin.
If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller than the EOL.
Figure 7-1 General commissioning flow

Commission optical power of
add wavelengths
Commission links
Equilibrate optical power
Commission receive optical

power of OTUs

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites and
optical power commissioning stations on the network according to Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Distribution of the stations for commissioning

Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power
station (in add monitoring station monitoring station (in add monitoring
direction) station station direction) station
MCA\ MCA\ MCA\

OSA OSA OSA
OTM OLA OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

Line attenuation commissioning Line attenuation commissioning
Optical power equilibrium Optical power equilibrium
OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer MCA: Spectrum Analyzer board
NOTE
Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations. As the
optical power for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be commissioned for
equalization purposes, consider the FOADM stations as fibers during commissioning.
NOTE
If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power of the OLA
stations does not need to be adjusted.
NOTE
NOTE
To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network model, the
start and end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should be determined. When
determining what stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring, adhere to the following principles:
l If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-monitoring
station in the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-monitoring point should be
shifted (N/2±0.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required.
NOTE
OPM8 boards are recommended.
The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based on the
signal flow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions,
the transmit direction and the receive direction.
First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit direction. Then
individually commission the optical power for each downstream NE. Complete the optical
power commissioning of the destination OTM in the receive direction. Finally, complete the
optical power commissioning for the other signal flow in the reverse direction.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in the

following procedures:
7.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Chain Network

Figure 7-3 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Figure 7-3 Commissioning procedure for the chain network
13 12 11 10 9 8
West MCA MCA MCA East
A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
: OTM : OLA : OADM
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A. Then
commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until the optical power
commissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the commissioning sequence, see
Figure 7-3 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction,
that is, in the east-to-west direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-3 (steps 7
through 13).
Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the following
sequence.
Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the links:
l At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure that the
input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input
optical power for the OA.
l At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input optical
power for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input optical
power for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power
for the OA.
l At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input optical
l At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input optical
for the OA.
l At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input optical
l At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input optical
for the OA.
Equilibrate the optical power:

l If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the
MCA board at station B. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power
± 1) dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the equilibrium based on the
optical power tested by the MCA board at station D. This ensures that:
± 1) dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the
MCA board at station F. This ensures that:
± 1) dBm
Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs:

l Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range of the
receive optical power along the A-C-E-G span.
7.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network Diagram for the Ring Network

Figure 7-4 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Figure 7-4 Commissioning procedure for the ring network

19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
A MCA C
20 12 8 MCA H D MCA 4 16
G MCA E
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of 1–10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoring
sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength meets the equilibrium
requirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single
wavelength plus or minus 3.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps
11 through 20. If the optical power of any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the
optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in
a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station according to the
following principle:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops wavelengths.
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A.
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by arrows in
the figure. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-4 (steps 1 through 10). Then
commission the optical power in the reverse direction station by station. For the
commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-4 (steps 11 through 20).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the
chain network.
7.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Mesh Network

Figure 7-5 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-5 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network

19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
32 34
A MCA C
21 31 B
K
MCA
30
J
33 22
MCA H D MCA
20 12 8 4 16
29
I 27
23
MCA
28
F 24
G E
MCA
26 25
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-
monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each single wavelength meets the
equilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a
single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is,
steps 11 through 20. If the optical power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-
commission the optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the
commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium
requirements.
Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain subnets and
ring subnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network according to the
following principles:
l Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the wavelength
connection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength connections, and the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
chain subnets should carry the least wavelength connections. Determine the ring subnets
first and then the chain subnets.
l Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain subnets
when possible.
l When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end stations for each
ring subnet. For other principles, see the corresponding commissioning requirements on
the ring network.
Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 7-5 as follows:

l Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-A
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by the
arrows in Figure 7-5 (steps 1 through 10). Then, commission the optical power in the
reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-5
(steps 11 through 20).
l Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-E
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For the
commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-5 (steps 21 through 25). When commissioning
the optical power for the chain network is complete, the optical power at station E
changes. Therefore, you need to measure and analyze the optical power between the
adjacent D and F stations. In addition, you need to re-commission the optical power at
station E for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-5
(steps 25 through 27). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along
the signal flow. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 7-5 (steps 28 through 32).
Measure and analyze the optical power between station H and station B. At station A,
commission the optical power for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning
sequence, see Figure 7-5 (steps 32 through 34).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the
chain network.
7.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power

Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical
power by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical
amplifier board.
7.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards

This section describes how to set the gain and Rated Optical Power for an optical amplifier
(OA) board.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher..

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Impact on System
None

U2000
l OAU and OBU are OA boards that support gain adjustment. In practical use, calculate
the gain range that can be set based on the intermediate insertion loss.
NOTE
Adjust the gain of the OBU board only when the ALC function is used.
l Before enabling the OPA function, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field of the
OA board at the transmit end as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Setting Nominal Gain for an OA Board

1. Set the Nominal Gain(dB) for an OA board.
3
4
5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Setting Rated Optical Power for an OA Board

1. Set the Rated Optical Power for an OA board.
3
4
5
1 6
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of the OA boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units .
Close Laser at the OUT Port on the OA Board

1. Close the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.
3
4
Enable Laser at the OUT Port on the OA Board

1. Enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3
4
5
7.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards

When a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this board by
changing the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section describes how to adjust the
attenuation based on engineering design documents.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
None

U2000
The electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, MR8V, ROAM, RMU9,
WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2 boards.
NOTE
l The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the board has been
configured with routes.
l The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD2 , WSMD4 or WSMD9 board can be
adjusted only when the board has been configured with routes.
Procedure
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status
of the NE is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-
hand Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
5. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio(dB) field, and then enter an appropriate value.
NOTE
The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
6. Click Apply.
7.2.3 Monitoring the Optical Power by MCA/OPM8 Board

This section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA board so that it monitors the
optical power for the specified channels.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher..
Impact on System
None

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure wavelength monitoring for the MCA board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3
4
7
2
6 8
2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified channels by
using an MCA board.
7.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on

the Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.

This section describes the networking for project X.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-8 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F and G are
the WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE
G are the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations, the ONE C is
the ROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM station.
Networking Diagram of the Project X

Figure 7-8 shows the networking diagram of project X.
Figure 7-8 Networking diagram of project X
13 12 11 10 9 8
West MCA MCA MCA East
A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
:OTM :OLA : OADM
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to
illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from
east to west is the same as the signal flow from west to east.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 7-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-
wavelength system.
Table 7-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power of the 10Gbit/s single-wavelength system
Modul Numb G.652 G.655 G.653 TW- TW-C TW+ SMF-
e Type er of SSMF LEAF RS LS
Wavel
engths
NRZ 40 +4 +4 -5 +2 +2 -1 -3
80 +1 +1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -3
(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5 +2 +2 +1 -3
80 +1 +1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -3
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the link, the incident
optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased by 3 dB in the commissioning
process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however, is changed to 4 dBm.
NOTE
For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design personnel to
determine the incident optical power.
NOTE
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident
power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator
(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel
incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.
G.653 fiber
OAU
FIU
OAU
: VOA
7.3.2 Commissioning Procedure

This section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.
Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power

Table 7-2 lists the procedure for each site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 7-2 Commissioning procedures

Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
(OTM) (ROAD (FOAD (OTM)
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N N
sioning
Optical
Power
for the
Add
Wavelen
gths
Commis N Y Y Y Y Y Y
sion
links
NOTE

NOTE
The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.
NOTE
Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in Figure
7-9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-9 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power

Start
N Configure the E2E OCH trail

OPA is
of ROADM node if ROADM is
available?
there
Y
Block all wavelengths except
one local added wavelength
Configure the E2E OCH trail
Set OA Gain to minimum

Set reference OA power by if variable Gain OA
NMS
Adjust input power of local

Enable OPA of ROADM node wavelength to target power
(OPA set attenuation of
EVOA to calculated value)
Release all the blocked
traffic which is going to
Set OPA to manual downstream
End
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure 7-10.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-10 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power

Start
Calculate and set the target Y

attenuation according to the Design loss <
design span loss minimum Gain OA?
Set EVOA at the receive end

to Minimum
Span loss is less than

N
design data? Check fiber
Span loss is more than N Set VOA make

minimum gain of OA? Span loss=Min gain
Set OA Gain=Span loss
End
Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power Equalization

Table 7-3 lists the procedures for each site.

ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
M) M)
Equalize Y Ya Y Ya Yb Ya N
optical
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE

l "a" indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning process of
commissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes.
l "b" indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is commissioned for
equalization purposes.
The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in Figure
7-11.
Figure 7-11 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power

Start
Query the power level of

each channel at monitor site
Compare to the reference

level and get target
attenuation set
Set EVOA by NMS
N
Is flatness in range of
target?
N
Is the last OEQ in
equalization order?
End
Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical Power

Table 7-4 lists the procedures for each site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N Y
sion
receive
optical
power of
OTUs
NOTE

The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 7-12.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-12 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power
Start
N
Is EVOA available?
Y
Set default attenuation by
NMS
Query input Power of OTU by

NMS
Y Is it in recommended
range?
Go to the site to change the

N fixed attenuator or adjust
Is EVOA available? attenuation of MVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range
Y
Adjust the EVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range
End
7.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths

at OTM Station A
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that is in the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

U2000
For the technical specifications of each type of the boards, see boards.
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-13 Fiber connections of OTM station A
Station A
Rx M31
OTU
M32
M OUT OUT
OTU
4 OAU1
0 To B
IN RC OUT
M40 V
OTU
TM RM F
SC1 I
D31
RM TM U
Tx
OTU
D32
OTU D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
OTU RDC TDC

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-13, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If there is no EVOA on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA or add the
fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE
Function from the Main Topology.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.
Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers for the
other OTUs.
NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically enabled and
is forced to emit light.
1. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
NOTE
The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each
wavelength during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 20.0dB.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
The OAU101 is used as an example of the OAU1. The minimum nominal gain is 20 dB, and the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power is –16 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the
amplifier, see boards.
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1.
3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA board so that the actual input optical power of the OAU1
reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Select the desired EVOA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the desired
value.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the attenuation of the
EVOA, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
(dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.
Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End
Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 On the U2000, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength
channel to 10 dB.
Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel so that the
input optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical power, based on the input
optical power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000.
Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the
OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the commissioning based on Step 1
through Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps.
Step 7 Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply.
Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow
button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End
7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-14 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC OUT
RC
IN
OAU1
IN OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
Figure 7-15 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
TC IN OUT D IN OUT RC
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If there is no
EVOA on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the
MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input
optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards.
Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking

Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on the
engineering design documents provided by the client.
Step 2 You should preset the attenuation of the EVOA located before the amplifier by using the
following formula: Attenuation of the EVOA = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier
at the upstream station - link attenuation - Nominal input optical power of the amplifier at the
OLA station.
NOTE
If the calculated preset value is a negative number, preset the attenuation of the EVOA to the minimum
attenuation.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and input optical
power (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the attenuation between the two
amplifiers according to the following formula: Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout
– Pin.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical
Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation specified in the
engineering design document, increase the attenuation of the EVOA so that the input optical
power reaches the minimum nominal input optical power. If the actual attenuation between
amplifiers is greater than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document,
decrease the attenuation of the EVOA so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches
the nominal input optical power.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of amplifier board, see boards .
Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment.
Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier =
Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power
of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following formula:
Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station -
Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation
between amplifiers.
3. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU, the
output optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical power. Therefore, set
the gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.
NOTE
Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss. Intermediate
insertion loss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical power of the BAIN optical
port.
2. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range of the gain for the OAU1.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function
Tree.
4. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the value of
Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss.
5. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the insertion loss.
6. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can be set.
8. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA located before the OBU1 at the input end to the minimum
value (1 dB). For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commission
the two OBU1 amplifiers as one amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier at
the transmit end of the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1
amplifier at the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the
following formula: Line attenuation = Pout – Pin. For the operations on the U2000, see
Querying the Optical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
NOTE
If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not need to adjust
the optical power of the EVOA. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of the EVOA to make sure that
the input optical power meets the requirements for the input optical power of the optical power amplifier.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the EVOA between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on the line
attenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of the OBU1 at the
receive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end = fixed gain of the OBU1 +
fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning the Optical
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in
the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-16 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+RMU9)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
M40V
Station C D40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
OBU1
IN OUT
DM TOA
F AM F
I EXPO ROA I
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
U TC IN EXPI OUT IN U To F East
West To D OUT IN OUT RC
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT IN ROA EXPO IN
TOA TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
OBU1
M40V D40
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-16, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the EVOA in the
dashed frame.
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
Procedure
Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving side
of the ROADM station to the maximum value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
NE C is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
maximum value (15.0).
5. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used
for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit
end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with
system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The
OBU103 (40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which
varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see
boards.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Step 2 .
Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and
choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used
for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4
end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the RMU9. The
recommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.
NOTE
the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which
varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). See boards.
NOTE

NOTE
----End
Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (Manual
Power Adjustment)
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the
Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side
lasers for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management
2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical
amplifiers and the type of system should be considered.)
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards.
1. Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of the
desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU
that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on Step 3 through
Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the
preceding steps.
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-
through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical
power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link
Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7
dB.
1. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each
wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU
in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A".
Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual
Power Adjustment and the EVOA Appears in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
lasers for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in the add
wavelength direction to 5.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA after the M40V so that the single-wavelength input
optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength
input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of
system should be considered.)
NOTE
Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see boards.
Step 4.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the
preceding steps.
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the
line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4 Commissioning the
Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the Laser of the
OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual
Power Adjustment and the EVOA Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-side lasers
for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards .
Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels for the
M40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel mentioned in
Step 4.
Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU
Step 4.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the
preceding steps.
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of the OTU
in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE
Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C
(WSD9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-17 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Station C
D40 M40V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
F EXPO F
OAU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
West To D U
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F East
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40V D40
DCM
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
at the same time.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
Procedure
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive end is used
to compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical power for the pass-through
channel based on the procedure for 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the
nominal input optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the system (40-
channel system or 80-channel system).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the rated optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the
optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C".

NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the OPA function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream
station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through channel for power
equilibrium purposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see 7.3.18 Commissioning
Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)
(RDU9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-18 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with RDU9+WSM9)
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Station C
D40 M40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
West DM AM
East
F EXPO F
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
To D U
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40 D40
DCM
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
at the same time.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards.
Procedure
None.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Scenario 1: OPA
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end RDU9 are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4
end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The
OBU103 (40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which
varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see
boards.
NOTE

1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and
choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
----End
Scenario 2: Manual Power Adjustment

NOTE
lasers for all the other OTUs. If the pass-through wavelengths on the RDU9 board are
configured, block the pass-through wavelengths and ensure there is no input light at the EXPI
optical port on the WSM9 board.
NOTE
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSM9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management
2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the WSM9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the
NOTE
1. Select the desired WSM9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of the
desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the WSM9 based on the
preceding steps.
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-
through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical
power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link
Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the RDU9 is connected to the EXPI port of the WSM9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSM9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7
dB.
1. Select the desired WSM9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each
wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the RDU9 is connected to the AM port of the WSM9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSM9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB.
Step 10 Activate the optical cross-connections on WSM9 to set up the pass-through wavelengths.
Step 11 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU
in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A".
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (ROAM
+ROAM) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see boards in the Hardware
Description.
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-19 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with ROAM+ROAM)
Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OAU1 OBU1 F
IN OUT EXPI IN OUT
I RC ROAM ROAM TC
I
West EXPI U East
U OBU1 OAU1
OUT IN EXPO OUT IN
M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0
OUT 1 1 IN
OBU OBU DCM
D40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-19, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
NOTE
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards in
the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 See Step 1 through Step 3 in 7.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
Step 2 Based on the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream
station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel for power equilibrium. For specific
commissioning steps, see 7.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and
OLA Station D for Equalization.
NOTE
The ROAM board cannot be used to commission the optical power for the wavelength in the pass-through
channels, and only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
(WSMD4+WSMD4) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-20 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)
Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC DM4
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
West I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
East
U RC AM4 TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 DM4 OAU1
OUT IN DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1
OBU
OBU
D40 M40V M40V D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. The
two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
NOTE
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards in
the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 7.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
(WSMD2+WSMD2) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Description.
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-21 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)
Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC EXPO
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
West F IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT F
I I East
WSMD2 WSMD2
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM AM OUT IN
DM
OBU
OBU
D40 M40V M40V D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
optical power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards in the
Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 7.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
----End
7.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths

and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)
Prerequisite

U2000
Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-22 Fiber connections of ROADM station (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
RM RM
EXPO IN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
NOTE
NOTE
optical power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards in the
Procedure
----End
7.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station D that is in the
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
----End
7.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical

Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of Unit
Specifications.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-23 Fiber connections of FOADM station E

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
RDC DCM TDC MI MI
VO VO
F TC IN
MO
OUT OUT F
OAU1 OBU1
I I
West To D U IN OUT VI IN RC U To F East
MR8V MR8V
RC IN VI IN
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-23, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured on
the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA or add
the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick
Reference Table of Unit Specifications.
Procedure
NOTE
Step 2 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA on each add channel for the MR8V to 7 dB.
1. Double-click NE E in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE E is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired MR8V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each add
channel of the MR8V to 7.0.
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Block all add wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Step 5 On the U2000, query the output optical power for the receive-end amplifier OAU1.
1. Select the desired OAU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management
2. Click Query to query the Output Power for the amplifier board.
Step 6 According to the nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier OBU1, calculate
and set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port between the two MR8V boards and the
VA1 board before the OBU1 at the transmit end as follows: Attenuation = Output optical
power of the receive-end amplifier - Nominal input optical power of the transmit-end
amplifier - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the receive end - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the
transmit end.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of Unit Specifications.
Step 7 Equally distribute the attenuation value (10 dB) to the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at
the transmit end and the VA1 board. Set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the
MR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board to 5 dB. For the adjustment of the VA1 on the
U2000, see Step 2 and Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical
NOTE
The OBU103 is used as the example of the transmit-end OBU1. The typical single-wavelength input optical
power of OBU103 is –19 dB (40 channels), and the typical single-wavelength output optical power of the
receive-end OAU1 is +4 dB. Therefore, the whole attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at
the transmit end and the VA1 board is as follows: Attenuation = 4 + 19 - 3.5 -3.5 – 6= 10 dB.
Step 8 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE
For details about the operations on the U2000, see Disabling the laser at an output port on an OA board in
"Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards".
Step 9 Enable the laser on an OTU that accesses the longest wavelength.
Step 10 On the U2000, adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on
the input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the
input optical power of the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single
wavelength.
Step 11 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that
access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on Step 10.
Step 13 Enable the disabled WDM-side lasers on the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the
OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE
Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
7.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical

Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer
Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in
Prerequisite

U2000
The optical power for the first wavelength after being adjusted is used as the reference optical
power during commissioning. In general, the longest wavelength is selected as the first
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-24 Fiber connection of FOADM station E

Station E
DCM M
D
LINE C SYS
TDC RDC 4 D03 Tx Rx M03 4
TC IN 0 IN RC
R 0 OTU OTU
OAU1 OBU1
P D02 M02 V OUT
IN IN OUT OUT OUT
C OTU OTU
D01 M01
OTU OTU
West East
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
I SC2 I To B
To F
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
OTU OTU
M02 D02
OUT M OTU OTU
OUT OUT D TC
M03 D03 D
OBU1 4 OTU OBU1 C
OUT OTU 4 IN
RC IN 0 IN IN M
0
V

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-24, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If no EVOA is configured on the
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Block the pass-through wavelengths.
NOTE
For details about the operation on the U2000, see "Disabling the laser on an output port on an OA board" in
Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.

NOTE
Step 3 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and close WDM-side lasers for all
the other OTUs.
NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser for the OTU is automatically enabled
and is forced to emit light.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The attenuation set here is the preset value and is used to adjust the optical power for each wavelength at the
commissioning stage for the optical power equilibrium purposes.
Step 5 Set the attenuation of the EVOA before the OBU1 at the transmit end to the minimum value.
Step 6 On the U2000, set the attenuation of the EVOA on this add channel based on the input optical
power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the input optical
power for the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
Step 7 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser on another OTU.
Then perform commissioning based on Step 6.
Step 9 Block all add wavelengths.

NOTE
Step 11 Unblock the pass-through wavelengths.
NOTE
For details about operations on the U2000, see "Enabling the laser at an output port on an OA board" in
Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.
Step 12 At the upstream station, enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that accesses the
longest wavelength. Disable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths.
Then, perform commissioning according to Step 6.
Step 13 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that
access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on Step 6.
Step 14 Adjust the optical power for all the other pass-through wavelengths based on the preceding
steps.
Step 15 Re-enable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths, and enable the
lasers on OTUs that add wavelengths.
----End
7.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station F that is in the
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
7.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station G that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-25 Fiber connections of OTM station G
Station G
D31 Tx
OTU
D32
D OTU
From F OAU1 4
IN OUT IN 0
TC
DCM D40
TDC RDC OTU
F RM TM
I SC1
U TM RM
M31 Rx
OTU
M32
OUT OUT M
OTU
To F OAU1 4
OUT IN
0
RC
V M40
OTU

EVOA
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and

OLA Station B for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A and OLA
station B that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
After wavelengths are transmitted over a certain distance, the optical power for different
wavelengths differs greatly because the loss or gain varies according to the components,
boards, fibers, and the non-linear effects of fibers. As a result, the input optical power of
different wavelengths at the downstream optical amplifier board (OAU) is different and the
OSNRs of different wavelengths at the receive end are different.
When the optical power variation is very great, the wavelengths with very low optical power
have much lower OSNR than the wavelengths with high optical power once the wavelengths
are transmitted in the system. To ensure that wavelengths with the lowest optical power meet
system requirements, you need to increase the original OSNR tolerance. You must ensure that
the optical power at the intermediate station is flattened. For more information, see Figure
7-26.
Figure 7-26 Equalizing optical power at the intermediate station
OA OA OA
OA at the OA at the OA at the

transmit end intermediate station receive end
Flattening the
optical power at Flatness Flatness
the transmit end of 2.5 dB of 5.2 dB
Flattening the
Flatness Flatness optical power at
of 5.2 dB of 2.5 dB the receive end
Flattening the optical

Flatness power at the Flatness
of 2.5 dB intermediate station of 2.5 dB
Variable optical attenuator
Objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning:

l According to the engineering requirements, the optical power flatness for each
wavelength of the intermediate OAU must be ensured. The optical power at the transmit
end remains at a certain slope that is opposite to the optical power slope at the receive
end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l According to the engineering requirement, the single-wavelength input optical power

must be within the range of nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB at both the transmit
and receive ends.
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes.
The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of
affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the
attenuation adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected
(based on an 80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that
for the adjusted channel.
l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is
recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not repeatedly adjust the attenuation
for a channel, and do not adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.
l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct any unflat link optical power
resulting from accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects from long distance transmission.
When the optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends
are unflat (±3 dB). But each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR, which
results in the same transmission performance.
Procedure
Step 1 The optical power equalization is commissioned by using the following methods:
l If the MCA is not configured at OLA station B, at the MON port for each supervisory
point OA, use the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to monitor the optical power for each
wavelength on receive end. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel for the
M40V at the upstream station A based on tested data. Equalize the optical power of the
channels. That is, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the total output
optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal
single-wavelength output optical power ± 3.0 dBm.
l If OLA station B where the MCA is configured is considered as the supervisory station,
test the flatness of the optical power for each wavelength through the MCA. Commission
the EVOA for each wavelength channel of the M40V at the upstream station A based on
the tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the
following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged:
Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power ± 1.0 dBm.
l Query the optical power of each wavelength through the MCA/OPM as follows:
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology and the Running Status
of NE B is displayed.
3. Select the desired MCA/OPM board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the Function Tree.
4. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
Step 2 Adjust the attenuation of the channel with the highest optical power and the attenuation of the
channel with the lowest optical power. Use a step of 0.5 dB based on the spectrum analysis
result of the MCA/OPM board. After the attenuation is adjusted, the optical power for the two
channels must satisfy the requirement above. For the adjustment process on the U2000, see
Setting the attenuation of each channel of the M40V in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Use the MCA/OPM board again to measure the optical power for each wavelength and
determine the wavelengths with the highest and lowest optical power. Then equalize the
optical power of the wavelengths based on Step 2.
Step 4 View the spectrum analysis result of the MCA/OPM board. If the deviation between the
optical power of each wavelength and the nominal single-wavelength optical power must
satisfy the requirement above, the optical power for the wavelengths is equalized.
----End
Equalizing Optical Power (the MCA/OPM Board at the Transmit/Receive End)

When the MCA/OPM boards are configured at the transmit and receive ends, observe the
following principles to commission optical power:
l When there are less than four (inclusive) spans and there is no ROADM station on the
link, commission the optical power at the transmit end to ensure that the optical power is
flattened at the transmit end.
l When there are more than four spans and there is no ROADM station on the link, after
flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that the system optical power is
equalized.
l When there are more than four spans and there is an ROADM station on the link, adjust
the attenuation of all channels of the ROADM station (configured with WSD9 and
RMU9 boards, for example) to the same value. After flattening the optical power at the
transmit end, ensure that system optical power is equalized.
l If there is an REG station on the link, divide the link into two spans with the REG station
as the dividing point. In this case, consider the REG station as either the transmit end or
the receive end.
Step 1 When the optical power at the transmit end is flattened and the commissioning at the OLA
station is complete, monitor the optical power for each wavelength by using an MCA/OPM
board at the receive end. Calculate the difference between the optical power for each
wavelength and the average optical power of the wavelengths. The difference is actually the
flatness deviation.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power at an intermediate station in compliance with the principles of "Commissioning
the Optical Power at the Transmit End based on that at the Receive End".
Step 2 Check the optical power at the receive end. Identify the channel that has the highest optical
power as channel A, and identify the channel that has the lowest optical power as channel B.
If the optical power difference between the two channels is greater than 6 dB, calculate the
difference between the optical power of channel A and the nominal single-wavelength optical
power, and record it as X. Also calculate the difference between the optical power of channel
B and the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as Y. Then consider half of
X or Y as the target flatness deviation for commissioning the optical power at the transmit
end. See Figure 7-27.
Step 3 Commission the optical power at the transmit end. Increase the attenuation of channel A for
the M40V at the transmit end by X/2 and decrease the attenuation for channel B by Y/2. After
that, the flatness deviation at the transmit end has the same absolute amount but the reverse
value as the flatness deviation at the receive end. See Figure 7-28.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-27 Checking the optical power at the receive end
X
X/2
Y/2
Y
B A B A
Optical power at Optical power at
the transmit end the receive end
Figure 7-28 Commissioning the optical power at the transmit end
B A B A
Optical power at Optical power at
the transmit end the receive end
Step 4 Ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged when adjusting the optical power
flatness for each wavelength. To keep the total optical power unchanged, decrease the highest
optical power by 0.5 dB, but increase the lowest optical power by 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Adjust the optical power of wavelengths sequentially. After adjusting the highest and lowest
optical power, query the optical power for the two wavelengths again. If both the highest
optical power and lowest optical power are within the range of nominal input optical power
+/- 3 dB, it indicates that the optical power for the wavelengths is equalized. If they are not
equalized, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 4 to recommission the optical power again.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the equalization of optical power is complete, if the average optical power for the wavelengths is not
equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power, do not adjust the optical power for each wavelength at
the transmit end. Instead, check and adjust the total optical power at the OLA station so that the average
optical power is equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power.
----End
7.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and

OLA Station D for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization of the ROADM
station C and OLA station D that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see boards.
Procedure
Step 1 At ROADM station C, set OPA Mode to Manual.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
NE C is displayed.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function
Tree.
4. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode, and
choose Manual for the optical cross-connections.
Step 2 For the information about querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA, see
Querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA in"Commissioning the
Optical Power Equalization of the OTM station A and OLA station B".
Step 3 Adjust the EVOA of each add channel for the RMU9 (or M40V) based on the optical power
analysis result. The single-wavelength optical power for each add wavelength is equalized.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while
the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each add channel of the RMU9 or Setting
the attenuation of each add channel of the M40V in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
Step 4 Adjust the optical power equalization in the pass-through direction based on the optical
spectrum analysis result from the downstream supervisory station D.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while
the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each pass-through channel of the WSD9 in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
----End
7.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and

OLA Station F for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E and OLA
station F that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
The static optical add/drop multiplexer board cannot be used to commission the optical power
of the wavelength for the pass-through channels. Only the optical power for the add
wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station
A and OLA Station B for Equalization.
----End
7.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)

This section describes how to commission optical power for a network that has no MCA
board configured.
Prerequisites
Fibers must be connected and network configuration must be complete.
ECC communication must be established.
Commissioning of an optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The cross-connections at each station must be configured.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000
For the technical specifications for all the boards, see boards.
If no MCA board is configured for the entire network, commission the optical power for each
wavelength to ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is consistent with the
nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the performance of each wavelength
is optimal.
l The commissioning must start at the station where the wavelength with the worst BER
performance is added.
l The wavelengths with better performance and involving fewer spans are preferred for
BER optimization.
Commissioning Procedure
Step 1 Shut down lasers on all OTU boards. Commission the optical power for each add wavelength
based on7.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM
Station A so that the optical power before entering the OA at the transmit end is equal to the
nominal optical power for a single wavelength.
Step 2 For the methods of commissioning an OLA station on the line, see 7.3.4 Commissioning the
Step 3 After commissioning and equalizing the optical power for each add wavelength at a back-to-
back OTM or OADM station on the line, suppress all add wavelengths. In the case of an
OADM station configured with a WSS module, commission the optical power for each pass-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
through wavelength so that the optical power for each pass-through wavelength is equal to the
nominal optical power for a single wavelength. For details about the commissioning methods,
see 7.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM
Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board), 7.3.7 Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9), and
7.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station
E (MR8V+MR8V).
NOTE
If an FOADM station (excluding the back-to-back OTM) is an intermediate station, commission only the
optical power for the multiplexed pass-through wavelength.
Step 4 After commissioning the optical power for each wavelength, test the total input optical power
of an OA at the transmit end to verify that it satisfies the following formula: Total input
optical power = Nominal input optical power for each wavelength + 10logN (N represents the
number of wavelengths) + input offset. If the total input optical power fails to satisfy this
formula, adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board before the OA or the attenuation of the
EVOA built in the OA to ensure that the total input optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
The offset value is determined by the number of wavelengths and OSNR and varies inversely with the OSNR.
The input offset is generally smaller than 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Optimize the performance of each wavelength because the optical power flatness of each
wavelength in a multiplexed wavelength cannot be measured. Ensure that the system
performance is optimal, and at the same time, ensure that the optical power for each
wavelength is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the
multiplexed optical power remains unchanged.
----End
7.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU Boards

This section describes how to commission the input optical power of the OTU in a west-to-
east signal flow. Follow the commissioning sequence of A-C-E-G.
Prerequisite
NOTE
If no EVOA in the drop wavelength channel is configured before the IN port of the OTU at the station, it
indicates that a fixed optical attenuator or MVOA is configured. In this case, check only the receive optical
power of the OTU. If the measured receive optical power of the OTU is not within the required range, replace
the fixed optical attenuator or adjust the MVOA on site.

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Query the input optical power of the OTU on the U2000.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the Function Tree.
4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the OTU to the range of the input optical power
of the OTU.
l If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the input optical
power of the OTU, increase the EVOA attenuation for this channel. The actual input
optical power is then within the range of the input optical power.
l If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the input optical
power of the OTU, decrease the EVOA attenuation of this channel. After the attenuation
is adjusted to the minimum value, if the actual input optical power is still not within the
range of the input optical power, check the internal fiber connections.
NOTE
For the specifications for the input optical power of the OTU, see boards .
NOTE
Adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical
power is within the optimal range: from -12 dBm to -5 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port
on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
(sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -2) dBm. In the commissioning process, you should better
commission the OTU received optical power to the middle of the range of the above requirements.
NOTE
When commissioning the input optical power of the OTU at the ROADM station, you do not need to
configure the EVOA before the IN port on the WDM-side of the OTU. You need to adjust only the EVOA for
each drop channel of the WSD9. For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each drop
channel of the WSD9 in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM
Station C".
NOTE
For operations of the EVOA on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning
the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
7.3.22 Commissioning OSNR

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a wavelength.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is
higher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to the tolerance at which the
boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower
than a specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly
adjusted, but a certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest
OSNR for the wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the
wavelengths that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR
value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or
WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed
only when there is no parallel OADM station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the
commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power for
the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the
wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck
the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR.
Then continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in Step 1. If the OSNRs for
the two wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR
commissioning is successful.
NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning,
analyze the cause, and then continue with specific commissioning.
----End
7.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long

Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units.
Networking Diagram
Figure 7-29 shows the network topology of Project Y. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) 1 - 24 are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE 1 and ONE
24 are configured as OTM stations. ONE 2–6, 8–12, 14–19, and 21–23 are OLA stations.
ONE 7 and 20 are ROADM station. ONE 13 is an OEQ station.
Figure 7-29 shows the span loss and distance between NEs.
Figure 7-29 Service requirement matrix in Project Y
West Commissioning Span 1
1 60km 2 80km 3 92km 4 80km 5 80km 6 76km 7 86km 8

16.5dB 22dB 25.3dB 22dB 22dB 20.9dB 23.65dB
Commissioning Span 2 80km

22dB
16 86km
23.65dB
80km 60km 60km 76km 72km 80km

90km 15 22dB 14 16.5dB 13 16.5dB 12 20.9dB 11 19.8dB 10 22dB 9
24.75dB
60km 80km 80km 60km 60km 80km 80km
16.5dB 22dB 22dB 16.5dB 16.5dB 22dB 22dB
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Commissioning Span 3 Commissioning Span 4

East
：OTM ：OLA ：ROADM
Commissioning Requirement
l In an ultra long-haul transmission system with multiple transmission spans, divide the
line into different commissioning spans according to service stations and equalization
stations (namely, ROADM and back-to-back OTM stations) and then commission the
system span by span. As shown in Figure 7-29, the network is divided into four
commissioning spans.
l Determine the stations that can serve as optical power equalization stations. For example,
the stations represented as dotted rectangles in the figure.
l Determine the optical power monitoring station for each commissioning span based on
the principle of equalizing optical power at the middle of a transmission link, for
example, stations 4, 10, 17, and 22 (represented as dotted rectangles).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Define the OTM, FOADM, and ROADM stations as optical power commissioning stations. For an
FOADM station, the optical power of pass-through wavelengths cannot be equalized. Therefore, an
FOADM station is regarded as a fiber during the commissioning.
NOTE
If you select an OTM or OADM station as the optical power motioning station, skip the step for
equalizing optical power at an OLA station.
NOTE
Before equalizing optical power, divide the network into different parts and select the source and sink
stations according to the network model. Then determine the optical power adjustment station. The
principles for selecting a station for monitoring optical power on a line are as follows:
l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is
greater than 4, determine the position of a monitoring station by dividing N by 2 (N/2). If N is an
odd number, determine the position of the monitoring station according to N/2±0.5.
l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is equal
to 4, determine the transmit end as the monitoring station.
l Commission the entire network from west to east. Then, commission the entire network
in the reverse direction.
Procedure
Step 1 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power at station 1 (OTM), see
7.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
Step 2 For the steps for commissioning the link optical power at station 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (OLA), see 7.3.4
NOTE
The input optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) cannot be out of the range of the total optical power of
the OA. That is, an OA cannot work with over-saturated optical power.
Step 3 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power and link optical power at
station 7 (ROADM), see 7.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9), 7.3.13 Commissioning the Add
Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V) or 7.3.14
Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E
(Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).
Step 4 For the steps for equalizing the optical power for the span 1, see 7.3.17 Commissioning the
Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes.
The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of
affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the
attenuation adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected
(based on an 80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that
of the adjusted channel.
l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is
recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not adjust the attenuation of for a
channel repeatedly, or adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.
l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct the unflat link optical power due
to accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects after long distance transmission. When the
optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat
(±3 dB), but each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR and therefore has
the same transmission performance.
Step 5 Commission the optical power in commissioning spans 2, 3, and 4 based on Step 1 through
Step 4.
Step 6 Optimize the BER and OSNR for the entire network so that the system performance of the
entire network is optimal.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 8 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40
Commissioning Guide Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
8 Example of Commissioning Optical Power

Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
About This Chapter
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA stations.
NOTICE
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise,
system performance will be affected.
NOTE
When commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project access
service signals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. By doing this, all the OTUs can emit light
normally. Then start the commissioning station by station.
NOTE
The optical power queried on the U2000 is general optical power. The difference between this value and
the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.
8.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System
This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.
8.3 Preparations for Commissioning
8.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-
Coherent System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on
the U2000.
8.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.
8.7 OSNR Penalties
If the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks are
performed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty, you can evaluate
impacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet system requirements.
8.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation
In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In
addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of
transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System
This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that
may happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle
the problems according to actual situations.

8.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 8-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on the 40Gbit/s non-coherent
transmission system.
Table 8-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power of the 40Gbit/s non-coherent transmission
system
Modul Numb G.652 G.655 TW- TW-C G.653 TW+ SMF-
e Type er of LEAF RS LS
Wavel
engths
40G 40 +4 +4 N/A +4 N/A N/A N/A

ODB
80 +1 +1 N/A +1 N/A N/A N/A
40G 40 +4 +2 +2 +2 -5 +1 -1
DQPS
K 80 +1 +1 +1 +1 -5 -1 -2
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to optical
amplifiers with total output optical power of 20 dBm.
NOTE
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the link, the incident
optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased by 3 dB in the commissioning
process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however, is changed to 4 dBm.
NOTE
A 40G signal is sensitive to non-linear effects. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical power of 40G
signals. Also, it is prohibited to let an optical amplifier work in an abnormal state.
For information about the single-wavelength incident power for fiber G.653, see Table 8-2.

NOTE
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident
power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator
(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel
incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.
G.653 fiber
OAU
FIU
OAU
: VOA
Table 8-2 Single-Wavelength Incident Power for fiber G.653

Module Type Channel Spacing OAU Type Standard Single-
Wavelength
Incident Power
40G eDQPSK 100 GHz OAU101, -4 dBm

(no wavelength at the 0AU103, 0BU103
zero dispersion point)
100 GHz OAU101, -5 dBm

(full configuration, 0AU103, 0BU103
including the zero
dispersion point)

(no wavelength at the 0AU103, 0BU103
zero dispersion point)

(full configuration, 0AU103, 0BU103
including the zero
dispersion point)

Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 10G and 40G Signals

In the system design, a 10G channel is separated from a 40G channel with an idle channel in
between. Therefore, do not configure a 10G channel as an adjacent channel of a 40G channel.
40G channels are preferred for carrying medium or long wavelengths. After all the medium
and long wavelengths are allocated, properly allocate the short wavelengths. 10G channels are
preferred for carrying short wavelengths.
Mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals are described as follows in the order of the
smallest impact to the greatest impact:
l Mixed transmission with maximum spacing between a 10G channel and a 40G channel.
– For G.652 fibers, the spacing is at least one channel.
– For G.655 fibers, the spacing is at least 400 GHz.
l One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on one
side of a 40G channel.
l Two-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on each
side of a 40G channel.
l Do not apply mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals when there are fiber types
other than G.652 and G.655.
Commissioning Rules
Observe the following rules when commissioning a 40G system:
l When commissioning the 40G system, the MCA boards or an optical spectrum analyzer
must be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is precisely
commissioned.
l Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is prohibited to
improve the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical power in the
initial engineering phase. During the equalization of the system optical power, the actual
incident optical power for every section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical
power over ±1.5 dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance
degrades quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly.
l For an ODB board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate to
within ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must
be used to ensure this level of accuracy.)
l For an eDQPSK board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate
to within ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must
be used to ensure this level of accuracy.)
l The optical power at the IN optical port on a 40 OTU board must be within the range of
-11 dBm to -4 dBm.
l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and
the OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power
flatness is small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power
flatness.
l In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power difference between
each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations that balance the
optical power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value not more than ±1
dB.

l If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength

optical power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are as follows:
– According to the engineering requirement, the single-wavelength input optical
power must be within the range of nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB at both the
transmit and receive ends.
l When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the general
commissioning method is same as that for 40G system commissioning. When the 10G
signal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however, make sure that the optical power of the
10G signal is not higher than the nominal power of a single wavelength. If the 10G
signal is stable for a long time, commission the 10G signal power to a value 1 dB less
than the power of the adjacent 40G signal.
l In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of the 40G
signal is wider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal. Actually, the power
of the 10G signal is equal to the power of the 40G signal. Therefore, measure optical
power of the 40G wavelength and the 10G wavelength accurately, Figure 8-1 shows the
mixed optical spectrum.
Figure 8-1 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals
10G signals
40G signals

NOTE
When the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there
is a great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Therefore, during the extra
long-haul 40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you
need to consider the OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.
8.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 8-2 shows the process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 8-2 Process for commissioning a 40G system
Start
Design documents Identify the

and network conditions comply No nonconformance with
with the commissioning relevant network design
requirements? department
Yes
Configure boards and stations
Flatten the optical power of the OTM

station at the transmit end
Commission the optical power of an

OLA station
Equalize the optical power at

intermediate stations
Optimize performance of each

wavelength
Document and save the commissioning

result
End

8.3.1 Checking Design Documents

Before starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to ensure that the
designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, PMD, OSNR, ITL
configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G and 40G signals, meet
the requirements for setting up a 40G system.
The optical amplifier (OA) design for a 40G system is the same as that for an Nx10G system.
Compared with an Nx10G system, a 40G system has higher requirements on incident optical
power, dispersion compensation, OSNR, and PMD.
Checking Span Information

Table 8-3 lists the information of each span on the link that needs to be checked.
Table 8-3 Information of each span on the link

Number Item Satisfied or Not
1 The actual insertion loss of each fiber span is lower □Yes □No
than the insertion loss specified in the design
drawing.
Note: 3 dB insertion loss should be reserved during
the site survey. During the operation and maintenance
of the actual services, the insertion loss should be
lower than the design value.
2 The actual distance of each fiber span is consistent □Yes □No

with the fiber distance specified in the design
drawing.
Note: If the actual fiber distance is inconsistent with
the fiber distance specified in the design drawing,
provide feedback to the marketing personnel so that
they can update the design configuration to ensure
accuracy.
Checking Dispersion Configurations

Check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configured on each optical path
meets the actual dispersion compensation requirement. First, obtain the dispersion value of
each optical path from the parameter document for optical paths. Then check whether the
DCM specified in the System Configuration Diagram at each station on the optical path can
compensate dispersion properly based on the following table. If a DCM fails to compensate
the dispersion on the optical path, provide feedback to the commissioning leader immediately.

Table 8-4 Dispersion configuration checklist for a G.652 fiber system

No. Checklist Check Result
1 Precompensation of 20 km □Yes □No

at the transmit end
2 The dispersion on the line is □Yes □No

compensated equally and
the compensation deviation
does not exceed ±10 km.
Over-compensation (for
example, the 80 km DCM is
used on 65, 70, or 75 km
span) is generally applied.
When under-compensation
is applied, compensation is
supplemented on the first or
second subsequent span.
3 The compensation for the □Yes □No

chromatic dispersion (CD)
at a fiber entry point on the
line is within the range of
-30 km to -10 km.

CD at the end point on the
line is in the range of -5 km
to +5 km.
Table 8-5 Dispersion configuration checklist for a leaf fiber system

1 No dispersion □Yes □No

precompensation is provided
at the transmit end.
2 If ODB OTU boards are □Yes □No

used, overcompensation of
10 km to 25 km is applied to
each span. The dispersion of
the fourth or fifth span is 0
after periodic compensation.

3 Over-compensation (for □Yes □No

example, the 80 km DCM is
used on 65, 70, or 75 km
span) is generally applied.
When under-compensation
is applied, compensation is
supplemented on the first or
second subsequent span.

CD at a fiber entry point on
the line is within the range
of -100 km to +100 km.

CD at the end point on the
line is in the range of -5 km
to +5 km.
Checking PMD Configurations

Check whether the PMD penalty on each optical path is within the range specified in the
engineering design. Check whether the PMD value for an optical path is smaller than the
PMD tolerance for the optical path against the parameter document for optical paths.
Table 8-6 PMD configuration checklist

1 The PMD value for an □Yes □No

optical path is smaller than
the PMD tolerance for this
optical path.
Checking OSNR Configurations

The OSNR penalty for a network includes PMD penalty, dispersion penalty, and individual
device OSNR penalty. These OSNR penalties can be obtained from the parameter document
for optical paths. Compare the OSNR penalties specified in this document with the system
OSNR tolerance.

Table 8-7 OSNR configuration checklist
1 The sum of OSNR penalty □Yes □No

and aging margin is smaller
than the system OSNR
tolerance.
Checking the Channel Allocation for Hybrid Transmission of 10G and 40G
Signals
Table 8-8 lists the 40G wavelength allocation items that need to be checked.
Table 8-8 40G wavelength allocation
Number Item Satisfied or Not
1 If there are sufficient idle wavelengths, 40G signals □Yes □No

use long wavelengths and 10G signals use short
wavelengths.
Checking ITL Board Configurations of a 40G System

Currently, only the TN11ITL04 board uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends.
Check the ITL board configurations against Table 8-9. If an ITL board using an interleaver at
the transmit and receive ends must be configured, check whether the ITL board type in the
engineering configuration is TN11ITL04.
NOTE
After a 40G electrical signal is encoded (ODB), two peaks appear at the spectral edges. This affects the signal
quality of the receiver. In addition, the peaks make the bottoms of the CD and OSNR curves unflat, which
affects the TDCM in searching for the optimal compensation value. Configuring an ITL board with 0.3 nm
bandwidth between the transmit end (behind the MUX board) and the receive end (before the DEMUX
board) helps filter noise and optimize OSNR tolerance, and it has no negative impact on signals.
NOTE
The 40G DQPSK signal spectrum is comparatively wide. The 20 dB spectrum width is about 0.8 nm.
Therefore, the signal overlapping in an 80-channel system is of major concern, and an ITL board that uses an
interleaver at the transmit and receive ends must be configured in an 80-channel system.
Table 8-9 ITL configuration checklist for a 40G 80-channel system
1 The TN11ITL04 board is □Yes □No

used in a 40G ODB system
with 50 GHz channel
spacing.


used in a 40G DQPSK
system with 50 GHz channel
spacing.

used at an OADM station to
add/drop DQPSK
wavelengths with 50 GHz
channel spacing.
4 An ITL board is used at a □Yes □No

WSS-based ROADM station
to add/drop wavelengths
with 100 GHz channel
spacing.
8.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter

This section describes the types of test meters used to commission a 40G system.
Context
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 8-10 lists certain 40G SDH analyzers. Table 8-11 lists
certain optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate the
optical spectrum analyzer with respect to the optical power setting.
Table 8-10 40G SDH analyzers

Name Appearance
ONT-506

Name Appearance
NX 4000
MP1797A
Table 8-11 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance
MTS8000
Agilent86145B/86142

Name Appearance
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317
8.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on

40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on
the U2000.

The commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with the
commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be
commissioned is a long-haul 40G link.
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-3 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE A
and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There
are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are
transmitted between ONEs A and D.
Figure 8-3 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the line
optical fiber.
Figure 8-3 Service requirement matrix in Project H

A 80 km/22dB B C 76 km/20.9dB D
OLA
：OTM ：OLA

Wavelength Allocation Diagram

Figure 8-4 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line represents
the working channel and the dashed line represents the protection channel.
Figure 8-4 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A D
STM-256
LSXL 192.10THz LSXL 192.10THz
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
LSXL 192.70THz STM-256 LSXL 192.70THz
STM-256
STM-256
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-5 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in project H.
Figure 8-5 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

A B C D
DCM DCM DCM

to
OAU D40
OBU OAU OAU
103
from 103 103 103
M40 OLA
OAU OAU OAU OBU

to 103 103 103 103
D40 from
DCM DCM DCM M40
80 km 76 km
22dB 20.9dB
NOTE
For the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an
80-channel system for wavelength filtering.

NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
For OSN 6800 Figure 8-6 shows the board configuration for ONE A and ONE D. The board
configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other
OLAs, as shown in Figure 8-8.
For OSN 8800 Figure 8-7 shows the board configuration of ONE A and ONE D. The board
configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other
Figure 8-6 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU PDU
P
I
L L L U
F S S S S P
I X X X C I
U L L L CU
A
U
X
P P
I I
U L L U
O L L F S S P
F M D
M S P S
I 4
B
4R S S C I I X X C I
U 0
U
02 X X CU U L L CU
1 L L A
A
U U
X X
P P
I I
U L L L U
O O F S S P
F S S P S S
A B M C I
I C C I I X X X
U U C CU
U 1 CU U L L L
1 1 A A
A
U U
X X
DCM DCM

Figure 8-7 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
B A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
L L S
M M D S F
S S C
C 4 4 C I
X X C
A 0 0 1 U
L L
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
L L L L
S S S S S
X X C X X
L L C L L
X X
CC
HH
L L S L L
S S C S S
X X C X X
L L L L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.
NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.

Figure 8-8 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
P
I
U
O O
F F S S P
A A
I I C C I
U U
U U 2 CU
1 1 A
U
X
DCM

Figure 8-9 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
A A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
F F S S
I I C C
UU 2 C

at the OTM Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in the
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the
OTU emit light normally.


U2000
In this example, the specifications for the hardware are as follows:
l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.
l The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-10 Fiber connections of the OTM station
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL
M32
M
LSXL
4 OBU1
0 OUT IN To B
OUT RC OUT
M40 V
LSXL
TM RM F
SC1 I
D31
RM TM U
Tx
LSXL
D32
LSXL D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
LSXL RDC TDC

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 8-10, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If there is no EVOA boards on
the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA or add
the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
----End

8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station

and the OTM Station at the Receive End
This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station and
OTM station at the receive end that are in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-11 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN OUT RC
OAU1
IN MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA

Figure 8-12 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
TC IN OUT D IN OUT RC
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
Figure 8-13 Fiber connections of the OTM station at the receive end
Station D
D31 Tx
OTU
D32
D OTU
From C OAU1 4
IN OUT IN 0
TC
DCM D40
TDC RDC OTU
F RM TM
I SC1
U TM RM
M31 Rx
OTU
M32
OUT OUT M
OTU
To C OAU1 4
OUT IN
0
RC
V M40
OTU

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 8-11, Figure 8-12 and Figure 8-13, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If
there is no EVOA boards on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs,
configure the MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 7.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-
to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and
OLA Station B for Equalization.
Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain
wavelength is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical
power. In addition, reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best
performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical
power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing the
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.
----End

8.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on

40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

commissioning requirements for a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-14 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) A, B, C, and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE A
and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There
are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are
transmitted between ONEs A and D.
Figure 8-14 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the
line optical fiber.
Figure 8-14 Service requirement matrix in project H

A 80 km/22dB B C 76 km/20.9dB D
OLA
：OTM ：OLA

Figure 8-15 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project H.

Figure 8-15 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A D
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
LSXL 192.70THz STM-256 LSXL 192.70THz
STM-256
STM-256
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-16 shows the configuration of an optical amplifier at each station in project H.
Figure 8-16 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

A B C D
DCM DCM DCM

to
OAU D40
OBU OAU OAU
103
from 103 103 103
M40 OLA
OAU OAU OAU OBU

to 103 103 103 103
D40 from
DCM DCM DCM M40
80 km 76 km
22dB 20.9dB
NOTE
In the case of the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be
used in an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.
NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
For OSN 6800 Figure 8-17 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The
board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other

For OSN 8800 Figure 8-18 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The
board configurations for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other
Figure 8-17 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU PDU
P
I
L L L U
F S S S S P
I X X X C I
U L L L CU
A
U
X
P P
I I
U L L U
O L L F S S P
F M D
M S P S
I 4
B
4R S S C I I X X C I
U 0
U
02 X X CU U L L CU
1 L L A
A
U U
X X
P P
I I
U L L L U
O O F S S P
F S S P S S
A B M C I
I C C I I X X X
U U C CU
U 1 CU U L L L
1 1 A A
A
U U
X X
DCM DCM

Figure 8-18 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
B A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
L L S
M M D S F
S S C
C 4 4 C I
X X C
A 0 0 1 U
L L
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
L L L L
S S S S S
X X C X X
L L C L L
X X
CC
HH
L L S L L
S S C S S
X X C X X
L L L L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.
NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.

Figure 8-19 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
P
I
U
O O
F F S S P
A A
I I C C I
U U
U U 2 CU
1 1 A
U
X
DCM

Figure 8-20 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
A A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
F F S S
I I C C
UU 2 C
Commissioning Procedures
Table 8-12 Commissioning stations reference list

Station Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram
A Refer to 8.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the

OTM Station
B, C Refer to 8.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station
D Refer to 8.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station

For the commissioning method for each station in project H and the fiber connection diagram
of each station, see Table 8-12. The commissioning is performed in two directions:
Direction 1: A→B→C→D
Direction 2: D→C→B→A
Because the commissioning for the two directions are performed similarly, only the
commissioning for direction 1 is described in this document.
NOTICE
Before the equipment is connected to the line fiber at each station, you must complete the
following operations:
l Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the
engineering design.
l Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in accordance
with the requirement of the engineering design.
l Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement
of the engineering design.
If any one of the preceding operation is not performed, the system commissioning will be
affected. In this case, provide feedback to the appropriate personnel who are in charge of that
particular issue.
NOTE
The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the service boards and client
equipment, and the fibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be routed on site.
8.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This section uses direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the optical power
at the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the total
transmit optical power meets the specification requirements and that the optical power
flatness for every wavelength is achieved.
Prerequisites


Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:
NOTE
When the 40G ODB system is used, a dual-module ITL board must be configured at the transmit and receive
ends. If certain OADM stations add/drop ODB wavelengths (wavelengths with 100 GHz channel spacing), a
dual-module ITL board must also be used at the transmit and receive ends. For the ROADM stations with 50
GHz channel spacing, no ITL board is required because the 50 GHz WSS module provides the 50 GHz filter
function.
Figure 8-21 Fiber connections at OTM station A
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL
M32
LSXL M
4 OBU1 To B
0 OUT IN OUT RC OUT
M40
LSXL
TM RM F
SC1 I
D31
RM TM U
Tx
LSXL
D32
LSXL D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
LSXL RDC TDC
Variable optical Fixed optical

attenuator attenuator ODF
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connections between boards are correct based on the fiber connection
diagram. Check if the fiber on each board is properly connected. If not, correct the error
immediately.
Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU boards.
Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by referring to the bar code on the
front panel or the board manufacturing information.

Step 4 Ask the customer equipment engineer to provide the transmitting optical power and the
optical module equipment type. Compare the optical power with the receiving optical power
on the client side of the OTU to determine if the fixed attenuator should be replaced. Record
the receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU.
For project H, the receiving optical power for the client-side OTU (the input optical power of
the client-side LSXL ports) must be within the range:
l TN11LSXL: from 0 dBm to +3 dBm.
l TN12LSXL: from -1 dBm to +1 dBm.
Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT ports on all OTUs emit light. If the OUT ports do not
emit light,
l check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If the services are
abnormal, clear the fault.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT port on the OTU. For the LSXL, the value must be
within the range from -5 dBm to 0 dBm. The normal value is –3 dBm.
Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn port for the M40 and record the value.
NOTE
Mn refers to the M31–M40 ports that are used in this example.

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OTU is
greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 to +3 dB to
facilitate the fine-tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps.
Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 by using a fiber
jumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the optical power for every
wavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then calculate the wavelength insertion loss
for the M40 to check whether the wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the
specification requirements.
NOTE
When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of the M40 is pre-
adjusted to +3 dB.
If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether the optical ports M31–M40 are properly
connected.
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to an
optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN optical
port on the OBU1 to ensure that the total input optical power of the OBU1 is near –9 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure
that the total optical power meets the specification requirements. Then, ensure the optical power flatness
for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the standards. The total input
optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation
formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power
+ 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total
optical power is -9 dBm.
Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the OBU1, and ensure that the total
output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.

NOTE
The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN port on the
OBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT port is +14dBm.
NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-
wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.
Obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical power = Single-
wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Connect the OUT optical port on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to query the
optical power for every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation of the Variable optical
attenuator attached to the M40 so that the output optical power flatness is about 0.5 dB.
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC port of the FIU board and
record the test result.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power at the RC port and the optical power at the OUT port on the
OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the FIU (when disconnecting the fiber from the
RM port), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical
power of the OUT on the FIU
Step 15 Test the output optical power for the TM port on the SC1 with an optical power meter, and
then test the input optical power for the RM port on the FIU. If the difference between the two
values is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanliness of the optical fibers.
Step 16 Test the output optical power for the OUT port on the FIU with an optical power meter (when
disconnecting the fiber from the RC port). Calculate the insertion loss from RM to OUT port
for the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
----End
8.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station

For the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms of the
optical power commissioning.
Prerequisites

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer, Fiber adapter,
Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000

l The type of OAU1 is OAU103.
Figure 8-22 Fiber connections of OLA station B
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN OUT RC
OAU1
IN OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power for the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare
the value with the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the
line attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation
is larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to
determine whether the cable attenuation is excessively high or the fiber routing is faulty. If the
cables are faulty, clear the fault immediately.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power for the TM port on the
west FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values
in the commissioning record.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port for the west FIU. The insertion
Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a
proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3 dB.
Step 5 Test the output optical power for the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Record the input optical power for the RM1 port and the output optical power for
the TM2 port in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power for the RM port and the output optical power for the OUT port on
the east FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion
Step 8 Test the input optical power for the IN port and the output optical power for the TC port on
the west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the
optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the west OAU1
to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN
optical port on the OAU1 to ensure that the total input optical power for the OAU1 is about
–10 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure
that the total input optical power meets the specification requirement. Then ensure the optical power
flatness for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the specification
requirements. The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical
power. The calculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength
input optical power + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20
dBm, the input total optical power is -10 dBm.
Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the west OAU1. Then adjust the
gain of the OAU1 on the U2000 to ensure that the total output optical power for the
multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power for the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-
wavelength input optical power should be not exceed +5.5 dBm.
The total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the following
formula: Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals
10).
Step 12 Test the input and output optical power for the DCM and calculate the DCM insertion loss.
DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power – DCM output optical power
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power for the RC port on the FIU and record the
value.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OAU is
greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU (when disconnecting the fiber to the
RM port) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical
power of the OUT on the FIU
----End

8.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
The commissioning rule for the OTM station is to "commission the optical power at the
transmit end based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM
station, you need to commission only the total input optical power. Then adjust the attenuation
for every wavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at
the receive end.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be established properly.
All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to
ensure that the OTU emits light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fiber jumper, flange, fixed
optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
l The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.
Figure 8-23 Fiber connections of OTM station D

Station D
D31 Tx
TDC RDC
DCM
LSXL
D32
D LSXL
From C OAU1
4
IN TC OUT IN 0
D40
LSXL
F TM RM1
I SC1
U RM TM1
M31 Rx
LSXL
OUT M32
M LSXL
To C OBU1 4
OUT RC OUT
IN 0
M40
LSXL


Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the fiber connections between boards are properly established and whether the
fibers on each board are tightly inserted. Immediately correct any issues found.
Step 2 Measure the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 8.5.2 Commissioning
Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 3 Commission the optical power of the OAU1 by referring to 8.5.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of the OLA Station.
Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN port on the D40 to an optical
spectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical power for each
wavelength.
Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the west D40 by using a fiber jumper.
Scan the multiplexed signal of the D40, and record the input optical power for each
wavelength.
Step 6 Measure the single-wavelength optical power at the Dn port on the D40 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be lower
than 6.5 dB, and the maximum insertion loss variance between wavelengths of the D40 must
be smaller than 2.0 dB.
Step 8 Measure the input and output optical power of the DCM and then calculate the insertion loss
for the DCM based on the following formula:
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the
DCM.
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the
optical power at the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
The input optical power on the WDM side of the LSXL board must be within the range of -11 dBm to -4
dBm. If the measured optical power does not meet the specification requirements, you need to add a
proper fixed optical attenuator, or replace/remove the existing fixed optical attenuator according to the
measured optical power, so that the receive optical power of the OTU is within the normal range.
Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the OTU after the input optical power
meets the specification requirements.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power on the
ODF side. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is
properly connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.
Step 12 On the U2000, query the input and output optical power of each OTU. The variance between
the optical power displayed on the U2000 and the measured optical power must be smaller
than 2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatness must be near ±1 dB after the commissioning. That is,
the OSNR measured by the optical spectrum analyzer must meet the specification
requirements and the OSNR for every wavelength is flat when the equalizing optical power
for every wavelength is normal. In addition, check whether the bit error rate conforms to the
expected value.

Step 13 If the connected client equipment is new, perform the 24–hour BER test on the client
equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not being used currently, configure a
loopback between the TX and RX ports on the client side for every OTU at station C. In this
case, a fixed optical attenuator needs to be installed between the two ports.
NOTE
8.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 8.5.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of the OLA Station, and 8.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the
OTM Station contain the process for commissioning an optical multiplex section. The commissioning
for the multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations is similar.
----End
8.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power for equalization.
Prerequisites
All channels must carry services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the OTU emit
light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical
l The G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the MON port on an OA at an OLA station to an optical spectrum analyzer to scan
the multiplexed signals. Then record the optical power for each wavelength.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power for each add wavelength by changing the attenuation of the VOA on
each add channel to ensure that the optical power is flat. That is, ensure that the optical power
for one wavelength differs from that of another wavelength at an intermediate station by less
than 2 dB.
Step 3 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a specific
wavelength is poor, improve the performance for this wavelength by changing its optical
power. In addition, make the opposite change to the optical power of the wavelength that has
the best performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed
optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.

NOTE
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve the wavelength performance.
----End
8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.
Prerequisites

U2000
Testing Method of Receive-End OSNR

The OSNR at the receive end can be tested either by using the scanning method or the integral
method.
Scanning Method
Module Type Channel RBW of the Span of the Remarks

Spacing Optical Optical
(GHz) Spectrum Spectrum
Analyzer Analyzer
Set Value Set Value
40G ODB 50 0.5 nm 100 GHz Odd

wavelengths
40G DQPSK 100 1 nm 100 GHz and even
50 0.5 nm 100 GHz wavelengths are
tested
separately.
Integral method

Analyzer Analyzer
Set Value Set Value
40G ODB 50 l 0.02nm 0.4 nm The OSNR of a

(minimum single 40G
40G DQPSK 100 resolution 0.8 nm signal
wavelength


Analyzer Analyzer
Set Value Set Value
50 for AQ 0.4 nm obtained by

instruments) using the
l 0.06nm integral method
(minimum should be close
resolution to the specified
for Agilent OSNR value in
instruments) the design
drawing. That
is, the variance
between the
detected OSNR
and the design
value must be
within the range
of -1 dB to +1
dB.
The 40G optical spectrum is wide, and the tested OSNR deviates from the actual OSNR
greatly by using the scanning method. Thus, the integral method is recommended for testing
the OSNR.
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is
higher than the design OSNR tolerance, which refers to the tolerance at which the boards at
the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a
specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a
certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR of the
wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths
that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be
incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9
boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is
no parallel OADM station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the
commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power of
the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the
wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck
the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR.
Then continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in step 1. If the OSNRs for the
two wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is
successful.

NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning,
analyze the cause, and then continue specific commissioning.
----End
Example
If a wavelength traverses a parallel OADM station, adjust the OSNR based on the OEQ
configuration modes and the OSNR tolerance listed in Table 8-13, Table 8-14, Table 8-15,
and Table 8-16.
Table 8-13 OSNR tolerance for a 40G ODB 40-channel system
1. G.652 ODB 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR
Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)
Fiber Input +4 dBm +4 dBm +4 dBm +4 dBm -

Power
Dispersion -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5
Tolerance km km km km
Power OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR

Equilibriu Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance
m (With M40) (With (With (With
M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)
Transmissi OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR Typical

on hops Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance PMD
OSNR
Penalty
1 19.31 19.31 19.31 19.31 0.5
2 19.46 19.36 19.36 19.36 0.5
3 19.61 19.41 19.41 19.41 0.5
4 19.7 19.45 19.45 19.45 0.5
5 19.94 19.59 19.59 19.59 0.6
6 20.28 19.82 19.82 19.82 0.8
7 20.55 19.99 19.99 19.99 0.93
8 20.87 20.2 20.2 20.2 1.12
9 - 20.62 20.62 20.62 1.31
10 - 20.94 20.94 20.94 1.51
11 - 21.47 21.47 21.47 1.71

1. G.652 ODB 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR

Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
12 - 21.8 21.8 21.8 1.92
Table 8-14 OSNR tolerance for a 40G ODB 80-channel system

1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance
Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 19.01 19.01 19.01 19.01 0.5
2 19.16 19.06 19.06 19.06 0.5
3 19.51 19.31 19.31 19.31 0.5
4 19.6 19.35 19.35 19.35 0.5

1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance
Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
5 20.04 19.69 19.69 19.69 0.6
6 20.38 19.92 19.92 19.92 0.8
7 20.95 20.39 20.39 20.39 0.93
8 21.27 20.6 20.6 20.6 1.12
9 - 20.82 20.82 20.82 1.31
10 - 21.04 21.04 21.04 1.51
11 - 21.47 21.47 21.47 1.71
12 - 21.7 21.7 21.7 1.92

Table 8-15 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR

Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 16.01 16.01 16.01 16.01 0.3
2 16.16 16.06 16.06 16.06 0.3
3 16.31 16.11 16.11 16.11 0.3
4 16.5 16.25 16.25 16.25 0.3
5 16.64 16.29 16.29 16.29 0.3
6 16.88 16.42 16.42 16.42 0.3
7 17.02 16.45 16.45 16.45 0.3
8 17.25 16.58 16.58 16.58 0.3
9 - 16.71 16.71 16.71 0.3
10 - 16.83 16.83 16.83 0.3
11 - 17.26 17.26 17.26 0.3
12 - 17.28 17.28 17.28 0.3
13 - - 17.4 17.4 0.3
14 - - 17.53 17.53 0.3
15 - - 17.65 17.65 0.3
16 - - 17.77 17.77 0.3
17 - - 18.09 17.99 0.3
18 - - 18.41 18.21 0.3
19 - - 18.73 18.43 0.3


Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
20 - - 19.14 18.74 0.3
21 - - 19.56 19.16 0.3
22 - - 20.08 19.68 0.3
Table 8-16 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system


Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 16.01 16.01 16.01 16.01 0.3
2 16.16 16.06 16.06 16.06 0.3



Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
3 16.31 16.11 16.11 16.11 0.3
4 16.4 16.15 16.15 16.15 0.3
5 16.54 16.19 16.19 16.19 0.3
6 16.68 16.22 16.22 16.22 0.3
7 16.82 16.25 16.25 16.25 0.3
8 16.95 16.28 16.28 16.28 0.3
9 - 16.31 16.31 16.31 0.3
10 - 16.33 16.33 16.33 0.3
11 - 16.56 16.56 16.56 0.3
12 - 16.58 16.58 16.58 0.3
13 - - 16.7 16.7 0.3
14 - - 16.73 16.73 0.3
15 - - 16.85 16.85 0.3
16 - - 16.87 16.87 0.3
17 - - 17.19 17.09 0.3
18 - - 17.51 17.31 0.3
19 - - 17.83 17.53 0.3
20 - - 18.14 17.74 0.3

NOTE
In Table 8-13, Table 8-14, Table 8-15, and Table 8-16, "OSNR Tolerance (With M40)" indicates that the
M40 board is used at the transmit end, and that neither pre-equalization is applied nor is the OEQ station
configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end
for pre-equalization but no OEQ station is used on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ)" indicates
that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and one OEQ station is configured on the line.
"OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-
equalization and two OEQ stations are configured on the line. The concept of the OEQ station covers the
back-to-back OTM station and ROADM station on the line. The configuration modes are designed in the
engineering design phase. During commissioning, you need to select an appropriate mode and commission
the optical power based on the OSNR tolerance given in the tables.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 8-13, Table 8-14, Table 8-15, and Table 8-16 increases with the number
of spans. The maximum number of transmission spans is 20. That is, the regenerator section must be
terminated at the 20th transmission span. If the services on the network need to be transmitted further, a
regeneration board must be added.
The number of transmission spans (also called the number of transmission levels) corresponding to the OSNR
tolerance indicates how many times that a wavelength enters a transmission fiber after being amplified by an
optical amplifier. It is equivalent to the number of spans of the transmission fibers or optical transmission
sections (OTSs). Note that a fiber connection inside a station is not considered a transmission span.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 8-13, Table 8-14, Table 8-15, and Table 8-16 includes the "Typical
PMD Penalty" listed in the last column. The typical PMD penalty is obtained when the customer fiber PMD
coefficient is .
8.7 OSNR Penalties

If the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks are
performed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty, you can evaluate
impacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet system requirements.
The OSNR penalty (expressed in dB) covers various penalty types, such as, OSNR penalty
resulting from over-limit dispersion and PMD penalty resulting from over-limit PMD.
Currently, focus on the following types of OSNR penalties: power penalty, hybrid
transmission penalty, high-power hybrid transmission penalty, PDL penalty, PMD penalty,
and ROADM penalty.
Power Penalty
In the system design process, if a high-power amplifier is being used as required, you need to
consider the extra penalty due to an increase in the single-wavelength signal power. This extra
penalty is called the power penalty, and the high-power amplifier in this context refers to an
amplifier with the maximum output power higher than +20 dBm.These high-power amplifiers
include TN11HBA, TN11OAU105, TN12OAU105, and TN11OBU205. If the amplifier has a
maximum output power of +20 dBm or less, you do not need to consider the power penalty. If
an amplifier has a maximum output power of +26 dBm, you need to consider this amplifier in
the 40G system as a separate span.
The power penalties in a 40G ODB system are as follows:

l In a 40G ODB 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single
wavelength is +1 dBm.
l In a regenerator section, if one to two +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do
not need to consider a power penalty.
l In a regenerator section, if three to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers dBm are used,
you need to consider a power penalty of 0.7 dB.
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system are as follows:
l The standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +4 dBm.
l Table 8-17 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system.
Table 8-17 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

Power Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers
Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Nu 1 0.4 - - - - - - - - -
mbe
r of 2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - - -
trans 3 0.4 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - -
miss
ion 4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - - -
span
s 5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 - - - - -
6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 - - - -
7 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 - - -
8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 - -
9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 -
10 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
11 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
13 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
14 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
16 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
17 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
18 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
19 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
20 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system are as follows:

l In a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a
single wavelength is +1 dBm.
l Table 8-18 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.
Table 8-18 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system

Power Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers
Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Nu 1 0.2 - - - - - - - - - -
mbe
r of 2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - - -
tran 3 0.2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - -
smi
ssio 4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 - - - - - - -
n
spa 5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - -
ns
6 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - -
7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 - - - -
8 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 - - -
9 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 - -
10 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 -
11 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
12 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
13 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
14 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
15 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
16 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
17 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
18 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
19 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
20 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If low-rate modulated signals (including 2.5G NRZ signals, 10G NRZ signals, and 10G
(D)RZ signals) need to be transmitted over the channels adjacent to a 40G channel, in the
system design process you need to consider an extra penalty, called a hybrid transmission
penalty in this case. In this context, hybrid adjacent transmission of a 40G ODB channel
refers to transmission of 10G/2.5G signals over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength
channel within 200 GHz channel spacing. In the case of a network on which the standard

incident power is +1 dBm for the entire regenerator section, you can ignore the extra OSNR
penalty generated by the hybrid adjacent transmission in each section.
In the case of a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire
regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table
8-19 and Table 8-20 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel
system.
Table 8-19 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

Hybrid Transmission Adjacency Type
Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 0.5 0.7 0.0

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13 0.8 1.2
14
15
16
17 2.7 2.6
18
19
20


Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmissi
on Penalty Two-Side Adjacency
100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + Z+ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z Z Z Z
Num 1 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.6 1.6 0.0 0.3 0.3
ber
of 2
trans 3
missi
on 4
span
s 5
10
11
12
13 2.5 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 0.2 0.5 0.5
14
15
16
17 4.0 - - 4.3 - - 0.4 0.8 0.8
18
19
20
For a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire
regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table
8-21 and Table 8-22 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel
system.


Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type
One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 0.6 0.7 0.3 0.3

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13 1.0 1.5 0.4 0.4
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20


Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmissi
on Penalty Two-Side Adjacency
50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 100
GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + Z+ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z Z Z Z
Num 1 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.5
ber
of 2
trans 3
missi
on 4
span
s 5
10
11
12
13 1.9 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.6 2.6 0.5 0.7 0.7
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
If both 40G and 10G signals are transmitted and high-power amplifiers are used on the network, you need to
consider the overall penalty instead of only the separate 40G/10G hybrid transmission penalty and the power
penalty caused by the high-power amplifier. For details, see High-Power and Hybrid Transmission
Penalty.

High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If high-power amplifiers (the maximum output optical power exceeds +20 dBm) are used and
40G and low-rate signals are transmitted on a network at the same time, you need to consider
the OSNR penalty on the 40G signals. This type of penalty is referred to as a high-power
hybrid transmission penalty.
If a 10G or 2.5G single wavelength, or if both 10G and 2.5G wavelengths, are transmitted
over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz channel spacing,
the high-power hybrid transmission penalties are as follows:
l In a regenerator section, if one to three +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do
not need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty.
l In a regenerator section, if four to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you
need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty of 0.5 dB.
Table 8-23 and Table 8-24 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G
eDQPSK 40-channel system.
Table 8-23 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system
High-Power Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmission Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 1.5a 1.8a 0.8a 1.0a

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16


One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
17 -
18
19
20
High-Power Adjacency Type
Hybrid
Transmissi Two-Side Adjacency
on Penalty 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NR NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + Z+ Z + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R +N (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z RZ Z Z Z Z
Num 1 l 1.5 l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. 1.0a 1.2a 1.2a

ber b 7b 7b 5 7b 7b
of 2 b
l 2.2 l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2.
trans c l 2.
3 7c 7c 7c 7c
missi 2
on 4 c
spans
5
10
11
12
13 -
14

High-Power Adjacency Type

Hybrid
Transmissi Two-Side Adjacency
on Penalty 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NR NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + Z+ Z + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R +N (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z RZ Z Z Z Z
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. If more than five +23 dBm amplifiers are
used, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than five.
l "b" indicates that one or two +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
l "c" indicates that three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds
three, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than three.
Table 8-25 and Table 8-26 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties for a 40G
eDQPSK 80-channel system.

One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 l 1.3a l 1.4a l 0.2a l 0.2a

transmission
spans 2 l 2.1b l 1.5b l 0.2b l 0.4b


One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
10
11
12
13 l 2.6c
14 l 2.7d
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
High- Adjacency Type
Power
Hybrid Two-Side Adjacency
Transmissi 50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 100
on Penalty GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + )RZ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R + Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z (D Z Z Z Z
)RZ
Num 1 l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 0. l 0. l 0.
ber 8a 8a 3a 8a 8a 3a 3a 2a 2a
of 2
trans 3

High- Adjacency Type

Power
Hybrid Two-Side Adjacency
Transmissi 50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 100
on Penalty GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + )RZ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R + Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z (D Z Z Z Z
)RZ
missi 4 l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 0. l 0. l 0.
on 5b 5b 0 5b 5b 0b 5b 4b 4b
span 5 b
l 0. l 0. l 0.
s 6 8c 6c 6c
l 1. l 1.
7
2d 2d
8
10
11
12
13 -
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see
Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
l "b" indicates that four to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l "c" indicates that six to eight +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l "d" indicates that nine to twelve +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds 12, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value
smaller than 12.

PDL Penalty
If no ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, the OSNR tolerance specification
described in 8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the PDL penalty in a
normal situation. In this case, you do not need to consider an extra PDL penalty.
If an ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, you need to consider an extra PDL
penalty caused by the WSS component at the ROADM station. In this case, you need to
consider a PDL penalty of 0.15 dB for each WSS component that a 40G ODB or 40G
eDQPSK wavelength traverses.
PMD Penalty
The "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 8.6 Commissioning
OSNR for the 40G System includes the typical PMD penalty, which is given based on the
fiber PMD coefficient of a regenerator section. If customers provide the

actual fiber parameter values or the actual fiber PMD coefficient is greater than the provided
PMD coefficient, you need to calculate the PMD penalty based on the following formula, then
substitute the calculated PMD penalty for the "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the
OSNR tolerance table in 8.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System. The calculated
PMD penalty is used as the OSNR tolerance of the regenerator section after the PMD penalty
is considered.
NOTE
The PMD tolerance is a key specification in a module test of a WDM system. As a random function of optical
wavelengths and time, the PMD may be different for different fibers at a specified time. The differential
group delay (DGD) is used to measure the PMD of a line. As a statistical value, the DGD probability
distribution must comply with the Maxwell distribution rate when long fibers are used. As the maximum
DGD value is three times the average DGD value, you need to calculate the PMD value permitted by a fiber
based on the maximum DGD value.
In general, the actual PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 is given in engineering design
documents. Based on this PMD coefficient, you can calculate the DGD value (ps) of each
optical amplifier span and optical multiplex section.
For optical amplifier spans, the DGD calculation formula is ,

where DGD represents the DGD value expressed in ps for each span, PMD represents the
PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 for each span, L represents the span distance
expressed in km, and L1/2 represents the square root of the span distance.
For the multiplex section, the DGD calculation formula is
, where (DGDi) represents the

DGD value of each section and is expressed in ps, and Li represents the distance for each
section.
In a 40G system, a DCM module introduces a PMD penalty while compensating for
distributed dispersions. In addition, the board using a WSS component also introduces a PMD
penalty of 0.2 ps.
For example, there are X (an integer representing the quantity) multiplex sections on the
network. The DGD of these multiplex sections can be calculated by using the

formula, where i is an integer equal to or smaller than X. In addition,

there are M (an integer representing the quantity) DCM modules and the PMD penalty
introduced by each DCM module can be calculated by using the

formula, where j is an integer equal to or smaller than M. Furthermore, there are N (an integer
representing the quantity) boards configured with WSS components. In this case, the DGD
value of all the multiplex sections can be calculated by using the
formula. You
can then convert the DGD value into the OSNR penalty by using the following formulas:
and
ROADM Penalty
Each WSS component at an ROADM station generates a certain OSNR penalty in 40G
signals. In a regenerator section, the number of WSS components at the ROADM stations that
40G signals traverse corresponds to an OSNR penalty. This type of OSNR penalty is called
the ROADM penalty. For the association between the number of the WSS components and
the OSNR penalty, see Table 8-27.

Table 8-27 OSNR penalty
Num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ber of
WSS
Com
pone
nts
That
40G
Signa
ls
Trave
rse
Extra 0 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Trans
missio
n
Penalt
y
8.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In
addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of
transmission fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
Prerequisites
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be
established correctly.
The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

U2000
Precaution
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt services.

When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the
automatic dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it
for a 40G board on the U2000.
NOTE
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the
process of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.
Procedure
l Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.
In addition, determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct

based on the following principles.
– If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is
proper.
– If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to
+300, attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the
network design personnel.
– If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to
the project manager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for
the dispersion compensation module (DCM) for the network.
a. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.
c. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. The
search status changes to Searching. After successful search, the search status
changes to The search is successful.
NOTE
l After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do not
change until you query them.
l If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.
d. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensation
value.
e. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
NOTE
After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of the
dispersion compensation value may change.
f. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
l Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the
board.
a. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.

c. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.

NOTE
l The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation
range.
l The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine
tuned only if they are in the fine tune range.
d. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
----End
8.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G

System
may happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle
the problems according to actual situations.
8.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters

This section describes how to rectify incorrect setting of board parameters in the deployment
commissioning phase.
Handling Method
1. Determine if the service type configured on the client side of the board is consistent with
the actual service type. If not, change the setting (STM-256 is the default service type).
2. Ensure that the FEC mode of the two interconnected boards is the same.
3. If OTN services are configured on the client side, the FEC mode of the interconnected
board is always FEC. If the 40G board is interconnected with the OTU board on the
client side, check the FEC mode of the OTU board. Ensure that the FEC mode is set to
FEC.
4. Ensure that the wavelength of the two interconnected boards is the same.
8.9.2 OSNR Failure

This section describes how to resolve the problem with the OSNR that are not up to the
design value in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
The integral method must be used to test the OSNR of a system to check whether the OSNR
is up to the network design value. If the input and output optical power and gain for each OA
on the network are the same as the network design values but the OSNR is not, inform the
project manager to provide this feedback to the network design engineers.
NOTE
Do not increase the optical power at the transmit end to increase the system OSNR. If you increase the
transmit optical power, the attendant nonlinear effects cause a sharp degrade in the performance of the
system. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the system OSNR fails.

8.9.3 Excessively High Incident Optical Power

This section describes how to resolve the problem of excessively high incident optical power
in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
A 40G system is sensitive to nonlinear effects. In general, a 40G system requires that the
incident optical power should be lower than 4 dBm. If the incident optical power is higher
than 4 dBm, nonlinear effects are caused and transmission performance degrade occurs. In the
fault identification process, check the output optical power of each OA on the line to ensure
that the actual output optical power of each OA deviates from the nominal output optical
power by at most ±1.5 dB.
8.9.4 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration

This section describes how to resolve the problem of incorrect dispersion configuration in the
deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
Regardless of whether the system is a 40G or 10G, the methods for handling a dispersion
problem are similar. To resolve a dispersion problem, add a fiber or DCM at the receive end to
change the system dispersion (note that the optical power of the OTU boards and the OA
boards in the system must remain unchanged after you change the dispersion), and use the
TDCM integrated in an 40G OTU board to automatically search for the optimal dispersion
compensation value (if possible, fine-tune the dispersion compensation). Ensure that the
system OSNR and optical power are normal. If the TDCM fails to automatically search for
the optimal dispersion compensation value, you need to adjust the DCM configurations by
referring to the dispersion configuration rules.
NOTE
The TDCM integrated in a 40G OTU board has a requirement on a wavelength carrying the receive optical
signals. If this wavelength fails to match the TDCM, the dispersion adjustment fails. Therefore, the
wavelengths for the two interconnected 40G OTU boards must be the odd wavelengths or even wavelengths.
8.9.5 Methods for Handling Other Faults

This section describes how to handle other faults in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
l The performance of certain 40G channels degrades after the commissioning.
– Possible cause: The TDCM integrated in the relevant 40G boards fails to adjust the
dispersion compensation to the optimal value.
– Solution: Refer to the TDCM value of the channel that has good performance and
shares the same source and sink as the channel being commissioned. Then adjust
the TDCM value for a channel with poor performance until the channel
performance reaches the optimal value.
l All the 40G channels on a route cannot be set up, or the performance of all these
channels is poor after the commissioning.
– Possible cause 1: After the design, the fiber route or length on this link is changed.
A 40G system has a high requirement on dispersion compensation deviation. After

the fiber route or length is changed, the existing DCM does not match the changed
fiber length. As a result, the 40G channels on this link cannot be set up or the
performance of these 40G channels is poor.
– Solution 1: If a fiber on a link is changed (for example, fiber length, attenuation,
and PMD), the changed parameter values must be provided to design engineers for
evaluation so that the design engineers can determine whether to adjust the design.
– Possible cause 2: The relevant DCMs are connected incorrectly or the relevant
dispersion configurations are incorrect.
– Solution 2: Focus on the dispersion configurations on the network.
NOTE
Compared with a 10G board, a 40G board has a higher rate and thus can tolerate a narrower range
of dispersion.
l For ODB and eDQPSK optical modules, the compensation for chromatic dispersion on a
line must be accurate to ±5.0 km. In a G.652 fiber network, a 10 km or 5 km DCM must be
used to ensure this compensation accuracy.
l All 40G channels on a route cannot be set up or the performance of these channels is
poor after the commissioning. In addition, this problem exists in both directions of this
route.
– Possible cause: The DCMs on the link are connected incorrectly, especially the
DCMs that are used for under-compensation or over-compensation.
– Solution: Check the input and output optical power for a DCM on the U2000 . Then
calculate the attenuation of the DCM, or check the fiber connections for a station at
the site to determine whether the DCM at this station is incorrectly connected.
l The OSNR for a 40G channel is lower than the design value after the commissioning.
(The OSNR for the 40G channel is obtained by using the integral method.)
– Possible cause: The commissioning is not performed by using a normal method, or
the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the design attenuation value.
– Solution: Recommission this link. If the actual attenuation of a span on the link
exceeds the design attenuation value, adjust the fibers on this span.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 9 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Commissioning Guide Coherent Transmission System
9 Example for Commissioning the Optical

Power of the Coherent Transmission System
About This Chapter
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of coherent system.
9.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
This topic describes the specific requirements on optical transmission performance of the
coherent transmission system. This topic focuses on the overall commissioning rules and the
difference between the coherent transmission system and non-coherent transmission system in
the incident optical power commissioning. In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system,
comply with the rules for commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence.
9.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system
This topic describes the general process for commissioning the coherent transmission system.
designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, OSNR, ITL
configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission , meet the requirements for
setting up the coherent transmission system.
9.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent System
This topic describes how to commission the single-channel 100G OTM, OLA and ROADM
stations on the U2000.
9.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning
This section lists some frequently asked questions on coherent system commissioning.

9.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

Coherent Transmission System
This topic describes the specific requirements on optical transmission performance of the
coherent transmission system. This topic focuses on the overall commissioning rules and the
difference between the coherent transmission system and non-coherent transmission system in
the incident optical power commissioning. In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system,
comply with the rules for commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence.
Requirements and Commissioning Process for the Incident Optical Power of the
Coherent Transmission System
In an optical transmission system, after the optical power of the transmit-end OA board is
adjusted to reach the nominal output optical power, the fiber access scenarios (including the
standard and non-standard fiber access scenarios) need to be determined based on the incident
optical power, and the incident optical power needs to be adjusted for the non-standard fiber
access scenario. Table 9-1 and Table 9-2 describe the requirements for the incident optical
power of the coherent transmission system and the methods of determining the fiber access
scenarios and commissioning the incident optical power respectively.
Table 9-1 Requirements for the incident optical power of the coherent transmission system
Module Number of Incident Optical Power Counter (Mainstream or
Type Wavelengt Special Incident Optical Power a)
hs
G.652 Leaf G.653 TW-RS
40G ePDM- 40 +1/+4 -1/-3 -7/-5 -2/-4

BPSK
80 +1/+4 -1/-3 -7/-5 -2/-4
100G 40 +1/+4 -1/-3 -7/-5 -2/-4

ePDM-
QPSK 80 +1/+4 -1/-3 -7/-5 -2/-4
a: The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and special incident optical
power is used to reduce the non-linear effects or improve the optical signal-to-noise ratio
(OSNR).

Figure 9-1 Commissioning process for the incident optical power of the coherent
transmission system
Start
Query the nominal single-

wavelength output power
1 (a) of the OA at the
Based on the OA
transmit end
board type and
line-side fiber type
Query the incident optical
2
power counter (b) Determine the
scenario as the
standard fiber
3
a>b? N access scenario
Determine the scenario
as the non-standard Y
fiber access scenario
Calculate and set the
attenuation of the EVOA at
the incident optical power
4 adjustment point:
(a-0.5)-b
End
Example 1 40 channels@G.653 fiber Example 2 80 channels@G.652 fiber

1 2 1 2
Nominal single- Incident optical Nominal single- Incident optical
wavelength output power counter wavelength output power counter
power a is +4 b is -7 power a is +1 b is +1
F F
OAU OAU
I I
101 101
U U
Set the attenuation 3 a>b 3 a=b

4 of the EVOA
Non-standard fiber Standard fiber
4-0.5-(-7)=10.5
access scenario access scenario
NOTE
In the non-standard fiber access scenario, the commissioning objective is to make the actual single-
wavelength incident optical power at the incident optical power reference point be equal to or smaller than
the incident optical power counter.

Commissioning Difference Between the Coherent and Non-coherent

Transmission Systems
Table 9-2 Commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent transmission
systems
Transmi Non-standard Fiber Access Standard Fiber Access
ssion
System
Coherent The incident optical power reference point is The EVOA at the input optical power
moved to the OUT port on the FIU board adjustment point of the receive-end OA
system instead of the OUT port on the transmit-end board at the downstream site may be
OA board. moved behind the OUT port of the
transmit-end OA board at the upstream
sitea.
F F
OAU I I OAU
U U
F F
OAU I I OAU
U U
Non-
F F F F
coherent OAU I I OAU OAU I I OAU
system U U U U
: Incident optical power reference point : Incident optical power adjustment point
: Input optical power adjustment point of the receive-end OA board at the

downstream site
NOTE
a: On a practical coherent network, the position where the EVOA at the input optical power adjustment
point of the receive-end OA board at a site is located is determined by the actual network design. If the
EVOA is located at the receive end of the downstream site, the commissioning method is the same as
that in a non-coherent transmission system.
NOTE
The figures describe the commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent transmission
systems in a signal flow, and in the opposite direction they are the same way.
Commissioning Rules for Coherent Transmission System

Observe the following rules when commissioning the coherent transmission system:
l Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power of the OA board. It
is prohibited to improve the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical
power in the initial engineering phase.
l The optical power at the IN optical port on a 100G/40G OTU board must be within the
range of -12 dBm to -5 dBm.
l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and
the OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power

flatness is small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power
flatness.
l In the case of coherent transmission system commissioning, adjust the optical power
difference between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations
that balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value
not more than ±1 dB.
l If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength
optical power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are the single-wavelength
input optical power must be within the range of nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB at
both the transmit and receive ends.
l In an 80-wavelength system, when G.653 optical fibers are used and there is no
requirement for more than 40 wavelengths, you can use 40 wavelengths in the range of
192.100 THz to 193.050 THz and 195.100 THz to 196.050 THz to increase the
transmission distance.
NOTE
The involved boards include FIU, DFIU, SFIU, and DAS1. To use the preceding 40 wavelengths,
perform the following: On the U2000, start the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > WDM Interface
> Configure Working Band Parity , and set Configure Working Band Parity to ecldmin40.
Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 100G, 40G and 10G Signals
l 100G signals should be deployed on long wavelengths with precedence. 10G signals
should be deployed on short wavelengths. 40G signals can be deployed between 100G
and 10G wavelengths to function as a guard band.
l Principles for setting guard bands in a G.652/LEAF fiber system:
– No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of 100G and 40G BPSK signals.
– No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of 100G and 40G DQPSK
signals.
– No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of 40G BPSK and 40G DQPSK
signals.
– For hybrid transmission of 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals, guard bands must be
configured and the 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals can neighbor each other on
only one side.
– For hybrid transmission of 40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals, guard bands
must be configured and the 40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals can neighbor
each other on only one side.
NOTE
l The guard band configuration varies according to networks. You can contact Huawei engineers to
design the guard bands in practical applications.
l In the event of hybrid transmission of 100G/40G BPSK, 40G DQPSK, and 10G/40G ODB signals,
the 40G DQPSK signals can be filled in the space between the 100G/40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB
signals as a guard band. In addition, the guard band must meet the network design requirement for
the channel spacing between the 100G/40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals.
Commissioning Rules for Mixed Transmission System

Observe the following rules when commissioning mixed transmission system:
l In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system, comply with the rules for commissioning
non-coherent signals with precedence. In special scenarios to which the rules for

commissioning non-coherent signals are inapplicable, perform commissioning based on

the actual plan and design results.
l For a hybrid transmission system with dispersion compensation, the requirements for
incident optical power are the same as those for the non-coherent transmission system.
l In adjacent mixed transmission of 100G signals and 40G/10G signals, it is recommended
that the optical power of 100G signals satisfy the following conditions:
– Approximate to optical power of 40G signals.
– Larger than that of 10G signals but smaller than the nominal single-wavelength
optical power of the OA board.
l In the mixed spectrum of 100G signals, 40G signals and 10G signals, the spectrum of
100G signals and 40G signals are wider and the amplitude is lower than that of 10G
signals. Actually, the power of 10G signals is equal to the power of 100G signals and
40G signals. Therefore, measure optical power of the 40G wavelength and the 100G
wavelength accurately.
9.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission

system
This topic describes the general process for commissioning the coherent transmission system.
Figure 9-2 shows the process for commissioning the coherent transmission system.

Figure 9-2 Process for commissioning the coherent transmission system
Start
Flatten the optical power of the

OTM station at the transmit end
Commission the optical power of an

OLA station
Commission the optical power of

Add Wavelengths and Links at an
ROADM station
Commission the input optical power

of the OTM station at the receive
end
Equalize the optical power at

intermediate stations and Optimize
performance of each wavelength
End

designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, OSNR, ITL
configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission , meet the requirements for
setting up the coherent transmission system.
The preparations before commissioning the optical power of the coherent transmission system
are as follows:
l Check the design documents.

– Optical amplifier types and dispersion configuration and compensation modes

– Channel allocation for mixed transmission signals
– Configuration of basic NE data such as NE IP and NE ID and station fiber
connection diagram
– Comparison between the planned designs and the actual designs on the live network
l Prepare the following commissioning meters:
– Optical spectrum analyzer
– Optical power meter
– Other types of test meters as listed in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3 Analyzers

Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503/ONT-603
EXFO FTB-500
l NMS:
– iManager U2000
9.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent

System
This topic describes how to commission the single-channel 100G OTM, OLA and ROADM
stations on the U2000.

commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be

This example is system equipped with OPM8. For the commissioning rules and methods of a
network that has no OPM or MCA, see Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Coherent Transmission System and Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on
the Chain Network.
Networking Diagram
Figure 9-3 shows the network topology of project K. In a chain network, optical NEs A, B, C
and D are WDM equipment. Optical NEs A and D are configured as OTM stations. Optical
NE B is an OLA station. Optical NE C is a ROADM station. 10-channel 100G services are
transmitted between Optical A and D.
Figure 9-3 shows the span loss and distance between the NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the
line optical fiber.
Figure 9-3 Service requirement matrix in project K
A B C D
36 km/10dB 87 km/24dB 110 km/30dB
OTM OLA ROADM

Figure 9-4 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project K.
Figure 9-4 Wavelength allocation diagram of project K

A C D
NS4 192.10THz 100GE NS4 192.10THz
NS4 192.20THz 100GE NS4 192.20THz
NS4 192.30THz 100GE NS4 192.30THz
NS4 192.40THz 100GE NS4 192.40THz
OA Configuration Diagram
Figure 9-5 shows the configuration for an OA at each station in project K.

Figure 9-5 OA configuration diagram of project K
TM20 TM20 AMx

EXPI
TD20 TD20 RDU9 WSD9
The TD20 board is equipped with
EDFA inside and has the optical
WSM9
amplification function. Therefore,
adjust the board as an OA board . WSD9
M D
4
RDU9 WSD9
4
0
0
V
D
WSM9 RDU9
4 M
0
4
0
WSM9 WSD9
A B V
TM20 TM20 TD20 TD20
D
C
Principles for adjusting network-wide OA boards:
1. For OAs on the main optical path, adjust the upstream and downstream EVOA attenuation to ensure that the local input optical power reaches the nominal value .
For a board marked blue, adjust the EVOA attenuation so that the input optical power reaches the nominal value .
2. In the local direction, adjust the EVOA attenuation to the minimum value for the OA boards in the wavelength -multiplexing direction to make the optical path
available. After the optical path becomes available , do not adjust the power of the multiplexing wavelengths . Otherwise, multiple wavelengths will be affected.
For a board marked blue , adjust the EVOA attenuation to the minimum value .
3. In the local direction, preset the EVOA attenuation for each channel of the WSM and WSD boards to make the optical path available . Then fine tune each EVOA
channel so that the optical power of each wavelength in the local direction reaches the nominal value .
For a board marked orange , preset the EVOA attenuation for each channel to make the optical path available . Then fine tune the EVOA attenuation for
each channel so that the input optical power of the adjacent downstream OA board reaches the nominal value .
4. When local multiplexing wavelengths are added on a multiplexer component , ensure that the difference between the local multiplexing wavelength power and pass -
through multiplexing wavelength power on the add ports of the multiplexer board is less than 5 dB.
For boards in a red box , adjust the EVOA attenuation for the AMX port to ensure that the difference between the EXPI port power and AMx port power
must be less than 5 dB.

at the OTM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in the
Prerequisite
OTU board emit light properly.
The receive wavelengths of 100G OTU boards have been set.
ECC communication has been established.
Optical supervisory channels (OSCs) have been commissioned.
Optical cross-connections have been configured at each station.


U2000
l In the 40-wavelength 100G system, three wavelengths are configured at the OTM station
in practice: one is dropped at station C, and the other two pass through station C and are
dropped at station D.
l The type of OAU1 is OAU106.
Testing Diagram
Figure 9-6 Fiber connections of the OTM station
Site A 3
1 2 5
Set up the optical path by Set the gain to 16 dB Set the EVOA attenuation
Preset the attenuation to 5 adjusting the EVOA (minimum nominal gain) to 5 dB for the OUT port
dB for each channel on attenuation to the minimum for the OAU106 board. of the OAU106 board.
the M40V board. value for the OAU106 board.
M38
NS4
RDC
M
M39 4 VI VO OAU TDC
NS4 106 To B
0 OUT IN OUT RC OUT
V MON
M40
NS4
Use the OPM board to scan the optical power
of the OAU106 board and adjust the attenuation 4 TM RM F
of each channel on the M40V board, so that the I
OPM8 SC1
optical power of each wavelength reaches the
nominal value and power flatness is achieved. RM TM U
D38
NS4 MON
D OUT OAU
D39 4 106 TC From B
NS4 0
IN IN
RDC TDC
D40
NS4
How to ensure that the optical power of each wavelength reaches the nominal value and power flatness is
achieved:
& The nominal single-wavelength input optical power (A) of the OAU106 board is -12 dB, the gain (B) is +16 dB, and
the nominal single-wavelength output optical power (C) is +4 dB.
& Use the OPM board to scan the OAU106 board to obtain the optical power of each wavelength. Adjust the
attenuation of each channel on the M40V board so that the output optical power of each wavelength is close to
value C.
& After adjusting the channel attenuation for the M40V board, use the OPM board to scan the OAU106 board. If the
power difference of wavelengths is less than 3 dB, power flatness is satisfactory.
Commissioning range in this direction

EVOA

NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the EVOA or add the
Procedure
NOTE
The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each
wavelength during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
navigation tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 Set up the optical path by adjusting the attenuation of the EVOA on the OAU106 board to the
minimum value.
1. Select the desired EVOA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
navigation tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
minimum value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU106 to the minimum nominal gain.
navigation tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 16.0dB.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
Here is used as an example of the OAU106. The minimum nominal gain is 16 dB, the nominal single-
wavelength input optical power is –12 dB (40 channels), and the nominal single-wavelength output optical
power is +4 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the amplifier, see boards.
Step 4 Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and adjust the attenuation
of each channel on the M40V board so that the optical power of each wavelength reaches the
nominal optical power value and optical power flatness is achieved.
NOTE
The nominal input optical power (A) of each wavelength on the OAU106 board is -12 dB, the gain (B)
is +16 dB, and the nominal output optical power (C) of each wavelength is +4 dB.
Use the OPM board to scan the OAU106 board to obtain the output optical power of each wavelength on
the OAU106 board. Then adjust the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board so that the output
optical power of each wavelength is close to value C.
After adjusting the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board, use the OPM board to scan the
wavelength power. If the power difference of wavelengths is less than 3 dB, the power flatness is
satisfactory.

Step 5 Set the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the local
station to 5 dB, so that the input optical power of the OAU106 board at downstream station B
reaches the nominal value.
NOTE
To ensure that the input optical power of the OAU106 at downstream station B reaches the nominal value, the
attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the local station needs to be set
to 5 dB. 2. Since the fiber access scenario for the transmit-end OAU106 board is a coherent non-standard
fiber access scenario, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the
local station needs to be set to 2.5 dB. Therefore, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT
port of the OAU106 at the local station is set to 5 dB.
NOTE
The EVOA attenuation value is calculated as 5 dB based on the following formula: Nominal output
optical power of the transmit-end OAU106 at station A (+4 dB) - Line attenuation (+10 dB) - Insertion
loss of the EVOA - Insertion loss of the transmit-end FIU (+0.5 dB) - Insertion loss of the receive-end
FIU (+0.5 dB) = Nominal input optical power of the receive-end OAU106 at station B (-12 dB).
NOTE
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles

A non-standard fiber access scenario is determined as follows:
l The transmit-end OA is OAU106, and the nominal single-wavelength output optical power (a) is
+4 dB.
l The system is a 40-wavelength system, a G.652 fiber is used as the line fiber, and the incident
optical power counter (b) is +1 dB.
l Because a is larger than b, the scenario is a non-standard fiber access scenario.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 2.5 dB based
on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of the FIU (+0.5 dB) -
b = 4 - 0.5 - 1 = 2.5 dB
----End
9.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station

and OTM Station at the Receive End
This topic describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station that are in
Prerequisite
OTU emit light properly.
ECC communication has been established.
Optical supervisory channels (OSCs) have been commissioned.
Optical cross-connections have been configured at each station.

U2000

l In the 40-wavelength 100G system, two pass-through wavelengths are configured in
practice.
l The types of OAU1 are OAU101 and OAU106.
Testing Diagram
Figure 9-7 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)
1 2 3 Set the EVOA attenuation

according to the commissioning
Adjust the EVOA attenuation at Set the gain to 16 dB Set the EVOA attenuation principle for non-standard fiber
site A, so that the input optical (minimum nominal gain) to 2.5 dB for the OAU106 access scenarios
power of the OA106 board at site for the OAU106 board. board.
B reaches the nominal value.
Site A Site B
RDC
TDC
M To B
4 VI VO OAU TDC TC IN
OAU
RDC RC
OUT 106
0 IN OUT RC OUT
106 OUT VI VO
MON IN OUT
V Short span, 36 MON
km/10 dB
TM RM
OPM8 SC1 F OPM8
RM TM F F
I
I I
U
U U
TM RM1 TM2 RM
From A To C
MON SC2
D OUT OAU TC RM TM1 RM2 TM
4 106
West East
0
IN From B MON
IN
RC OUT OAU TC
RDC TDC 101
IN OUT RDC TDC IN

EVOA
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the input optical power of the OAU106 at the local station to the nominal value. (Note
that this step is not required in this example because the input optical power has reached the
nominal value after the transmit-end optical power at the upstream station is adjusted.)
Step 2 Determine that it is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario for the transmit-end
OAU106. Therefore, set the attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the OAU106
to 2.5 dB.

NOTE
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles

l The transmit-end OA is OAU106, and the nominal single-wavelength output optical power (a) is +4 dB.
l The system is a 40-wavelength system, a G.652 fiber is used as the line fiber, and the incident optical
power counter (b) is +1 dB.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 2.5 dB based on
the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of the FIU (+0.5 dB) - b = 4 -
0.5 - 1 = 2.5 dB
----End
9.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths

and Links at the ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the
west-to-east signal flow
Prerequisite

U2000
l In the 40-wavelength 100G system, 1 add wavelength and 2 pass-through wavelengths
are configured at the ROADM station in practice.

Testing Diagram
Figure 9-8 Fiber connections of ROADM station C

Site C
Configure an FOA for the OTU Drop
board so that the input optical wavelengths
5 power of the OTU board is within
Set the VOA attenuation to the
the range of -13 dBm to -5 dBm.
minimum value for the TD20
N 3 board.
S
4
Fine tune the attenuation of each

4 channel on the WSD9 board, so TD20 TD20 N
that the input optical power of the S
EDFA on the TD20 board reaches - 4
16dBm.
DM
WSD9 TM20 TM20
Preset the attenuation AM

to the minimum value
for each channel on the WSM9
2
WSD9 board.
RM1 TM2 RM
TM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM F OUT
OBU1
I
U
IN OPM8 OPM8
To F East
DM AM
West To D F OUT IN EXPO RC
1 I TC OAU OAU
RDU9 WSM9
Set the attenuation and U IN 101 ROA EXPI
106 IN
OUT IN OUT
gain to compensate for the TOA
line attenuation, so that the SYS
input optical power of the
OAU board reaches the TC
nominal value. TOA
RC VI
OUT EXPI ROA
OUT
OAU
WSM9 RDU9 RAU LINE
106 OUT 201
OUT IN EXPO IN
IN
VO
Signal flow Commissioning range in this direction

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see boards.
Procedure
1. On the U2000, adjust the EVOA attenuation for the OAU101 board to the minimum
value and adjust the gain of the board to 27.5 dB, so that the input optical power of the
board reaches -23.5 dB.
a. Determine whether the gain needs to be adjusted. Generally an OA board has the
best optical performance when the gain is at the minimum. If the minimum gain
cannot compensate for the line loss, the gain needs to be increased.

i. The nominal output optical power (a) of the upstream OA board is +4 dB.
ii. Attenuation (b) between OA boards = EVOA attenuation at the transmit end +
Fiber attenuation + Attenuation of two FIU boards = 2.5 + 24 + 1 = 27.5 dB
iii. Actual incident optical power (c) of the OAU101 board = a - b = 4 - 27.5 =
-23.5 dB
iv. When the gain range of the OAU101 board ranges is 20-31 dB, the range of
the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is from -16 dB to -27 dB.
Value c (-23.5 dB) ranges between -16 dB and -27 dB. Therefore, the
minimum gain cannot be used and the board gain needs to be adjusted.
b. Set the board gain.
i. Gain of the OAU101 board = Nominal output optical power for the site -
Nominal output optical power of the upstream OA board + Attenuation
between OA boards = 4 - 4 + 27.5 = 27.5 dB
2. Preset the attenuation to 3.0 dB for each pass-through wavelength on the WSD9 board.
NOTE
The preset attenuation is determined based on the following formula: Nominal single-wavelength input
optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (EDFA on the TD20 board) = Nominal single-wavelength
output optical power (A) of the receive-end OA (OAU101) - Inherent insertion loss (C) of the WSM9
board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the RDU9 board - Single-wavelength attenuation for the WSD9
board
3. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the TD20 board to the minimum value to make the
optical path available.
4. Fine tune the attenuation of each channel on the WSD9 board so that the input optical
power of the EDFA on the TD20 board reaches the nominal value.
5. Configure the fixed optical attenuator (FOA) equipped for the OTU board, so that the
input optical power of the OTU board is within the range of -13 dBm to -5 dBm.
9.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Pass-through

Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000

Testing Diagram
N Site C
S
4
N TM20 TM20
S
4
AM
TD2 TD2
0 0 WSM9
DM
3 Set the EVOA attenuation to 2.5
WSD9 dB for the OAU106 board.
OBU
104
Set the EVOA attenuation

according to the commissioning
principle for non-standard fiber
access scenarios
OPM8
OPM8
DM AM F
IN OUT IN EXPO IN OUT I OUT
OAU OAU
101 RDU9 WSM9 106 U
TC IN ROA EXPI OUT RC
West To D TOA 1 2 To F East
Preset the attenuation to 3 dB Preset the EVOA attenuation
F
for each pass-through channel to the minimum value and
I on the WSM9 board. set the board gain to 23 dB. Pass-through
U
RM1 TM2 RM wavelengths
TM
SC2
TM1 RM2
RM TM
TC IN SYS
TOA
RC VI
OAU OUT EXPI ROA LINE
WSM9 RDU9 RAU
OUT 106 OUT 201
OUT IN EXPO IN
IN
VO

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE

Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation to 3.0 dB for each pass-through channel on the WSM9 board on
the main optical path.
NOTE
optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (OAU106) = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power (A) of the receive-end OA (OAU101) - Inherent insertion loss (C) of the RDU9 board - Inherent
insertion loss (D) of the WSM9 board - Single-wavelength attenuation for the WSM9 board
2. Preset the attenuation to the minimum value for the EVOA attached to the IN port on the
OAU106 board on the main optical path (to make the optical path available), and set the
board gain to 23 dB.
NOTE
1. The following describes the reason why the board gain is set to 23 dB: If the line loss is 20 dB
(inherent insertion loss of the RDU9 board + that of the WSM9 board), the gain must be set to at
least 20 dB (in this scenario, the single-wavelength attenuation is considered as 0 dB.) A 3 dB
margin, however, must be reserved for the single-wavelength attenuation for further flatness
adjustment. Therefore, the gain is set to 23 dB.
2. When the board gain is set to 23 dB, the input optical power of the OAU106 board is calculated as
follows: Input optical power of the OAU106 board = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power of the OAU101 board on the main optical power - Inherent insertion loss of the RDU9 board
- Inherent insertion loss of the WSM9 board - Single-wavelength attenuation = +4 - 12 - 8 - 3 = -19
dB.
3. Determine that it is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario for the transmit-end
OAU106. Therefore, set the attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the
OAU106 to 2.5 dB.
NOTE
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles,

l The transmit-end OA is OAU106, and the nominal single-wavelength output optical power (a) is
+4 dB.
l The system is a 40-wavelength system, a G.652 fiber is used as the line fiber, and the incident
optical power counter (b) is +1 dB.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 2.5 dB based
on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of the FIU (+0.5 dB) -
b = 4 - 0.5 - 1 = 2.5 dB

at the ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the add wavelengths and links at
the ROADM station.
Prerequisite


U2000
Testing Diagram

Site C
N Add
S wavelengths
3
4
1 Use the OPM board to scan the OBU104 board
Preset the and fine tune the attenuation of each add
N attenuation to 5 dB channel on the WSM9 board, so that the optical
TD20 TD20 S for each channel on power of each wavelength is close to the
4 the WSM9 board. nominal single-wavelength output optical power
of the OBU104 board.
DM
TM20 TM20 5
WSD9 Use the OPM board to scan the OAU106
board and fine tune the attenuation of each
2 AM pass-through channel on the WSM9, so
that power flatness of add/pass-through
If an EVOA is configured, wavelengths is achieved.
WSM9
set its attenuation to the
minimum value.
OPM8
RM1 RM
OBU
TM TM2
104
SC2 4
RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
Preset the EVOA attenuation
toPreset
8 dBthe
so EVOA attenuation
that the to
difference
8 dB so that the difference
between the AM port power
IN OPM8 between the AM port power and
and F To F East
EXPIEXPI port power
port power is withinis5within
dB.
5 dB. I
DM AM U
West To D F OUT IN IN RC
I OAU EXPO OAU
RDU9 WSM9
U TC IN 101 ROA
EXPI OUT
106
OUT IN
TOA
TOA TC SYS
RC VI
OAU OUT EXPI ROA LINE
WSM9 RDU9 RAU
106 4 OUT 201
OUT IN EXPO IN
IN
AM DM
VO
OUT

EVOA

NOTE
NOTE
Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation of each pass-through wavelength on the WSM9 board to 5.0 dB.
NOTE
optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (OBU104) = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power (A) of the receive-end OTU board - Inherent insertion loss (C) of the TM20 board - Inherent
insertion loss (D) of the WSM9 board - Single-wavelength attenuation for the WSM9 board
2. If an EVOA is attached to the IN port of the OBU104 board, set the EVOA attenuation
to the minimum value to make the optical path available.
3. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OBU104 board and fine tune the
attenuation for each add channel on the WSM9 board, so that the output optical power of
each wavelength is close to the nominal value.
4. Preset the EVOA attenuation to 8 dB so that the difference between the AM port power
and EXPI port power is within 5 dB.
NOTE
The preset EVOA attenuation is determined as follows:
Single-wavelength input optical power on the AM port = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power of the OBU104 board - EVOA attenuation
Single-wavelength power of the EXPI port = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power of the
OBU104 board - RDU attenuation
Single-wavelength input optical power of the AM port = Single-wavelength power of the EXPI port.
According to the preceding formulas, the EVOA attenuation is calculated as 8 dB.
5. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and fine tune the
attenuation for each pass-through channel on the WSM9 board, so that power flatness of
add/pass-through wavelengths is achieved.
9.4.7 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This topic describes how to commission the receive-end optical power of the OTM station
that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to
ensure that the OTU emits light properly.
The fiber connections must be established properly.

Ensure that the end face of fiber connectors on OTU boards is clean.
The quality of the near-end 40 km optical cable has been checked using an optical time
domain reflectometer (OTDR), and the optical cable addresses the deployment requirement.
The line fiber quality has been tested and meets the requirement.
Pigtails have been connected to the WDM side of Raman boards.
The IPA configuration has been completed.

U2000
l In the 40-wavelength 100G system, three wavelengths are added.

Testing Diagram
Figure 9-11 Fiber connections of OTM station D
Site D
1 2 3
Set the working mode Commission the WDM-
and fiber type for the Adjust the gain of the side receive optical
Raman board. Raman board. power of the OTU board.
VO D37
IN NS4
IN
RAU OUT D
From C 4
LINE 201 VI D39
SYS 0 NS4
D40
IN TC NS4
OPM8
RM TM
F SC1
I
RM
U TM M37
NS4
OUT M
OUT OAU 4 M39
To C
106 0
OUT RC IN NS4
V M40
NS4

EVOA
NOTE

Procedure
NOTE
In the following example, the Raman board is RAU201, the working mode of the board is Gain locking, the
fiber type is G.652, and the fiber attenuation is 30 dB. For other configurations of the RAU201, the procedure
may differ. For details, see Raman Amplifier Commissioning Guideline.
Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board
1. Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them to
Disabled and click Apply.
2. Set Working Mode for the RAU201 board as required.
a. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired RAU201
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
b. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking
c. Click Apply.
NOTE
For the LINE port of the RAU201, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking, Maximum gain, or
Pump power.
For the OUT port of the RAU201, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or Power locking.
3. Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
a. On the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers that
have been used (that is, G.652).
b. Click Apply.
Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board
1. Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
a. Select the desired RAU201 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the navigation tree.
b. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
c. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE ports
of the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them to Off and click
Apply.
2. Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the LINE port
of the Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If it is greater than 1
dBm, add a fixed attenuator to the transmit end of the upstream site so that the input
optical power on the LINE port meets the requirement. Note that the input optical power
on the LINE port of the RAU201 board must be within the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm.
If it is greater than +1 dBm, the Raman amplifier may be damaged.
3. After repairing the fiber, open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the
Basic Attributes tab, set the Laser Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM
interfaces are On, and click Apply.
4. Set the gain of the Raman unit on the RAU201 to 10 dB and the gain of the EDFA unit to
20 dB. For other gain settings of the RAU201, see Adjusting the Gains for the Raman
Board.
a. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB)Standard Gain for the LINE and
OUT ports according to the actual line loss.
b. Click Apply.

5. Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA between the EFDA unit and Raman unit, so that the
optical power of the IN port on the RAU201 reaches the nominal value: Adjust the
attenuation of the EVOA so that the input optical power on the IN port of the RAU201
on the main optical path reaches about -16 dBm , the input optical power can be queried
on the U2000
a. Select the desired EVOA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the navigation tree.
b. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
minimum value.
c. Click Apply.
Adjusting the Receive Optical Power on the WDM Side of the OTU Board.
1. Configure the fixed optical attenuator equipped before the OTU board, so that the input
optical power of the OTU board is within the range of -13 dBm to -5 dBm.
Subsequent operations:Set the IPA status attribute of the IPA group to Enable,and click
Apply.
9.4.8 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This topic describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-to-
east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 7.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and
OLA Station B for Equalization.
Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain
wavelength is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical
power. In addition, reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best
performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical
power cannot exceed 2 dB.

NOTE
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.
----End
9.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning

This section lists some frequently asked questions on coherent system commissioning.
Q1: What are the principles for commissioning a network carrying both coherent and
non-coherent wavelengths?
A: The principles are as follows:
l Such network can be commissioned in the same way as a non-coherent network, without
considering fiber access scenarios.
l In a scenario where 100G coherent wavelengths need to be added on a non-coherent
network for capacity expansion, the incident optical power can be reduced to increase the
OSNR margin of the 100G wavelengths and the transmission distance without electrical
regeneration. In this situation, the optical power of single non-coherent wavelengths will
be definitely reduced. When this occurs, commission the network according to the
network design.
Q2: What are the principles for commissioning the EVOA before the receive-end OA,
especially how to set the OA gain?
A: The principles are as follows:
l The OA gain can be as small as possible. A small OA gain brings a better OSNR value.
l The OA gain can be as small as possible under the condition that the single-wavelength
output optical power meets the requirement. Accordingly, the EVOA attenuation can be
set as small as possible (zero or even not set).
Q3: Can the OA gain be decreased to decrease the single-wavelength output optical
power and meet the incident optical power requirement?
A: No, it cannot. If the single-wavelength output optical power of the OA decreases, the
system OSNR will also decrease. If you increase the EVOA attenuation to decrease the
optical power, the system OSNR will not decrease.
Q4: Why cannot the incident optical power of coherent 100G single wavelengths be too
high?
A: 100G coherent signals have severe non-linear effects than non-coherent 10G signals.
Therefore, the incident optical power of coherent 100G single wavelengths must be
decreased.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 10 Configuring Services and Service Protection
10 Configuring Services and Service

Protection
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure various services and features.

10.1 Configuring Services
This section describes how to configure various services.
10.2 Configuring System Features
This section describes how to configure system features.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.1 Configuring Services

This section describes how to configure various services.
Before configuring services, see Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual in the Configuration guide to understand various services.
Configuring WDM Services

l See Configuring WDM Services (By Trail) to configure WDM services by using trails.
l See Configuring WDM Services (Station By Station) to configure services station by
station.
Configuring Ethernet Services

l See Configuring Ethernet Services (EoO/EoW/EoS) to configure Ethernet services
(EoO/EoW/EoS).
l See Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet) to configure Ethernet services (Packet).
Configuring the SDH Services

l See Configuring the SDH Services to configure the SDH services.
Configuring the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA Board

See the following sections to configure the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA board and the WDM
Services (by Station Service Package):
l Configuring the TN11TOM Board
l Configuring the TN52TOM Board
l Configuring the THA/TOA Board
l Configuring the LOA Board
l Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)
Configuring Universal Line Boards

See Configuring Universal Line Boards to configure the universal line boards by trail or by
station.
10.2 Configuring System Features

This section describes how to configure system features.
Before configuring system features, you can see Feature Overview in the Feature Description
to understand the features supported by the product on the live network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuring Protection Schemes

l See Configuring Optical Line Protection to configure optical line protection.
l See Configuring Intra-Board 1+1 Protection to configure intra-board 1+1 protection.
l See Configuring Client 1+1 Protection to configure client 1+1 protection.
l See Configuring SW SNCP to configure SW SNCP protection.
l See Configuring ODUk SNCP to configure ODUk SNCP protection.
l See Configuring VLAN SNCP to configure VLAN SNCP protection.
l See Configuring Tributary SNCP Protection to configure tributary SNCP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 6800/3800, see Configuring Board-Level Protection to configure board-
level protection.
l For OptiX OSN 6800/3800, see Configuring MS SNCP to configure MS SNCP
protection.
l See Configuring DBPS to configure DBPS protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring an Ethernet DLAG to configure DLAG
Protection (OTN).
l See Configuring Protection for ODUk SPRing to configure ODUk SPRing protection.
l See Configuring OWSP to configure OWSP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring Linear MSP to configure linear MSP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to
configure two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to
configure four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring SNCP Protection to configure SNCP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring to configure
transoceanic MSP ring protection.
l See Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet ring protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet
ring protection (OCS).
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring DLAG to configure DLAG protection (OCS).
Configuring Data Features

l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring LCAS to configure LCAS.
l See Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Groups to configure LAGs.
l See Configuring the Spanning Tree to configure STP or RSTP.
l See Configuring MSTP to configure MSTP.
Configuring System Features

l See Configuring the IPA to configure IPA.
l See Configuring ALC to configure ALC.
l See Configuring APE to configure APE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 11 Commissioning the Network
11 Commissioning the Network
About This Chapter
Commission the optical power for an entire network after the optical power for the equipment
in the network is commissioned. This chapter describes how to commission the optical power
for a network through a case study.
Network commissioning serves to:
l Connect all the NEs in the network in line with the engineering design plan.
l Test the services on the entire network to verify the service configuration.
l Test the required functions of the network, for example, orderwire and protection
switching.
l Test the quality of long-term communication of the network by monitoring alarms and
performance events.
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching
This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics
This section describes how to test the data characteristics.
11.4 Testing System Features
The system features includes IPA, APE, and ALC.
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks
This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2
This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels
When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service
channels must be tested.
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
When a network transmits packet services, the availability of packet service channels must be
tested.
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services
After configuring Ethernet services on a PSN network, you need to test Ethernet services to
check whether the configuration is correct.
11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System
You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.
11.11 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System
This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the
U2000.
11.12 Testing Orderwire Functions
Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing

Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
Prerequisites
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000 or Web LCT. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the
U2000.
Querying Network-Wide Alarms on the U2000

1. Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical alarms. When
the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are critical alarms
to be acknowledged.
NOTE
Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance, handle Critical
and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.
Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to network
conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot be reported. For
example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during deployment commissioning. In this
case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real
services are accessed on the client side.
In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every reported
alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms:
l Optical power low or high alarm
l Temperature threshold-crossing alarm
l Abnormal communication alarm
l Bit error-related alarm
l Abnormal service alarm
2. Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide major alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major alarms. When
the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are major alarms
to be acknowledged.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor alarms. When
the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are minor alarms to
be acknowledged.
Querying the Current Alarms of an NE on the Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from
the Function Tree.
2. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
3. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of the
methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the U2000.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching

This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
OptiX OSN 8800 supports the following protection modes:
l Optical line protection

l Intra-board 1+1 protection
l Client 1+1 protection
l SW SNCP protection
l ODUk SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l ODUk SPRing protection
l Tributary SNCP protection

l VLAN SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l Board-level protection
l Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection
l Intra-subrack DBPS protection
l DLAG protection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l VLAN SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l Board-level protection
l Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection
l Intra-subrack DBPS protection
l DLAG protection
For the working principle for each protection mode and the operating process, see the Feature
Description.
The testing methods for different types of protection switching are similar. The only
difference lies in the navigation path on the U2000.
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection

This section describes how to test inter-subrack communication protection.
Prerequisites
Subracks must be cascaded in ring mode.
Communication cables between subracks must be connected in ring mode.
Precautions
l All network cables must be properly connected.
l The logical cascading mode must be consistent with the physical cascading mode. When
the subracks are cascaded in ring mode, the subracks must work properly and there
should be no alarm indicating that subracks form a ring or alarm indicating a fault at a
cascaded port.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication protection is in
normal state. Figure 11-2 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication
protection is in protection state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-1 Normal State

Master
Subrack 0
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave Normal Slave
Subrack 1 ETH2 State ETH1 Subrack 3
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
Subrack 2
Figure 11-2 Protection State

Master
Subrack 0
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave Protection Slave
Subrack 1 ETH2 State ETH1 Subrack 3
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
Subrack 2
Procedure
1. Remove the network cable connecting the slave subrack 1 to master subrack 0 from the
ETH1 port on master subrack 0. See Figure 11-2.
2. On the U2000, check whether all slave subracks are unreachable to the NMS. Check for
the NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and GNE_CONNECT_FAIL alarms.
Observe the color of NE icons of slave subracks 1, 2, and 3.
3. If no preceding alarm is reported and the color of NE icons of all slave subracks does not
change, inter-subrack communication is normal and protection switching is successful.
Then you can reconnect the network cable to the ETH1 port.
4. After the network cable is reconnected, inter-subrack communication protection
automatically switches communication from the protection channel to the working
channel. See Figure 11-1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and

Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect board and clock board. This section
describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect board and clock
board, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, slots 9 and 10 must house the high cross-connection, system
control and clock processing board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 9 and 43 (or slots 10 and 44) must house the cross-
connect board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 42 and 44 must house the clock board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 75 and 86 must house the clock board.
The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. The queried Active
Board should be the same as the Working Board.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing
board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board in
slot 10. Active Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board that is actually
working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is
the cross-connect board in slot 10.Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9 or 10, and Protection
Board is the cross-connect board in slot 43 or 44. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually
working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the clock board in slot 42, and Protection Board is the
clock board in slot 44. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the clock board in slot 75, and Protection Board is the clock
board in slot 86. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.
Step 4 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click
Working/Protection Switching. In the Microsoft Internet Explorer dialog box that is
displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the
clock board perform switching at the same time.
Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click
Restore Working/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the
clock board perform switching at the same time.
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards and clock boards is non-revertive. When
Protection Board becomes Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards and clock boards to the original
working/protection state by removing the protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on
the U2000.
Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as
Working Board.
----End
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect

Board for OptiX OSN 6800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect boards. This section describes how to
test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect boards, thus ensuring that the protection
switching is normal.
Prerequisites
Slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect boards.
The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query, In the Operation Result
dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Working Board.
NOTE
Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot
10. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the
Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is
displayed, click Close.
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards is non-revertive. When Protection Board becomes
Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards to the original working/protection state by removing the
protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.
Working Board.
----End
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards

1+1 protection is configured to protect the SCC boards. This topic describes how to test the
1+1 protection switching of the SCC boards, thus ensuring that the protection switching is
normal.
Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two SCC boards. The NE commissioning data must
be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. In the Operation Result
dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Working Board.
Step 4 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The 1+1 SCC board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current Working
Board, you need to remove the protection board, or click Restore Working/Protection on theU2000 to
switch services back to the working board.
Working Board.
Step 8 After active/standby switching is completed, NE data must be manually uploaded.
----End
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the
test procedure for the optical line protection switching.
Prerequisites
The optical line protection must be configured.
correctly established.
The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3 Testing the optical line protection switching
R
TI TO1 RI1 RO
Signal x
analyzer OTU1 W W OTU1
RI1 TO1
T S S
x M M
D FIU OLP OLP FIU D
OTUn 4 4 OTUn
TO2 RI2
RO RI2 TO2 TI
Station A Station B
: Fixed optical attenuator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments
a. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the
RX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on the client side of the
OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
b. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on
the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the
loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-3.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A
The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the U2000. For the configuration
procedures, see Creating Optical Line Protection.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology.
The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
b. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer
to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
c. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection
d. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-
hand pane.
e. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is A, the
Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and the
Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). The
Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.
l Testing the protection switching for the equipment
a. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods:
n Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the OLP board
at Station A to perform the switching.
n Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. Right-click the
desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform
the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the
operation result dialog box.
b. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching at station
A.
n Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click
Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
n In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–
105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–
105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection
Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.
n In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–
105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection
Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection
Channel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
c. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.
d. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available.
e. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the following
two modes can be used respectively:
n Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.
n Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the
Protection Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation result
dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group
and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click
the protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the
operation result dialog box.
f. After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status
of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisites
The intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured.
established correctly.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 11-4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-4 Testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching
TO1 W W RI1
S S
M FIU FIU M TO1
Rx RI1
TI D D RO Tx
O 4 4 O
Signal
T RO OLP OLP TI T
analyzer TO2 W W RI2
U U
Tx S S Rx
M FIU FIU M
RI2 TO2
D D
4 4
Station A Station B
Procedure
a. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports for the signal analyzer to the
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU
respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
c. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the NE from the function tree and choose Configuration > Port Protection.
d. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click
Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. The switching status
of intra-board protection and channel status should be Normal.
e. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. If the NE name is A, the
Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and the
Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). The
Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.
l Testing the protection switching of the equipment
a. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed using the
following two methods.
n Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber for the RI1 port of the OLP
board at Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-4.
n Method 2: Forced switching. In the protection group window for station A,
right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection
Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
Click Close in the operation result dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTICE
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber in the direction that the signals are sent
to the signal analyzer. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or
no protection switching is performed.
b. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection at station A.

Close.
n In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–
105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection
105–12OLP–1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–
Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status
and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to
Protection Channel.
c. In the NE panel for the station A, right-click the OLP board, and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported.
d. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available with
zero bit error generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the
following two methods:
n Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the
Protection Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog
box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection
group, and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click
the same protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in
the operation result dialog box.
f. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click
Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching

This topic uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the
procedure for verifying the client 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisites
The client 1+1 protection has been configured.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations is correctly
established.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The equipment is running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 11-5.
Figure 11-5 Testing the client 1+1 protection switching
W W
TO1 S F S RI1
F
OTU1 M I I M OTU3
RI1 D U U D TO1 RO
Signal TI 4 4 Signal
analyzer OLP OLP analyzer
W W RI2
TO2 S F S TI
RO F
OTU2 M I I M OTU4
RI2 U TO2
D U D
4 4
Station A Station B
Procedure
a. At stations A and B, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal
analyzer to the TI and RO ports on the client side of the OLP board with a fixed
optical attenuator in between, as shown in Figure 11-5.
b. Test the optical channels using the signal analyzer and ensure that no bit error is
generated.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A.
b. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer
to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
c. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection
Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane.
e. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. Working Channel Status
and Protection Channel Status are Normal.
a. The switching test for the client 1+1 protection can be performed using either of the
following methods:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
n Method 1: Fiber removal. Remove the fiber from the IN optical port of the
working OTU1 board at station A to trigger switching, as shown in Figure
11-5.
n Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, open the protection group
window station A. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force
to Protection Channel to trigger switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTICE
In Method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the OTU1 board at
station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protection
switching is performed.
b. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A.

Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane.
n In the fiber removal mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF and Protection
105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and Protection
Channel Status are Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection
Channel.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.
d. Test the services —by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and
no bit error is generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use either of
following methods:
n Fiber removal mode: Reconnect the fiber.
n Forced switching : Right-click the desired protection group in Protection
Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection
group, and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click
the same protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in
the operation result dialog box.
f. After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status
for the protection group should be Idle.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the SW SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The SW SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in
Figure 11-6.
Figure 11-7.
Figure 11-7.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-6 Testing the SW SNCP
Singal
analyzer
6
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I TOM I
U 7 8 U
OA OA
West A East
6
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
TOM
U U
7 8
OA OA
East B West

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-7 Testing the SW SNCP protection switching
Signal
analyzer
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I I
U U
OA OA
West A East
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
U U
OA OA
B
East West
1, 2, 3, 4: OTU Board
Procedure
a. As shown in Figure 11-6, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of
the signal analyzer to the RX6 input optical port and TX6 output optical port of the
TOM with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX6
input optical port and the TX6 output optical port of the TOM with a fixed optical
attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
b. As shown in Figure 11-7, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of
the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the
client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B,
connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side
of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on
the client side.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
c. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
l Querying the normal channel status of the station A
b. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
dialog box.
c. Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
d. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. Status of SW
SNCP should be Normal State.
e. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. Channel Status of Working cross-
connection is Normal, and Channel Status of Protection cross-connection is
Normal.
a. The SW SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods.
n Method 1: Fiber removing.
○ Remove the fiber of the RX8 optical port for the TOM at station A to
perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-6.
○ Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the second working OTU at
station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-7.
n Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station
A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed
menu, select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
NOTICE
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the signal analyzer
at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice, or no
protection switching is performed.
b. Query the channel status of the SW SNCP protection at station A.

n Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function
Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. A prompt is displayed
indicating the operation is successful. Click Close.
n In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection
is SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal.
Status of the protection group is SF Switching.
n In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-
connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection
is also Normal. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working to
protection) switching state.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current
Alarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the SW_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and
Performance Events Reference.
d. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit
error is generated.
n Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click
Function. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-
connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,
right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed
menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
f. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and the
line board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SNCP
protection switching.
Prerequisites
The ODUk SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-8 Testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching
N Subnetwork N
1 (Any site type) 1
T T
Signal
analyzer N Subnetwork N
2 (Any site type) 2
Site A Site B
Working signals flow Protection signals flow
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the tributary
board with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
the client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to
achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-8.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE A is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control tab.
d. Click Query. Then, all ODUk SNCP protection groups are listed. Status of the
ODUk SNCP protection is Normal State.
e. Query the channel status of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status of the
working cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is Normal.
l Testing the protection switching of the equipment by fiber removing.
a. Remove the fiber on the IN optical port of the working line board N1 at station A to
NOTICE
In the fiber removing mode, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the
working line board N1 at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be
performed twice or no protection switching is performed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A

Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query.
c. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current
Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
error is generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the switching modes in step 1, reconnect the
fiber.
NOTE
select the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu,
choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
f. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the protection group
should be Normal State.
l Testing the protection switching of the equipment by forced switching.
a. In the NE panel of the station A, choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
b. Click Query.
c. In the SNCP Service Control window, select the working cross-connection and
click Function. In the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
d. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A
n In the SNCP Service Control window, click Query.
e. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current
f. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit
error is generated.
g. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the
following methods:
n Select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed
NOTE
select the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu,
choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
h. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the protection group
should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations which use the LEM24 board as an
example to describe the test procedure for the VLAN SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The VLAN SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-9 Testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching
Signal
analyzer
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I I
U U
OA OA
West A East
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
U U
OA OA
East B West
1, 2, 3, 4: LEM24 Board
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with
a fixed optical attenuator in between.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

c. Select the desired Ethernet board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
d. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one service. Click Set/
Query Switching and select Query Switching Status, and all the current
protection groups are displayed. Current Status of VLAN SNCP should be
Normal State.
e. Query the channel status of the VLAN SNCP protection. Link Status of the
working service is Normal, and Link Status of the protection service is also
Normal.
a. The switching test for the VLAN SNCP protection can be performed using the
following two methods.
n Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the IN optical port of the
working OTU 2 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure
11-9.
n Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. In the VLAN
SNCP Service Management, select working service, and click Set/Query
Switching. Select Force to Protection in the displayed menu to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
b. Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection at station A.
n Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one
service. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status, all
the current protection groups are displayed.
n In the fiber removing mode, Link Status of the working service is SF, Link
Status of protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protection
group is SF Switching.
n In the forced switching mode, Link Status of the working service is Normal,
Link Status of the protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the
protection group is Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the LEM24 board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The VLAN_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported by the LEM24.
d. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and
no bit error is generated.
n Forced switching mode: Select the working service, and click Set/Query
Switching. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.
NOTE
connection, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to
Working. Then right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Set/Query
Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
f. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status. A prompt is

displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Current Status
of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure for the tributary
SNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributary
board and the line board are jointly used
Prerequisites
The tributary SNCP protection must be configured.

U2000, optical fiber, fiber adapter, signal analyzer, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Testing the tributary SNCP protection switching
Station A Station B
TOM1 TOM1
OM OD
TOM2 TOM2
Signal N F F N
analyzer D I I D
TOM1 2 U U 2 TOM1
OD OM
TOM2 TOM2
: Fixed Optical Attenuator
Procedure
RX and TX ports on the client side of the tributary boards with a fixed optical
attenuator in between.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the client side of the tributary boards with a fixed optical attenuator in between to
achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-10.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
d. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Status of
the tributary SNCP protection is Normal State.
e. Query the channel status of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel Status of the
working cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is Normal.
a. The tributary SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following
two methods:
n Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical port on the
tributary boards T1 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure
11-10.
n Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station
A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed
menu, select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the
b. Check the channel status for tributary SNCP protection of station A
Tree, and click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
error is generated.
e. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, use the
n Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click
Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
connection and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,
right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed
f. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN

6800/3800)
The board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extended
mode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section uses the extended board-
level protection with two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the
board-level protection switching.
Prerequisites
The board-level protection must be configured.The board-level protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-11 shows the connection for testing the board-level protection switching.
Figure 11-11 Testing the board-level protection switching

TX1
TBE1 TBE1
TI1
O O
TBE2
S L A F F A L TBE2
Signal
C 4 D I I D 4
analyzer
S G M U U M G
TBE1 TBE1
RX1
RO1 TBE2 TBE2
Station A Station B

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
RO1 input optical port and T11 output optical port on the client side of the SCS
with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
b. At station B, connect the TX1 output optical port and the RX1 input optical port on
the client side of the TBE with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the
Function Tree.
hand pane. The switching status for board-level protection should be Idle.
e. Check the board status for board-level protection. If the TBE1 is in slot IU7 and the
TBE2 is in slot IU8, then Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status
is Usable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE, Protection Board Status is Usable,
and Active Board is Working Board.
a. The board-level protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods.
n Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber for the RX1 port of
the TBE1, as shown in Figure 11-11.
n Method 2: Forced switching. In the board-level protection window for station
A, right-click the desired protection group on the U2000. Select Forced
Switching to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.
b. Check the board status of station A
n Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.
Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
n In the fiber removing mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board
Status is Unusable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board
Status is Usable, Switching Status is Auto Switching, and Active Board is
Protection Board.
n In the forced switching mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working
Board Status is Usable; Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board
Status is Usable; Switching Status is Forced Switching to Protection; and
Active Board is Protection Board.
c. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit
error is generated.
d. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be
used to restore the switching status to normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
n Reconnect the fiber.

n Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select
Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
e. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.
----End
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP

Protection Switching
This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection
switching. In this section, the service between station A and station C on a ring that consists
of three stations is used as an example.
Prerequisites
An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A
(or subrack m).
An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station B
(or subrack n).
An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.
A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and
the (TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 11-12.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS
to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over
the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the IN port of the L4G at station A
receives the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the
electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the
Configuration Guide.

U2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter
For the MS SNCP protection switching that is triggered by the fault on the OTN side, see
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-13 show the DBPS protection and MS SNCP protection in the
normal and switching states.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
In Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-13, the L4G boards numbered 1, 4 and 5 are the working OTU
boards. The L4G boards numbered 2, 3 and 6 are the protection OTU boards.
Figure 11-12 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal)
SMB
P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Bras 2
Master Slave
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

RX3 TX1
1 Master TBE 2 Slave
TBE TX3 RX1
L4G 2 RX1 TX1

L4G 1
L4G 3 L4G 4
TX1 RX1
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A Station B
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G 6
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX1 TX1
DSLAM
TX2 RX2
Station C
Service signals
Observed service signals

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-13 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching)
SMB P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Bras 2
Slave Master

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Slave TBE 2 Master
TX3 RX1
L4G 1 RX1 TX1

L4G 2 L4G 4
TX1 RX1 L4G 3
OUT IN IN OUT
Station Station
A B
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G 6
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX1 TX1
DSLAM
TX2 RX2
Station C
Service signals
Observed service signals
Procedure
a. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. See
Figure 11-12. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the same
time. Make P1 receive the service signals (data packets from P2 or P3) forwarded
by the DSLAM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Create the electrical cross-connection from the IN port of the L4G to the TX1 port
of the TBE1 at station A. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection,
see the Configuration Guide.
c. Use fibers to connect the output optical port of the DSLAM to the RX2 port of the
L4G at station C so that a loopback is enabled. Then create the electrical cross-
connection from the RX2 port of the L4G to the OUT port of the L4G. For the
configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 11-12.
Status of NE A is displayed.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.
Working board is TBE1, Protection Board Status is Master.
e. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.
f. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the
uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the TBE1 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to
the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the normal channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 11-12.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE B is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
Working board is TBE2, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
e. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.
pass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the cross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the protection switching channel status of station A
a. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of TBE1 board at station A to perform the
switching, as shown in Figure 11-13.
b. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
c. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
d. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and chooseConfiguration >
Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.
Working board is TBE1, and Protection Board Status is Slave.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
f. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
g. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is
pass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the cross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the protection switching channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 11-13.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE B is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
Working board is TBE2, and Working Board Status is Master.
e. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the TBE2 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to
the west and east L4G boards.
g. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets
received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, NE D and NE E must be established.
A pass-through service must be configured on the ring network consisting of NEs A, B, C,
and E.
DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. ERPS ring protection is configured between
NEs A, B, C, D, and E.
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 11-14, the DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. The ERPS
ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, D, and E.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-14 Application of protection (DBPS+ERPS)
P1 OADM E
Master R1 LEM24 OADM A
P2
SMB OADM D
LEM24
Slave R2
P3 LEM24 DSLAM
OADM B
OADM C
LEM24
A B A B
LEM24 LEM24 LEM24 LEM24
ERPS block ERPS block
LEM24 LEM24 LEM24 LEM24
D C D C
A B
A B
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
D C
D C
: Working path
: DBPS protection path
: ERPS protection path
: Observed service path
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments.
a. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NEs A and B. See
Figure 11-14. Configure the P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at
the same time, and configure the P1 port as a mirrored port for monitoring. In

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
addition, enable the P1 port to receive the service signals (data packets from the P2
or P3 port) forwarded by the DSLAM.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
a. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE A is displayed.
b. Right-click NE A and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
Click Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At
NE A, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Master.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE B works normally.
a. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE B is displayed.
b. Right-click NE B and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
NE B, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
a. At NE A, disconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board and the R1
port to trigger protection switching.
b. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
c. Right-click NE A, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
d. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration >
Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.
NE A, Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE B after protection switching occurs.
a. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE B is displayed.
b. Right-click NE B, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Distributed
Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.
NE B, Working board is LEM24, and Working Board Status is Master.
e. At NE A, reconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board to the R1 port.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
a. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
b. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
c. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection
> ERPS Management.
d. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status
of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
a. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the
direction to NE E to trigger protection switching.
b. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
c. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status
of State Machine is displayed as Protection.
d. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.
e. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is
VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
NOTE
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working
path. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
l Calculate the switching time by using the following formula: Switching time = (Packets
sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching.
In this section, the service between station A and station C is used as an example.
Prerequisites
An SW SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A.
An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.
A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and
the (TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 11-15.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS
to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over
the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then the IN port of the L4G at station A
receives the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the
electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the
Configuration Guide.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Intra-subrack DBPS protection must work with SW SNCP protection.
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching is shown in Figure
11-15.
Figure 11-15 and Figure 11-16 show DBPS protection and SW SNCP protection in the
normal and switching states.
Figure 11-15 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal)
SMB P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Master Bras 2 Slave

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Master TBE 2 Slave
TX3 RX1
L4G L4G
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G
L4G
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX2 TX2
Service signals
DSLAM Observed service signals
TX1 RX1
Station C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-16 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching)
SMB
P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Slave Bras 2 Master

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Slave Master TBE 2
TX3 RX1
L4G L4G
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G
L4G
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
Service signals
RX2 TX2
DSLAM Observed service signals
TX1 RX1 Station C
Procedure
a. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point for stations A. See
Figure 11-15. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send packets at the same time.
Make P1 receive the packets (from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM.
l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A, as shown in Figure 11-15.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Working board is TBE1, and Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status
is Master, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
e. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
f. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. Then, the
related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection
L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the
working TBE1 in the DBPS protection.
l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A
a. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A to perform
the switching, as shown in Figure 11-16.
b. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration >
Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.
c. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Working board is TBE1 and Protection Board is TBE2. Working board Status
is Slave, and Protection Board Status is Master.
d. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree,
click WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.
Click Close. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the
working and protection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-
connections only with the working TBE2 in the DBPS protection.
f. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets
received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is
triggered by the line failure after the fiber is removed.
Prerequisites
A DLAG protection group must be configured at station A.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-17 and Figure 11-18 show DLAG protection in the normal and switching states.
Figure 11-17 DLAG protection (normal)
SMB P1 P2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1
Port1/1
DSLAM
Port2/1 Port2/2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1 RX1 TX1
Master Slave
TBE 1 TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN Station A
Figure 11-18 DLAG protection (switching)
SMB P1 P2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX2
Port1/1
DSLAM
Port2/1 Port2/2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1 RX1 TX1
Slave Master
TBE 1 TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN Station A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l Connecting Test Instruments.
a. Connect the SmartBits (SMB). See Figure 11-17. Ensure that P2 sends data packets
and P1 receives the data packets.
l Query the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 11-17
c. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link
Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
Click Close. If the TBE1 is in slot IU11 and the TBE2 is in slot IU12, Main Board
is 111–11TBE, and Slave Board is 112–11TBE.
l Query the protection switching channel status of station A.
a. Remove the fiber in the RX1/TX1 optical port on the TBE1 board at station A to
b. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
c. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close. In this case, Main Board is 112–11TBE, and Slave Board is 111–
11TBE.
d. Reconnect the fiber into the RX1/TX1 optical port of TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 - Packets received at
P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent stations which bear
services, as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SPRing protection
switching.
Prerequisites
The ODUk SPRing protection must be configured.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching is shown in Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 Testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching

Signal
analyzer
Tx Rx ODU1-2 ODU1-2
Tributary Line OADM FIU FIU OADM Line Tributary
(West) (East)
ODU1-1 ODU1-1
Line Line
OADM OADM
ODU1-2 (East) ODU1-1 ODU1-1 (West) ODU1-2
FIU A D FIU
FIU FIU
B C
ODU1-2 OADM ODU1-1 ODU1-1 OADM ODU1-2

(West) (East)
Line Line
ODU1-1 ODU1-1
Line OADM FIU FIU OADM Line

Tributary (East) (West) Tributary
Rx Tx ODU1-2 ODU1-2
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with
a fixed optical attenuator in between.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Right-click the desired NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE

Explorer window.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree.
Click Close. All ODUk SPRing protection groups are listed in the protection group
list in the right-hand pane. The switching status of ODUk SPRing protection should
be Idle.
e. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection. Channel Status of the
east working board is Normal, Channel Status of the east protection board is
Normal.Channel Status of the west working board is Normal, and Channel
Status of the west protection board is Normal.
a. The ODUk SPRing protection switching test can be performed using the following
two methods.
n Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber of the main optical
channel from the D1 port of the east OADM board to the IN port of the
working line board, as shown in Figure 11-19.
n Method 2: Forced switching. In the ODUk SPRing protection window for
station A, right-click the desired East Working board on the U2000, and
choose Forced Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the
dialog box displayed.
b. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection of station A.
n Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. Click
Close.
n In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of East Working board is SF,
Channel Status of East Protection board is Normal, and Switching Status
is East Switching.
n In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of East Working board is
Normal, Channel Status of East Protection board is also Normal, and
Switching Status is East Switching.
Alarms. The ODUKSP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the ODUKSP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance
Events Reference.
error is generated.
e. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be
n In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station A, right-click the desired
protection group in the East Protection board, and choose Clear. Click OK
in the dialog displayed box.
f. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for OWSP protection. In this section, two
adjacent stations with services on a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example
for illustration.
Prerequisites
OWSP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching is shown in
Figure 11-20.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-20 Testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching

Signal analyzer
Tx Rx Tx Rx
OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 λ1 λ1 λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2
2 x DCP OADM FIU FIU OADM 2 x DCP
(West) (East)
λ1 λ1
λ2 λ2
OADM OADM
λ2/λ1 (East) λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1 (West) λ1/λ2
FIU A D FIU
FIU FIU
B C
OADM λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1 OADM λ1/λ2

(West) (East)
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1 λ1
OADM FIU FIU OADM
2 x DCP (East) 2 x DCP
(West)
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 λ1 λ1
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2
OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1
Rx Tx Rx Tx
: Working signal : Protection signal
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU1
with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
the client side of the OTU2 with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

c. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared
Protection from the Function Tree.
hand pane. The switching status of the OWSP protection should be Idle.
e. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection. East Working Channel is 4-
DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. East Protection Channel is 2-
DCP-2(RI12), Channel Status is Normal. West Working Channel is 2-
DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. West Protection Channel is 4-
DCP-2(RI12), Channel Status is Normal.
NOTE
"4" in 4-DCP-2(RI12) is the slot number.

a. The OWSP protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods:
n Remove the fiber of the main optical channel from the D1 port of the east
OADM to the RI11 port of the DCP, as shown in Figure 11-20.
n Right-click the East Working Channel on the U2000, and choose Forced
Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box
displayed.
b. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection of station A, which should be
consistent with the actual situation.
n Choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the
Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
n After the fiber of the main optical channel is removed, the status of East
Working Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel
Status is SF. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-
DCP-2(RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of
n After the Forced Switching-Ring is selected, the status of East Working
Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is
Normal. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-
DCP-2(RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of
c. Query the alarms on the U2000. The OWSP_PS alarm must be reported by DCP.
error is generated.
e. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be
n Right-click East Working Channel, and choose Clear. Click OK in the
f. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.19 Verifying Linear MSP

After a network is configured with linear MSP, services in the working path of the linear MSP
group can be protected. This topic considers 1+1/1:1 linear MSP as an example to describe
how to verify linear MSP.
Prerequisites
l You must be a U2000 user with the "NE and NM operator" authority or higher.
l The linear MSP must be created and configured on the U2000.

U2000, SDH analyzer

Figure 11-21 shows a connection diagram for testing 1+1/1:1 linear MSP.
Figure 11-21 Connection diagram for testing 1+1/1:1 linear MSP

VC-4: VC-4-1 2 1xVC-4 2
VC-4: VC-4-1
Optical
attenuator
12 1xVC-4 12
SDH analyzer
NE2 NE1
Line board Line board Line board Line board Line board Line board
2-SLH41 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SLH41 8-SL64 12-SL64
Service flow on
STM-1 line board
the working path
Service flow on the
protection path STM-64 line board
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to NE2's service port; on the optical distribution frame (ODF) to
which NE1 is connected, loop back the service transmitted from NE1's service port. The SDH
analyzer should indicate that the service is normal.
Step 2 Right-click the NE1 icon on the NMS and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 Select the optical interface board in slot 2, choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree, select By Function, and choose Laser Switch from the drop-down menu.
Step 4 Select the port to be shut down, set Laser Switch to Close for the port, and click Apply. In
the displayed dialog box, click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Check the SDH analyzer, which should indicate that the service is normal. Then, check for
new alarms on the NMS and other instruments. No new alarms should be reported, which
indicates that the service is normal after the switching.
Step 6 Check for MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms on the NEs.
l If the switching mode is set to Dual-End Switching, both NE1 and NE2 are expected to
report the two alarms.
l If the switching mode is set to Single-End Switching, only NE2 is expected to report the
two alarms.
NOTE
1+1 linear MSP can take Dual-End Switching or Single-End Switching, whereas 1:1 linear MSP can
take only dual-ended switching.
Step 7 Turn on the shut-down laser by following instructions in step 2 to step 4.

Step 8 Check the SDH analyzer after the wait-to-restore (WTR) time elapses.
l If Revertive is selected for linear MSP, do as follows:
– Check for MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms on the NEs. The alarms
should clear.
l If Non-Revertive is selected for linear MSP, do as follows:
– Check for MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms on the NEs. The alarms
should persist, and the SDH analyzer should indicate that the service is normal.
– In the NE Explorer, click the desired NE and choose Configuration > Linear MS
– In Linear MS interface, click Stop Protocol. Click Close in the Operation Result
dialog box.
– Click Start Protocol to re-enable the protocol. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box.
– Observe the state of the working channel. The state should be Normal.
NOTE
1+1 linear MSP can take Revertive or Non-Revertive, whereas 1:1 linear MSP can take only revertive
switching.
Step 9 Release the loopback performed in step 1.
----End
11.2.20 Verifying Ring MSP

After a network is configured with ring MSP, the service in the working path of the MSP ring
group can be protected. This topic considers the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring as an
example to describe how to verify the switching of ring MSP.
Prerequisites
l Ring MSP has been configured for involved NEs.

U2000, SDH analyzer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Build a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring as shown in Figure 11-22. Assume that a VC-4
service from NE1 to NE3 is configured and the service flow is NE1-NE2-NE3.
Figure 11-22 Connection diagram for testing ring MSP

Optical
attenuat
or
Line board
1xVC-4 NE1: 20-SLH41
Line board Line board
1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
VC-4: VC-4-1
1 19
NE2: Line board
NE1
19-SLQ64
Line board
1-SLQ64 19
VC-4: VC-4-1 Two-fiber 线路

Passing through NE2 bidirectional NE4 板
the service MSP ring
19 NE3 1
NE3: Line board Line board

19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-1 line board
Line board
STM-64 line 20-SLH41
Service flow SDH analyzer
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to NE3's service port; on the optical distribution frame (ODF) to
Step 2 Log in to the NMS, and choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Protection
Subnet Maintenance from the Main Menu to check the status of active and standby
resources before MSP switching.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select the board in slot 1, choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree,
select By Function, and choose Laser Switch from the drop-down menu.
Step 7 Check for new alarms on the NEs. NE1 and NE2 should report MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms, which indicates that NE1 and NE2 have implemented MSP switching.
Step 8 Turn on the shut-down laser.
Step 9 Check the SDH analyzer after the wait-to-restore (WTR) time elapses. The SDH analyzer
should indicate that the service is normal. Then, check for new alarms on the NMS and other
instruments. No new alarms should be reported, which indicates that the service is normal
after the switching.
Step 10 Check for MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms on NE1 and NE2. The alarms should
clear, which indicates that MSP switching on NE1 and NE2 has been completed.
Step 12 Test other sections by repeating the preceding steps.
----End
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection

Switching
If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs working
paths are protected. This section describes how to test the four-fiber bidirectional MSP
protection switching.
Prerequisites
l The authority of "NE and NM operator" or higher is required.
l The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
must have been created and configured on the U2000. See "Configuration Example:
Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring" of the Feature Description.

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
When the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The
restoration time consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical
fiber and through the equipment.
Figure 11-23 shows the diagram for testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
switching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running
from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-23 Testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection switching
Optical Line board

attenuator 20-SLO16
VC4:VC4-1 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
2-SLQ64 18-SLQ64
NE2: Line board
19-SLQ64 18-SLQ64
NE1
1-SLQ64 2-SLQ64
VC4:VC4-1
线路
Service NE2 MSP ring NE4 板
pass-through
Traffic flow of the
forward working path
Traffic flow of the NE3
backward working
path
Traffic flow of the
forward protection path
Traffic flow of the Line board Line board
backward protection path 18-SLQ64 2-SLQ64
VC4:VC4-1 Line board Line board
STM-16 line board
19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-64 line board SDH analyzer
NE3: Line board
20-SLO16
NOTE
Select the test connection diagram and test method according to the actual networking conditions.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the set-up diagram. At the ODF
side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.
Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection
Subnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before the
switching.
Step 3 Test the span switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
NOTE
The working ring and protection ring in the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring are defined according to
the actual service configured. In this example, the optical port of the board in slot 1 on NE1 works as the
service optical port. Therefore, the outer ring in the test connection diagram is the working ring and the
inner ring is the protection ring.
1. Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface
from the Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button and select Laser Switch
from the drop-down list.
3. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A
dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services is generated, it indicates that
services are restored after switching.
5. Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE2 reports the MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms, it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2.
6. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet.
7. Select the subnet to be viewed. Check the switching state of the four-fiber MSP ring. If
one direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Span(local end), it indicates that section
switching occurs.
8. Open the laser on the board in slot 1.
9. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is
generated, it indicates that services are restored after switching.
10. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on
NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete.
Step 4 Test the ring switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
1. Follow step 3 to step 5 in the "Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection
Switching" to shut down the laser of the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.
2. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that
services are restored after switching.
3. Query the NE alarms. The NE1 and NE2 should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms.
4. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Maintain Protection Subnet from
the Main Menu.
5. Select the four-fiber MSP ring protection subnet and query the switching state. If one
direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Ring(local end), it indicates that MSP ring
switching occurs.
6. Open the laser on the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.
7. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching
between NE1 and NE2 is complete.
8. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms reported from NE1
and NE2 ends, it indicates that the MSP switching for NE1 and NE2 concludes.
9. Remove the loopback set up in step 1.
Step 5 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one.
----End
11.2.22 Verifying SNCP

After a network is configured with the SNCP, the SNCP service in the working path can be
protected.
Prerequisites
An SNCP protection group has been created.
NE1 has been connected to NE2 using fibers.
All NEs are working normally.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NMS, SDH analyzer, fibers, fiber adapters, fixed attenuators

Figure 11-24 shows a connection diagram for testing SNCP.
Figure 11-24 Connection diagram for testing SNCP

1xSTM-1
NE1
SNCP protection group Working source Protection source Service sink
Protection group 1 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SLH41
VC-4: VC-4-1
8 12
NE1 NE2 and NE4
SDH service Working source Protection source
12 8 VC-4 8-SL64 12-SL64
VC-4: VC-4-1 线路 VC-4: VC-4-1

Passing through NE2 SNCP ring NE4 板 Passing through
the service the service
8 12
12 NE3 8
VC-4: VC-4-1
NE3
Service flow on SNCP protection group Working source Protection source Service sink
STM-1 line board
the working path Protection group 2 8-SL64 12-SL64 2-SLH41
Service flow on the
STM-64 line board 1xSTM-1
protection path
Procedure
Step 1 Assume that slots 8 of NE1 and NE3 are working slots and slots 12 are protection slots.
Connect the SDH analyzer to NE3's service port; on the digital distribution frame (DDF) to
Step 2 Check the path status on NE3 (at this time, no switching is implemented).
Set parameters for SDH boards on the NMS. For details, see Configuring SNCP Protection.
1. Right-click NE3 on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer. Then, the NE
Explorer dialog box is displayed.
2. Select NE3 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control
3. Select the SNCP protection group, choose Function > Query Switching Status, and
click Close in the displayed Result dialog box that indicates the operation is successful.
4. Check the status of paths of the SNCP protection group. Current Status of both
Working Service and Protection Service should be Normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Perform SNCP switching.

1. Select the N4SL64 board in slot 8 in NE Explorer of NE1, choose Configuration >
SDH Interface from the Function Tree, select By Function, and choose Laser Switch
from the drop-down menu.
2. Select the port to be shut down, set Laser Switch to Close for the port, and click Apply.
In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
3. Check the path status on NE3 (at this time, SNCP switching is implemented).
– Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Select
the SNCP protection group, choose Function > Query Switching Status, and click
Close in the displayed Result dialog box that indicates the operation is successful.
– Current Status of Working Service should be SF switching, and Current Status
of Protection Service should be Normal.
4. Use the SDH analyzer to check service availability. The SDH analyzer should indicate
that the service is transiently interrupted.
5. Turn on the shut-down laser by following instructions in Step 3.1 to Step 3.2. Then, wait
for 10 minutes.
– If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive for the SNCP protection group, check the
SDH analyzer, which should indicate that the service is transiently interrupted.
– If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the SNCP protection group, do as
follows:
n Right-click the NE3 icon on the NMS and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
n Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree,
select all working services, choose Function > Forced to Working, and click
OK in the displayed dialog box. Then, click Close in the second displayed
dialog box.
n Choose Function > Clear and click Close in the displayed dialog box.
n Choose Function > Query Switching Status and click Close in the displayed
dialog box. Current Status of the services should be Normal.
6. Release the loopback performed in step 1.
----End
11.2.23 Verifying SNCTP

This section describes how to verify SNCTP.
Prerequisites
The task described in Creating an SNCTP Protection Group has been performed.
NE A has been connected to NE B using fibers.
All NEs are working normally.

NMS, SDH analyzer, fibers, fiber adapters, fixed attenuators

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-25 shows a connection diagram for testing SNCTP.
Figure 11-25 Connection diagram for testing SNCTP

1xSTM-1
NE A
SNCTP protection group Working source Protection source Service sink
Protection group 1 12-SLQ64 14-SLQ64 15-SLO16
VC-4: VC-4-1
12 14
NE B and NE D
NE A
SDH service Service source Service sink
VC-4 12-SLQ64 14-SLQ64
12 14
VC-4: VC-4-1 VC-4: VC-4-1
线路
Passing through SNCTP ring Passing through
NE B NE D 板
the service the service
14 12
NE C
14 12
VC-4: VC-4-1
NE C
SNCTP protection group Working source Protection source Service sink
Service flow on Protection group 2 12-SLQ64 14-SLQ64 15-SLO16

STM-16 line board
the working path
Service flow on the
STM-64 line board 1xSTM-1
protection path
Procedure
l Assume that slots 12 of NE A and NE C house working boards and slots 14 house
protection boards. Connect the SDH analyzer to NE C's service port. On the digital
distribution frame (DDF) to which NE A is connected, loop back the service transmitted
from NE A's service port. The SDH analyzer should indicate that the service is normal.
l Check the path status on NE C when no switching is performed on NE C.
Set parameters for SDH boards on the NMS. For details, see Creating an SNCTP
Protection Group.
a. Right-click NE C on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu. Then, the NE Explorer dialog box is displayed.
b. Select NE C from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > SNCTP from the
Function Tree.
c. Click Query Switching Status. In the Result dialog box that indicates the
operation is successful, click Close. Then, all protection groups are listed on the
right side.
d. Check the status of paths of the SNCTP protection group. Current Status of both
the working and protection paths should be Normal.
l Perform SNCTP switching.
a. Select the SDH board in slot 12 in NE Explorer of NE A, choose Configuration >
SDH Interface from the Function Tree, click By Function, and choose Laser
Switch from the drop-down menu.
b. Select the port to be disabled, set Laser Switch to Close, and click Apply. In the
displayed dialog box, click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
c. Check the path status on NE C after SNCTP switching is implemented on NE C.

n Choose Configuration > SNCTP from the Function Tree. Click Query
Switching Status. In the displayed Result dialog box that indicates the
operation is successful, click Close. Then, all protection groups are listed on
the right side.
n Check the status of paths of the SNCTP protection group. Current Status of
the working path should be SF, Current Status of the protection path should
be Normal, and Switching Status of the SNCTP protection group should be
SF switching.
d. Use the SDH analyzer to check the service availability and switching time. The
SDH analyzer should indicate that the service is transiently interrupted.
e. Turn on the laser by following instructions in a to b. Then, wait for 10 minutes.
n If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive for the SNCTP protection group, check
the SDH analyzer, which should indicate that the service is transiently
interrupted. The switching time should be less than 50 ms.
n If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the SNCTP protection group,
perform the following steps:
○ Right-click the NE C icon on the NMS and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
○ Choose Configuration > SNCTP from the Function Tree. Right-click the
protection path of the SNCTP protection group in Slot Mapping
Relation, and choose Forced to Working from the shortcut menu. In the
displayed dialog box, click OK. In the second displayed dialog box, click
Close.
○ Right-click the protection path of the SNCTP protection group again, and
choose Clear from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click
Close.
○ Right-click the protection path of the SNCTP protection group again, and
choose Query from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click
Close. Current Status of the protection path should be Normal.
f. Release the loopback performed in step 1.
----End
11.2.24 Verifying Transoceanic MSP Ring Switching

A network is configured with transoceanic MSP ring protection, which protects the services in
the working path. This section describes how to verify transoceanic MSP ring protection
switching.
Prerequisites
l A transoceanic MSP ring has been created and configured on the NMS. For details, see
Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring.
l All nodes on the ring must run transoceanic MSP protocols. If another protocol is used
on the ring, transoceanic MSP switching will fail.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000 and SDH analyzer

Currently, transoceanic MSP cannot be configured for lower order services.
When the transoceanic MS is in the switching state, the extra services on the protection path
can be restored one minute later if the protection path is not preempted by the services on the
working path.
Build a transoceanic MSP ring as shown in Figure 11-26. Assume that a VC-4 service from
NE1 to NE3 is configured and the service flow is NE1-NE2-NE3.
Figure 11-26 Connection diagram for testing transoceanic MSP

Attenuator
Line board
1×VC4 NE1: 20-SLO16
1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
VC4: VC4-1
1 19
NE2: Line board
NE1
19-SLQ64
Line board
1-SLQ64 19
VC4: VC4-1
Passing through the Line
Transoceanic MSP NE4
service NE2 board
ring
19 NE3 1

19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-16 line board
Line board
STM-64 line board 20-SLO16
Service SDH analyzer

flow
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to NE3's service port, and loop back the service carried on the port
of NE1. The SDH analyzer should indicate that the service is normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Log in to the NMS, and choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Protection
Subnet Maintenance from the Main Menu to check the status of active and standby
resources before MSP switching.
Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1, choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree, select By Function, and choose Laser Switch from the drop-down menu.
Step 7 Check for new alarms on the NEs. NE1 and NE3 should report MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms, which indicates that NE1 and NE3 have implemented transoceanic MSP
switching.
Step 8 Wait for one minute and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the
Function Tree.
Step 9 Click Query to query the services on the NEs, and verify that the extra services on the
protection channel that is not preempted by the working services are restored.
Step 10 Follow steps 2 to 4 to switch on the laser of the optical interface board in slot 1.
Step 12 Check for MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms on NE1 and NE3. The alarms should
clear, which indicates that transoceanic MSP switching on NE1 and NE3 has been completed.
Step 14 Test other sections by repeating the preceding steps.
----End
11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D must be established.
ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and D.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 11-27, the ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and
D.
Figure 11-27 Application of ERPS protection

SMB
LEM24
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
West Port East port
East port
West Port
LEM24 VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2 LEM24
A
VCTRUNK2 B D VCTRUNK1
C
West Port East port

VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
East port West Port
: ERPS working signal flow

LEM24 : ERPS protection signal flow
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments.
a. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NE A, see Figure
11-27. In addition, configure a client-side loopback at NE D.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
a. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
b. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection
> ERPS Management.
d. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status
of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
a. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the
direction to NE D to trigger protection switching.
b. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
c. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status
of State Machine is displayed as Protection.
d. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.
e. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is
VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
NOTE
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working
path. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
----End
11.2.26 Verifying DLAG

To check whether the configured DLAG function works normally, verify whether all the basic
functions of the LAG are available.
Prerequisites
l The DLAG configuration must be complete.
In the DLAG as shown in Figure 11-28, the ports connected through link 1 function as main
ports, and the ports connected through link 2 function as slave ports. You can verify the
DLAG in the following aspects:
l If a network fault occurs, the DLAG can be successfully switched.
l In revertive mode, the main port can be switched after the fault on the link is rectified.
Figure 11-28 DLAG networking diagram

NE1 DLAG NE2
Link1
Link2
Procedure
Step 1 If a network fault occurs, the DLAG can be successfully switched.
1. Disconnect the fiber or network cable from the main port.
2. In the Main Topology, right-click NE1 and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed
Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
4. In the right pane, select the DLAG the configuration of which is complete and then click
Query.Check and ensure that the statuses of the working board and working port are
normal. If the port on the protection board in the DLAG group on NE1 becomes active,
DLAG protection switching is successful.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 In revertive mode, the main port can be switched after the fault on the link is rectified.
1. In the Main Topology, right-click NE1 and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed
Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
3. In the pane on the right side, select the DLAG the configuration of which is complete
and then click Query. Check and ensure that the statuses of the working board and
working port are normal.
4. Disconnect the fiber or network cable from the main port.
5. Repeat Steps a to c to query the statuses of the working board and working port in the
DLAG on NE1 and NE2.
6. Connect the fiber or network cable to the main port.
7. Repeat Steps a to c to query the statuses of the working board and working port in the
DLAG on NE1 and NE2. The working board and working port in the DLAG on NE1 and
NE2 return to the initial state. You can infer that the DLAG works normally.
----End
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics

This section describes how to test the data characteristics.
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS

By dynamically adding and deleting members, masking failed members, and restoring failed
members, you can determine whether the LCAS is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
The LCAS must be configured.
During adjustment of the services with the LCAS function enabled, the corresponding alarm
is reported on the U2000. This alarm can be used to verify whether the operation is
successful.
l During adjustment of the services, the LCAS protocol checks whether the configured
members are the same as the actual negotiated members. When the actual bound
members at the source or sink end are less than the configured members, the opposite
end reports an alarm indicating the partial loss of bandwidth, such as LCAS_PLCR or
LCAS_PLCT.
l When all members are deleted, the local end reports the LCAS_TLCR and LCAS_TLCT
alarms. Normally, when the LCAS negotiation is unavailable, the performance events are
deleted forcibly due to the timeout.
l If the LCAS state at one end is switched from Enabled to Disabled, the LCAS_FOPR
alarm indicating the failure of the LCAS protocol (the LCAS protocol fails in the receive
direction) is reported at the other end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically deleting members at one end:
1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE, and choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu.
2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.
4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is
displayed.
5. Click Configuration.
6. In the Bound Path Configuration dialog box, select Display in Combination.
7. Select any bound path to be deleted from Selected Bound Paths and click .
8. Right-click the Ethernet board on the NE at the opposite end, and choose Browse
Current Alarms from the shortcut menu.
9. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms
LCAS_PLCR and LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed.
NOTE
If all members of the bound paths are deleted, the major alarm LCAS_TLCR is reported at the local end,
which indicates the complete loss of bandwidth in the receive direction.
Step 2 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically adding members at one end:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and choose NE
2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select Internal Port. The internal port configuration window is displayed.
4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is
displayed.
5. Click Configuration, and add bound paths as required.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Then the new members are added to the local end.
8. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS
function. Right-click this board, and select Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut
menu.
NOTE
Because new members are dynamically added to only one end, the total traffic does not change. In the
Bound Path tab, query the actual used paths and check whether they are the same as those before the
new members are added. The Ethernet board at the local end reports the LCAS_PLCR alarm, but no
packets are lost. If the equivalent number of new members is added to the other end, after the WTR time
for the LCAS, the previous LCAS_PLCR alarm clears.
Step 3 Verifying the LCAS by masking the failed members:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and select NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > SDH Service configuration. The list of
members configured with SDH services is displayed in the cross-connection window
pane.
3. Select one or more members to be masked.
4. Click the Deactivate button in the right pane. The Confirm dialog box is displayed to
query whether to deactivate all the selected services.
5. Click OK. Masking the selected members is complete.
6. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS
function.
7. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface.
8. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.
9. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.
10. Click the Query button.
11. Query the The Used Channel column. The paths that correspond to the deactivated
members are masked and not displayed.
12. In the board list, select the board configured with the LCAS function. Right-click this
board, and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu.
14. Query the current alarms of the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function on
the opposite NE, and the same alarms are displayed.
NOTE
The LCAS_PLCT and LCAS_PLCR alarms indicate that the actual number of paths in the transmit
(receive) VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is smaller than the configured number of paths. After the
cross-connections are deactivated, paths that correspond to the originally used paths become invisible.
This indicates that the failed members are successfully masked.
Step 4 Verifying the LCAS by restoring the failed members:

1. Based on Step 3, select the previously deactivated members. Click the Deactivate button
in the lower area of the window. The failed cross-connections are restored.
2. The Confirm dialog box displays to query whether to activate the selected services.
Click OK to restore the failed members.
3. Perform substeps Step 3.7 to Step 3.10 in step 3. Then, in the The Used Channel
column, the paths that correspond to the masked members are displayed.
NOTE
After the WTR time (300s by default) of the LCAS, the previously reported LCAS_PLCR and
LCAS_PLCT alarms clear. This indicates that the failed members are successfully restored.
NOTICE
During the process of dynamically deleting members or masking failed members, packet loss
occurs. The packet loss time equals the number of lost packets divided by the packet
transmitting rate. The WTR time can be lengthy and is 300s by default.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
If the preceding verification operations are successfully complete and the query results are the
same as those mentioned, it indicates that the LCAS function is successfully configured.
----End
11.3.2 Testing the LPT

By simulating the link fault at the access point and querying the alarms reported on the NE,
you can verify whether the LPT is configured successfully.
Prerequisites
l The Ethernet service must be configured on the specified port.
l The LPT function must be enabled for the transmission equipment at the local and
opposite ends.
l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must
be correctly established.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding Ethernet board. Select Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query in the lower right corner, and ensure that the LPT state of the specified port is
enabled.
Step 3 Select Ethernet Interface from Ethernet Interface Management at left hand pane, and
select External Port in the right pane.
Step 4 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and select Disabled from the Enabled/Disabled drop-down
list. This causes the corresponding laser on the local board to shut down so that the access link
becomes unavailable.
Step 5 In the Main Topology, right-click the opposite NE and choose Browse Current Alarms from
the shortcut menu to query the alarms on the opposite NE. In the query results, the ETH_LOS
and LPT_RFI alarms are displayed.
Step 6 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to open the laser that was previously shut down, and query the alarms on
the opposite NE.
Step 7 The ETH_LOS and LPT_RFI alarms on the opposite NE are cleared, indicating that the LPT
is successfully configured.
----End
11.3.3 Testing the STP/RSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the STP/RSTP function is enabled and disabled,
you can verify whether the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The Ethernet LAN services must be configured.
The STP/RSTP must be configured.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the STP/RSTP.
Figure 11-29 shows the set-up diagram.
Figure 11-29 Testing the STP/RSTP
Data board:N1EGSH
Data board:N1EGSH
NE2 Data board:N1EGSH
U2000 NE1 STP/RSTP NE3
NE4
SMB A
SMB B
Data board:N1EGSH
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1-NE4, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Enabled tab, and select the corresponding EGSH board in the board list.
Click Fast Config in the lower right corner.
Step 3 In the Fast Config window, double-click the Protocol Enabled drop-down list, select
Disabled, and click OK. This causes the STP/RSTP protocol that was previously enabled to
be disabled.
Step 4 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to
the ring network.
Step 6 Then SMB B receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the
packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets
are cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 7 Repeat steps 1 through 3. In the Fast Config window, enable the STP/RSTP protocol on the
EGSH boards of NE1-NE4.
Step 8 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.
Step 9 Then, SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive
the packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided
after the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled, and the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.
----End
11.3.4 Testing the MSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the MSTP function is enabled and disabled, you
can verify whether the MSTP is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
The MSTP must be configured.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the MSTP, and
Figure 11-30 shows the setup diagram.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-30 Testing the MSTP
Data board:N1EGSH
Data board:N1EGSH
NE2 Data board:N1EGSH
U2000 NE1 MSTP NE3
NE4
SMB A
SMB B
Data board:N1EGSH
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Multiple Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Parameters tab, and set Enable Protocol to Disabled. Click Apply. This
causes the MSTP protocol that is previously enabled to be disabled.
Step 3 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.
Step 4 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to
the ring network.
Step 5 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets
are cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 6 Repeat steps 1 through 3. Set Enable Protocol to Enabled for the MSTP protocol on the
N1EGSH boards of NE-NE4.
Step 7 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.
Step 8 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive the
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided
after the MSTP protocol is enabled, and the MSTP is successfully configured.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.4 Testing System Features

The system features includes IPA, APE, and ALC.
11.4.1 Testing IPA

This section describes how to test the IPA function.
Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning must be complete.
The IPA must be configured.

U2000
The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, start test.
This section uses the start test as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.
IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 11-31.
Figure 11-31 IPA verification diagram
NE A NE B
1 2
laser control board detection board

4 3
detection board laser control board
IPA pair NE
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status
of the ONE is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Right-click the NE A icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the IPA Status to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE B. See steps 2 through 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 Remove the fiber of the output port on the OAU1.
Step 7 Log in NE A and NE B separately. In the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose
Configuration > IPA Management.
Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Right-click the Status column, and
select Query State. The state Power off should display.
Step 9 Insert the fiber of the output port of the OAU1.
Step 10 In IPA Protection, click Start Test. A message indicating a successful operation is displayed
in the prompt dialog box.
Step 11 Click Close.
Step 12 In IPA Protection, select Status. Right-click Query State. Status is displayed as IPA ended.
----End
11.4.2 Testing IPA of Raman System (CRPC01/RAU1/RAU2 +

Detection Board + Auxiliary Detection Board)
Prerequisites

U2000


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-32 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (Auxiliary Raman board
CRPC03+ROP+Raman Amplifier CRPC01 or RAU1)
NE A NE B
CRP CRP
ROP
C03 C01
CRP CRP
ROP
C01 C03
OA board OTU or OSC board
NE A NE B
CRP
C03 ROP RAU1
CRP
RAU1 ROP
C03
OA board OTU or OSC board
Procedure
Step 2 Right-click the NE B icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, check whether IPA Status is Enabled; if it is
Disabled, change it to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE A. See Step 2 through Step 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the shutdown board on NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. Set Laser Status to Off for the site.
Step 7 Select NE A, then in the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration > IPA
Management.
Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA pair. Right-click the Status column and select
Query State. Ensure that Status is Power off. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click
Close.
Step 9 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A. Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that Laser Status for the
boards are Off.
Step 10 Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 for NE B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Management. In IPA Protection, click Start Test. The Warning dialog box is displayed.
Click Yes.
Step 12 A dialog box appears showing that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 13 Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 for NE B.
Step 14 In the NE Explorer on NE A, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the Raman board of
NE A.
Step 15 In the NE Explorer on NE B, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the Raman board of
NE B.
Step 16 In the NE Explorer of NE A, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
ended. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 17 In the NE Explorer of NE B, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
Step 18 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A. Choose
boards is On.
Step 19 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE B. Choose
boards is On.
----End
11.4.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2+ Auxiliary

Detection Board)
Prerequisites

U2000
Precaution
It is recommended that the local NE (NE A) selected during the verification be a gateway NE
(GNE).
If both NEs A and B selected during the verification are non-GNEs, ensure that the function
of automatically releasing laser shutdown is enabled for the non-GNEs. To enable the
function, do as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Figure 11-33 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (RAU1 boards+14FIU boards
+OSC boards)
NE A NE B
RAU1
Raman EDFA
FIU OSC FIU FIU OSC FIU
EDFA Raman
RAU1
OA board
Procedure
Step 2 Right-click the NE B icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management .
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, check whether IPA Status is Enabled; if it is
Disabled, change it to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE A. See Step 2 through Step 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the RAU1 board on NE B. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface . Manually turn off the pump laser on the Raman board of NE B.
Step 7 In the NE Explorer, select the OSC board on NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface e. Manually turn off the laser on the OSC board of NE A.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Management.
Step 9 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA pair. Right-click the Status column and select
Query State. Ensure that Status is Power off. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click
Close.
Step 10 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE A. Choose Configuration
> WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards are Off.
Step 11 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 for NE B.
Step 12 In the NE Explorer, select the OSC board on NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface . Manually turn on the laser on the OSC board of NE A.
NOTE
When NE A is a non-GNE, turning off the laser on the OSC board may make the NE unreachable. As a result,
the laser on the OSC board on NE A cannot be turned on manually. However, the function of automatically
releasing laser shutdown is enabled in this scenario. Therefore, the laser on the OSC board will be
automatically turned on after the automatic disabling time (the time can be set, for example, 5 minutes)
elapses.
Management. In IPA Protection, click Start Test. The Warning dialog box is displayed.
Click Yes.
Step 14 A dialog box appears showing that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 15 Repeat Step 13 and Step 14 for NE B.
Step 16 In the NE Explorer of NE A, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
Step 17 In the NE Explorer of NE B, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
Step 18 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE A. Choose Configuration >
WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards is On.
Step 19 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE B. Choose Configuration >
WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards is On.
----End
11.4.4 Testing ALC

This section describes how to test the ALC function.
Prerequisites
The ALC Link must be created. The parameters must be configured according to Parameters.

U2000, optical power meter
ALC Verification Diagram

For the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 11-34.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-34 ALC verification diagram

Station A Station B StationC
DCM-D DCM-D
OAU1 OAU2 OAU3

From To
M40 D40
OAU OAU OAU

To
D40 V40
DCM-D DCM-D M40
OTM OLA OTM

(NE51) (NE53) (NE54)
: VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Choose Configuration > WDM ALC Management from the Main
Topology.
Step 2 In WDM ALC Management, click the NG Complete Link tab. In the list of links, select a
link whose Status is Idle.
Step 3 On the U2000, query and record the line attenuation and node gain for stations A, B, and C,
also record the input and output optical power of OAU1, OAU2, and OAU3.
Step 4 On the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between stations A and B to
increase the attenuation between the two stations by 3 dB.
Step 5 Query the input and output optical power of OAU2 on the U2000. Compare the test value
with the input optical power value obtained before adjusting the VOA to ensure that the test
value is 3 dB lower. At the same time, check whether the difference between the line
attenuation value and node gain value of station B is not less than 3 dB. Also check whether
an event that indicates an ALC optical power anomaly exists.
Step 6 When the link turns yellow, in the Link ID list, select the link and click Start Automatic
Link Adjustment to start the ALC adjustment. Also check whether the ALC adjustment
event occurs.
Step 7 After the ALC adjustment is complete, the link restores to the original color, and an event that
indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
Step 8 Query the input and output optical power for OAU2/OAU3 on the U2000. Compare the test
value with the value obtained before the adjustment is performed to check whether they are
the same. At the same time, check whether the line attenuation value and the node gain value
for station B are consistent. If that is the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formula:

Adjustment range of OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of OAU1 without DCM - DCM insertion
loss - 1 dBm
----End
11.4.5 Testing APE

The APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which ensures the
signal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the APE function is started.
Prerequisites
The system optical power commissioning must be completed.
The APE Link must be created.

U2000, VOA
When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at the receive end differs significantly
from that configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function can automatically
adjust the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of
the optical power at the receive end is closer to that configured in deployment commissioning.
Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexer boards and optical multiplexer boards
supporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9, ROAM and
RMU9 boards.
This section uses the M40V as an example to describe the APE function.
The following descriptions provide the details for commissioning the APE from west to east.
The commissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the commissioning from west
to east.
The APE function testing configuration is shown in Figure 11-35.
Figure 11-35 APE function test configuration diagram
OTU M OTU
D
4
OA OA 4
0
0 OTU
OTU V
F F MCA
West SC1 I I SC1 East
U U
OTU D M OTU
4 OA OA 4
0 0
OTU OTU
V

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Configure the APE function on the U2000. Set the standard optical power
curve and the wavelength to be checked. Save the configuration data.
NOTE
It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB.
Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to a
minimum.
Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power of the
channel has decreased by 3 dB.
NOTE
l The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be higher than the
power unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation for a channel be set to 3 dB.
l The ALC function may be enabled after the optical power decreases.
l After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the
power is unbalanced.
Step 4 On the U2000, select the desired NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Optical
Power Equilibrium from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click Query to review information about the created APE pair.
Step 6 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list.
Step 7 On the U2000, click Start Regulation on the bottom to start the APE function. After the APE
adjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the
receive end and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power
unbalance threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the optical power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE
event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
Step 8 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2.
Step 9 On the U2000, start the APE function by referring to step 7. After the APE adjusts the power,
the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the
standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event report
dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
----End
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks

This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Fiber connections or clock cable connections between NEs must be established.
Clocks at the physical must be configured.

ANT-20 (or MP1550A, MP1552B, MP1570A, HP37718A) clock analyzer, frequency meter,
U2000
Testing Items
1. External clock source input/output and tracing test. This test checks whether an external
clock source is properly traced.
2. Clock source selection and tracing test. This test checks whether clock synchronization is
achieved between two NEs that are interconnected by using fibers.
3. Line clock source and external clock source selection test. This test checks whether a
line clock source and an external clock source function normally.
4. Synchronous clock active/standby switching test. This test checks whether the active/
standby clock protection functions properly.
5. Master/slave subrack cascading test. This test checks whether a synchronous clock can
function properly when multiple subracks are cascaded.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-36 shows the diagram for the external clock source input/output and tracing test.
Figure 11-36 Test Diagram
BITS
Clock
analyzer
A
NOTE
NE A is configured with clock and cross-connect boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-37 shows the diagram for the clock source selection and tracing test.
BITS
Clock
analyzer
A B
NOTE
NEs A and B are configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.
Figure 11-38 shows the diagram for the line clock source and external clock source selection
test.

BITS
Fiber 1
NOTE
NE A is configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Item 1: External Clock Source Input/Output and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to NE A and the external clock source to check whether NE A
properly traces the external clock source.
----End
Testing Item 2: Clock Source Selection and Tracing Test

Step 2 Configure NE B to trace a line clock. See Configuring Clock Attributes.
Step 3 Attach a clock analyzer to NE B to check whether NE B properly traces the line clock source.
----End
Testing Item 3: Line Clock Source and External Clock Source Selection Test
Step 2 Configure the clock source priority table of NE A and assign the highest priority to the
external clock source. See Configuring Clock Attributes.
Step 3 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources.
Step 4 Disconnect the external clock source from NE A. Check whether NE A can switch the clock
to the line clock source by querying clock synchronization status.
Step 5 Reconnect the external clock source to NE A to enable NE A to trace the line clock source.
Then check whether NE A can switch the clock to the external clock source by querying clock
synchronization status.
----End
Testing Item 4: Synchronous Clock Active/Standby Switching Test

Step 1 Perform an active/standby switching of the clock boards when an NE properly traces a clock
source. Then check whether the NE properly traces a clock source by observing the data on
the clock analyzer.
----End
Testing Item 5: Master/Slave Subrack Cascading Test

Step 1 Connect the master subrack or the last slave subrack to an new external clock source. Set the
external clock as the clock source for tracing.
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to the master subrack or the last slave subrack to check whether the
NE properly traces the external clock source.
Step 3 Disconnect the master subrack or the last slave subrack from the external clock source.
Configure the NE to trace a line clock for any subrack on the NE. Then check whether the NE
traces this line clock by observing the data on the clock analyzer.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2

This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.
11.6.1 Testing Process

This section describes the general process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.
Figure 11-39 shows the process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.
Figure 11-39 Process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features
Start
Check
configurations
Formulate a
commissioning plan
Start
commissioning on
site
Perform short-term
performance tests
on site
Examine the pre-

test results
End
Precaution
l Before Starting Deployment:
– Examine the IEEE 1588v2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office carefully and verify
that the actual network configurations are the same as the planned network
configurations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements.

– Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
– Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site operations in
advance.
l Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an IEEE
1588v2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an IEEE 1588v2 link (a point
farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS signals to the TimeAcc-007 or IEEE 1588v2
time tester. Calibrate the test instrument before performing the test.
Procedure
1. Check configurations.
– After completing IEEE 1588v2-related configurations according to the network
design diagrams, check the configurations based on parameters specified in the
Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning sequence
according to connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and OptiX PTN
equipment.
– First commission BITS devices.
– Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the source of
delay compensation ports is BITS.
– For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and record the
switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock tracing link is completed,
restore configurations.
– For OptiX PTN equipment where IEEE 1588v2 has been provided, configure delay
compensation on all OTN boards before connecting OTN equipment to OptiX PTN
equipment.
3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a proper
commissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning at a site must
cover all time/clock tracing links.
– Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions.
– Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment, observe
performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source satisfies
requirements. After completing compensation for test cable delay and antenna
feeder delay, measure output at the 1PPS+TOD port on the BITS device. If the
maximum difference between measurement values does not exceed 50 ns, delay
compensation for the BITS device is not required; otherwise, delay compensation
for the BITS device is required (in this case, contact BITS maintenance personnel).
NOTE
After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It takes the
BITS device over two hours to become stable after the restart.
– Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details, see 11.6.2
Testing Delay Compensation.
4. Perform short-term performance tests on site.
– To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is completed at
a site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that services will not be affected. For
short-term performance specifications at each site, see 11.6.3 Testing Items.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation
Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.
Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 11-40 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation.
Figure 11-40 Testing Diagram
Convergence layer Access layer

1PPS+TOD
2M
Slave A 2M
BITS
2M E Node B
OTN network 1PPS+TOD
B D
Master 1PPS+TOD
BITS
F Node B
C
Station Direction Board
A、B、 East 18-11ST2-1

:Special cables C、D West 18-11ST2-2
:Straight cables
:Optical cable
:Physical synchronization protection route
:1588 phase synchronization protection route
:Physical synchronization route
:1588 phase synchronization route
:Crossover cables
:OSN series
:BITS :PTN equipment :Node B
WDM equipment
Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)

The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be interconnected
in either of the following modes:
l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board.
l Connected through a GE port on the tributary board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is
as follows:
1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node.
a. In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock >
Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the clock
provided by the BITS device.
2. Measure delay.
a. After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the BITS
device, verify time precision of the source node.
b. Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port.
c. When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable to the
TOD port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by the antenna
feeder and test cable, check the time displayed on the test instrument 10 minutes
later. When the maximum time difference does not exceed 50 ns, record the time
offset of the OTN equipment. Then, configure asymmetry delay compensation
using the U2000.
3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a cable or
service board.
a. Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's 1PPS+TOD
port to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see Setting Cable
Transmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port.
b. Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation modes, see
Configuring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock Port.
4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time difference on the
OTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time difference does not exceed 100
ns, the delay compensation satisfies requirements. Otherwise, configure delay
compensation again.
Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)

The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies according to the
configuration.
l ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay compensation (no
site-by-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you only need to select sites for
delay compensation and the maintenance engineers will configure delay compensation at
the selected sites. Adhere to the following principles when configuring delay
compensation during deployment:
– Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be received over
two or more paths.
– Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected to OptiX
PTN equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time precision requirements.
– At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must be
completed. This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes satisfies
requirements after time source switching.
As shown in Figure 11-40, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for transferring
time sources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for receiving time sources.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
At these sites, delay compensation is required for path switching. After the delay
compensation, no more delay compensation is required during maintenance.
l OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-site
asymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at a site.
For example, site D in Figure 11-40 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C.
Compensate for delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay Compensation for
the Source Node), switch the time source (by disabling a port on path B-C), and then
compensate for delay on path D-C. Finally, enable the port on path B-C.
Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10 minutes. The
time offset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within ±1 us.
Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN Equipment
(NE E, F)
OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the following modes:
l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board
used with the STG/ATE board.
l Connected through a GE port on the tributary board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is
as follows:
1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment.
a. Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then, compensate
for the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board on each downstream OTN
NE based on the time offset as well as the delay generated at the output port of the
ST2 on each upstream OTN NE with the same number with reversed polarity. For
details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10 minutes. The
time offset between the sink node and the GPS is within ±1 us.
2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment.
a. On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN equipment and
the BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate for the delay generated at
the TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipment based on the time offset.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN equipment for 10
minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN equipment and the GPS is within
±1 us.
11.6.3 Testing Items

This section describes the items to be tested in the testing of IEEE 1588v2 features.
Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.
Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Time tester and U2000
Testing Items
1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To verify
that OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by overcoming
asymmetry issues.
2. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-term stability
when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.
3. Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability when
NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode.
4. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of restoring clock
or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut.
5. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/standby IEEE
1588v2 switching performs properly.
NOTE
Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-40 shows the diagram for the testing items.
Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using

TN11ST2+SFIU Boards Test
Test To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time
Purpose precision by overcoming asymmetry issues.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

Configura
tion
Test Time tester with a GPS receiver

Instrumen
t
Test 1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time tester.
Procedure 2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes.
3. Extend the fiber that transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages between the two
sites by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a new fiber longer than 10 m
using a fiber adapter).
Expected The time offset is within ±100 ns before and after the fiber is extended.
Result

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization
Purpose mode
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

Configura
tion

Instrumen
t
Test 1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the
Procedure time tester.
Expected The time offset is within ±1 us.

Result
Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization
Purpose mode.
Test All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.

Configura
tion

Instrumen
t
Test 1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the
Procedure time tester.
Expected The time offset is within ±1 us.

Result
Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery Test

Test To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a
Purpose fiber cut.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP synchronization

Configura mode.
tion

Instrumen
t

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Test 1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester.
Procedure 2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit IEEE 1588v2.
Check for clock/time source switching alarms and performance events
generated on OTN and OptiX PTN devices before and after the fibers are
reinserted.
3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and record it.
4. Recover the fiber connections.
Expected When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the time offset
Result is within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and after the fault is
rectified.
Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform a switching
between the active and standby clock boards on this NE.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, STG active/standby status is independent of the XCS active/standby status.
Therefore, the active/standby STG switching can be tested without affecting the active/standby XCS
status.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the active/standby clock board status is associated with the active/standby
cross-connect board status. Therefore, it is recommended to test only the active/standby clock board
switching or active/standby cross-connect board switching.
Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock source
switching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to measure the time
synchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the time synchronization
performance meets the clock source switching requirements (The time offset is within 240 ns
before and after the switching).
----End
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels

When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service
channels must be tested.
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops

You can perform the test by connecting laptops to both ends of the Ethernet service. By doing
this, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisites
l You must be a U2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
l The Ethernet services must be configured and the port attribute is set to "Access".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Two laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two straight-through cables
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-41 shows the diagram for testing the Ethernet service channels.
Figure 11-41 Testing the Ethernet service channels

PC 1
PC 2
NE4
NE5
NE1
NE3
NE2
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according
to Figure 11-41.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. The two IP addresses must be set in the same
network section.
l Set the IP address for laptop A.
– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
l Set the IP address for laptop B.
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping
192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command:

l -n Num: transit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end
l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.

l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64
time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal.
l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the
Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration
of the Ethernet service. Correct the fault, and then continue the test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is
normal.
----End
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet

OAM Function
If the Ethernet board supports the OAM function, the OAM function can also be used to test
the availability of Ethernet service channels. Prerequisites.
Prerequisites
l The Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

U2000
Context
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following boards support the OAM function.
l EGSH
l LEM24
l LEX4
l LEM24
l LEX4
l LEM24
l LEX4
Before testing the availability of the Ethernet service channels by using the OAM function,
you must configure the OAM maintenance points on the two sites.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select the Ethernet board in the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
Step 3 In the right pane, click OAM Configuration. The OAM Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Click New. Then, select Create MD from the drop-down menu.
Step 5 In the New Maintenance Domain dialog box, set Maintenance Domain Name and select
Maintenance Domain Level.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Click New. Then, select Create MA from the drop-down menu.
Step 7 In the New Maintenance Association dialog box, set Maintenance Domain Name and
Maintenance Association Name. Then close the OAM Configuration dialog box
Step 8 Click New. In the New MEP Point dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters.
Step 9 In Ethernet Service OAM, right-click the created Ethernet service maintenance point, and
choose Performance Detect from the shortcut menu.
Step 10 The Performance Detect dialog box is displayed. In Send Mode, select the specific mode. In
Maintenance Point, set Source MP ID and Destination MP ID.
Step 11 Click Start Detect. The statistics of the performance is displayed in the Details. View the
results of the statistics. Then, determine the performance of the service between the local
equipment and the opposite equipment through Loss Ratio and Delay.
Step 12 Change the length of the frame in Send Mode. Then, test and record the loss ratio and delay
of the packets with the length of 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes.
----End
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels

When a network transmits packet services, the availability of packet service channels must be
tested.
11.8.1 Testing Tunnel Performance Using MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM

The delay measurement (DM) functions in MPLS-TP tunnel OAM allow you to test tunnel
performance easily with a single mouse click, and does not require any dedicated meters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
l An MPLS tunnel is created and deployed. For details about how to create an MPLS
tunnel, see Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
If the MPLS tunnel is created on a per-NE basis, search for the tunnel before performing other
operations. For details about how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

U2000
Only certain boards support MPLS-TP OAM. For details about these boards, see Availability
of MPLS-TP OAM in Feature Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the desired tunnel and choose Performance > Create Monitoring Instance from
the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed Quick Monitor dialog box, click Close.
Step 5 In the Performance Monitoring Management window, after selecting the desired instance,
right-click the desired Tunnel in the Transmit Tunnel to choose Real Time Monitoring.
Step 6 In the RTP for NE(xxx)-Tunnel(xxx) window, select the MPLS_TUNNEL_FD(us) or

MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV(us) to measure delay or delay variation between two MEPs (DM).
----End
11.8.2 Testing PW Performance Using MPLS-TP PW OAM

The loss measurement (LM) and delay measurement (DM) functions in MPLS-TP PW OAM
allow you to test PW performance easily with a single mouse click, and does not require any
dedicated meters.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service is created and deployed. For details how to create a PWE3 service,
see Managing PWE3 Services.

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Only certain boards support MPLS-TP OAM. For details about these boards, see Availability
of MPLS-TP OAM in Feature Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 After selecting the desired PWE3 service, in the Topology windows right-click the working
Tunnel route to choose View Real-Time Performance.
Step 4 In the RTP for NE(xxx)-L2VPN(xxx)-PW(xxx) window, select the
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD(us) or MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV(us) to measure delay or delay variation
between two MEPs (DM). And select the MPLS_PW_FL(pkt), MPLS_PW_FL_N(pkt) or
MPLS_PW_FLR(%), MPLS_PW_FLR_N(%) to measures the number of packets lost or the
rate of packets lost between two MEPs (LM).
----End
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services

After configuring Ethernet services on a PSN network, you need to test Ethernet services to
check whether the configuration is correct.
11.9.1 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using Ping

Commands
You can perform the test by connecting the laptops to both ends of the Ethernet service. In this
way, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisites
l The Ethernet services must be configured and the port attribute is set to "Access".

l Two personal computers (PCs) on which the Windows operating system is installed
l Two straight-through cables

Figure 11-42 shows the connection for testing the Ethernet service channels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-42 Connection for testing the Ethernet service channels
PC 1
PC 2
NE4
NE5
NE1
NE3
NE2
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the PC to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according to
the previous connection diagram.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for PC 1 and PC 2. The two IP addresses must be set in the same network
section.
l Set the IP address for PC 1.
– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
l Set the IP address for PC 2.
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on PC 1 to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping
192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command:

l -n Num: transit Num packets to the PC at the opposite end
l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.

l If the displayed window provides the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64
time=1ms TTL=255", Ethernet channel is normal.
l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, the Ethernet channel
is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration of the Ethernet
service. Rectify the fault, and then continue the test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The values of time and TTL are associated with the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is
normal.
----End
11.9.2 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using ETH-

OAM
Use the Ethernet OAM function to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service to ensure that
the Ethernet service works normally. This section describes how to test the connectivity of the
Ethernet service by performing a loopback (LB) test.
Prerequisites
l Ethernet services are configured. For configuration details, see Operation Tasks for
Configuring E-Line Services or Configuring E-LAN Services.
NOTE
If the Ethernet service is PW-carried and created on a per-NE basis, see Searching for PWE3
Services to convert discrete PWE3 services into complete PWE3 services.
Precautions
The PW-carried E-Line service based on VLAN priority or VLAN switching does not support
the LB test function in Ethernet service OAM. To verify these services, see 11.9.4 Testing
Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using SmartBits.

U2000
In the case of the OptiX OSN 8800, you can refer to the Availability about the ETH-OAM
function in the Feature Description for details about the boards that support the ETH-OAM
function.
As shown in Figure 11-43, ETH-OAM has two protocol applications (IEEE 802.1ag and
IEEE 802.3ah) according to the application scenarios.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-43 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah

Ethernet Ethernet
Port OAM Ethernet Service OAM
Port OAM
P P
CE1
Router1 Router3
PE1 PE2 CE3
CE2
P P CE4
Router2
Access
Access
Core Network
Network
Network
Custom Custom
Network Network
OptiX NE
l IEEE 802.1ag
It is used to test end-to-end Ethernet services, and is generally used at the core layer of a
network. For its detailed applications, see Ethernet Service OAM.
l IEEE 802.3ah
It is used to test the connectivity and performance of a physical link, and is mainly used
at the access layer of a network. For its detailed applications, see Ethernet Port OAM.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM > Ethernet
OAM Test from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select LB test from the Measurement Type drop-down list.
Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click Run.
Step 6 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether the
service is available.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the service is
available.
----End
11.9.3 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance Using ETH

OAM
The loss measurement (LM) and delay measurement (DM) functions in ETH OAM allow you
to test Ethernet service performance easily with a single mouse click, and does not require any
dedicated meters.
Prerequisites
l Ethernet services are configured. For configuration details, see Operation Tasks for
Configuring E-Line Services or Configuring E-LAN Services.
NOTE
If the Ethernet service is PW-carried and created on a per-NE basis, see Searching for PWE3
Services to convert discrete PWE3 services into complete PWE3 services.

U2000
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click the desired PWE3 service and choose Ethernet OAM > Ethernet OAM Test
from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select LM Test or DM Test from the Measurement Type drop-
down list.
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, select the source NE and sink NE.
Step 6 Click Run and view test results.

NOTE
You can click LM to check packet loss rate or click DM to check delay in Ethernet services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l ETH_CFM_FLR(%): E-Line service packet loss ratio.

l ETH_CFM_FL(pkt): E-Line service lost packets.
l ETH_CFM_FD(us): E-Line service delay.
l ETH_CFM_FDV(us): E-Line service delay variation.
----End
11.9.4 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using

SmartBits
You can check whether packet loss has occurred on an Ethernet packet service by looping
back the service at one end and testing packet loss with a SmartBits at the other end.
Prerequisites
l Ethernet services are configured according to actual situations. For details, see Operation
Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services or Configuring E-LAN Services.

Network Analyzer, U2000

Figure 11-44 shows how to test Ethernet packet service channels.
Figure 11-44 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet packet services
SmartBits
Packet domain
network
21- PEFF8-1 3- PEG8-1
MAC inloop NE2
NE1
NOTE
The connection diagram serves as a network model. In this example, an inloop at the MAC layer is
performed on an Ethernet port of NE1 and a SmartBits is connected to an Ethernet port on NE2. In
practice, SmartBits can be connected to any desired Ethernet board on source and sink NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Precautions
NOTICE
l Ensure that only the commissioning engineers are present during the test.
l Do not touch optical fibers, wires, or cables without permission.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a SmartBits to an Ethernet port on NE2 according to the connection diagram.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring for NE1 and
NE2. For details, see Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
NOTE
The performance monitoring is set to analyze and locate faults that occur during the test.
Step 3 Log in to the U2000. Perform an inloop at the MAC layer on an Ethernet port of NE1. For
details, see Performing Software Loopback on NMS.
Step 4 Use the SmartBits to transmit and receive packets.

NOTE
l Packets with all 0s are regarded as special packets. Therefore, do not use packets of all 0s for testing
transmitted and received packets.
l When the SmartBits transmits and receives packets for the first time, packet loss occurs due to MAC
address learning. Therefore, it is normal that the number of transmitted packets is different from the
number of received packets.
l In the tests subsequent to the initial one, if the number of transmitted packets is the same as the
number of received packets, the cross-domain service channels are normal.
l If packet loss occurs during the tests, troubleshoot the fault and then perform 24-hour tests until the
channels pass the tests.
----End
11.9.5 Testing Ethernet Service Latency, Throughput, and Short-

Term Packet Loss Ratio Using TP-Assist
The TP-Assist function allows you to test the latency and throughput of UNI-UNI E-Line
services with different frame lengths, with no need for test instruments.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service to be tested must be a PW-carried E-Line service, or a VLAN-based
E-Line service (that is, E-Line service in PORT+VLAN mode at both ends).

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The following boards can be used for the test: TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2,
TN54HUNS3, TN55EG16, TN54EX8 and TN54HUNQ2.
NOTICE
l The ports at the ends of the Ethernet service to be tested must be Ethernet ports. During
the test, the other Ethernet services on the related ports are interrupted.
l If the tested service is configured with QoS, OAM, LAG, inband DCN or any data
transmission protocol, the precision of test results may be affected. To ensure the precision
of test results, it is recommended you delete the above configurations.
l When the source ports of the tested services carry other services, the test result may be
inaccurate. You are advised to disconnect the other services before the test.
l Service configurations cannot be changed during the test.
l A maximum of 7 NEs are configured on the trail carrying the service to be tested.
l The packet loss ratio test is a short-term test (the detection time is within 20s), and will
automatically give the test results after the test finished.
Connection Diagram for the Test

The test procedure takes the Ethernet service between NE A (PORT 1) and NE B (PORT 2),
as shown in Figure 11-45, as an example. The Ethernet service between NE A and NE B is a
UNI-UNI E-Line service. The test procedure for a PW-carried E-Line service is similar.
Figure 11-45 Test connection diagram
The Ethernet service between NE A and NE B has the VLAN ID of 100.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the tag attribute of the Ethernet service between NE A and NE B.
1. In NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from Function
Tree.
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Set Tag to Access. Set Default VLAN ID to the VLAN ID of the tested E-Line service.
In this example, set Default VLAN ID to 100.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set NE B as the sink node for the test.
1. In NE Explorer, select NE B from the object tree and choose Diagnosis&Maintenance
> Data Service Performance Test from Function Tree.
2. In this example, port 2 is on the sink node and therefore Sink Status should be set to
Enabled.
NOTE
If port 2 is on the source node, Source Status should be set to Enabled, then the port will be
loopback.
3. Select the Ethernet service to be tested, enter Test Name, and set Test As to Sink.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set NE A as the source node for the test. Then start the test.
1. In NE Explorer, select NE A from the object tree and choose Diagnosis&Maintenance
2. In this example, port 1 is on the source node and therefore Source Status should be set
to Enabled.
NOTE
– If port 1 is on the sink node, Sink Status should be set to Enabled.

– A maximum of five Ethernet services can be tested one time. Therefore, Source Status and
Sink Status should be set to Disabled for the other Ethernet services.
3. Select the Ethernet service to be tested, enter Test Name as that on NE B, set Test As to
Source.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Start.
NOTE
The test can be started on only the source node (NE A).
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
6. Click Start. Set Frame Length(Bytes) in the Specify the test frame length dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
– The test can be initiated only on the source node (NE A).
– When Frame Length(Bytes) is set to All Item, the system tests Ethernet services with all possible
frame lengths: 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518.
– By default, the system tests Ethernet services with all possible Latency values. The system also
tests Ethernet services with Throughput Percentage(%) set to 80, 90, and 100.
7. Click OK.
The system starts the test and displays the test progress and test result.
NOTE
The system tests the following parameters:

– Throughput, Latency when Frame Length(Bytes) is 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and
1518. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500OptiX OSN 3580 does not allow the frame length to be set
to 1518.
– Latency when Throughput Percentage(%) is 80, 90, and 100
8. Optional: After the progress bar indicates that the test is 100% complete, click Export
Report.
Data Service Performance Test Report is displayed. The report contains information
displayed in the U2000 window.
NOTE
Compared with the throughput in practice, the throughput in test results of long-frame services has
an error rate lower than 5%.
Step 4 After the progress bar indicates that the test is 100% complete, set Source Status and Sink
Status to Disabled for the related ports (port 1 of NE A and port 2 of NE B in this example).
----End
11.9.6 Testing Long-term Ethernet Packet Loss Ratios Using TP-

Assist
The TP-Assist function allows you to test the long-term packet loss ratios of VLAN-based E-
Line services with different frame lengths.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service to be tested must be a PW-carried E-Line service, or a VLAN-based
E-Line service (that is, E-Line service in PORT+VLAN mode at both ends).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
The following boards can be used for the test: TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2,
TN54HUNS3, and TN54HUNQ2.
NOTICE
l The Long-term test should star or stop manually.
l The ports at the ends of the Ethernet service to be tested must be Ethernet ports. During
the test, the other Ethernet services on the related ports are interrupted.
l If the tested service is configured with QoS, OAM, LAG, inband DCN or any data
transmission protocol, the precision of test results may be affected. To ensure the precision
of test results, it is recommended you delete the above configurations.
l Can not change the configuration of service during the test.
Connection Diagram for the Test

The test procedure takes the Ethernet service between NE A (PORT1) and NE B (PORT2), as
shown in Figure 11-46, as an example.The test procedure for a PW-carried E-Line service is
similar.
Figure 11-46 Test connection diagram
The Ethernet service between NE A and NE B has the VLAN ID of 100.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the tag attribute of the Ethernet service between NE A and NE B.
1. In NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the object tree and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from Function
Tree.
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Set Tag to Access. Set Default VLAN ID to the VLAN ID of the tested E-Line service.
In this example, set Default VLAN ID to 100.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set NE B as the sink node for the test.

1. In NE Explorer, select NE B from the object tree and choose Diagnosis&Maintenance
2. In this example, port 2 is on the sink node and therefore Sink Status should be set to
Enabled.
NOTE
If port 2 is on the source node, Source Status should be set to Enabled, then the port will be
loopback.
3. Select the Ethernet service to be tested, enter Test Name, and set Test As to Sink.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set NE A as the source node for the test. Then start the test.
1. In NE Explorer, select NE A from the object tree and choose Diagnosis&Maintenance
2. In this example, port 1 is on the source node and therefore Source Status should be set
to Enabled.
NOTE
– If port 1 is on the sink node, Sink Status should be set to Enabled.

3. Select the Ethernet service to be tested, enter Test Name as that on NE B, set Test As to
Source.
4. Click the Long-term Packet Loss Radio tab.
5. Set test parameters.
– Set Frame Length(Bytes) to 64.
– Set Throughput Percentage(%) to 80.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
To test the long-term packet loss ratio when the throughput percentage is 90%, set Throughput
Percentage(%) to 90. To test the long-term packet loss ratio at a specific traffic volume, configure
a flow whose C-VLAN ID is 100 in the port policy for PORT1, configure the specific CAR for the
flow, and set Throughput Percentage(%) to 100.
6. Click Start Long-term Test.
The system starts the test and displays the test progress and test result.
NOTE
After the test time lasts for 24 hours (commonly used test time), click Stop Long-term Test and
check the test result.
7. After the progress bar indicates that the test is 100% complete, click Export Report.
Data Service Performance Test Report is displayed. The report contains information
displayed in the U2000 window.
NOTE
Tests may have an error rate in the results. When the number of received packets is different from
the number of transmitted packets and the error rate is within one millionth, you can conclude that
no service packets are lost.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3.5 to Step 3.7 to test the long-term packet loss ratio when Frame
Length(Bytes) is 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280 and 1518.
Step 5 After the progress bar indicates that the test is 100% complete, set Source Status and Sink
Status to Disabled for the related ports (port 1 of NE A and port 2 of NE B in this example).
----End
11.10 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.
Availability
l OptiX OSN support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 6800 support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 3800 support Orderwire of OTN System.
11.10.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.
Prerequisite
l The optical supervisory channel boards must be created.
l For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel
boards on the main subrack supports the orderwire function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000 or Web LCT
The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Query the configurations of the orderwire board.
1
3
2
4
2. Set the orderwire board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1
3
4
5
6
2 8
7
NOTE
6
: Based on the network design, check whether Settings for the Second Orderwire
Phone needs to be set.
8
: Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
11.10.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1. Configure the orderwire.
1
3
4 7
NOTE
5
: Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire
communication. When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds.
Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.
6
:
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum
length is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet,
the number length must be the same.
l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
11.10.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows
concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls
for NEs.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure the conference calls.
1 3
5 6
4 7
2
NOTE
5
: In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to
configure a conference call. If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler
tone is generated. Hence, "releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the
conference call in a certain node.
2. Start the conference calls.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1
3
6 7
4 8
NOTE
5
: The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same
length as the orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the
conference call number is recommended to be 9999.
11.10.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls
are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the
conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l Conference calls must be configured.

U2000 or Web LCT
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number.
For example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet
conference call number of the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE
can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Set the Subnet No. Length.
1
3
4 6
2
NOTE
5
: When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical
Interface is in the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the
Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.
2. Divide the orderwire subnets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1
3
2
6
5
NOTE
4
: The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire
subnet.
6
: Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The
parameter values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.
11.11 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System

This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the
U2000.
Availability
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OCS System.

l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OCS System.
11.11.1 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l TNL1STI board has been configured.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the General tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.
Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.
When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9
seconds.
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is
eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length
must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 11.11.3 Dividing Orderwire
Subnets.
l The orderwire phone numbers and conference phone numbers must be different, while length of
orderwire phones number and that of conference phone numbers must be the same.
l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire.
l If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the
same. If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must
be the same.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query to confirm that the parameter values are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
11.11.2 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows
concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls
for NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.
Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a
conference call, and click .
NOTE
If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing
loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the
orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is
recommended to be 9999.
Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
----End
11.11.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the
conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l Conference calls must be configured.

Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number.
For example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet
conference call number of the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE
can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Optical Interface Subnet No. is in the range of 0
to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Optical Interface Subnet No. is in the
range of 0 and 10 to 99.
Step 3 Click the Optical Interface Subnet No. tab.
NOTE
When setting Optical Interface Subnet No., ensure that the generated subnet conference phone number must
be different from the network-wide conference phone number.
Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE.
Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and
enter a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter
values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
11.12 Testing Orderwire Functions

Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.
Prerequisites
l The orderwire is connected to the EOW port of the SC1/SC2/HSC1/TNL1STI
l Orderwire on each NE must be configured.
l The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly at related stations.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Testing the addressing call.
1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the called station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without
noise.
4. See the previous steps to test addressing calls at other stations.
Step 2 Testing the subnet conference call.
1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the subnet conference call number.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the other station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without
noise.
4. See the previous steps to test subnet conference calls at other stations.
NOTE
l The subnet conference call covers only the optical ports that have the same subnet No. on the network.
The subnet No. for the optical port can be set on the U2000. The subnet conference call number consists
of the subnet No., which replaces the first one or two digits of the network-wide call number. For
example, if the subnet No. is 1, the subnet conference call number is 199.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer
12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal

Analyzer
About This Chapter
The network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You can
perform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments.
There must be no bit error for 24 consecutive hours.
This section uses Project G as an example to illustrate the test for network-wide bit errors. For
the network diagram for Project G, see Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Network diagram for Project G
A B C D E
: OTM : OLA : OADM
Each of the stations A, C and E have four OTU boards.
NOTICE
Before the test, make sure that the input and output optical power for each board is in the
optimal range, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance event.
12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors

To ensure that the network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a bit error test
for each channel in advance.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on
a transmission link are normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors

To ensure that the network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a bit error test
for each channel in advance.
Prerequisites
There must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Set-up Diagram
For the bit error test for one channel, see Figure 12-2, Figure 12-3, and Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-2 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal
analyzer OTU OTU
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal Tributary Line Line Tributary
analyzer board board board board
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station E
Figure 12-3 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station C
IN Tx Rx
Signal
LSX LSX
analyzer
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
IN Tx Rx
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station C
Figure 12-4 Testing bit errors for one channel from station C to station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal
LSX LSX
analyzer
OUT Rx Tx
Station C Station E
IN Tx Rx
OUT Rx Tx
Station C Station E
Procedure
Step 1 See Figure 12-2, for station A, connect the receive and transmit optical ports of a signal
analyzer to the TX output optical port and RX input optical port with a fixed optical
attenuator in between.
Step 2 At station E, connect the TX output optical port to the RX input optical port with a fixed
optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 15-minute or 24-hour bit error test for the service
channel.
Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 15-minute or 24-hour bit error test again
until there is no bit error.
Step 5 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-3 to perform 15-minute or 24-hour bit error tests to all
the channels between station A and station C.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-4 to perform 15-minute or 24-hour bit error tests to all
the channels between station C and station E.
----End
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on
a transmission link are normal.
Prerequisites
No abnormal alarm or performance event exists on the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Fiber Connection
At the local end, connect the output port on the signal analyzer to the RX port on the first
OTU or tributary board. After the signals are looped back from the remote end, the signals are
output from the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board. This establishes the connection
of a single channel. Connect the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board to the RX port on
the second OTU or tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Then connect
the second OTU or tributary board to the third OTU or tributary board in the same way until
OTU or tributary board (N-1) is connected to OTU or tributary board N. Finally, connect the
TX port on the OTU or tributary board N to the IN port on the signal analyzer.
Precautions
NOTICE
l The number of cascaded OTUs or tributary boards should be less than or equal to 13.
l There are five types of LC connector-shaped fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10 dB, 7dB,
5 dB and 2 dB. According to the requirements for the optical power, use the correct fixed
optical attenuators when you perform the network commissioning.
Set-up Diagram
This section uses Project G as an example to describe how to test bit errors on all channels in
cascading order. Figure 12-5 shows the testing diagram. The testing diagram does not show
the OLA and repeater stations because no signal is inserted into or extracted from an OLA
station or a repeater station.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 12-5 Fiber connections for the all-channel bit error test
OUT Rx Station A Station E

OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Signal
analyzer OTU OTU
OTU OTU
IN Tx
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Station C
Station A Station E
OUT Rx Tx
T L L T
Signal T L L T
analyzer
T L L T
T L L T
IN Tx Rx
L L L L
T T T T
Rx Tx
Station C

T: Tributary board
L: Line board
Procedure
Step 1 Use Figure 12-5 to connect the fibers according to the information inFiber Connection.
Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour or 15-minute bit error test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour or 15-minute test again until there
is no bit error.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
13 Checklist for Commissioning During

Deployment
Correct setting and commissioning of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring
normal network operation.
Check the configurations of NEs and boards according toTable 13-1 and rectify inappropriate
configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings.
Table 13-1 Checklist for commissioning during deployment

N Item Related Operation
o.
1 Communication between NEs on the network is Creating NEs in Batches

normal and login to an NE is successful. Creating Optical NEs.
Uploading the NE Data
2 NE ID and IP are changed properly according to Setting NE ID and IP

the customer planning requirements.
3 All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and Synchronizing the NE Time
NE performance monitoring can be enabled with the U2000/Web LCT
normally. Server Manually
Setting Performance
Monitoring Parameters of an
NE
4 When the network uses the HWECC Setting Manually Extended

communication protocol, a proper extended ECC ECC Communication
communication mode is selected when the number
of NEs that adopt the extended ECC
communication exceeds eight.
When the network uses IP over DCC Configuring IP over DCC

communication protocol, the IP over DCC protocol
is configured properly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
N Item Related Operation

o.
When the network uses OSI over DCC Configuring OSI over DCC
communication protocol, the OSI over DCC
protocol is configured properly.
5 NE license are configured correctly. Setting license
6 Attributes of every WDM optical port on a board Configuring Boards

are set properly.
7 Logical fiber connections are created on the entire Creating Fiber Connections in
network and they are consistent with actual fiber Graphic Mode
connections.
8 OCh trails are complete and no discrete service Creating OCh Trails by Trail
exists. Search
9 Optical cross-connections at an ROADM station Creating Single-Station

are complete. Optical Cross-Connection
10 Acceptance items such as bit errors and OSNR Testing Bit Errors
satisfy the requirements and optical power on the
entire network is commissioned correctly.
11 Various services are configured correctly. Configuring Services
12 Protection schemes and system features are Configuring System Features

configured correctly. Testing Protection Switching
Testing Data Features
Testing System Features
Testing Ethernet Service
Channels
NOTE
In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the
configurations of an NE after configuring the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC

Board
You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board
of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power
failure. When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE
data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted
after a power failure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH
and issues the configuration to the boards.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
By default, the NMS automatically backs up the NE database into the flash memory every 30 minutes.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
2. Back up the NE database to the SCC board.

2
4
1

1. Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click BackUp NE Database > BackUp to SCC.
NOTE
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in the
process of backup.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
(Optional) Related Backing Up and Restoring This section describes

Operation the NE Data several NE data backup and
restoration methods. You
can select the method as
required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 15 Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical
Commissioning Guide Doctor
15 Configuring the O&M Function Based

on Optical Doctor
About This Chapter
By configuring the Optical Doctor (OD) system in centralized mode, users can visually query
the alarm and performance data on abnormal trails and optimize links in a timely manner.
During deployment of a new network, we only describe how to configure the Optical Doctor
(OD) system. For the details about the principles, O&M function application, and other
feature descriptions of OD system, see "Introduction to the Optical Doctor System" in the
Feature Description.
15.1 Setting Basic Parameters
15.2 Setting the State of OCh Trails
On the U2000, an OCh trail can be in the Unset, Commission, or Maintenance state. The
OD only monitors the trails in the Maintenance state. For trails that are successfully
commissioned during manual deployment or expansion commissioning, manually set the
Maintenance Status of the OCh trails to Maintenance.
15.3 Configuring the OD Monitoring Function
By setting monitoring parameters in a centralized way, you can enable the Optical Doctor
(OD) system to monitor the main optical path, flatness, and OTU input optical power in real
time, report errors, monitor network changes, and apply configuration parameters to new
network nodes.

15.1 Setting Basic Parameters

15.1.1 Synchronizing Data on the U2000
After the WDM commissioning component is installed or re-deployed, you must synchronize
data on the entire network. After NE data is uploaded, NE data is synchronized with the
U2000 data, or U2000 data is initialized, you must synchronize the U2000 data on the entire
network or the corresponding subnets before the commissioning.After modifying the NE ID
on the U2000, you must synchronize U2000 data, restart the process, and synchronize U2000
data again.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Maintainer Group" authority or higher.
If operations such as the adding, deletion, or modification on subnets, sites, NEs, boards, and
fibers are performed during data synchronization, data synchronization will fail.
Procedure
the main menu.
Step 2 Click the Synchronize Data on the U2000 tab.
Step 3 Choose the subnet to be synchronized from the Root navigation tree and click Start. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When the installed WDM commissioning component is used to synchronize data for the first time, you
must select Root to perform network-wide synchronization. In other scenarios, you can select a subnet
to synchronize the subnet data.

Step 4 Click Yes. Data synchronization starts.

NOTE
If data share conflicts during data synchronization on the U2000, maybe another user is deleting, uploading,
copying or checking data consistency on the NE. When this occurs, perform data synchronization again after
another user completes the operations on the NE. During synchronization, do not perform other
commissioning operations on the NE.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization.
NOTE
After the synchronization is completed, the refresh icon turns red. Click to refresh the root navigation
tree.
----End
15.1.2 Setting OA Board Parameters

This topic describes how to set OA board parameters. This operation must be completed
before the optical power commissioning of a WDM trail. In this operation, set System
Wavelengths, Rate, Code Type, and Launch Power, that determines the typical
commissioning value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM trail.
Ensure that all the preceding parameters are correctly set. If any parameter is not set, the
commissioning will fail. If any parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will
be incorrect.
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.
Configuration Guidelines
l Set System Wavelengths based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by
the system. If System Wavelengths is not set, the optical power target value cannot be
calculated. If the parameter is incorrectly set, the optical power adjustment will be
incorrect.
You can set the value of System Wavelengths based on the frequency allocation table in
the marketing telecom design documents or based on the actual product configurations.
For example:
– If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System
– If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System
the same OA, set the Rate and Code Type of the OA based on 100 Gbit/s signals.
l The value of Launch Power queried on the Board Parameter Settings tab is the launch
power set on the U2000. If the value of Launch Power is displayed as /, the NMS data
may not be synchronized or this parameter is not set for the board on the U2000. In this
scenario, you are advised to perform the following operations:

board on the Board Parameter Settings tab.
NOTE
To use the OD function, ensure that the Launch Power and System Wavelengths parameters are set on
the Board Parameter Settings tab.
During launch power commissioning:
l In general, System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type need to be set by subnet only on the
Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. When NEs on different subnets are interconnected and
the values of System Wavelengths, Rate, and Code Type for the subnets are inconsistent, the
three parameters need to be set on the Board Parameter Settings tab for boards on the NE of a
subnet so that the parameter values are consistent with the parameter values on the interconnected
subnet.
l The Launch Power value set for the board will be preferentially used. If Launch Power is not
set for the board, ensure that other OA parameters including System Wavelengths, Rate, Code
Type, and Fiber Type are correct. If other parameters are properly set, the system can
automatically calculate the launch power based on the settings of other OA parameters to ensure
accurate launch power commissioning.
Procedure
the main menu.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Commissioning Parameter Settings tab. Set System Wavelengths,
Rate, and Code Type for each subnet. This step is not required when the OD function is used
because the settings are invalid for the OD system.
Step 3 Click the Board Parameter Settings tab. Set Launch Power, System Wavelengths, Rate,
and Code Type for boards.
1. Set filter criteria. Click OK to filter the boards for which parameters need to be set.
NOTE
value.


end.
NOTE
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
practical networking scenario. For details, see 5.5.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.
15.1.3 Calibrating ASE

Amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) must be calibrated for the RAU1/RAU2 board to
ensure that the line loss Compensation optimization function is available and can accurately
adjust amplifier gains on a long span. If the ASE is not calibrated, the Raman laser on the
RAU board will not properly work and the commissioning will fail.
Prerequisites
l Logical fiber connections between the RAU1/RAU2 and TN14FIU/TN16FIU boards
have been established.

U2000
Precautions
NOTICE
l The LINE port of the Raman board produces extremely high output optical power. During
operations, avoid exposure to laser radiation to prevent bodily injuries, especially to the
eyes. In addition, take measures to prevent the fiber connector that connects to the LINE
port from being burned out due to high power. A burned out fiber connector may cause
fire.
l Calibrating ASE causes service interruption. Therefore, it is recommended that ASE be
calibrated at the deployment stage.

ASE Calibration Conditions

Table 15-1 describes the conditions for calibrating ASE according to the upstream OA board
type, fiber type, and line loss.
Table 15-1 ASE calibration conditions for RAU1/RAU2

Upstream Fiber Type Line Loss La
OA Board
of the ASE ASE ASE
RAU1/ Calibration Calibration Calibration
RAU2 Not Required Required Required
Board (Independent (Related to
of the the
Wavelength Wavelength
Count) Count)b
OAU101 G.653, LEAF, L <= 35 35 < L <= 43 L > L0, L0 = 43

TWRS, TWC,
TWPLUS, SMFLS,
G.656,
TERA_LIGHT
G.652, G.654A L <= 33 33 < L <= 41 L > L0, L0 = 41
G.654B L <= 29 29 < L <= 37 L > L0, L0 = 37
OAU105 G.653, LEAF, L <= 38 38 < L <= 46 L > L0, L0 = 46

TWRS, TWC,
TWPLUS, SMFLS,
G.656,
TERA_LIGHT
G.652, G.654A L <= 36 36 < L <= 44 L > L0, L0 = 44
G.654B L <= 32 32 < L <= 40 L > L0, L0 = 40
HBA All types NOTICE 39 < L <= 47 L > L0, L0 = 47

When L < 39,
the downstream
OA board
cannot
accurately
adjust the
amplifier gains.
a: L represents the line loss. It includes the FIU board insertion loss and the VOA
attenuation on the line. It is the designed end of life (EOL) insertion loss.
b: The minimum number of wavelengths is N = 10c, where c = (L - L0)/10. When the
number of wavelengths is less than N, the downstream OA board cannot accurately
perform gain adjustments even though the ASE is calibrated.
Configuration Process
Figure 15-1 shows the ASE calibration flow.

Figure 15-1 ASE calibration flow
Start
Create logical
fiber
Prerequisites
Create IPA
pairs
Turn off the Set the working Turn on the Specify the
Disable transmit laser on mode for the LINE port laser Fiber Type used
IPA the upstream RAU1/RAU2 on the RAU1/ by the RAU1/
OA board board RAU2 board RAU2 board
Turn on the Turn off the

transmit laser on LINE port laser Calibrate
Enable IPA
the upstream on the RAU1/ ASE
OA board RAU2 board
End
Procedure
Step 1 Disable the IPA function.
1. Start the NE Explorer of the associated NE. In the navigation tree, select the NE and
choose Configuration > IPA Management.
2. Select the associated IPA pair and set IPA Status to Disabled.
3. Click Apply. In the Warning dialog box, click Yes. Then in the Result dialog box, click
Close.
Step 2 Turn off the transmit laser on the upstream OA board.
1. Start the NE Explorer of the associated NE. In the navigation tree, select the upstream
OA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click the By Function option button and select Laser Status from the drop-down list
under the option button. Set Laser Status to Off for the required port on the OA board.
3. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 3 Set Working Mode to Gain locking for the LINE port on the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.
1. Start the NE Explorer of the associated NE. In the navigation tree, select the RAU1/
RAU2/SRAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface. Click the By
Function option button and select Working Mode in the drop-down list under the

option button. Then set Working Mode to Gain locking for the LINE port on the
RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.
Step 4 Turn on the LINE port laser on the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.

1. Start the NE Explorer of the associated NE. In the navigation tree, select the RAU1/
RAU2/SRAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click the By Function option button and select Laser Status from the drop-down list
under the option button. Set Laser Status to On for the LINE port.
Step 5 Specify the fiber type used by the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board. Ensure that the specified fiber
type is the same as the actual fiber type.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface. Click the By Function option button and select Fiber Type from the
drop-down list under the option button. Then set Fiber Type based on the actual fiber
type.
Step 6 Calibrate the ASE value of the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select ASE Calibration from the drop-down list under the By
Function option button. Then click the LINE port on the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.
2. Click Calibrate. Three dialog boxes are sequentially displayed. The first dialog box
indicates that ASE calibration will cause service interruption. The second dialog box
asks you to confirm that all required operations have been completed. The third dialog
box is used to confirm the operation. In these dialog boxes, click OK.

3. In the Operation Result dialog box, confirm that the ASE calibration is successful and
click OK to complete calibrating the ASE value of the RAU1/RAU2/SRAU board.
Step 7 Once the ASE calibration is completed, turn off the LINE port laser on the RAU1/RAU2
board. For the detailed procedure, see Step 4, but set Laser Status to Off.
Step 8 Turn on the transmit laser on the upstream OA board. For the detailed procedure, see Step 2,
but set Laser Status to On.
Step 9 Enable the IPA function. For the detailed procedure, see Step 1, but set IPA Status to
Enabled.
----End
Result
If the Operation Result dialog box displayed in Step 6 shows that ASE calibration failed,
handle the failure according to the possible causes given in Table 15-2.
Table 15-2 Possible causes for an ASE calibration failure

Possible Cause Solution
The logical fiber connections between the Ensure that the logical fiber connections
RAU1/RAU2 and TN14FIU/TN16FIU agree with the physical fiber connections.
boards do not agree with the physical fiber
connections.
The transmit laser on the upstream OA Go to Step 2 to turn off the transmit laser on
board is not turned off before the ASE is the upstream OA board.
calibrated.
Working Mode is not set to Gain locking Go to Step 3 to correct the setting.
for the LINE port on the RAU1/RAU2
board.
The LINE port laser on the RAU1/RAU2 Go to Step 4 to correct the setting.
board is not turned on.
The fiber type specified for the RAU1/ Go to Step 5 to correct the setting.
RAU2 board does not agree with the
physical fiber type.
The inter-NE fiber has poor quality or the Clean the fiber endface or replace the fiber
fiber endface has been contaminated. If this to clear the OA_LOW_GAIN alarm.
is the case, an OA_LOW_GAIN alarm
should be reported for the LINE port when
the port works in gain locking mode.
Follow-up Procedure
l Repeat Step 5 to check whether the fiber type specified for the RAU1/RAU2 board
agrees with the physical fiber type. Note that ASE calibration can be successful but the

main channel monitoring function cannot accurately adjust the gain when specified fiber
type disagrees with the logical fiber type. If the specified fiber type disagrees with the
physical fiber type, correct the setting and calibrate the ASE again.
l If the RAU1/RAU2 board is replaced or the LINE port fiber type is changed after a
successful ASE calibration, an ASE_NOT_CALIBRATE will be reported. In this
situation, calibrate the ASE again.
15.2 Setting the State of OCh Trails

On the U2000, an OCh trail can be in the Unset, Commission, or Maintenance state. The
OD only monitors the trails in the Maintenance state. For trails that are successfully
commissioned during manual deployment or expansion commissioning, manually set the
Maintenance Status of the OCh trails to Maintenance.
For the meanings of the OCh trail status information, see 5.6.18 Meanings of
Commissioning Trail Status Parameters.
To enable the new OCh trails to be monitored immediately, click Apply Incrementally or
Apply in the Network Parameters Setting window of OD to manually enable the OD
function for the OCh trails. If you do not manually enable the OD function for the OCh trails,
the OD will monitor the new OCh trails only based on the specified automatic network
change monitoring interval.
Method 1: Setting the State of OCh Trails in the Optical Doctor Window
1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Optical
Management > Optical Doctor. The Optical Doctor window is displayed.
2. On the OD View or Alarm Info tab, right-click an OCh trail in Trail Info, choose Set
Trail Maintenance Status from the shortcut menu, and then choose the desired trail
state.
Method 2: Setting the State of OCh Trails in the Manage WDM Trail Window
1. Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the Main Menu.
2. In the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, select OCh in the Service
Level.
3. Click Filter All, and all OCh trails on the live network are displayed.
4. Select and right-click a desired OCh trail. Choose Details from the shortcut menu.
5. Set Optical Commission Status in the dialog box that is displayed.

15.3 Configuring the OD Monitoring Function

By setting monitoring parameters in a centralized way, you can enable the Optical Doctor
(OD) system to monitor the main optical path, flatness, and OTU input optical power in real
time, report errors, monitor network changes, and apply configuration parameters to new
network nodes.
Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.
l The deployment or expansion commissioning has been completed and the network is in
the maintenance state.
l OD only monitors the OCh trails in the Maintenance state. For details about how to set
the status of an OCh trail, see 15.2 Setting the State of OCh Trails.
l Ensure that the basic parameters have been set. For details, refer to OD System
Configuration and Usage Wizard.
l If the automatic level control (ALC) function is configured on a network, the main
optical path monitoring function of the OD cannot be started, and an
OMS_LOSS_MON_FAIL alarm will be reported (only on the working trail when
protection is configured). The OD-provided power maintenance function is more
advanced and delivers better usability than the ALC function. Before enabling the OD
function, you are advised to delete the ALC function from a subnet. For details about the
method of deleting the ALC function, see Deleting an ALC Link.
l During the flatness adjustment, the OD will disable the automatic power equilibrium
(APE) function. The flatness adjustment results provided by the OD may be inconsistent
with the results of flatness adjustment using the APE function. The OD-provided power
maintenance function is more advanced and delivers better usability than the APE
function. Before enabling the OD function, you are advised to delete the APE function
from a subnet. For details about the method of deleting the APE function, see Deleting
an APE Pair.

l The optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) is calculated by the OD system based on the
OA theories and the receive-end and transmit-end optical power reported by the MCA
boards in the optical transmission system. This OSNR calculation method can replace
the OSNR measurement method using a meter and does not affect services on the live
network. In addition, the OSNR obtained using this calculation method is precise and is
independent of the signal rate, modulation format, and channel spacing. It can reflect the
optical quality of the signals and provides references for checking the system
communications quality.
l When a network is managed by multiple U2000 servers, the OD function can be enabled
on at most one U2000; otherwise, abnormalities may occur. For example, the reported
alarms will be inconsistent, or an optimization commissioning conflict will occur.
l On all subnets of the entire network, only one configuration policy is supported.
l Assume that subnet A is composed of subnet A1 and A2. If both subnet A1 and A2 are
on an OMS, for ensuring the integrity of the saved historical data and generated report,
and entirely monitoring of the OMS, you must select subnet A when setting the OD
monitoring configuration. That is, subnet A1 and A2 must be concurrently selected.
l The latest 15-minute historical performance data on the U2000 is backed up using the
function of manual and automatic backup of the OD system. The backup and
commissioning can be concurrently performed.
l Because the OD periodically and automatically monitors network changes, when the
network topology changes, you can manually click Apply Incrementally to apply the
configured parameters.
l After the NE version is upgraded to V100R008C00 or later, you must click Apply in the
Network-Wide Parameters window to deliver the configuration of the OD monitoring
function again.
Setting Monitoring Parameters

1. From the main menu of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Optical
Management > Optical Doctor. The Optical Doctor window is displayed.
2. Click Parameter Configuration. In the Network Parameter Configuration dialog box

that is displayed, select the desired subnet.

NOTE
Subnet A containing A1, A2, and A3 is used as an example. Subnet A is automatically monitored only
when A1, A2, and A3 are selected.
If subnet A contains NEs B1 and B2 in addition to subnet A1, A2, and A3, you are advised to create
subnet A4, classify NEs B1 and B2 into subnet A4, and then select the desired subnet for monitoring. If
subnet A4 is not created, NEs B1 and B2 will be automatically monitored and the monitoring cannot be
canceled after subnets A1, A2, and A3 are selected for monitoring.
If subnet A has a new subnet A4, A4 is monitored only when subnet A is monitored. The monitoring
policy of A4 is the same as that of subnet A.
Only one monitoring policy is allowed on a network.
3. Set the adjustment mode and monitoring parameters, such as the main optical power,
flatness, and OTU input optical power, based on the network plan. For the parameter
setting rules, see Table 15-3.

Table 15-3 Parameter Description

Range
Main Main Enable, When Main Channel Monitoring is set to

Optica Optical Path Disable Enable, the OD will monitor the transmit-
l Path Monitoring Default: end OA optical power, fiber loss
Enable compensation, and fiber loss (determing
whether it exceeds the EOL value) on each
OMS whose source and sink are on the
monitoring subnet.
NOTE
The design fiber loss EOL value must be set to
determine whether the fiber loss exceeds the
design EOL value. For the configuration method,
see Configuring the Long Fiber Designed
Attenuation (EOL).
Transmit- 1.0-3.0 Indicates the threshold for the difference

End OA Default: 1.5 between the current output optical power of
Power the transmit-end OA board in an OMS
Threshold(d section and the target value. An
B) OA_OUT_PWR_ABN alarm is reported
when the difference exceeds the threshold.
For example, if the threshold is 1.5 dB, an
OA_OUT_PWR_ABN alarm will be
reported if the difference between the
current output optical power of the transmit-
end OA board and the target value is greater
than or equal to 1.5 dB.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Main
Channel Monitoring is set to Enable.


Range
Line 1.0-3.0 Indicates the threshold for the difference

Attenuation Default: 2.0 between the loss of optical transmission
Compensati section (OTS) and OA gain. An alarm is
on reported when the difference exceeds the
Threshold(d threshold.
B) l A SPAN_LOSS_UPPER_GAIN alarm is
reported when the OTS loss is greater
than the OA gain and the difference
between the OTS loss and OA gain
exceeds the threshold.
l A SPAN_LOSS_LOWER_GAIN alarm
is reported when the OTS loss is lower
than the OA gain and the difference
between the OTS loss and OA gain
exceeds the threshold.
l An OMS_LOSS_ACCUM_ABN alarm
is reported when the accumulated
difference between the OTS loss and OA
gain exceeds the threshold.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when Main
Channel Monitoring is set to Enable.
NOTE
OTS loss = Output optical power of the upstream
OA board - Input optical power of the
downstream OA board. An OTS loss can be
caused by many factors such as the fiber loss,
EVOA attenuation, and insertion loss of fiber
connectors or boards.
NOTE
For the SPAN_LOSS_UPPER_GAIN or
SPAN_LOSS_LOWER_GAIN alarm:
l In the Alarm Info window, the alarm is
cleared if the offset between the span loss
and the gain compensation value is within
half of the alarm threshold. For example, if
the alarm threshold is 2, the alarm is cleared
when the offset between the span loss and
gain compensation value is -1 to 1.
l In the Trail Performance Analysis window,
the alarm is cleared if the offset between the
span loss and the gain compensation value is
within the alarm threshold.
Optica Flatness Enable, When Flatness Monitoring is set to

l Monitoring Disable Enable, the OD will monitor the optical
Power Default: power flatness of each OMS whose source
Flatnes Enable and sink are on the monitoring subnet.
s


Range
Flatness 1.0 to 3.0 When multiple wavelengths are present in

Monitoring Default value: an OMS section, the difference between the
Threshold 3.0 optical power of each OCh wavelength and
(dB) the average optical power cannot exceed the
optical power flatness threshold.
This parameter must be set when Flatness
Monitoring is set to Enable.
OTU OTU Input Enable, When OTU Input Optical Power

Optical Disable Monitoring is set to Enable, the OD will
Power Default: check the input optical power of the OTU
Monitoring Enable board at the sink of the OCh trail whose
source and sink are on the monitoring
subnet.


Range
Optimi Optimizatio The value can l Auto

zation n Mode be Auto, This mode can be used only after an OD
Mode Main Optical optimization license is obtained. When
Path SPAN_LOSS_UPPER_GAIN,
Optimization SPAN_LOSS_LOWER_GAIN,
, or Manual. OMS_LOSS_ACCUM_ABR,
Default: OA_OUT_PWR_ABR,
Manual PWR_UNBALANCED,
IN_PWR_HIGH, or IN_PWR_LOW
occurs, the OD automatically starts
optimization commissioning for the
associated OCh trail that is in the
Maintenance state and is the longest
one among the trails behind the alarm
generation point.
l Main Optical Path Optimization
In this mode, the OD automatically
optimizes only the main optical path of
the OMS where
OMS_LOSS_ACCUM_ABN,
SPAN_LOSS_UPPER_GAIN or
SPAN_LOSS_LOWER_GAIN occurs.
l Manual
When SPAN_LOSS_UPPER_GAIN,
SPAN_LOSS_LOWER_GAIN,
OMS_LOSS_ACCUM_ABR,
OA_OUT_PWR_ABR,
PWR_UNBALANCED,
IN_PWR_HIGH, or IN_PWR_LOW
occurs, you have to manually starts
optimization commissioning for the
associated OCh trail that is in the
Maintenance state and is the longest
one among the trails behind the alarm
generation point.
– If no OD optimization license is
obtained, when you select Manual,
the link optimization commissioning
function of the OD cannot be used,
and you have to perform optimization
commissioning manually.
– If an OD optimization license has
been obtained, you can select the
Manual mode to manually perform
optimization commissioning or
perform flatness optimization
commissioning using the link


Range
optimization commissioning function

of the OD. For details, see Link
Optimization Commissioning.
NOTE
To enable the OD function, ensure that launch
power must be configured. For details about the
method of configuring the launch power, see
Setting OA board parameters.
4. Optional: Click Advanced Options. In the dialog box that is displayed, set parameters
in the Trail Parameters area, and click Save. For details about the parameter setting
rules, see Table 15-4.
NOTE
If OD routes are not configured and OSNR detection is not enabled, Single-Wavelength OSNR and
Commissioning Reference Value will not be present in the Trail Performance Analysis window, trail
performance report, networkwide preventive maintenance report, or commissioning report.


OD Route Selected, This check box must be selected.

Configuration Deselected When this check box is selected, the OD will
Default: enable one-click configuration for OSNR
Selected detection for all OMS sections that are not
configured with OSNR detection and both the
source and sink are on the monitored subnet.
The following functions are available only after
OD Route Configuration is selected:
l Viewing the OSNR of an OMS
l Enabling OSNR equilibrium commissioning
l Viewing single-wavelength optical power of
the OA board not equipped with MCA/OPM8
during expansion commissioning or
optimization commissioning
NOTE
OSNR detection can be enabled for all trails in each
OMS one by one. For details about the method, see
4.19 (Optional) Configuring OD Route for a Trail.
Enable OSNR Selected, You are advised to select the check box.
Deselected After this check box is selected, OSNR detection
Default: and output are enabled, and OSNR Status is set
Selected to Enable for all OCh trails on the monitored
subnet. In this scenario, each unidirectional OCh
trail will consume an OD wavelength monitoring
and management license.
The OSNR of the trail whose OSNR Status is
Enable can be viewed only after the Enable
OSNR check box is selected.
NOTE
OSNR detection can be enabled for all trails one by
one. For details about the method, see (Optional)
Configuring OSNR Detection for a Trail.

Enable OD Selected, You are advised to select the check box. If

Optimization Deselected Enable OD Optimization is selected, Enable
Default: OSNR must also be selected.
Selected After this check box is selected, OD optimization
is enabled for all OCh trails on the monitored
subnet, and each unidirectional OCh trail will
consume an OD wavelength optimization license.
After Enable OD Optimization is selected, the
OD can perform optimization commissioning for
the trail whose OD Optimization Status is
Enabled.
NOTE
You can also configure the OD optimization function
for all trails one by one. For details about the method,
see (Optional) Configuring the OD Optimization
Function for a Trail.
5. Click Apply Incrementally or Apply.

NOTE
l Apply Incrementally: If you click Apply Incrementally, monitoring parameters are applied only
to unconfigured network nodes.
l Apply: If you click Apply, monitoring parameters are applied to all selected network nodes, which
is time-consuming.
If monitoring parameters are modified, you must click Apply to apply the new monitoring policy to all
selected network nodes.
NOTE
To isolate network faults in case of abnormal network operating, select the NE in NE Explorer and
choose OD Parameter Management in the navigation tree to cancel OD monitoring on nodes of the
NE. Exercise caution when canceling OD monitoring on nodes because the OD monitoring cannot be
automatically restored after it is canceled.
Setting Parameters in the Network Change Auto Monitoring Area

1. In the Network Parameter Configuration window, click Advanced Options. In the
Automatic Network Change Monitoring area in the dialog box that is displayed, select
Automatically Update Monitoring Configurations.
2. Set Update Configuration(Hours).
3. Click Save.


Field Value Range Description
Automat Checked, If network changes occur, such as adding or deleting

ically Unchecked boards, dimensions, or services, the OD will
Update Default: Checked automatically deliver the configured monitoring
Monitori policy to new network nodes at the preset interval.
ng Users do not need to manually set monitoring
Configur parameters.
ations
Detectio 1-24 Indicates the interval for applying the configured

n Default: 3 monitoring policies to new services.
interval
(hours)
Configuring the Data Backup Policies

1. In the Network Parameter Configuration window, click Manage Backup.
2. In the Manage Performance Data Backup dialog box that is displayed, configure the
data backup policies. For details about the parameter setting rules, see Table 15-6.


Domain Value Description
OCh Max. 10-1000 In the Trail Performance Analysis window,

Trail Saved Default: 100 users can select one or more OCh trails for
Backup Backup manual data backup at a time.
Record OCh Trail Backup Folders Saved indicates
s the maximum number of times that data can be
manually backed up in the storage space. When
the number of manual backups exceeds the
value specified by OCh Trail Backup Folders
Saved, the latest backup data will overwrite the
earliest backup data.
NOTICE
The storage space occupied by manually backed-up
data will increase with the value of OCh Trail
Backup Folders Saved.
Backup Enable Checked, When this check box is selected, the OD will
of Schedu Unchecked periodically back up the performance data of
Selecte led Default: OCh trails on the selected subnet.
d Backup Unchecked
Subnet
s Backup 7-365 Indicates the interval for automatic data
Interval Default: 14 backup.
(days)
Start - Indicates the start time for automatic data

Time backup.
Max. 10-100 Indicates the maximum number of times that

Saved Default: 100 data can be periodically backed up and saved in
Schedu the storage space. When the number of periodic
led backups exceeds the value specified by
Backup Scheduled Backup Folders Saved, the latest
Record backup data will overwrite the earliest backup
s data.
NOTICE
The storage space occupied by automatically
backed-up data will increase with the value of
Scheduled Backup Folders Saved.
DST Checked, During the DST, if you select DST, the

Unchecked specified time uses the DST standard.
NOTE
At other time except DST, the option DST is
unavailable.
3. Click Save.
4. Optional: Click Back Up Now. The OD will immediately back up the data of the
selected subnet.

NOTE
For a large-scale subnet, the subnet data backup may time out. If the backup fails, contact Huawei
engineers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 16 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment
Commissioning Guide Problems
16 Analyzing and Handling Common

Deployment Problems
About This Chapter
may happen during the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems
according to actual situations.
16.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent
switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.
16.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports
Use the U2000 to disable the unused auxiliary ports.

16.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent
switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.
Prerequisites

U2000
During the deployment commissioning phase, the commissioning of optical power for an
OTU board or a line board is not complete. When this occurs, the ECC link is unstable and
the OSC and ESC channels may be frequently switched. The symptoms are as follows:
l As shown on the NMS, the NE is occasionally unreachable. A query of the WDM-side
alarms for the corresponding OTU or line boards shows that the power_high or
power_low alarm is reported.
l Switching between different channels on the ECC link frequently occurs.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. On the U2000, check the value of Communication Status. Then determine which port
fails in ESC communication after a check of the value of Port.

NOTE
On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, check whether Communication Status for a channel
whose Channel is GCC0, GCC12_18, GCC12_9, or RES_ODU is displayed as Receiving
Failed. If yes, this Port fails in ESC communication.
2. On the U2000, disable all the failed ESC channels on all the NEs on the network.
1
3
4
2
6
NOTE
5
:
l On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, change the value of Enabled/Disabled for all
channels for the failed Port identified in step 1 to Disabled.
l If Communication Status for all channels on the specified Port is Normal, skip the
preceding sub-step.
3. After the entire system is commissioned and the optical power on the entire line becomes
stable, set the enable status of the ESC channels to Enabled. For details, see step 2.
NOTE
After the enable status of the ESC channels is set to Enabled, the supervisory channel on the ECC route
is automatically switched to the ESC channel.

16.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports

Use the U2000 to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the entire system must be complete.

U2000
The auxiliary ports that are not currently used must be disabled. If they are required in a
subsequent phase, enable these auxiliary ports.
NOTICE
Disabling the unused auxiliary ports may make NEs go offline.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Set the unused serial port to disabled.

3
4
NOTE
3
:
l Deselect the Enable Serial Port Access check box.
l If you select the Enable Serial Port Access check box, Baud Rate must be set. You are
advised to set Baud Rate to 19200.
2. Optional:
Set the unused ETH/NMETH port to Disabled.
1

NOTE
3
: Set Enabled/Disabled of the unused port to Disabled.
3. Optional:
Set the two NMETH ports to disabled.
1
3
4
NOTE
3
: Deselect the Enable Ethernet Access check box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 17 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and
Commissioning Guide Configuration
17 Reference Operations for the

Commissioning and Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You can
perform proper operations according to the network condition.
17.1 Configuring the NE Data
Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.
17.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple
shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the
U2000/Web LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves.
When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be
adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE
in the U2000/Web LCT.
17.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming
This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service
grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.
17.4 Configuring the NE Time
Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for
troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE
time before service configuration.
17.5 Performance Management
To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance
personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance
17.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs
After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following
task sets.
17.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board
based on the following task sets.
17.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration
After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
on the following task sets.
17.9 Creating a Single NE
After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of
whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no
matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to
communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
17.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User
During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create
another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
17.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode
In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in
the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create
a few fiber connections only.
17.12 Configuring the Edge Port
An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
17.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection
The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs grooming at the
optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board
optical cross-connection.
17.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes
Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every
board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port
parameters can be queried.
17.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes
Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every
17.16 Opening/Closing Lasers
This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of
faults and the commissioning.
17.17 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards
If the wavelength received on the IN port of a board is inconsistent with that specified by
Receive Wavelength, services will be unavailable. When this occurs, change the value of
Receive Wavelength to the actual receive wavelength.
17.18 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

17.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is
no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical
interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical
signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser,
extends the service life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from
causing permanent eye damage.
17.20 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board
17.21 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching
You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection
switching of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
17.22 Setting the NULL Mapping Status
Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection.
For the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping
status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be
monitored.
17.23 Configuring Path Binding
By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower
order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.
17.24 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board
The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical
multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and
reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the
function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be
configured on the U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be
normal.
17.25 Setting the FEC Mode
This section describes the basic method for setting the FEC mode to FEC or AFEC and thus
having the board work in the mode.
17.26 Enabling and Disabling LPT
When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the
WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can
be monitored.
17.27 Setting the Speed Level of Fans
This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
17.28 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port
This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel
of alarm signals of an external device.
17.29 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes
must be configured.
17.30 Verifying Ethernet Services
After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is
normal.
17.31 Configuring the PRBS Test
Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence
(PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals,
and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS
signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without
connecting a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
17.32 Managing NE Power Consumption
You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to
ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE
runs in the normal state.
17.33 Measuring Trail Latency
The latency must satisfy high requirements for the transmission system. duration of source-
sink signal transmission can be learned by measuring the trail latency. This helps appraise the
trail transmission performance and determine a less time-consuming trail to meet the short-
latency requirements for a network.
17.34 Enabling the ASON Feature
The NE obtains the ASON feature after this feature is enabled. The ASON feature is disabled
by default during delivery.
17.35 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs
When there are alarm inputs on third-party equipment, the housekeeping alarm input
parameters of the interconnected OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 must be set so that the alarms
on third-party equipment can be managed.
17.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data
To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

17.1 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.
17.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
Prerequisite

U2000
NG WDM equipment does not support NE preconfiguration.

1. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then,
double-click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration
Wizard dialog box is displayed.
2. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,
indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.
3. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration
interrupts the service on the NE.
4. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.
5. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type,
Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf, Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf, NE
Remarks, Shelf Type, and so on.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set based on the current
license requirements. In addition, Service Type must be the actual subrack type; otherwise, the NE
cannot properly function.
6. Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.
7. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.
8. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.
9. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.
10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.
11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

NOTE
Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration
to the NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the
NE starts to work normally.
12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured previously
is located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the board information of
the NE. If the configured board information of the NE is displayed in the right pane, it
indicates that the NE is configured successfully.
17.1.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already
configured and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new
NE.
Prerequisite
l The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type and
software version of the replicated NE.

U2000
Procedure
1. Double-click the unconfigured optical NE on the main topology. Then, double-click the
unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE.
NOTE
After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the U2000 side is changed, but the data on the
equipment side is not changed.

4. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation
results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.
5. Click OK to start the replication. The Result dialog box is displayed after a few seconds.
6. Click Close.
17.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple
shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the
U2000/Web LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves.
When multiple shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be
adopted for centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE
in the U2000/Web LCT.
This section describes how to configure master and slave subracks for new NEs.
17.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration

In the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave shelves are
displayed as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP
address.
Generally, the subrack where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC)
board, and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master subrack.
17.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE

To ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between subracks on
an NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical cascading mode of the
subracks on the U2000.
Prerequisite
Cables for communication between subracks must be installed.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
The cables for communication between subracks are properly installed and no alarm indicating a
cascading fault is reported.

1. Configure the subrack cascading mode of an NE.

2
4
NOTE
3
: Select Tree or Ring based on the actual physical cascading mode of the subracks.
(Optional) Related Testing Inter-Subrack This section describes how

Operation Communication Protection to test inter-subrack
communication protection.
17.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute

You can use the U2000 or Web LCT to change the attribute of the master or slave subrack.
Prerequisite
The master or slave subrack has been created.

U2000/Web LCT

Legend Information

N notes
N N

Figure 17-2 NE for 8800

2. Change a subrack attribute.

2
1

2
1
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set based on the current
license requirements. In addition, Service Type must be the actual subrack type; otherwise, the NE
cannot properly function.
17.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes Physical
Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.
Prerequisite
The master or slave subrack has been created.

U2000 or Web LCT

Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Query the status of a slave subrack.
2 3
NOTE
2
: Click to refresh the state of the Slot Layout. On the Slot Layout, you can query
the status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
3
: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.

1. Click to refresh the state of the Slot Layout. On the Slot Layout, you can query
the status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
2. Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.
17.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack

The slave subrack that does not need to be managed by the U2000 can be deleted.
Prerequisite
All boards that are manually created on the slave subrack are deleted.

U2000 or Web LCT
l Before an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T64 subrack is deleted, other logical boards except
the ATE and FAN boards must be manually deleted.
l Before an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is deleted, other logical boards except the EFI,
PIU, ATE and FAN boards, and the AUX board in slot 21 must be manually deleted.
l Before an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is deleted, other logical boards except the PIU,
AUX, FAN, and EFI boards must be manually deleted.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Delete a slave subrack.

17.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service
grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.
17.3.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The
U2000 and Web LCT are used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of
channels, and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power
equalization can be performed on pass-through and adding wavelengths.
There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation:
l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
l Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of service
development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-
connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamic
operation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the U2000 and Web LCT software adjusts
the status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic
adjustment of wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is
supported.
Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical cross-
connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the optical
layer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services,
users need only to make configuration accordingly on the U2000 and Web LCT.

Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are
listed as follows:
l WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for
multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions.
l WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in
no more than four dimensions.
l ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional
grooming.
NOTE
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming

in two transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple
transmission directions.
For more details of optical grooming, see the Product Description.
17.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before
configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic
configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
Figure 17-8 Wavelength grooming configuration flow
Start
Creating firbers
Creating the
board optical
cross-connections
Creating the
Single-Station optical
cross-connections
End

Task Name Task Description
4.14 Creating Required

Fiber If the single-station cross-connection is configured, you can create the
Connections logic fiber connection between NEs and between boards that are inside
in Graphic the NEs on the U2000. Or create the logic fiber connection between NEs
Mode on the U2000 and the logic fiber connection between boards that are
inside the NEs on the Web LCT.
4.16 Creating The inter-board service route can be established by creating the single-
Single-Station station optical cross-connection.
Optical
Cross-
Connection
NOTE
The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.
17.3.3 Configuring the ROADM

This section uses project R as an example to describe how to configure the reconfigurable
optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) on the U2000 and Web LCT when the WSS board is
used.
Networking Diagram
Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical
layer.
Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and
G. All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 17-9 shows the networking diagram of
Project R.

Figure 17-9 Networking diagram of Project R

C
D B
E G
: OADM
In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 17-10. There are
two services between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and
station D, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one
service respectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.
Figure 17-10 Service allocation of Project R
C
E W
D B
A E
W
S N
E G

Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board
configuration of the project.
Service Signal Flow

Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the
optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at
station A is shown in Figure 17-11. The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure
17-12.
Figure 17-11 Services at station A of Project R
W DM1 DM1 E
IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 ROA
AM1
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8
S DM1 DM1 N
IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7

WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8

Figure 17-12 Services at station C of Project R
W
OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40
E OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40

Figure 17-13 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.
Figure 17-13 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R
No./Wavelength(nm) B C D No./Wavelength(nm) A B
/Frequency(THz) E W E W /Frequency(THz)
E W
8/1531.90/195.70 18/1535.82
/195.20
10/1532.68/195.60
12/1533.47/195.50
No./Wavelength(nm) D A F
No./Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz) E W N W
D A E
/Frequency(THz) E W S W
12/1533.47
/195.50
10/1532.68/195.60

Configuration Process
This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the
configuration of other stations, see the description for station C.
Prerequisite
The related boards are configured.


Step 1 Station A configuration process
1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select the
corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click Create. The Create Optical
Cross-Connection window is displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source
Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from
the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source
port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink
Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the
pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from
station D to station F.

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-
Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection
is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at
station A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.

7. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at station A for the
service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.
8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

9. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box
displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the
Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-
connection, the physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are
displayed in the Detailed Physical Route window.

Step 2 Station C configuration process

1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click New. The Create Optical Cross-
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source
Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from
the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source
port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink
Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the
pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station
B to station D.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection
is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for
the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.

7. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at station C for the
service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.
8. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box
displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the
Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-
connection, the physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are
displayed in the Detailed Physical Route window.
----End

Enabling the Port Blocking Function

After the port blocking function is enabled, the VOA is set to the default value (greater than
45 dB) and the port is blocked when no OCh trail is found at the optical port that services
traverse.
Prerequisite
l The TN11RMU9 board must be installed.
After the port blocking function is disabled, the attenuation remains the same.
When the port blocking function is enabled:
l If no optical cross-connection in automatic mode is configured at the port, the port is in

blocking state. In this case, the blocking function can be disabled after the attenuation is
adjusted manually.
l If optical cross-connections in automatic mode are configured at the port, the OPA
function automatically computes the attenuation according to the first optical cross-
connection that traverse the port. Then, the blocking function is disabled at the port.
l After all optical cross-connections at the port are deleted, the port is in blocking state.
When the port blocking function is disabled:
l The port is enabled with the port blocking function by default after being powered on.
However, the port blocking function is disabled after attenuation is set.
l Attenuation at the port remains the same after optical cross-connections are configured.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Enable the Port Blocking function.

3
4
5
1
6
NOTE
6
: Select the optical port to be blocked, double-click the Block Port field, and
selectEnabled from the drop-down list.
17.4 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for
troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE
time before service configuration.
17.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT

and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and
the U2000/Web LCT server time. In this way, the U2000/Web LCT is able to record the
correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are
reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms
and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time
with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in
fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is
recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides two
time synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server and synchronizing with
the standard NTP server.
NOTE
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000
server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000

server time manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time
of the workstation or computer where the U2000 server resides. This scheme features
easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to
time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the standard NTP server, all NEs and the
U2000 are synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server
can be the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable in networks
that require a high accuracy with regard to time.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the Web LCT, the time at which such alarms
and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time
with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the Web LCT. This may cause trouble
in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events
is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the Web LCT provides
one time synchronization scheme: synchronizing with the Web LCT server.
In this scheme, all NEs use the Web LCT server time as the standard time. The NE time can
be synchronized with the Web LCT server time manually or automatically. The Web LCT
server time refers to the time of the computer system where the Web LCT server resides. This
scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with
regard to time.
17.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with

the NMS Time
This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS
time. After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time
is automatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.
Prerequisites
l You must have logged in to an NE.
l The NTP service must not be configured for the U2000 and NEs.

Web LCT or U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N


1. Set the automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time in the NE
Explorer.
1
5 7
6
NOTE
3
: Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
5
: Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.
NOTE
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
17.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key

On the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically
synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server is
accessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the
key and password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.
Prerequisites
l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000

The NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If the
standard NTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the NE must be
the same as the key of the server.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

2. Configure the standard NTP key.
2 3
5
1

NOTE
6
: Set Trusted to Yes
17.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server

Time
You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize
the NE time with the standard NTP server time.
Prerequisites
l The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key management
function.
l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000
After you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when the
modification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though the
encryption key is incorrect.
Legend Information

N notes
N N


2. Synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.

2
4
1
7 6
NOTE
4
:
1. Set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
2. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.
5
:
1. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from the shortcut
menu to create a standard NTP server.
2. If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standard NTP
server and Standard NTP Server Key. If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP,
enter the IP address of the standard NTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key.
7
: Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the same as the
ones set previously.
17.5 Performance Management

To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance
personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance
17.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified
threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a
board. On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template, you can
set performance thresholds for one or more boards at the same time.

Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Set the board performance threshold.
3 6
9 8 7 5

NOTE
4
: In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.
5
: On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template for the
boards, click Use Template and select the desired template. Click Open.
7
(Optional): Click Default to restore the default settings.
9
: Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is
set.
17.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and
starting the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed
performance record during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance
status monitoring of services and NEs.
Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
U2000/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature is
disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N


1. Set the performance monitoring parameters of a board.
2 4
NOTE
3
: Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-down list.
4
: Set the Monitor Status. Click Apply.
Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000 server time.

U2000


1. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring
Time from the Main Menu.
2. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .

3. Select one or more NEs, and set the 15-Minute Monitoring and 24-Hour Monitoring
parameters according to the requirement.
a. Select Enabled.
b. Set the start time and date.
c. Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.
NOTE
l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end
time must be later than the start time.
l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time
and does not stop.
4. Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.
Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an
Ethernet port.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Guests" privilege or higher.
l The Ethernet service must be configured.
l The performance monitoring parameters must be set.


U2000

1. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON
Performance.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
3. Select a port from the Object drop down list.
4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions and Display Mode.
5. Click Start and the result is shown.
17.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Reset the board performance registers.

NOTE
3 4
and : Select the ports and registers that you want to reset.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board
Performance Register from the Function Tree.
2. Select the registers that you want to reset.
3. Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE
3 4
and : All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the
register.
4. Click OK.
17.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following
task sets.
17.6.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the
NE.
Prerequisites

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Modify the NE name.

NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and
numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <,
and >.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the
Function Tree.
2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.
NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and
numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <,
and >.
17.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name

You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of
the NE.
Prerequisites

U2000

Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
2. Modify the optical NE name.

NOTE
An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the
following special characters: | : * ? " < >.
3. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed by the
new name on the Main Topology.
17.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or
the communication address.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.

U2000
Precautions
NOTICE
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the
communication between a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE
and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the GNE.
NOTE
l It is not recommended to change the Port No..

l In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as
the IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network
segments, you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server
and the GNE are connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.
Legend Information

N notes
N N


2. Close the displayed Filter dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Specify GNE filter criteria.
1
4. Modify GNE parameter settings.
1 2

17.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number is
usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certain
NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Prerequisites

U2000
Precautions
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure

2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter dialog box and click OK. The NE is
shown in the list of the NE tab.
3. Specify NE filter criteria.
1
2
3
4. Change the GNE for NEs.
17.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Non-GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change
the GNE to a non-GNE.
Prerequisites

U2000

Impact on System
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt the service.
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
2. Close the displayed Filter dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Specify GNE filter criteria.

4. Change a GNE to a non-GNE.
1
2
Follow-up Procedure
After changing the GNE to a non-GNE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE
and select another GNE.
17.6.6 Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change a
non-GNE to a GNE.
Prerequisites

U2000

Legend Information

N notes
N N
Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE

2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter dialog box and click OK. The NE is
shown in the list of the NE tab.
3. Specify NE filter criteria.
1
2
3

4. Change a non-GNE to a GNE.
1 2
4 3
NOTE
3
The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.
17.6.7 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE
removes all information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the
equipment.
Prerequisite
Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.
On the Web LCT, you have already logged out the NE.

U2000 or Web LCT
When the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.
Legend Information

N notes
N N


1. Delete a single WDM NE.
批注框标注。选择形状，然后开始键入。将框的大小调整到所需尺寸。移动控制手柄可以将指针对准要标注的
3对象。
2. Delete NEs in batches.

a. Navigation path.

b. Delete NEs in batches.
4
5

1. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.
2. Click OK.
17.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board
based on the following task sets.
17.7.1 Deleting Boards

To modify network or NE configurations, users can delete boards in the NE Panel or Slot
Layout.

Prerequisite
l The services and protection groups have been deleted.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Double-click an NE icon to open the NE Panel, and choose the desire subrack.
2. Delete boards.

NOTE
After a board is deleted, the inactive NE-level optical cross-connections to the board are also
deleted.

1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Select the desired subrack.
2. Right-click the board you want to delete, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After the board is deleted, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
17.7.2 Adding Boards

Boards must be added on the NE Panel or Slot Layout if NE data needs to be manually
configured.
Prerequisite

l The NE has been created.

l There must be vacant slots on the NE Panel or Slot Layout.

U2000 or Web LCT
Physical boards refer to the boards that are actually installed in a subrack. Logical boards
refers to the boards that are created on the U2000 or Web LCT. After a logical board is
created, services can be configured on the board. Created services are available only when the
corresponding physical board is online.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

2. Add boards.


1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
2. Select the shelf, right-click the selected vacant slot. Select the board you want to add
from the list.
NOTE
On the Web LCT, clicking Add Physical Boards adds corresponding logical boards on all slots
that house physical boards.
17.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration

After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
on the following task sets.
17.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and medium type of a fiber/cable according to
its connection status and physical features.

Prerequisites

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

2. Modify the fiber/cable information.

– Modify the name of a fiber.

– Modify the Length(km) of a fiber.
– Modify the Designed Loss(EOL)(dB) of a fiber.

– Modify the Medium Type of the fiber.
17.8.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs,
you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.

U2000 or Web LCT

Legend Information

N notes
N N

2. Delete the fibers.

NOTE
2
: To delete a fiber or cable from both the NMS database and the NE database, right-click
this fiber or cable and then choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.
NOTICE
The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and user-
defined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export
the script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete.
3. Click OK.
17.9 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of

whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no
matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to
communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
Prerequisite
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

U2000 or Web LCT
For U2000:
l First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.
l If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is
abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

a.

b.
2. Create a single NE.
– Create a GNE.
3
1
– Create a subtending GNE.

1 3
NOTE
When creating the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 NE, you need not to choose the optical NE that is NE
belongs to and this NE is directly created on the Main Topology.
NOTE
The default NE user is root, and the default password is Changeme_123 or password.
3. Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the physical view
and the NE is created.
Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as
the IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.

1. Click Add NE in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the NE Type to Europe, enter the NE ID and Extended ID.
3. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.
– If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
– If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.
NOTE
You are advised to set Baud Rate to 19200bps.

– If the gateway type is SSL Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
4. Enter the User Name and the Password.
NOTE
The default user name is lct and the default password is Changeme_123 or password.

5. Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally
and is in the Logged In state.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of
communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE.
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE
user.
17.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create
another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
Prerequisite
l The NE user must be created.
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to
log in to an NE through a U2000/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to
the same NE through another U2000/Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from
the first U2000/Web LCT server.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N


2. Switch a logged-in NE user.

Note
1 4
批注框标注。选择形状，然后开始键入。将框的大小调整到所需尺寸。移动控制
手柄可以将指针对准要标注的对象。
8
6 7
3 5
NOTE
8
If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password, and thus later
login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS. Therefore, it is recommended
not to select Offline Switching.

1. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE
status becomes Not Logged In.
2. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the User Name and the Password.
4. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.

17.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode

In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in
the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create
a few fiber connections only.
Prerequisite
l The board on relevant NEs must be created.
l The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength
No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the
NE. You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.
Conflicting fibers see the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.
NOTE
The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology
view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. Create fibers in the synchronization mode.

Note
4 2
NOTE
2
: Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed.
– Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides.
U2000 is the same as the fiber data on NEs.
– Uncreated Fiber in U2000: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
4
: Handle different situations as follows:
– If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click Create
Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are
displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
– If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cable to
delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click Create
Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Step 2 Creating fiber connections in list mode.


2. Create the fiber connections in list mode.
5
2 7
NOTE
3
: Select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable.
5
:
1. Dual-fiber bidirectional fiber connections can be created on an NE to achieve bidirectional
transmission. When only one single-fiber unidirectional fiber connection is created, a reverse fiber
connection needs to be created.
2. Repeat this step to create multiple fiber connections.
6
: The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot be edge ports.
----End
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber
connections are correct and the line communication is available.

17.12 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
NOTE
l The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port is
a Fixed Edge Ports.
l If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edge
port of NEs.
l If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot
be configured as the edge port of NEs.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure the edge port.

NOTE
When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that
the operation is successful. Click Close.
If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge
Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.
17.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs grooming at the
optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the creation of single-board
optical cross-connection.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N


1. Create the board optical cross-connection.
1 3
NOTE
5
: Select the Source Slot, Sink Slot, Source Port and Sink Port. Click the
button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths
from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected
Wavelengths.

1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical Cross-
2. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the
right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the
Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths.
4. Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
17.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes

Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure the board WDM port attributes.

5
1
NOTE
3
: When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried
and set from the perspective of function.
5 6
and : Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click
corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.
17.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes

Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. Configure the board SDH interface attributes.

1 3
NOTE
3
: When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried
and set from the perspective of function.
5
: Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.
17.16 Opening/Closing Lasers

This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of
faults and the commissioning.
Prerequisites
To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function. .
Impact on System
Closing the laser of the local board interrupts the services of the downstream board.

U2000
Legend Information


N notes
N N
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the WDM board

1. Open/Close the lasers in the case of the WDM board.
3
4
5
2
7
NOTE
6
: Laser Status needs to be set to On or Off as required.
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the SDH board

1. Open/Close the lasers in the case of the SDH board.

4
1
NOTE
5
: Laser Switch needs to be set to On or Off as required.
17.17 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

If the wavelength received on the IN port of a board is inconsistent with that specified by
Receive Wavelength, services will be unavailable. When this occurs, change the value of
Receive Wavelength to the actual receive wavelength.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N


1. Configure the receive wavelength of boards.
3
4
5
1
6 8
7
NOTE
7
: Select the corresponding wavelength according to the requirements.
17.18 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
Prerequisite
Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G or ISC2G.
Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM, TN12LOM, TN12LWXS,
and TN13LQM board.

U2000 or Web LCT

Precautions
NOTICE
l Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shutdown functions to Disabled before the
OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Enable the open fiber control (OFC).
17.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM

Board

Prerequisite
The OTU board or tributary board must be created.

U2000 or Web LCT
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Set the automatic laser shutdown on the WDM board.
3
5
7

NOTE
5
: Click Query and the attribute of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel
are shown in the window.
6
: This operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the
settings according to actual service requirement. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the
relevant laser on the client side of the board is shut down automatically when an R_LOS alarm is
reported from the WDM side of the board.
17.20 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH

Board
Prerequisite
The optical interface board must be created.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000is recommended)

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown
Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and
Continuously On-test Period (ms).
Step 3 Click Apply. The Resultdialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Then, click Close.
----End
17.21 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering

Protection Switching
You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection
switching of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.

Prerequisite
The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
For the boards for which you configure SD conditions, see the parameter description of each
OTU board in the Hardware Description.

The following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG and
ODUk_PM_DEG.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD Trigger
Condition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.
NOTE
After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching,
the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens.
l The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals are
degraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the bit
error rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value.
l The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit
errors are of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold.
When bit errors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error
count crosses the threshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs.
l The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs
when the BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses
the threshold.

Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner.
Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of SD Trigger Condition is the same as the value that is
set.
----End
17.22 Setting the NULL Mapping Status

Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection.
For the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping
status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be
monitored.
Prerequisite
The OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured. For details, see

Figure 17-41 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection.
Figure 17-41 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test
Precaution
NOTICE
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and select
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose Configuration > OTN
Overhead Management > OPU Overhead.
Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received.
----End
17.23 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower
order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TN11TDX board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID,
and Direction. For details, see Path Binding.Configure relevant information of the path
binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction.
NOTE
For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you must
select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
----End

17.24 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board

The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical
multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and
reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the
function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be
configured on the U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be
normal.
Prerequisite
Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs.
The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.

l The wavelength locking function is achieved after the WMU board is configured with
the centralized wavelength monitoring function.
l When configuring wavelength monitoring, check the transmit directions of each OTU
board and the fiber connections. In addition, check which optical port on the WMU
board is connected. Based on the check result, configure the optical ports on the WMU
board and wavelength monitoring of the OTU board.
l There are three types that the wavelengths be locked:
– Scenario I: The OTU, WMU, and optical-layer boards are on the same NE, and
logical fiber connections are configured. In this case, the wavelengths can be locked
automatically without any operation performed by the user.
– Scenario II: The OTU and WMU boards are on the same NE, but the optical-layer
boards are on another NE. In this case, you need to configure the mapping between
the OTU board and WMU board.
– Scenario III: The OTU board and the WMU board are on different NEs. Ensure that
the NEs be allocated to the same optical NE and that the DCN communication
between the NEs is normal. You need to configure the mapping between the OTU
board and the WMU board.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration > Wavelength
Monitoring Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the WMU board
from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been configured is
displayed.

Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and the OTU
board where the wavelengths to be detected are located.
NOTE
Click New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength monitoring
but support wavelength monitoring.
Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. The
wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user interface.
NOTE
l If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system calculates all the
OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber connection relationship. Click
Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of the OTU boards is delivered.
l After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength
monitoring, click Delete to remove them one by one.
----End
17.25 Setting the FEC Mode

This section describes the basic method for setting the FEC mode to FEC or AFEC and thus
having the board work in the mode.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
When mode of the FEC selected for the upstream board is inconsistent with mode of the FEC
selected for the downstream board, the services may be interrupted.

U2000
The boards with different FEC mode cannot interconnect with each other. For example, the
FEC mode of the LSX is FEC by default, but it can also be set to AFEC. Though the rates of

the two FEC mode are the same, the boards with different FEC mode still cannot interconnect
due to the difference in FEC mode. Therefore, ensure that the FEC types of the upstream and
downstream boards are the same.
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Set the FEC mode.
4
5
NOTE
6
: FEC Mode needs to be set to FEC or AFEC as required.
17.26 Enabling and Disabling LPT

When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the
WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can
be monitored.

Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU units must be created.
The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Enable or disable the LPT.
l To enable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT
Enabled, and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
l To disable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT
Enabled, and choose Disabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of
LPT Enabled is the same as the one set previously.
----End
17.27 Setting the Speed Level of Fans

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
Prerequisite
Fan Speed Mode must be Adjustable Speed Mode.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fan Attribute from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a shelf for which you want to change the fan speed from the Subrack drop-down list.
Step 3 Select Adjustable Speed Mode in the Fan Speed Mode pane.
Step 4 Set Fan Speed Level.

NOTE
The values of Fan Speed Level are as follows:

l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800: Stop, Low, Medium, and High.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/OptiX OSN 8800 T64: Stop, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-
High, and High.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Click Apply.
----End
17.28 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals

Using the RS232 Serial Port
This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel
of alarm signals of an external device.
Prerequisites
The TNK2SCC, TN52SCC board is installed on the NE.
The TN12HSC1, TN12SC1, TN12SC2, or TN11ST2 board is installed on the NE.
The SCC board and the HSC1, SC1, SC2 or ST2 board are installed in the same subrack.

U2000
Context
A WDM device can transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device
using its RS232 serial port. In this manner, the WDM device can centrally manage alarms of
the external device.
When the WDM device uses its RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of
alarm signals of an external device, the data source and sinks must be specified. Broadcast
communication is required from the source to the sinks. The source can broadcast a command
to all the sinks. The sinks can send data to the source but only one sink is allowed to do so at a
time. The source and sinks can be specified randomly.
Table 17-1 lists the interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm
signals using their RS232 serial ports.
Table 17-1 Interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm signals
Device Type Interface Board Port
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 EFI1 Serial
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 EFI1 Serial
OptiX OSN 6800 EFI Serial

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC/AUX board and choose Configuration > RS232
Transparently Transmit from the Function Tree.
Step 2 From the RS232 Data Source drop-down list, select Shelf11(subrack)-17-52SCC-1.
Step 3 In the Available RS232 Data Sink area, select Shelf11(subrack)-12-12SC2–1, and click
to add the selected board to the Selected RS232 Data Sink area.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
----End
17.29 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes
must be configured.
Context
Follow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:
17.29.1 Configuring Internal Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured
with services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an
Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet boards must be created.


NOTICE
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.
NOTE
The configuration items are different according to different boards.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the Internal Port option
button.
Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply. For the configuration of related
parameters, see TAG Attributes.
Step 3 Optional: Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and mapping.
Click Apply.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a general
mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-
length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-
oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and
ESCON), or common bit data streams. The GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click Apply.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag
Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a network-to-
network interface, it is used for connecting to another network node.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Click LCAS tab and set the port LCAS. Click Apply. For relevant information, see
LCAS of Feature Description .
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting for OptiX OSN 8800.
Step 6 Optional: Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold,
Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and
all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
----End
17.29.2 Configuring External Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured
with services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be created.

Precaution
NOTICE
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select the
External Port option button.
Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working Mode at the
other end also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
l MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-affecting. The
two are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to Inloop, the value of PHY
loopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same applies to the reverse case.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Basic Attributes (External Port).

Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode and
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.
NOTE
l Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is Auto-
Negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only transmits and does not
receive flow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to
transmit and receive only PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means
that the symmetric or dissymmetric flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is
not Auto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and
receive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is able to transmit PAUSE frames only.
Receive Only means the port is able to receive PAUSE frames only.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Flow Control (External Port).
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply. For the
configuration of related parameters, see TAG Attributes.
Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag
Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold,
Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and
all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (External Port).
Step 10 Click Apply.
----End

17.30 Verifying Ethernet Services

After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is
normal.
Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be created.

NOTE
You can select different steps to verify Ethernet services based on the networking and application
requirements.

Step 1 Optional: Test Ethernet services. For details, see Testing Ethernet Services.
NOTE
The board supports the test of Ethernet services refer to Hardware Description.
Step 2 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet services. For details, see Configuring the IEEE
802.1ag OAM of Feature Description.
Step 3 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet ports. For details, see Configuring the IEEE
802.3ah OAM of Feature Description.
----End
17.31 Configuring the PRBS Test

Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence
(PRBS) error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals,
and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS
signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without
connecting a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
17.31.1 PRBS Test

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each
section are normal by performing loopback operations section by section.

Figure 17-43 PRBS application

PRBS is enabled on the auxiliary boards
Sends PRBS codes
WDM
network
Tester Near-end Far-end

board auxiliary auxiliary
board Inloop on Outloop on board Inloop on
WDM side WDM side client side
Site A Site B
NOTICE
l When a PRBS test is in progress, only query operations can be performed, no
configurations can be delivered to involved boards, the involved boards cannot carry any
services, and the original services on the boards will be interrupted.
NOTE
l Tester board: generates PRBS test signals and monitors the loopbacked PRBS test signals from the
remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS test signals, the board determines
whether the current link and equipment are normal. For example, an OTU board that supports the
PRBS function can be configured as a tester board to send PRBS signals, as shown in Figure 17-43.
l Auxiliary board: connects a tester board and the network under test and transparently transmits the
PRBS test signals. On the auxiliary boards at the near end, PRBS Test Status need to be set to
Enabled, only when client-side services are other than OTN services.
l When a tributary or line board is used as a tester or auxiliary board, cross-connections need to be
configured to form a service path.
NOTE
l The PRBS test function is targeted for use during deployment and fault location. After deployment
and fault location, users must set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
l PRBS codes vary according to the client-side service types. Therefore, to perform a client-side
PRBS test, users must ensure that the client-side service types for the tester board and auxiliary
board are the same.
The PRBS test is applicable to networking modes, as provided in Table 17-2.

For information about how to complete PRBS configurations, see 17.31.3 Configuring PRBS
Test on the Meter Board in Commissioning Guide.
For the boards that support the PRBS function, refer to Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN
Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards in

Table 17-2 PRBS applications

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Client-side OTN signals/SDH TX RX OUT IN TX

1
PRBS test services Tester Near 2
Remote
WDM network 3 auxiliary 4
board auxiliary board
RX TX board IN OUT
RX
Client Client WDM WDM Client

side side side side side
1 Start PRBS test

2
Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
3
4 Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback
WDM-side N/A OUT IN

PRBS test 1
Remote
Tester 2
WDM network auxiliary
board IN
OUT board
WDM WDM
side side
1 Start PRBS test

2 Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
NOTE
When the NS4 and NS4M boards are used to implement the WDM-side PRBS function and lower-order
cross-connections are configured on the backplane side (that is, the received signals are ODU0, ODU1,
ODU2, ODU3, or ODUflex), the tester board and remote auxiliary board will report an OPU4_LOOMFI
alarm, which does not affect the PRBS function.
17.31.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board

Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliary
boards at the local and remote ends.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
The service type must be set according to the board type.
The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the remote
auxiliary board based on the networking requirements.


Precautions
NOTICE
l Create cross-connections between the IP port and the ClientLP port before enabling the
PRBS on the client side. Otherwise, the PRBS test will fail to be enabled. Do not delete
the created cross-connections after the PRBS is enabled.
l After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operations, such as
modifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a loopback.
l After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test Status of
the board to Disabled.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as an auxiliary board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and select
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click
Close.
NOTE
Set the service type of the auxiliary board before configuring the PRBS test status.
----End
17.31.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board

In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is
looped back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code
that is received, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.
Prerequisite

The corresponding OTU or packet service board must be configured.
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTU
boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTU
board which is used as auxiliary board.

Precautions
NOTICE
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used
only in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
Before starting the PRBS function on the client side, create a cross-connection between the IP
and clientLP ports; otherwise, starting the PRBS function fails. After the PRBS function is
started, the cross-connection cannot be deleted.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function tree.
Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right pane, and set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual
situation.
Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane
in an accumulative manner.
NOTE
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous n
seconds.
Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service is
displayed.
Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test.
Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.

NOTE
l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working.
l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have
loud noise.
----End
17.31.4 Performing the PRBS Test in E2E Mode

This topic describes how to perform the pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) test for an
OCh trail in end-to-end (E2E) mode to determine whether the OCh trail is properly working.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTU
boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTU
board which is used as auxiliary board refer to Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the
Auxiliary Board.

U2000
Precautions
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used
only in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the main menu.
At this moment, the Manage WDM Trail-[Main Window] window and the Set Trail
Browse Filter Criteria dialog box are displayed.
Step 2 Specify the filter criteria and click Filter All. Bidirectional OCh trails are displayed.
Step 3 Right-click the desired OCh trails and choose PRBS Test, and the PRBS Test window is
displayed.

Step 4 Select one OCh trail and in the Set Test Parameters, set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual
situation.
Step 5 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane in
an accumulative manner.
NOTE
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous n
seconds.
Step 6 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service is
displayed.
Step 7 Click OK to start the PRBS test.
Step 8 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.

NOTE
l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working.
l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have
loud noise.
----End
17.32 Managing NE Power Consumption

You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to
ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE
runs in the normal state.
17.32.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption

You can monitor the power consumption of an NE, to ensure that the actual NE configuration
does not exceed the maximum power consumption.
Querying the Power Consumption of an NE

After you query the power consumption of an NE, if the power consumption exceeds the
threshold, you need to configure energy conservation for the NE in a timely manner.
Prerequisites

You can use this function to query the power consumption threshold, and the nominal and
current power consumption of an NE.
You can query the power consumption of an NE on a per-subrack basis. The power
consumption of an NE is displayed in the NE/Shelf Name format.
You can query the NE threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 on a per-partition basis.
The nominal power consumption of an NE is the sum of the nominal power consumption of
all boards on the NE.
The current power consumption of an NE is the actual power consumption of a running NE

and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.
Legend Information


N notes
N N
Procedure
Step 1 Enter NE Power Option.
Step 2 Select NE and query the power.
----End

Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold

Prerequisites
Precaution
The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the
actual power distribution capability; otherwise, alarms will be falsely reported.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N


2. Set the NE power consumption threshold.

2 3
4
1
NOTE
4
: The setting of NE Power Consumption Threshold depends on the area division. For
details about area division, see Power Redundancy. The NE Power Consumption Threshold
parameter needs to be set based on the network planning and practical power distribution
capability of the NE. For details about the maximum power consumption of each subrack, see
"Power Consumption" of the subrack.

Querying the Power Consumption of a Board

You can query the power consumption of a board to learn the board that has abnormally high
power consumption, which causes high NE power consumption or threshold crossing.
Prerequisites
It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

U2000
l You can use this function to query the logical board status, board nominal power
consumption, physical board type, board current power consumption, and other
information.
l The nominal power consumption of a board is a fixed value and is coded in the software.
l The current power consumption of a board is the actual power consumption of a running
board and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Enter Board Power option.

Step 2 Select board and query power consumption
3 1
NOTE
The value of Nominal Power Consumption on the U2000 equals to the value of Nominal Power
Consumption of the online physical board.
----End
17.32.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE

You can configure energy conservation for an NE to dynamically adjust the power
consumption of the NE. In this way, environment protection and energy conservation are
achieved.
Prerequisites

U2000
There are five power saving modes of an NE: Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect
Board, Idle Ports, Standby Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Cross-Connect Bus.
Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board is applicable only to the XCM and SXM boards
(when the SXM board is used with the XCT board) intended for the OptiX OSN 8800, but not
applicable to the XCH boards.
Table 17-3 lists the power saving measures specified to power saving modes.

Table 17-3 Power saving measures specific to power saving modes

Power- Power Saving Measure
Saving
Mode Idle Cross- Idle Boards Idle Ports Standby Idle Low
Connect Cross- Order
Bus Connect Cross-
Board Connect
Board
Normal Y N N N N
mode
Power- Y Y Y N N
Saving
mode
Enhanced Y Y Y Y Y
power-
saving
mode
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Enter Power Saving Configuration Option.

Step 2 Select Ne and set Power Saving Mode.
3 1
----End
17.32.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption

Report
By viewing the network-wide power consumption report, you can learn the network-wide
power consumption statistics, annually-conserved energy, and other information.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Guests" privilege or higher.
It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.
Querying the network-wide NE power consumption is time-consuming. If the number of NEs
queried exceeds 100, a dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue.
The network-wide NE power consumption report is based on NEs instead of subracks.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Enter Power Consumption Statistics Report Option.
Step 2 Select NE and query Power Consumption Statistics Report .
3 1
NOTE
It is recommended that you do not select more than 100 NEs at a time. Otherwise, the operation may
take a long time.
Click Print to print the NE power consumption report.
Click Save As to save the report to any directory.
----End
17.33 Measuring Trail Latency

The latency must satisfy high requirements for the transmission system. duration of source-
sink signal transmission can be learned by measuring the trail latency. This helps appraise the
trail transmission performance and determine a less time-consuming trail to meet the short-
latency requirements for a network.

Prerequisites
l Only a bi-directional ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex trail supports latency
measurement.
l Deactivated or locked trails do not support latency measurement.
l Before the trail latency test on the tributary boards, services on the boards must have
been configured successfully and optical signals are input on the client side; otherwise,
the trail latency measurement will fail.
l During the delay measurement, only one ODUk channel can be configured. And the
delay measurement interval of the same board must be longer than 3 minutes; otherwise,
the delay measurement will fail.
l During trail latency measurement, ensure that the measured trail is normal.
l The overhead bytes used during latency measurement are the same as those of IEEE
1588v2 on the OTN interface. If these overhead bytes transmit IEEE 1588v2 protocol
packets, the IEEE 1588v2 is interrupted so that services are affected. Therefore, it is not
recommended that you measure trail latency if IEEE 1588v2 is used.

U2000 or Web LCT
Context
Measuring a trail latency (duration of source-sink signal transmission) is processing overhead.
The latency measurement function measures the end-to-end bidirectional latency at the ODUk
layer. If ODUk SNCP is configured on a trail, this function measures the latency of the
current working trail.
Ensure that there are input optical signals on the client side before latency measurement.
During the measurement, the U2000 automatically inserts PM layer overhead bytes for
latency measurement to the source OTU board. The overhead bytes are transparently
transmitted through intermediate NEs and looped back on the sink. After the measurement,
the U2000 restores the original configurations.
NOTICE
During latency measurement, do not modify or switch the port service type; otherwise, the
latency measurement or command issuing will fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the Main Menu.
At this moment, the Manage WDM Trail-[Main Window] window and the Set Trail
Browse Filter Criteria dialog box are displayed.
Step 2 Specify the filter criteria and click Filter All. Bidirectional ODUk trails are displayed.
Step 3 Select a trail, click Maintenance, and choose Latency Test.
Step 4 In the Latency Test dialog box, click Latency Test.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed indicating that the latency measurement may interrupt
1588 and affect services in the 1588 scenario.
Step 5 Click Yes. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click Yes. The measurement starts. When the measurement is complete, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click Close and view the measurement results.

NOTE
The result of the latency test is displayed as the unidirectional latency for the bidirectional trail.
NOTE
l When the result is 0 or 4294967295, the measurement is invalid, indicating that faults occur on the trail.
l If there is a high requirement on the latency, you can adjust it by setting the AFEC grade based on
different network design requirements on OSNR. A larger value of AFEC grade means a stronger error
correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.
----End
17.34 Enabling the ASON Feature

The NE obtains the ASON feature after this feature is enabled. The ASON feature is disabled
by default during delivery.
Prerequisites
l The node ID must be set.
l The NE must be in the running state.
l The NE must be created on the U2000 and the NE data must be already uploaded.

l A unique node ID is allocated to each ASON NE to identify the NE in the ASON
network. In the same ASON network, node IDs cannot be duplicate or in the same
network segment as the IP address of the corresponding NE. The format of a node ID is
the same as that of an IP address. The node ID cannot be 0.0.0.0, 1.2.3.4 or
255.255.255.255. Properly set the NE node ID before you enable the ASON feature of
the NE.
l After you enable the ASON feature, synchronize the NE data to keep the consistency of
data between the U2000 and the NE. Refer to Uploading NE Configuration Data for the
process.
l You can disable the ASON feature of an ASON NE according to the project requirement.
After you disable the ASON feature, the NE is possessed of only traditional NE features.
NOTE
To disable the ASON feature, the NE must meet the following requirements:
l The NE must be in the running state and does not have any ASON cross-connection or
ASON service residual
l The fiber between the local NE and the adjacent node must not carry ASON services.
l The ASON feature has been enabled.
l The TE link information is correct and no exception occurs.
l The network is stable.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to view the current enabling status of the ASON feature.
Step 3 Set ASON Feature to Enabled.
NOTE
Set the ASON Feature to Disabled to disable the ASON feature.

After you enable the ASON feature, both the electrical-layer and optical-layer ASON features will be
enabled. Generally, only the electrical-layer or optical-layer ASON feature is required on a network. To
save system resources, you are advised to disable unneeded ASON features. For example, you can
disable the electrical-layer ASON feature for an optical-layer ASON network.
Step 4 Click Apply. After you confirm the operation twice, a prompt appears telling you that the
operation was successful.
NOTE
After you disable the ASON feature, synchronize the NE data to keep the consistency of data between
the U2000 and the NE. For related operations, see Uploading NE Configuration Data.
Click Query on the bottom right of the ASON Feature Management windows. If Running
is displayed in ASON Software Running Status, it indicates that the ASON software is
running normally.
----End

17.35 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs

When there are alarm inputs on third-party equipment, the housekeeping alarm input
parameters of the interconnected OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 must be set so that the alarms
on third-party equipment can be managed.
Precaution
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the physical interface board for housekeeping alarm inputs is
ATE and the board where housekeeping alarm input parameters are set is EFI1.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the physical interface board for housekeeping alarm inputs is ATE
and the board where housekeeping alarm input parameters are set is EFI.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Configure the housekeeping alarm inputs.
1 6
5 8

NOTE
1
: Select the desired EFI or EFI1 board.
7
: Based on the actual alarm inputs, set Using Status, Alarm Mode, and Alarm Severity
of the housekeeping alarm input interface.
17.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
17.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods

You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC
board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the SCC
board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE
data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.
Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods

The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card,
local server, and remote server. The data backup and restoration methods vary according to
storage locations. See Table 17-4.

Table 17-4 Data backup and restoration methods and application scenarios
Backup and Restoration Storage Application Scenario
Method
Back up/Restore the NE Flash database on the SCC NE fault recovery scenario
database to/from an SCC board such as data loss for an NE
boarda control board, NE power-
off, or replacement of an NE
control board
l Backs up the NE
configuration data in the
control board (no CF
card is configured) to the
flash database.
During the restoration,
after a warm or cold
reset on the control
board, the control board
reads the configuration
from the flash database
and issues the
configuration to other
boards.
l The backup procedure is
the same as that in the
scenario of backing up
NE data to the CF card.
If a CF card is installed,
NE data is backed up to
the CF card because the
CF card has a larger
capacity than the control
board. If no CF card is
available, NE data is
backed up to the control
board.
l NE data can also be
backed up to the flash
memory of the control
board to ensure data
security in case of NE
power-off within half an
hour after NE
configuration
modification.


Method
Back up/Restore the NE CF card NE fault recovery scenario

database to/from a CF carda such as data loss for an NE
control board, NE power-
off, or replacement of an NE
control board
l Backs up the NE
configuration data in the
SCC board (a CF card is
configured) to the CF
card.
During the restoration,
the database is restored
from the CF card to the
SCC board. After a
warm or cold reset on the
SCC board, the memory
database on the SCC
board is updated. Then,
after the warm resets on
other boards, the NE
memory data is issued to
the boards.
l Frequent manual data
backup on the CF card is
not recommended, for
example, do not perform
manual data backup after
each configuration data
modification. This is
because the NE
automatically backs up
data every 24 hours,
which meet deployment
and maintenance
requirements, while
frequent backup
operations make CF
cards wear and shorten
their lifecycle.


Method
Back up the NE U2000 server or client Fault recovery or NE

configuration data to a upgrade/downgrade scenario
U2000 server or client/ l This method applies to
Restore the NE quick NE configuration
configuration data from the data restoration when
U2000 server or clienta both the control board
and CF card are faulty.
l Backs up data before an
upgrade/downgrade
operation. The data can
be used to restore the NE
to the original state when
an upgrade/downgrade
operation fails.
Stores the data in the
computer where the
U2000 server or client
resides.


Method
Disaster restoration of NE - This method applies to the

configuration data scenario in which services
are interrupted due to
database faults (such as loss
of database configuration
data) and the service data
cannot be restored using the
preceding common
methods.
When this method is used, a
configuration script is
exported from the NMS,
delivered to the NE, and
activated on the NE. Then,
the NE is reset and service
data is applied to all boards
again to restore
configuration data.
The difference between this
method and the preceding
common methods lies in that
this method uses the NMS
script file as the data source
for data restoration.
NOTICE
Disaster restoration of NE
configuration data is a highly
risky operation which may
interrupt services. You are
advised to perform this
operation under instructions of
Huawei engineers. When a
database fault occurs, you are
advised to use the preceding
common methods to restore
data first.
a: The preceding common database backup/restoration methods support backup/restoration

of all configuration data and will not interrupt services, and the validity and integrity of
data restored are ensured. You are advised to back up NE data periodically so that backup
data is available for data restoration in case of NE faults.
NOTE
The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 support CF cards.

The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 support CF cards.
The SCC board of the OptiX OSN 3800 does not support CF cards.

NOTE
l OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 support disaster restoration of NE configuration data.

l OptiX OSN 3800 does not support disaster restoration of NE configuration data if the TN22SCC board is
configured.
17.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
data in the DRDB database of the system control board to a CF card manually, to ensure the
automatic restoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the
system control board or a power failure occurs on the equipment.
Prerequisites
l You must have logged in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority.
l The system control board must be configured with the CF card.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
2. Manually back up one or more NEs database to a CF card.

17.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS

Client
This section describes how to back up the latest NE (configuration) data to the NMS server or
NMS client as required in case of NE maintenance or upgrade/downgrade.
Prerequisites
The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.

U2000
l Backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of same device type.
l On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device type
versions related to the device type is displayed in the NE View table.
l The files backed up from the server can be viewed in the Backup Information tab.
Legend Information


N notes
N N
Manually Backing Up NE Data

2. Manually back up the NE data.
1
2

NOTE
1
l : The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.
3
l : By default the OSS Server is selected.
l If the OSS Server is selected, the selected device information is stored on the NMS
server.
l If the OSS Client is selected, click to select the location where the device data
are to be backed up.
3. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the
NEName/yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE,
"yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the
time when the backup is created.
Saving and Backing Up NE Data as Required by the Default Policy

2. The NE data is saved and backed up as required by the default policy.

1
2
3
4
5

Saving and Backing Up NE Data as Required by the Customized Policy

2. The NE data is saved and backed up as required by the customized policy.

1
NOTE
3
l : Select the desired NE by type from the drop-down list of NE type and NE
Version .
4
l : Select one or more NEs for configuring the save and backup policy in the
navigation tree below the NE Version drop-down list.
3. Set the policy information as required.

NOTE
l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the DC performs the backup/save operation on
the newly added NEs (NEs moved from other policies to this policy) at specified time points.
l If the The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the DC does not perform the backup/save
operation on the newly added NEs (NEs moved from other policies to this policy) even at specified
time points.
4. Click OK to complete the save and backup configurations for the specified NE.
17.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC
board.
Prerequisites
l You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
l The NE data from DRDB Database must be backed up to Flash database on the SCC
board.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N

1. Restore the NE database from the SCC board.

2
1
NOTE
2
: The reset modes vary depending on SCC boards. The reset mode needs to be set to
Warm Reset or Cold Reset as required.
17.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Administrators" privilege.
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
The system control board must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB database must
be backed up to the CF card.


U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure
2. Restore the NE database from the CF card.
2 3
1
4
NOTE
l If the database is performing a scheduled backup task, a message will be displayed on the NMS,
indicating that restoring data from the CF card will fail. In this scenario, you are advised to wait 5
minutes, and restore data again from the CF card after the database finishes the scheduled backup
task.
l NE data is backed up every 24 hours by default. The database data restored from the CF card is the
latest data backed up before the NE is unreachable. Therefore, it may be different from the current
actual data.

NOTE
After the NE databases are restored, the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the system
control board but not other boards. To ensure that the configurations in the system control board and the
configurations in other boards are consistent, you need to perform warm resets on other boards.
17.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS
Client
This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS
Client.
Prerequisites
l To perform the Recover operation from the server, the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is
configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.
l To perform the Recover operation from the client, the parameter in File Transfer
Protocol between client and server area must be set and the file transfer service must run
in the normal state (FTP and SFTP are supported), because files cannot be transferred
directly between an NE and the client. Instead, the files are transferred to the root
directory for file transfer on the server and then the server transfers the files to the
specified directory on the target NE or client.
l You cannot perform the Recover operation for multiple devices of different device types.
l On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the
device type is displayed in the NE View table.

U2000
Legend Information

N notes
N N
Procedure

2. Recover the device data from the NMS server or the NMS client.
2
1
3 8
7

NOTE
3
:
In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is listed in the File
Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is not listed in the File Name
drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file in the Select File dialog box.
4
l
1. If OSS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the OSS server. The selected
backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
2. If OSS Client is selected, click to select the backup file from the OSS Client. The
selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
7
l :
1. When you select No Reboot, the NE will not be automatically restarted. In this scenario, you
need to manually activate the database.
2. When you select With Service Interruption, the NE will be automatically restarted. After the
NE restart, the data is restored and the database is activated automatically.
8
:
To enable the backup data of service boards to be restored, select the Deliver To Board check box. If
the services on the board are not recovered yet, manually perform a cold reset on the board.
Result
After the device data is recovered, right click the device in the NE View table. Select
Activation Database... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and then click Start to
activate the device database.
NOTE
If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the
U2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.
17.36.7 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data

Disaster restoration of NE configuration data (disaster restoration for short) is a function
provided to restore service configurations in emergent cases. Disaster restoration is a highly
risky operation and may interrupt services. Therefor, perform this operation under instructions
of Huawei engineers.
Prerequisites
The NE configuration data for disaster restoration comes from the NMS database. Therefore,
before performing disaster restoration, check carefully to verify that the configuration data on
the NMS is complete and consistent with that on the NE. If the configuration data is

inconsistent, NE configuration data may be lost and services may be interrupted when you
perform disaster restoration.
Precaution
This function supports restoration of only key service configuration data but not all
configuration data. Therefore, after performing this operation, check and complete the
configuration data manually.

U2000
Procedure
No. Task Mandatory/Optional
1 Check whether the Mandatory

configuration data on the Do not perform disaster
NMS is complete. restoration if the
configuration data on the
NMS is incomplete.
2 Change the script export Mandatory

mode. Scripts exported from the
NMS can be used for NE
data restoration and the
NMS displays the
navigation path for disaster
restoration only when the
script export mode is
configured as the NE data
restoration mode.
3 Assign permission to the Optional

NMS user to perform If the NMS user is an
disaster restoration. administrator, skip this task.
1. Choose Administration
> NMS Security > NMS
User Management from
the main menu.
4 Back up tunnel service E2E Optional

data. If the NE is configured with
1. Choose Configuration > tunnel services, tunnel
SDH ASON > Lower service E2E data must be
Order E2E Service backed up before disaster
Management from the restoration. The backup data
main menu. In the is used to restore ASON
window that is displayed, lower order E2E services
click Data Backup. after the disaster restoration.

No. Task Mandatory/Optional
5 Export NMS configuration Mandatory

data. Export the configuration file
1. Choose Administration of the target NE from the
> Back Up/Restore NMS for disaster
NMS Data > Import/ restoration.
Export Script File from
the main menu.
6 Perform disaster restoration. Mandatory

1. In the dialog box that
shows NMS script
exported successfully,
click Restore Data with
NE Configuration File.
2. In the Restore Data
with NE Configuration
File dialog box, click
Download to NE.
3. When the downloading
is complete, click
Activate NE to activate
the NE configuration
file.
4. After the configuration
file is activated, click
Export Logs.
7 Perform the following Mandatory

operations after disaster
restoration:
l Restore the script export
mode.
l Manually restore the
configuration data that
cannot be restored during
disaster restoration.
l Upload NE data. This
operation is mandatory.
l Manually restore the
configuration data that
cannot be uploaded.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s
to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over
private VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit
AA authentication authorization
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACK See acknowledgement.
ACL See access control list.
ACR allowed cell rate
ACS See Application Control Server.
ADC analog to digital converter
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line.
AF See assured forwarding.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
AG See Access Gateway.

AH See Authentication Header.
AIN advanced intelligent network
AIS alarm indication signal
AK See access key ID.
ALC See automatic level control.
ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment
(single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it
fulfills optical power control on the line that contains the link.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
API See application programming interface.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working
facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS)
protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS
switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the
protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATAE See Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
AU adaptation unit
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
Access Gateway (AG) A type of gateway that provides a user-network interface (UNI) such as ISDN. An
access gateway is located at the edge access layer of the NGN structure, and provides
various methods for connecting users to the NGN.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Advanced A carrier-class processing platform that is designed to meet the service application
Telecommunications requirement of high performance, high specialization, and high integration.
Application
Environment (ATAE)
Application Control A subsystem of the Media Entertainment Middleware (MEM), used for providing a
Server (ACS) service control interface for the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) server.
Authentication Header A protocol that provides connectionless integrity, data origin authentication, and anti-
(AH) replay protection for IP data.
Authentication, A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
Authorization and services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
Accounting (AAA) network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
access key ID (AK) An ID that confirms the identity of a user accessing the object-based storage system.
One access key ID belongs to only one user, but one user can have multiple access key
IDs. The object-based storage system recognizes the users accessing the system by
their access key IDs.
acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate reception of information. Acknowledgements
(ACK) may be implemented at any level, including the physical level (using voltage on one or
more wires to coordinate a transfer), link level (indicating transmission across a single
hardware link), or higher levels.
administrative unit One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM
group (AUG) payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm
has been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been
generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The
ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the
board.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
programming interface that are used for communication between software programs.
(API)
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable
for many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short
delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For
traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues
to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing
subscriber line (ADSL) phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL
provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that
it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to
receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog
(voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data
rates from 512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
shutdown (ALS) transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A function that keeps output power of components in a system essentially constant,
(ALC) even when line attenuation in a section of the system increases.
automatic power A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
equilibrium (APE) ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B/S Browser/Server
BA booster amplifier
BBC See battery backup cabinet.
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BEI backward error indication
BER Bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BPSK See binary phase shift keying.
BRA See basic rate access.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
BRAS See broadband remote access server.

BTS base transceiver station
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system
regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take
actions to recover the faulty link.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the
computer.
basic rate access An ISDN interface typically used by smaller sites and customers. This interface
(BRA) consists of a single 16 kbit/s data (or "D") channel plus two bearer (or "B") channels
for voice and/or data. Also known as Basic Rate Access, or BRI.
battery backup cabinet A cabinet that contains a built-in battery group to back up -48 V DC power and to
(BBC) supply power to the base station when there is no power input. It is a component of a
base station.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of
the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the
time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter,
packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
binary phase shift 2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation
keying (BPSK) mode, the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1
represents the phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1
needs to be specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to
represent digital information.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one
byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of
"1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the
number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them.
Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because
bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical
signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while
routers use IP addresses.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a
unit (BPDU) spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports,
addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended
destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of
network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of
multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth
utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to
a broadband network.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any
device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between
which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast
sending.
byte A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.
C
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CBS See committed burst size.
CCM continuity check message
CD chromatic dispersion
CDR See call detail record.
CE See customer edge.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CES See circuit emulation service.
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLI command-line interface
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CMEP connection monitoring end point
CMI coded mark inversion

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
CNP connection-not-possible signal

CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
COS chip operating system
CP cyclic prefix
CPLD complex programmable logical device
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CR carriage return
CR-LDP Constraint-based Routed Label Distribution Protocol
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CS class selector
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
CST See common spanning tree.
CSV See comma separated values.
CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
CoS class of service
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces
Request Broker of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the
Architecture (CORBA) two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on
different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request
broker, or ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program
from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented
environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cabinet A physical entity for containing one or more shelves, providing the cooling, power,
and security functions.
call detail record A record unit used to create billing records. A CDR contains details such as the called
(CDR) and calling parties, originating switch, terminating switch, call length, and time of day.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At
service (CES) the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These
ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception
end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots.
The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to
the original sequence at the reception end.
circulation The number of copies of a newspaper or magazine per issue that are circulated in the
market
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also
known as frequency synchronization).
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
comma separated A CSV file is a text file that stores data, generally used as an electronic table or by the
values (CSV) database software.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of
an IP packet to be forwarded.
common public radio A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
interface (CPRI) wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC,
Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF
interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and
equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to
reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST
(CST) region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their
spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
configuration data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key
factor that determines the operation of an entire network.
consistency check A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data
between two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the
consistency of service data and resource data between the softswitches.
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from
one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice
versa.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly
connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or
host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the
transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy
check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-
checking values.
D
DAPI destination access point identifier
DB database
DBMS Database Management System
DBPS distributed board protect system
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
(with ground) (DC-C) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line
between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
ground) (DC-I) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the
PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DEI device emulation interrupt
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DMUX demultiplexer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
DPSK differential phase shift keying

DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior
node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate
DSE dispersion slope equalizer
DSF See distribute service framework.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP See digital signal processor.
DSS door status switch
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency.
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See differentiated service.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
(DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating
IP addresses to hosts.
data circuit- The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data
terminating equipment terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE
(DCE) may be separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment.
The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end
of the line.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the
equipment (DTE) DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced
by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source
node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
division multiplexing attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific
(DWDM) frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously
in the same fiber.
designated switch A designated switch of a device is a switch that is directly connected to the device and
forwards BPDUs to the device.
detection sensitivity The capability for a detector to respond to an exception.
differentiated service An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits
and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It
is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to
ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP
value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB).
Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital signal processor A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real
(DSP) time.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections
(DSLAM) and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
(DCF)
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
distribute service A distributed service development and running framework, in which services comply
framework (DSF) with standard specifications, and can be loaded and run by containers. This framework
provides a range of services including registration, detection, routing, and distributed
access.
distributed link A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
aggregation group negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or
(DLAG) hardware failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board,
thereby achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a
notation dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
downlink traffic The network traffic transferred into an internal carrier network. Noticeably, downlink
refers to sending traffic to user-end link nodes.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the
link.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
dual feed and selective A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The
receiving monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the
overhead of the service signal.
dual tone multiple Multi-frequency signaling technology for telephone systems. According to this
frequency (DTMF) technology, standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one
from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four high
frequencies, are used.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E1 An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides
thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32
timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization,
and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as
speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame
sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per
second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
E2E end to end
EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS See excess burst size.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEC Ethernet Electric Interface PMC Card
EEPROM See electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMF element management framework
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logic device.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
EVC Ethernet virtual connection

EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet passive A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
optical network technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
(EPON) supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance
of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on
encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the
bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high
bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission
channel (ESC) of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
programmable read- storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming.
only memory EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be
(EEPROM) reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its

compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP
inside IP.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates
a rate of 200 Mbit/s.
erasable A logic array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programmable logic programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array
device (EPLD) repeatedly until the program meets the requirement.
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump
laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting
with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it
amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode,
traffic control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter
defines the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when
the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must
be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
(EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to
(EXP) identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.
eye pattern An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively
sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the
horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks
like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.
F
FBG fiber Bragg grating
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.

FDI See forward defect indication.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction.
FICON See Fibre Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FMC See fixed mobile convergence.
FMT See fiber management tray.
FOA fixed optical attenuator
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FR See frame relay.
FRR See fast reroute.
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on
networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fibre Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units.
(FICON) It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel,
and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of
a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an
active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active
route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the
traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN
FRR, and TE FRR.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
(FMT)
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies
many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate
arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read
and invoked first.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
fixed mobile Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless
convergence (FMC) technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC
network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from
various access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and
use the same service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group
of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
forced switching The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection
channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is
faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that
indication (FDI) first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its
location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level
client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the
number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of
service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service
frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the
duplex (FDD) uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts.
Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GE ADM A technique that improves the transmission of GE services on a metropolitan area
network. Using this technique, equipment configured with a high-speed backplane can
separately transmit, aggregate, or divert GE services over electrical-layer wavelengths
or sub-wavelengths. This achieves cross-connections of wavelengths and end-to-end
management of sub-wavelengths over a single device. GE ADM enables GE
convergence and cross-connections at the same time, thereby ensuring that network
resources are used effectively.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
GFF gain flattening filter

GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GSM See Global system for mobile communications.
GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is
Procedure (GFP) defined by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
Global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by the European
mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
communications global mobile phone networks. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
(GSM) subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gateway IP address The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between
networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network
address resides in a different network to the sender.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This
(GTS) is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream
router to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
granularity The extent to which a system is broken down into small parts, either the system itself
or its description or observation. It is the extent to which a larger entity is subdivided.
If a system has more granularity for you to choose, that is, there are more granules in
the system for you to choose, then you can customize the system more flexibly.
H
HA system high availability system
HCS higher order connection supervision
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDTV See high definition television.
HP higher order path
HPT higher order path termination
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
HSI high-speed Internet

HSL See high-level script language.
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HUAWEI Electronic The software used to view, search for, and upgrade electronic documentation of
Document Explorer Huawei products. HedEx, pronounced as [hediks], has two editions, HedEx Lite and
(HedEx) HedEx Server.
HedEx See HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the
Packet Access requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It
(HSDPA) enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
high definition A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
television (HDTV) active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
high-level script A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and extendable.
language (HSL)
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
ILM incoming label map
IM See instant messaging.
IMP Instant Message Platform
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the
Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the
decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first
three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and
the last byte identifies the host itself.
IP subnet A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the
submap icon in the topological view.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.

IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISI intersymbol interference
ISL See Inter-Switch Link.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IST internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Inter-Switch Link A kind of link that realizes VLAN by adding a 26-bit ISL header (with VLAN ID) to
(ISL) the traditional Ethernet packets.
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA
(IANA) also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite,
including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
Management Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and
(IGMP) maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the
media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to
the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after
media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host
within the network or subnetwork.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits
while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
input jitter tolerance The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector,
coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path.
instant messaging (IM) A form of real-time communication between two or more people based on typed text.
The text is conveyed via devices connected over a network such as the Internet.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured
by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in
properly.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations,
and control system instability.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LAS line assurance system
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCT local craft terminal
LER See label edge router.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
LHP long hop

LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LMP link management protocol
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LPT link-state pass through
LRF location registration function
LSA link-state advertisement
LSR See label switching router.
LSS loss of sequence synchronization
LT linktrace
LTC loss of tandem connection
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
Layer 2 multicast A technology that maps IP multicast addresses to multicast MAC addresses. When
Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses for
traffic transmission.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
(LCK) informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and
suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to
(LER) assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR
(LSR) is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible
for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table,
creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to
groups received in the label forwarding table.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it
were a single link.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member
links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity
initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path
is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
(LTM) LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM
minus 1.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
(LAN) square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the
(LLC) upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various
physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the
(LBM) destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the
LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the
sending time of LBR.
loss measurement A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
(LM) frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames
between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received
from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MBB mobile broadband
MD See maintenance domain.
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MDF See main distribution frame.

ME See maintenance entity.
MEG See maintenance entity group.
MEP maintenance association end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MGC media gateway controller
MIB See management information base.
MID message identification
MIN mobile identification number
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MML man-machine language
MNO See mobile network operator.
MOP See method of procedure.
MP maintenance point
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S main path interface at the transmitter
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MRI See measurement result integrity.
MRO mobility robustness optimization
MS multiplex section
MS-AIS See multiplex section alarm indication signal.
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSDP See Multicast Source Discovery Protocol.
MSI mobile station identifier
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MUX See multiplexer.

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator
MWA mobile wireless access
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of
(MAC) the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and
connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC
protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted,
certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control
information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving
data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the
data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted
correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is
transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multicast Source A protocol that is applicable only to the PIM-SM domain and meaningful only for the
Discovery Protocol Any-Source Multicast (ASM) model. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up
(MSDP) between RPs of different PIM-SM domains, multicast source information can be
shared between PIM-SM domains, and the inter-domain multicast can be
implemented. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up between RPs of the same
PIM-SM domain, multicast source information can be shared in the PIM-SM domain,
and anycast RP can be implemented.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this
case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.
The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning
trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN
because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different
Switching (MPLS) link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the
basis of IP routing and control protocols.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
(MD) connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of
(ME) a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
group (MEG)
l Exist within the same management edges.
l Have the same MEG hierarchy.
l Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
maintenance entity An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond
group intermediate to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or
point (MIP) perform any operations on network connections.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such
(MIB) as routers and switches) in a network.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
measurement result Percentage of the number of the actually reported measurement results to the number
integrity (MRI) of the measurement results that should be reported.
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
method of procedure A document that describes the process of executing a specific task. It facilitates the
(MOP) mutual understanding of and cooperation between a service provider and a carrier.
Before executing a task, the representatives from both parties confirm this document
and reach an agreement on it. This document describes who, when, where, why, and
how to execute a task and what to do.
mobile network A company that has a network infrastructure, sells large network capacities, and
operator (MNO) provides transparent network channels.
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point
wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a
multicast group rather than a host.
multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On
IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router
to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related
groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a
instance (MSTI) simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a
VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be
assigned to multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section An all-ONES characteristic or adapted information signal. It's generated to replace the
alarm indication signal normal traffic signal when it signal contains a defect condition in order to prevent
(MS-AIS) consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised. AIS can be
identified as multiplex section alarm indication signal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between
protection (MSP) and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to
a "protection" channel.
multiplex section A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the
termination (MST) formation of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse
direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate
channels being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol
switching virtual label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network
private network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines
(MPLS VPN) traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to
construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
NAS network access server
NDF new data flag
NE network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays
subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of
the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NOC network operations center
NOS network operating system
NP See network processor.
NPE network provider edge
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NS network system

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NSAP See network service access point.

network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the
TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and
implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network processor An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking
(NP) application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices
and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are
commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a
message broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the
segment.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
point (NSAP) available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by
network connection or configuration problems.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the
output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in
the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise
figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device
itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio
receiver can be specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OC ordinary clock
OCI open connection indication
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
OCh optical channel with full functionality
OD optical demultiplexing

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ODB optical duobinary

ODF optical distribution frame
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OEQ optical equalizer
OFC optical fiber communication conference and exhibit
OIF See Optical Internetworking Forum.
OLP See optical line protection.
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOS out of service
OPEX operating expense
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
ORT See operation response time.
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI reference model See Open Systems Interconnection reference model.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OSS operations support system
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OUI organizationally unique identifier
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Open Systems An open network architecture model developed by the International Organization for
Interconnection Standardization (ISO) and the ITU-T. This module consists of 7 layers. Each layer has
reference model (OSI special network functions, such as addressing, flow control, error control,
reference model) encapsulation, and reliable message transmission. The lowest layer (physical layer) is
closest to media technologies. The lower two layers are implemented in hardware and
software, and the upper five layers are implemented only in software. The highest
layer (application layer) is closest to users. The OSI reference model is a widely used
method of understanding network functions.
Optical A worldwide non-profit organization with membership open to any organization
Internetworking interested in shaping the future of optical internetworking.
Forum (OIF)
operation response The average time taken by a storage device to respond to each request. It is a critical
time (ORT) storage performance indicator.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification,
administration and location, and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one
multiplexer (OADM) channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.
optical channel A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for
payload unit (OPU) multiple services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and
lowering costs.
optical line protection Optical line protection is implemented using the dual feeding and selective receiving
(OLP) function. Two pairs of fibers (that is, four fibers) are used. One pair of fibers function
as the working trail and is used to transmit service signals of a line when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers function as the protection trail and is used to carry
protection switching signals when a fiber cut occurs or the signal attenuation is
excessively large.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and
reflectometer (OTDR) measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length
and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS
section (OTS) allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between
NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCC protection communication channel
PCN product change notice
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDG polarization-dependent gain
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDL See polarization-dependent loss.
PDM pulse duration modulation
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PER packet error rate
PET polyester
PFI packet forward interface
PGA program global area
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PID photonics integrated device
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PLC See packet loss compensation.
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMI payload missing indication
PMS Product Management System
PMU power monitoring unit
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
POTS See plain old telephone service.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

PPS pulse per second
PPT PDH physical terminal
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
Protocol clock (PTP V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
clock) system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet loss A technology of compensating packets according to an appropriate algorithm if
compensation (PLC) packets are lost in the transmission.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
packing case A case used for packing a board or subrack.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd
or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity
error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
patch loading During patch loading, the software is written into the Flash boards and the patch area
of the board memory from the specified storage area of the OMU board or the BAM
of NEs through commands.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network
should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the
IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding
(EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
permanent virtual Virtual path that consists of PVCs.

path (PVP)
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop
filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with
the incoming or reference frequency.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the
sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
plain old telephone The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted
service (POTS) pair cables.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the
hierarchy (PDH) minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization-dependent A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component
loss (PDL) when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated
onto a non-conductive substrate.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the
working path.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can
be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent
sequence (PRBS) of the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is
established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information
of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of
edge-to-edge (PWE3) a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched
network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time
division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates
to the real situation.
Q
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth
period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four
dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can
perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the
minimum BER.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN See radio access network.
RBW reverse-band working
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
RF See radio frequency.
RFC See Request For Comments.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RJ45 registered jack45
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RMS resource management system
RMU rack monitoring unit
RNC See radio network controller.
ROADM reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR resilient packet ring
RS regenerator section
RS232 See Recommended Standard 232.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and
others are the same as RS232.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTP real-time performance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
RX receive
RXD receive data
RZ return to zero
RZ code return-to-zero code
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Recommended A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals,
Standard 232 (RS232) and the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. As a distributed server/client system, RADIUS provides
(RADIUS) the AAA function.
Request For A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
Comments (RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from
sources such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for
Protocol (RSVP) an integrated services Internet.
Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
Protocol-Traffic MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs
Engineering (RSVP- by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP
TE) rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a
Protocol (RIP) route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the
(RAN) CN from wireless network.
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic
wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current.
The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can
be classified into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP
synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
regional root The root of the Internal Spanning Tree (IST) and Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
(MSTI) in the MST region. The regional root differs with the topology of the spanning
tree in the MST region.
remote optical A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply
pumping amplifier and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power
(ROPA) compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount,
free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action
ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
ring network A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming
a circular pathway for signals.
S
S-VLAN service virtual local area network
S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network,
each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock
synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock
reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference
source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole
network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference
source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization
status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1
byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching
of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper
switching protocol.
SAI service area identifier
SAPI service access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SBS synchronous information backbone system
SCA selective call acceptance
SCE See service creation environment.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP See Session Description Protocol.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SES severely errored second

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SETS SDH equipment timing source

SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA See service level agreement.
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB Server Message Block
SMF See single-mode fiber.
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple network management protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SO See security object.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPI SDH physical interface
SPM service processing module
SQL See structured query language.
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SRP satellite reference point
SRS stimulated Raman scattering
SSD See service support data.
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STG synchronous timing generator
STM See synchronous transport module.
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS space time spreading
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the
network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived
and simple passwords from being captured.
Serial Line Interface A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
Protocol (SLIP) transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host
interconnection function with a known IP address.
Session Description A protocol intended for describing multimedia sessions for the purposes of session
Protocol (SDP) announcement, session invitation, and other forms of multimedia session initiation.
Simple network "An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in a network.
management protocol The data being monitored and managed is defined by a MIB. The functions supported
(SNMP) by the protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data, and
traps that signal the occurrence of events."
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing
Message (SSM) link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network
or synchronization network.
security object (SO) A main part of the information security. It is not related with the communication mode
or terminal. It does not only focus on the security of the information exchange but also
provides feasible solutions of security for the user information, including the user
identity authentication, user password, and encryption.
segment A subset of an identity type. This is a different subset from a trust level including but
is not limited to the following examples: A subset based on customer age, a subset
based on where the identity was registered or based, a subset based on the customer's
gender, and a subset based on an association that the identity may have. For example,
an organization is confirmed as a supermarket or a customer is a member of a society.
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
service creation A service generation tool that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for
environment (SCE) programming.
service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
service support data An identifier that defines data parameters of specific service feature descriptions in the
(SSD) global functional plane.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific
defined traffic profile.
shared risk group A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
(SRG) failure of all the resources in the group.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
(SNR) given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
single-mode fiber A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave
(SMF) length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.
single-pair high-speed A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
digital subscriber line HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
(SHDSL) terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
split ratio The ratio of the number one to the number of optical signal channels that are split
from a channel of downstream optical signals in a GPON network. A larger split ratio
implies greater optical splitting which creates the need for an increased power budget
to support the physical reach.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
structured query A programming language widely used for accessing, updating, managing, and
language (SQL) querying data in a relational database.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers
network (SONET) to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle
multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84
Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It
module (STM) consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is
suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is
synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed
STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic
rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are
under consideration.
T
T1 A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It
provides 24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN topology change notification
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TLS Transport Layer Security

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TLV See type-length-value.

TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOS type of service
TPID tag protocol identifier
TR token ring
TST See Test.
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TUG tributary unit group
TX transmit
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows
users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local
system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Test (TST) A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service
diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors,
and so on.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other
networks through the RNC.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
(TM) signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high
rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
multiplexing (TDM) slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
token bucket The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited,
algorithm and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token
bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to
the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in.
Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be
transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of
packet input.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the
entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the
performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in
the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and
telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the
operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks.
The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems,
monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
transparent mode A method of binary synchronous text transmission in which only transmission control
characters preceded by the data link escape (DLE) character are processed as
transmission control characters.
transparent A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content
transmission but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as
speech, data and video signals.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The
tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases,
a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two
marker (trTCM) rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether
it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called
(TLV) Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through
different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual
data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New
TLVs can be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing
information loaded in packets.
U
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream
board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VA value assurance
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCPLM virtual concatenation payload mismatch
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VM virtual memory
VOA variable optical attenuator
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switching instance.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP
address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this
virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers
in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the
network.
value-added service A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers
(VAS) based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network
technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide
value-added services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice
calls.
very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
(VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection (VCC) point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple
end points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications
network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits
(PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the
group (VCG) same virtual concatenation link.
virtual connection A logical tunnel built in a non-backbone area between two ABRs in a same OSPF
routing domain. It is used to maintain the logical connections between physical
division areas. The two ends of the virtual connection must be ABRs. In addition, to
make a virtual connection effective, the ABRs must be configured at the same time.
The virtual connection is identified by the ID of the peer router.
virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
(VC trunk)
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switching An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
instance (VSI) virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.
W
WAN wide area network
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRR weighted round robin
WSS wavelength selective switching
WTR See wait to restore.
WXCP See wavelength cross-connection protection.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength cross- A type of channel protection based on ring network topology. WXCP employs the
connection protection dual feed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to
(WXCP) implement service switching between the working and protection channels.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all
priority queues can be scheduled.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
network (WLAN) wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data
interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional
LAN.
X
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
xDSL x digital subscriber line


OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R009C10 Commissioning Guide 04

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R009C10 Commissioning Guide 04

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R009C10

iManager U2000 V200R014C60

iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R014C60

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Based on Product Version V100R009C10

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

4 Configuring NE l 4.20 Checking Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800

Updates in Issue 03 (2015-07-01) Based on Product Version V100R009C10

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R009C10

6.12 Adjusting Adjusting Optical Power of Submarine Amplifier Board is

4.4 Setting the NE Setting NE Power Consumption Threshold is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-01) Based on Product Version V100R009C10

4 Configuring NE 4.17 Configuring Flexible ROADM is added.

6 Commissioning Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board (New-Generation

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-11-10) Based on Product Version V100R009C00

All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R014C50 to

All Optimized the operation procedure and added operation screenshots.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R009C00

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C10

15 Configuring Configuring the O&M Function Based on Optical Doctor is

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-07-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10

6 4.13 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board is added.

All Changed the required U2000 version from V200R001C00 to

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

4 Configuring 4.15 Setting Fiber Parameters is added.

6.13.1 The TN12HSC1 board is added.

9.4.8 The optical power equalization multimedia is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C00

All Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M Through

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C00

4 Configuring NE l Setting License is added.

9 Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

5 Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power Through MDS

Automatically Automatically Commissioning Optical Power for O&M

2.1 Starting the Web Starting the Web LCT is modified.

2.2 Quck Guide of Quck Guide of the U2000 is modified.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C02

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-08-19) Based on Product Version V100R007C00

Issue 04 (2017-02-28) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

4 Configuring l 4.12 Configuring Boards is modified.

17 Reference 17.33 Measuring Trail Latency is modified.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007C00

4 Configuring Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00